2018 Adhesives and Sealants Equipment Guide

Adhesives & Sealants Guide 

2018-2019 

12 th Edition

Nordson Corporation welcomes requests for information, comments, and inquiries about its products. General 

information about Nordson can be found on the Internet using the following address: http://www.nordson.com. 

Address all correspondence to: 

Nordson Corporation 

Attn: Customer Service 

11475 Lakefield Drive 

Duluth, GA 30097 

Notice 

This is a Nordson Corporation publication which is protected by copyright. Original copyright date 2014. 

No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior 

written consent of Nordson Corporation. The information contained in this publication is subject to 

change without notice. 

Trademarks 

Allegro, Apogee, Artiste, Asymtek, Automove, Avex, BaitGun, BKG, Blue Box, BM‐32, BM‐58, BM‐63, Bowtie, Build‐A‐Part, CF, Century, CleanSleeve, CleanSpray, 

Color‐on‐Demand, ColorMax, Conexis, Connections to Life, Contour, Control Coat, Coolwave, Cross‐Cut, CrystallCut, Dage, Dima, DispenseJet, DispenseMate, DuraBlue, 

DuraDrum, DuraPail, e.dot, e‐stylized, Easymelt, Ecodry, Econo‐Coat, EDI, EFD, Eliminator, Encore, Equatherm, Excel 2000, Fibrijet, Fluidmove, FoamMelt, FoamMelt 

‐ stylized, FoamMix, Freedom, Fulfill, HDLV, Heli‐flow, iControl, iDry, iFlow, IntelliJet, Isocore, Iso‐Flo, iTrax, KISS, Lean Cell, LogiComm, March, Matrix, MatriX, 

Maverick, Measuring the Invisible, MEG, Meltex, MicroCoat, MicroMark, Micromedics, Micro‐Meter, Microshot, Millennium, MiniBlue, Mini Squirt, NexJet, No‐Drip, 

Nordson, Nordson ‐ stylized, Nordson and Arc, OptiMix, Optima, Optimum, Package of Values, Paragon, PermaFlo, PICO, Plasmod, Poly‐Check, Polymer Solution Casting, 

Porous Coat, Posi‐Dose, PowderGrid, Precisecoat, PrintPlus, ProBlue, ProBlue Liberty, Prodigy, Pro‐Flo, Program‐A‐Bead, Program‐A‐Shot, Program‐A‐Stream, Program‐A‐ 

Swirl, Pro‐Meter, Pulsar, Quantum, Ratio‐Pak, RBX, RediSet, Rhino, Saturn, Saturn with Rings, Scoreguard, Sealant Equipment & Engineering, Inc., SEE (and design), See‐ 

Flo, Select Charge, Select Coat, Select Cure, Servo‐Flo, Shot‐A‐Matic, Signature ‐ stylized, Slautterback, Smart‐Coat, Smart‐Gun, SolderPlus, Spectrum, Speed‐Coat, StediFlo, 

Stratablend, SureBead, Sure Coat, SureWrap, Tip‐Seal, TRAK, Tribomatic, Trilogy, TrueBlue, TrueCoat, Turbo, Ultra, u‐TAH, Value Plastics, Vantage, Vention Medical, 

Vention Medical Advancing Your Innovations For Health, VersaBlue, Versa‐Coat, VersaDrum, VersaPail, Versa‐Spray, VP stylized, When you expect more., X‐Plane, Xaloy, 

Xaloy ‐ stylized, YesTech, and 2 Rings (design) are registered trademarks of Nordson Corporation. 

Accubar, Active Nozzle, Advanced Plasma Systems, AeroDeck, AeroWash, AirShield, AltaBlue, AltaSlot, Alta Spray, ATS, Auto‐Flo, Autoflex, AutoScan, Axiom, Best Choice, 

Better Dispensing, Blue Series, Bravura, CanPro, Champion, Check Mate, Classic IX, ClassicBlue, Clean Coat, Cobalt, Concert, ContourCoat, Control Weave, Controlled 

Fiberization, CPX, cScan+, cSelect, Cyclo‐Kinetic, Dial‐A‐Dose, DispensLink, Dry Cure, DuraBraid, DuraCoat, DuraPUR, e.dot+, Emerald, E‐Nordson, Easy Clean, 

EasyOn, EasyPW, Eclipse, EcoBead, EdgeControl, Equalizer, Equi=Bead, FillEasy, Fill Sentry, FlexSeam, Flow Coat, FluxPlus, G‐Net, G‐Site, Genius, Get Green With Blue, 

Horizon, Inspire, iON, Iso‐Flex, iTrend, Lacquer Cure, LightTite, Maxima, Mesa, MicroFin, MicroMax, Mikros, MiniEdge, Minimeter, MiniPUR, Multifill, MultiScan, 

Myritex, Nano, OmniScan, OptiStroke, Optix, Partnership+Plus, PatternJet, PCI, PharmaLok, PicoDot, Pinnacle, Powder Pilot, Powder Port, Powercure, Process Sentry, Pulse 

Spray, PURBlue, PUReOne, PURJet, Qadence, Ready Coat, RediCoat, RollVIA, Royal Blue, Select Series, Sensomatic, Shaftshield, SheetAire, Smart, Smartfil, SolidBlue, 

Spectral, SpeedKing, Spray Works, StediTherm, StrokeControl, Summit, SureFoam, Sure Mix, SureSeal, Swirl Coat, TAH, Trade Plus, ThruCoat, ThruCure, ThruWave, Trio, 

TruFlow, Ultraflex, Ultrasaver, Ultrasmart, Unity, UNITYMotion, Universal, Ultra FoamMix, UltraMax, ValueMate, VarioCoat, Versa, VersaPUR, Vista, VP Quick Fit, VP 

Quick‐Fit stylized, Web Cure, 781Mini, and 787Mini are trademarks of Nordson Corporation. 

Amphenol is a registered trademark of Amphenol Corporation. 

ChemCoat is a registered trademark of Impreglon GmbH. 

DeviceNet is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendors Association, Inc. 

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. 

Nomex is a registered trademark of E. I. DuPont de Nemours and Company. 

PROFIBUS and PROFINET are registered trademarks of PROFIBUS & PROFINET International. 

Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens, AT. 

Designations and trademarks stated in this document may be brands that, 

when used by third parties for their own purposes, 

could lead to violation of the owners’ rights.

Purpose 

Using the Guide 

The Adhesives and Sealants Equipment Guide is 

a quick-reference document that supports new 

equipment sales and purchasing decisions for 

mainstream packaging and product assembly and 

nonwovens applications. 

This information provides basic equipment 

capabilities and complements Nordson product 

support materials such as user manuals, training 

manuals, sales aids and product literature. 

Value-Added Customer Service 

At Nordson the best solutions begin with service, and 

Nordson provides unparalleled service to its customer 

before, during and after the sale. 

• Nordson maintains an extensive network of regional 

offices, direct operations, select distributors and joint 

ventures to provide local support, service and training. 

• Factory-trained sales and service personnel provide 

solid technical support to help tailor a system that is 

right for your production needs. 

• Strategically located product testing and demonstration 

labs throughout the world allow you to evaluate equipment 

and systems before a purchase. 

• Major replacement parts and components are stocked 

locally, and a network of direct operations provides 

local-language technical support to help keep your 

operation up and running. 

A full range of accessories, kits, and standard parts 

helps improve productivity and minimize downtime. 

Sales and Service Locations 

Contact a Nordson representative for more information 

on special and non-standard engineered products, service 

parts, engineering and technical illustrations, price and 

delivery: 

United States 

Duluth, Georgia 

Telephone: (800) 683‐2314 

Order Entry: 

(888) NORDSON 

(770) 497‐3700 

Facsimile: (866) 667-3329 

(866) NORDFAX 

Canada 

Markham, Ontario 

Telephone: (905) 475‐6730 

Facsimile: (905) 475‐8821 

Europe 

Lüneburg, Germany 

Telephone: (49) 4131‐894‐0 

Facsimile: (49) 4131‐894‐149 

Japan 

Tokyo, Japan 

Telephone: (81) 3‐5762‐2700 

Facsimile: (81) 3‐5762‐2701 

Asia/Australia/Latin America 

Duluth, Georgia 

Telephone: (770) 497‐3400 

Facsimile: (770) 497‐3588 

Information on equipment not contained in the current 

edition of this guide can be found in previous versions of 

the Adhesives and Sealants Equipment Guide, which are 

available on CD. 

NOTE: This document was bound using Nordson adhesive application 

systems. 

*This service is not available in all countries. 

Nordson reserves the right to make design changes between printings.

Adhesive & Sealants Equipment Guide 

Table of Contents | i 

Table of Contents 

Melters 

. 

Freedom ® Hot Melt Adhesive 

Dispensing System 

Description . 1-1 

Touch Screen Controls. 1-1 

Integrated Fill System 1-1 

Easy to Service. 1-1 

Smart Melt Technology. 1-1 

EcoBead Technology. 1-1 

Specifications. 1-2 

Freedom Series Melter. 1-2 

Integrated Adhesive Filling . 1-3 

Optix Controls . 1-4 

Freedom Series Hoses. 1-5 

Freedom Series Applicators. 1-5 

Freedom System Product Configuration Tree. 1-6 

Freedom System (200V) Product Configuration Tree. 1-8 

Freedom System—MultiFeed System (Feed System Components Only) . 1-10 

Parts and Accessories. 1-12 

Solenoid Valve-to-Melter Cables . 1-12 

Hose-to-Applicator Fittings. 1-12 

Optional Equipment. 1-12 

MiniBlue II LP Applicators—Freedom. 1-13 

ProBlue Liberty 

. 

Integrated Tankless Melter and Fill System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 



ProBlue Liberty Series Melter. 1-16 

Integrated Adhesive Filling . 1-17 

Parts & Accessories 1-18 

Melters. 1-18 

Optional Base. 1-18 

Adhesive Storage Container . 1-18 

Adhesive Transfer Hose Assembly . 1-18 

Sequencer. 1-18 

Accessories. 1-18 

Suction Lance . 1-19 

Communication Devices. 1-19 

Pump Box Kits. 1-19 

ProBlue ® Series Melters 

Models 4, 7, and 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 



Part Numbers. 1-23 

ProBlue Melter 200-240 VAC and 400/230 VAC with Standard 14:1 Pump . 1-23 

ProBlue Melter 200-240 VAC and 400/230 VAC with 6:1 Pump . 1-23 

ProBlue Melter 400 and 480 VAC with Standard 14:1 Pump. 1-23 

ProBlue Melter 400 and 480 VAC with 6:1 Pump. 1-23 

Optional Accessories. 1-24 

To place your order, NAD call 1-888-NORDSON (1-888-667-3766), fax 1-770-497-3733 or online at www.enordson.com. 

International Orders, call 1-440-985-4797, fax 1-440-985-1096, or email intcustomerservice@nordson.com

ii | Table of Contents 



. 

. 

Models 15/30/50 Large Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 

Description 1-25 



Melters with a Standard Output Dual Acting 14:1 Pump . 1-27 

Melters with a High Output Dual Acting 16:1 Pump 1-27 

Melters with a Single Acting 12:1 Pump. 1-27 


ProBlue ® and ProBlue Liberty ATS Melters 

. 

. 

Melters and Melter/Fill Systems with Adhesive Process Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 

ProBlue ATS Melters . 1-29 

ProBlue Liberty ATS Melters. 1-29 

ProBlue ATS Melter Specifications. 1-30 

ProBlue Liberty ATS Melter Specifications 1-31 

ProBlue ATS Melter Part Numbers . 1-32 

ProBlue Liberty ATS Melter Part Numbers 1-32 


ATS Retrofit Kit 

. 

External Flow Measuring and Process Control Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 

Description. 1-33 

ATS Retrofit Kit Specifications 1-34 

Dimensions. 1-35 

Melter with Melter-Mounted ATS Retrofit. 1-35 

ATS Control Box Melter or Bench Mounting Bracket Dimensions. 1-36 

ATS Control Box Wall Mounting Bracket Dimensions. 1-36 

ATS Retrofit Manifold. 1-37 


ATS Control Box. 1-38 

ATS Control Box Mounting Brackets. 1-38 

Air Filter/Regulator and Pneumatic Panel Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 

ATS Retrofit Manifold and Ship-With Kit. 1-39 

ATS Manifold Mounting Plates . 1-39 

Fulfill ® Retrofit Adhesive Fill System 




Lid and Control Box Assemblies . 1-43 

Adhesive Storage Container . 1-43 

Suction Lance . 1-43 

Pump Box Kits. 1-44 

Transfer Hose and Pump. 1-44 

Sequencer (Multi-Feed). 1-44 


AltaBlue TT Adhesive Melters 

Models A4, A10, and A16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 



AltaBlue TT Melter Part Numbers. 1-47 

Model A4. 1-47 

Model A10. 1-47 

Model A16. 1-48 




Table of Contents | iii 


AltaBlue Touch Series Melters 

. 

. 

Models 15, 30, and 50 Liter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49 



AltaBlue Touch Configuration. 1-52 

Base Melter 1-52 

Options 1-53 

DuraBlue ® L Series Adhesive Melters 




DuraBlue 4L System Selection . 1-58 

DuraBlue 4L System Applicator and Hose Part Numbers. 1-59 

DuraBlue ® Large Capacity Adhesive Melters 




VersaBlue ® Plus Series Adhesive Melters 

. 

. 

Models 25, 50, and 100 Liter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65 



VersaBlue Plus Configuration. 1-68 


Options 1-69 

VersaBlue ® Adhesive Melters 

. 

Models V12, V25, V50, and V100 Liter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 


Specifications: V12 and V25 Melters . 1-72 

Specifications: V50 and V100 Melters 1-73 

VersaBlue Melter Configuration. 1-74 

Pump Selection. 1-75 

VersaBlue ® N Adhesive Melters 

. 

. 

12, 25, and 50 Liter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77 



VersaBlue N Configuration. 1-80 


Options 1-81 



iv | Table of Contents 


. 

. 

. 

. 

. 

. 

VersaBlue® XN and XC Series 

Adhesive Melters 


Specifications - VersaBlue XN . 1-84 

Specifications - VersaBlue XC 1-87 

VersaBlue XN Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88 


Options 1-89 

VersaBlue XC Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-90 


Options 1-91 

Pump Selection: Versablue N, XN, XC Adhesive Melters. 1-92 

VersaBlue N Filter Service Kits. 1-93 

Fittings and Accessories. 1-93 

Straight Hose Fittings 1-93 

45° Hose Fitting Adapter. 1-93 

90° Hose Fitting Adapter. 1-93 

VersaBlue ® N, XN, XC 

Adhesive Melter Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93 

Hose Fittings. 1-94 

Safety Valves. 1-94 

Control Valves. 1-94 

Temperature Sensor . 1-94 

Casters. 1-94 

Light Tower. 1-94 

Interface Connectors. 1-94 

EZ Melt Series Adhesive Melters 

20 and 45 liter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-95 



EZ Melt Product Configuration Tree. 1-97 

Foam Systems 

SureFoam Dispensing Systems 


Manual Density Control. 2-1 

Simple Interface. 2-1 

User-Friendly Design. 2-1 



Ultra FoamMix Cube 


General Specifications. 2-4 

Ultra FoamMix Specifications. 2-4 


Ultra FoamMix EX 



Control System. 2-8 


EX 30 UFM. 2-9 

EX 60 UFM. 2-10 




Table of Contents | v 


Ultra FoamMix PH Tank Systems 




PH 100 UFM. 2-13 

PH 400 UFM. 2-13 

FoamMelt ® Processors 

. 

200 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 



Selection Chart. 2-17 

Accessories 2-17 


Bulk Melters 

VersaDrum ® 

. 

. 

200-liter or 55-gallon Drum Melters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 




VersaDrum Configuration. 3-4 


Options 3-5 

VersaPail ® 

. 

. 

20-liter or 5-gallon Pail Melters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 




VersaPail Configuration. 3-10 


Options 3-11 

. 

. 

DuraDrum ® Bulk Melter 




DuraDrum Configuration. 3-16 


Options 3-17 

. 

. 

DuraPail ® Bulk Melter 




DuraPail Configuration. 3-22 


Options 3-23 



vi | Table of Contents 


PUR Melters 

PURBlue 4 Adhesive Melters 




PURBlue 4 Part Numbers. 4-3 

240 VAC 3 Phase Delta or 400 VAC 3 Phase Wye. 4-3 

200 VAC 3 Phase Delta (Primarily for Japan). 4-4 

. 

. 

VersaPUR Slug Melters 


Configuration Chart. 4-6 


Options 4-7 


Options/Configurations. 4-8 


. 

. 

VersaPUR Tank Melters 




Options 4-13 


Options/Configurations. 4-14 


MiniPUR Plus 

. 

. 

Polyurethane Melter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 




MiniPUR Plus Melters 4-19 

MiniPUR Accessories 4-19 

Nitrogen Accessories. 4-19 




Table of Contents | vii 


Automated Dispensing Systems 

Unity Basic 

. 

Automated Dispensing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 





Unity 4XP 

. 

Automated Dispensing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 





Unity IC Series 

. 

Dispensing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 



Electrical Specifications. 5-10 


Basic Unity IC 30 Plus System. 5-11 

Basic Unity IC 300 Plus System. 5-11 

Basic Unity IC 300-E System. 5-11 

Robots. 5-11 

Nozzles 5-12 

Unity PURJet 30 and 300 

. 

Dispensing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 





Basic PURJet30 System. 5-15 

Basic PURJet 300 System. 5-15 

Modules . 5-15 

Robots. 5-15 


Unity C and Unity Touch 

Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 







viii | Table of Contents 


Extruder Systems 

EX Extruder Systems 



. 

. 

. 

EEX Extruder Systems 

EEX Extruder Series 6-3 



Pump Station Table 6-5 

Gear Pump Chart 6-6 

Dimensions (mm). 6-6 

EEX 100 . 6-6 

EEX 10/EEX 40. 6-6 

Automatic Applicators 

. 

. 

Best Choice Configurable Applicators 


Best Choice Applicator Specifications 7-2 

Best Choice Applicator Configuration Code 7-2 

Module Selection Chart. 7-5 

SolidBlue Hot Melt Applicators 

and Modules 


Parts and Accessories - SolidBlue Applicators . 7-10 

SolidBlue Low-Profile (LP) Applicators . 7-10 

Replacement Modules. 7-11 

Multi-Service Device . 7-11 

Insulating Applicator Jackets. 7-11 

SureBead ® Reduced Cavity 

Applicators & Modules 




Parts and Accessories - SureBead Applicators. 7-15 


Replacement Nozzle. 7-15 


Multi-Service Device . 7-15 

Saturn Nozzles to SureBead Module Conversion Table. 7-16 

Select Series Applicators 


Best Choice Applicator Configuration Code. 7-17 





Table of Contents | ix 


. 

. 

MiniBlue ® II Applicator 


Configuration Code. 7-22 




Nozzles 7-24 

Cordsets. 7-24 

Applicator Insulating Covers . 7-24 

Integrated Filters. 7-25 

Solenoids 7-25 

Solenoid Cables . 7-25 

Solenoid Hard Tubing Replacement Kits . 7-26 

Solenoid Optional Flexible Tubing Connection Kits. 7-26 

Solenoid Accessories and Spare Parts. 7-26 


. 

. 

. 

MiniBlue ® II Low Profile Applicator 


MiniBlue II LP Applicators. 7-30 

MiniBlue II LP Applicators - Freedom. 7-30 


Replacement Module. 7-30 

Heaters 7-30 

Cordsets. 7-30 

Integrated Filters. 7-30 

Nozzles 7-31 

Applicator-to-Hose Connectors 7-31 

Insulating Cuffs. 7-31 

Solenoid . 7-32 

Solenoid Cabling. 7-32 

Solenoid Hard Tubing Replacement. 7-32 

Solenoid Optional Flexible Tubing Connection Kits. 7-32 

SP Solenoid Accessories and Spare Parts. 7-32 


MiniBlue II Low Profile - 2 module configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 

EcoBead Pattern Generator 

For use with MiniBlue II Applicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 


Part Number . 7-35 

MiniBlue ® Hot Melt Applicators 

RC Type Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 


Configuration Code. 7-38 


Replacement Modules . 7-40 


PatternPro Variable Pitch 

Dispensing Applicator 


Dimensions - Select Models. 7-46 



x | Table of Contents 


. 

Series H-20 Hot Melt Applicators 


Standard H-20. 7-51 

H-20 Large Ball and Seat 7-51 

Micro-Adjust H-20 . 7-51 

Filtered H-20. 7-51 


Selection Charts. 7-52 

H-20 RTD Applicators . 7-52 

H-20 Thermostat Applicator . 7-53 

A200 Applicator Heads. 7-53 

Thermostat Options. 7-54 


. 

AG-900 + S Dispensing Module 


Module Part Numbers 7-47 

Solenoid Part Numbers. 7-47 


AG900+S Configurations. 6-50 

AG900+S Nozzle Configurations . 6-51 


e.dot+ Electric Applicators 


e.dot+ Applicator Specifications. 7-54 

Applicator Driver Specifications. 7-54 


e.dot+ Applicators and Modules. 7-55 

Applicator Service Kits. 7-55 

Cables. 7-55 

Nozzles. 7-55 

Saturn Integrated Filters. 7-55 

e.dot+ Small Diameter Hoses. 7-56 

Applicator Dimensions. 7-56 

Top Feed. 7-56 

Rear Feed. 7-56 

E-400 Series Electric Applicators 


Intended Uses. 7-57 


E-400B Drivers. 7-57 

E-400B Applicator Specifications. 7-58 

Torque Specifications. 7-58 


. 

Series EM-100 Electric Applicators 




EM-100 Module Replacement . 7-60 

Driver Cable Assembly for EM Series Electric Applicators 7-61 

SureSeal Non-Contact 

Sift-Proof Applicator 



8-inch Applicator. 7-64 

15-inch Applicator . 7-64 


8-inch Applicator. 7-65 

15-inch Applicator . 7-66 




Table of Contents | xi 


Non-Contact 

. 

Universal Applicators 


Universal Applicator Insulating Jackets. 8-1 

UA Configurator 8-2 

AltaSpray Plus Applicators 



Alta Spray Plus Applicators. 8-4 

Solenoid Valve Installation Kit. 8-5 

Alta Spray Applicators Insulating Jackets. 8-5 

Module Service Kits. 8-5 

Heater Service Kits. 8-6 

Sensor Service Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 

Filter Service Kit. 8-6 

. 

. 

. 

. 

. 

Non-Contact Adhesive Module Selection 


CF Modules 8-7 

Universal 22 mm (UM22). 8-8 

Specifications 8-8 








High Speed Universal (UMSC). 8-11 



Spray Nozzles 

Controlled Fiberization Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 


Standard Frequency (6-hole) Bronze CF Disk Nozzles . 8-13 

Disk Nozzle Accessories. 8-13 

Unibody CF Spray (6-hole) Nozzles. 8-14 

CF Spray Nozzles. 8-14 

Unibody Standard Frequency (6-hole) Color-Coded Steel Spray Nozzles. 8-14 

High Frequency (12-hole) Bronze CF Unibody Nozzles. 8-15 

Unibody Nozzle Accessories. 8-15 

Spray Nozzles 

Universal Controlled Fiberization Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 


High Frequency (12-hole) Coated Brass Universal-Style CF Spray Nozzles. 8-17 

Spray Nozzles 

Summit Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 


22 mm Universal Summit Coated Brass Spray Nozzles. 8-19 

25 mm Universal Summit Coated Brass Spray Nozzles. 8-19 



xii | Table of Contents 


Spray Nozzles 

Signature ® Continuous Spray Nozzles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 


22 mm Universal Signature Steel Spray - Continuous - Standard Flow. 8-21 

22 mm Universal Signature Steel Spray - Continuous - Low Flow. 8-21 

25 mm Universal Signature Steel Spray - Continuous - Standard Flow. 8-22 

25 mm Universal Signature Steel Spray - Continuous - Low Flow. 8-22 

Spray Nozzles 

Signature ® Intermittent Spray Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 


22 mm Universal Signature Laminating Nozzles - Intermittent. 8-23 

25 mm Universal Signature Laminating Nozzles - Intermittent. 8-23 

Spray Nozzles 

SureWrap ® Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 


22 mm Universal SureWrap Coated Brass Spray Nozzles for Thin Elastic. 8-25 

22 mm Universal SureWrap Coated Steel Spray Nozzles for Thin Elastic. 8-25 

25 mm Universal SureWrap Coated Brass Spray Nozzles for Thin Elastic. 8-26 

25 mm Universal SureWrap Coated Steel Spray Nozzles for Thin Elastic. 8-26 

Spray Nozzles 

Allegro Elastic Coating Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 


22 mm Universal Allegro Nozzles. 8-27 

25 mm Universal Allegro Nozzles. 8-27 

Universal Spray Nozzle Comparison Chart. 8-28 

Process Air Control Kits 

Common to All Non-contact Application Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 

Air Control Kits and Accessories . 8-29 

Hand-Held Applicators 

Series AD-41 Hand-Held Applicators 





AD-41 Nozzles and Accessories . 9-5 

. 

Series AD-31 Extrusion Hand-Held 

Applicators 





AD-31 Extrusion Hand-Held Applicator Nozzles 9-9 

AD-31 Swirl and Wide Pattern Swirl 






AD-31 Swirl Hand-Held Applicator Nozzles and Accessories. 9-14 




Table of Contents | xiii 


AD-31 Spray Hand-Held Applicators 





AD-31 Spray Hand-Held Applicator Accessories. 9-18 

Select Series Hand-Held Applicators 


Hand-Held Applicators for HMT ProFlex. 9-19 

Series FP-200 Hand-Held Applicators 



FP-200 Hand-Held Swirl Applicator Components. 9-23 

FP-200 Hand-Held Extrusion Applicator Components. 9-24 

FP-200 Suspension System Components. 9-25 


Series FP-200 Hand-Held Applicator Nozzles and Accessories. 9-26 

Coating Heads 

. 

. 

Speed-Coat ® Slot Coating Heads 






Control Module. 10-4 

Filters 10-4 

Nozzle Seal 10-4 

. 

. 

TrueCoat ® Slot Coating Heads 







Filters 10-8 

Nozzle Seal 10-8 

. 

TrueCoat ® FS Slot Coating Applicator 





TrueCoat FS Slot Applicator. 10-11 


Filters 10-12 

EZ Coat Slot Applicators 





EZ Coat Applicators. 10-15 

Coating Nozzles . 10-15 


Filter Assembly. 10-15 



xiv | Table of Contents 


AltaSlot Applicators 

. 

AltaSlot-c and AltaSlot-i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 





AltaSlot-c 10-19 

AltaSlot-i. 10-19 

. 

EB 60 Flex Edge Banding Slot Applicators 





EB 60 Flex Applicators. 10-24 

Control Box 10-24 


Coating Nozzles . 10-24 

. 

. 

EP 48 PRO Bookbinding Slot Applicators 



Dimensions (mm). 10-26 


EP 48 PRO Applicators 10-27 

Control Cabinet 10-27 

Plates for Side-Gluing. 10-27 

Nozzles 

. 

. 

Precision Bead Nozzles 


Saturn ® Precision Nozzles 11-1 

Nozzles for Best Choice, MiniBlue II BAS, and E400 Electric Applicators. 11-2 

Multi Orifice Nozzle Bead Spacing Table . 11-3 

2380XX Domed Nozzles. 11-4 

Nozzles for H-20, E-100XT, EM-100, M-100, and Series 700 Electric Applicators. 11-5 

232XXX and 226XXX Single Orifice Nozzles . 11-5 

1022XXX Extended Nozzles. 11-6 

65089 Series Multi-Orifice Cone Nozzles (0.030 Engagement). 11-6 

231XXX Single Orifice Nozzles. 11-7 

2310XX Long Engagement Nozzles . 11-7 

Long Engagement Domed Nozzles. 11-8 

220XXX Domed Nozzles. 11-9 

Male-Threaded Nozzles for AD-31 and L4, AD-41, L5, and L7 Extrusion Hand-Held Applicators 11-10 

. 

. 

. 

. 

Specialty Nozzles 

AD-31 and AD-41 Swirl and Wide Pattern Swirl Hand-held 

Applicators, FP-200 Hand-held Applicators 11-11 

Nozzles for H-20 Automatic Applicators with Right-Angle Adapter. 11-12 

Nozzles for E-900 and EM-900 Modules. 11-13 

Straight Orifice Nozzles 11-13 

Button Nozzles 11-14 

Swirl Nozzles 11-14 

Right Angle Nozzles . 11-15 

Nozzle Accessories 

Nozzle Accessories. 11-17 

Pattern Width Graphs 

Pattern Width Graphs . 11-19 




Table of Contents | xv 


Hoses 

. 

. 

. 

. 

Advanced Technology Hot Melt Hoses 


Minimum Radii for Hoses. 12-1 

Medium-Pressure (“Standard”) Hoses. 12-1 

High-Pressure (“Standard”) Hoses . 12-1 


Wattage Calculations for Hoses and Applicators on the PA2500 System. 12-2 

Wattage Calculations for Manual Applicators and Hoses for 120V DuraBlue Melters. 12-2 

Hose Selections 12-3 

Blue Series RTD-Style Automatic Applicator Hoses 5/16 in. Diameter: Blue Series, FoamMelt 200 Processors, and 

SureFoam. 12-3 

RTD-Style Automatic Applicator Hoses 5/8 in. Diameter: Blue Series, FoamMelt 200 Processors, SureFoam, VersaDrum, 

VersaPail, DuraDrum, and DuraPail. 12-6 

RTD-Style e.dot Hoses. 12-6 

Automatic Applicator Hoses, 5/16, 5/8, 1-1/8 in. Diameter, RTD Control: BM 20/BM 200 Drum Melters. 12-7 

RTD-Style AD-31 Hand-Held Applicator Hoses 5/16 in. Diameter: Blue Series, FoamMelt 200 Processors, and SureFoam.12-8 

AD-31 (LBS, B, C, K) Hand-Held Applicator Hoses 5/16, 5/8, 3/4, 1-1/8 in. Diameter, RTD Control: BM 20/BM 200 Drum 

Melters. 12-9 

AD-41 (LBS, B, C, K) Hand-Held Applicator Hoses 5/16, 5/8, 3/4, 1-1/8 in. Diameter, RTD Control: BM 20/BM 200 Drum 

Melters. 12-9 

Transfer Hoses 5/16, 5/8, 1-1/8 in. Diameter RTD Control: BM 20/BM 200 Drum Melters . 12-10 

Automatic Applicator Hoses 5/8 in. Diameter Thermistor Control: 150 Series FoamMelt Processors. 12-10 

Automatic Applicator Hoses 5/8 in. Diameter RTD Control: 190 Series FoamMelt Processors . 12-10 

VersaBlue Series High Temperature Hoses, Pt100 Control. 12-11 

TC-8 Series Automatic Applicator Hoses Thermocouple Control: MX Series Melters. 12-12 

TC-8 Series Automatic Applicator Hose Pt100 Control: MX Series Melters. 12-12 

TC-13 Series Automatic Hoses Thermocouple Control: MX Series Melters. 12-13 

TC-13 Series Automatic Hoses, Pt100 Control: MX Series Melters. 12-13 

Select Series Hoses. 12-14 

ITW - 5/16 in. Automatic Hose for Dynapro and Dynaplus. 12-14 

ITW - 5/16 in. Automatic Hose for Dynamelt and Dynamini with Dynacontrol 12-14 

Robatech - 5/16 in. Automatic Hose for Robatech Concept 4. 12-14 

HMT - Hand-held Applicator Hoses for HMT ProFlex 12-14 


Hose Mounting and Installation Accessories . 12-15 

Hose Fittings. 12-16 

Hand-Held Applicator Bracket Kits. 12-17 

Melter-End Hose Fittings. 12-17 

KB and LS Melter Hose Fittings. 12-17 

Non-Heated Inline Filters. 12-18 

Multi-Plane Swivels. 12-18 



xvi | Table of Contents 


Controls 

. 

. 

. 

Spectra 30 Control System 





Spectra Control System. 13-3 

Cut and Stack Cabinets. 13-3 

Customer Documentation Language Packs. 13-4 

Software License Keys (Aftermarket). 13-4 

Encoders/Cables. 13-5 

Trigger Sensors 13-6 

Run-Up 13-7 

Other System Accessories. 13-7 

Service Kits 13-8 

. 

Concert Series Controllers 


Specifications — Basic Flow Controller. 13-10 

Specifications — Basic Temperature Controller. 13-10 


Controllers. 13-11 

Optional Boards. 13-11 

Service Kits 13-11 

Sales Collateral. 13-11 

. 

. 

. 

. 

. 

LogiComm ® Control System 




Master Modules. 13-15 

Expansion Modules 13-15 

Data Communication Cables and Accessories. 13-15 

Touch Screen Display 13-16 


Applicator Cables - Electric Applicators 13-17 

Applicator Cables - Pneumatic Applicators*. 13-17 

Applicator Cables - Miscellaneous . 13-18 

Encoders. 13-18 

Photocell. 13-19 

I/P Transducer . 13-19 

GD200 Verification Sensor for Liquid Adhesive. 13-20 

HD-100 Hot Melt Verification Sensor (High Speed). 13-20 

HD-80 Hot Melt Verification Sensor (Low Speed). 13-21 

HD-70 Hot Melt Verification Sensor (Medium Speed). 13-21 

UV Sensors 13-21 

Barcode Sensors. 13-21 

GD500 Sensors. 13-22 

Other Sensors . 13-22 

Reject, Marking, and Batch Control Equipment 13-23 




Table of Contents | xvii 


. 

. 

LA 404-2 Pattern Control System 





Controller. 13-27 


Encoder. 13-27 

I/P Transducer . 13-27 

Applicator Cables - Electric Applicators 13-28 

Applicator Cables - Pneumatic Applicators. 13-28 

Applicator Cables - Miscellaneous . 13-28 


. 

Seal Sentry ® Series 10 Bead 

Detection System 




Console. 13-30 


Photocell Bracket 13-30 

Verification Sensor . 13-30 

Accubar Barcode Verifier 





Accubar. 13-33 

LA-5100 . 13-33 

Applicator Driver Selection Chart 

Applicator Driver Comparison Chart . 13-35 

LogiComm ® Applicator Driver 




Applicator Driver with Connectors. 13-39 

Applicator Cables for Connector Version. 13-39 

Other Cables for Connector Version. 13-39 

Applicator Driver with Terminal Block. 13-40 

Applicator Cables for Terminal Block Version. 13-40 

LogiComm ® OEM Applicator Driver Board 



Driver Software Parameter Ranges. 13-42 


Applicator Driver with Connectors. 13-43 

Applicator Cables for Terminal Block Version. 13-43 

Other Cables for Terminal Block Version . 13-43 

Service Kits (Terminal Block) . 13-43 

Spare Parts (Terminal Block) . 13-43 

e driver 






xviii | Table of Contents 


Auxiliary Equipment 

. 

. 

Nitrogen Generation System & Booster Pump 


Foaming Applications 14-1 

Tank Blanketing 14-1 

Nitrogen Gas Generation Process. 14-1 

Features. 14-2 

Nitrogen Generation System. 14-2 

Nitrogen Booster Pump. 14-2 

Objectives . 14-2 


Generator Specifications. 14-3 

Booster Specifications. 14-3 


ProMeter ® VDK Dispense Head 





ProMeter VDK Dispense Applicator Matrix. 14-7 

ProMeter VDK Controllers. 14-8 

ProMeter VDK Cables. 14-8 

VDK Midi Metering Applicator 



Gear Pump Chart. 14-11 


PS Metering Station 



Gear Pump Chart. 14-15 


PS midi. 14-15 

PS maxi. 14-16 

Liquid Adhesive Equipment 

LA 300 Series Piston Pumps 




Pumps. 15-2 

Lid Mountings. 15-2 

Pressure Gauge Kits. 15-2 

Cart Systems and Level Control. 15-3 

Remote Filter Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3 





Table of Contents | xix 


. 

. 





Wall-Mounted 15-6 

Lid-Mounted. 15-7 


Pumps. 15-8 

Cart Systems and Level Control. 15-8 

Pressure Gauge Kits. 15-8 

Mounting Kits 15-8 

. 

. 

LA 320 Diaphragm Pumps 



LA 320 Diaphragm Part Numbers 15-10 

Service Parts. 15-10 

Auxiliary Components 15-10 


. 

. 

. 

. 

. 

Pressurized Liquid Adhesive Containers 


LA 105 Container 15-11 



LB 120 Container 15-11 

LB 140 Container 15-11 




. 

. 

LA 380 Pressure Regulators 






LA381 . 15-15 

LA 382/383 15-15 

. 

WM 801 Series Electric Applicators 





WM 801 Electric Applicator Nozzles . 15-19 

WM 801 Electric Applicator Brackets. 15-20 

WM 801 Electric Applicator Cables. 15-20 




xx | Table of Contents 


. 

. 

LA 825 Series Electric Applicators 



Parts and Accessories - LA 825 Applicator. 15-25 

Applicator for Use with All Controllers 15-25 

Nozzles - Non-Contact, Short Engagement. 15-25 

Nozzles - Non-Contact, Long Engagement 15-25 

Options (Filter Valve) . 15-26 

Cables for LogiComm Applicators . 15-26 

Parts and Accessories - LA 825RC Applicator . 15-27 

Applicators for Use with All Controllers. 15-27 

LA 825RC - Common Service Parts . 15-27 

Options (Filter Valve) . 15-27 

Brackets for installations in Folder Gluers. 15-27 

Cables for LogiComm Applicators . 15-28 


Pneumatic Bead Applicators 

LV 227 Pneumatic Bead Applicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31 




LV 227 Applicators. 15-32 

LV 227 Service Parts. 15-32 

LV 227 Nozzle Covering. 15-32 

LV 227 Cables . 15-33 


Pneumatic Liquid Adhesive Applicators 

. 

LA725 Pneumatic Liquid Adhesive Applicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35 




LA 725 and LA 725-S Applicators . 15-37 

LA 725 and LA 725-S Modules 15-37 

LA 725 and LA 725-S Kits. 15-37 

LA 725 and LA 725-S Nozzles. 15-37 

Connection Cables for Hardwiring . 15-37 

Connection Cables for Use with LogiComm . 15-37 

Connection Cables for Use with LA 404-2 . 15-37 


. 

Liquid Adhesive Coating Applicators 



Pattern Plates 15-40 

Standard Slot Nozzles (w/o Applicator) for Use with LA725 and WM 801 Applicators. 15-41 

Special Slot Nozzles (w/o Applicator) for Use with QPC and Slide Plates. 15-41 


VarioCoat TM Liquid Adhesive Dispensing Applicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-43 



Pattern Plates 


Quick Change Kits . 15-45 




Table of Contents | xxi 


. 

LS 373 Pneumatic Spray Applicator 




LS 373 Applicators. 15-48 

LA 373 Needle and Nozzle Kits 15-48 

Air Spray Caps. 15-48 

Seal Kits . 15-48 


High Pressure Hoses 

PTFE Metal Braided Hoses. 15-51 

Accessories 

. 

. 

. 

In-Line Filters 

Saturn In-Line Filters . 16-1 

Saturn Integrated Applicator Filters. 16-1 



Saturn In-Line Filters. 16-2 

Replacement In-Line Filters. 16-3 

In-Line Filter Accessories 16-3 

Saturn Integrated Applicator Filter . 16-3 

Heated In-line Filters. 16-4 




Non-Heated In-Line Filters. 16-5 

Solenoid Valves 

. 

Saturn Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7 

Saturn ® Platinum Solenoid for Single or Independent Air Actuated Applicators. 16-7 

Saturn Platinum Solenoids. 16-8 

Spare Parts 16-8 

Solenoid Cabling. 16-8 

Solenoid Accessories and Spare Parts. 16-8 

Standard Saturn Solenoid Valves for Multi-Module Common Air Applicators . 16-9 

Saturn Ring Identification. 16-10 

Platform Comparisons. 16-10 

Large Cv Saturn Solenoid Part Numbers. 16-10 

Small Cv Saturn Solenoid Part Numbers. 16-11 

Standard Saturn Solenoid Spare Components Part Numbers. 16-11 



xxii | Table of Contents 


. 

. 

. 

. 

. 

. 

. 

. 

Fittings and Connectors 


Fitting Usage and Comparison . 16-13 

Fitting Part Numbers . 16-14 

Pneumatic Connectors. 16-14 

Pipe Nipples. 16-14 

Pipe Elbows, 90° 16-14 

SAE 90° Elbow 16-14 

90° Male Elbow Barged Coupling . 16-15 

Straight Barbed Coupling. 16-15 

SAE 45° Street. 16-15 

SAE Adapter, Straight . 16-15 

SAE Adapter, Tee, 3 Ports. 16-16 

Hydraulic Connectors 16-16 

SAE 37° Straight Connector. 16-16 

SAE Hydraulic Flareless Female Tube Connector 16-16 

SAE 90°, 37° Flare Male Elbow 16-17 

SAE 90°, 37° Flare Swivel . 16-17 

SAE 90°, 37° Male Connector. 16-17 

SAE 45° Male Tube Elbow. 16-17 

SAE 45°, 37° Connector Elbow. 16-18 

Miscellaneous Plugs, Adapters, and Parts . 16-18 

Pipe Plug, SAE Square Head 16-18 

Pipe Plug, Socket Head . 16-18 

O-Ring Pipe Plug 16-19 

SAE 37° Flare Tube Cap. 16-19 

Pipe Bushing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 

Pipe Coupling . 16-19 

Hydraulic Hose Adapter . 16-20 

Pneumatic Adapter 16-20 

O-Ring Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20 

. 

. 

Hydraulic System Accessories 

Flow Control Valve. 16-21 

Hydaulic System Pressure Gauge Kit. 16-21 

O-Rings 16-21 

Best Choice Extension Cords (Ni-120 Receptacles) 16-22 

Extension Cables. 16-22 

Best Choice Splitter Cables (Ni-120 only). 16-22 

Equipment Accessories. 16-22 

Multi-Service Device 

Technical Data 

. 

Conversion Formulas and Tables 

Maximum Required Delivery Rate (MRDR) . 17-1 

Bead Cross Sectional Area (BCA) Calculations. 17-2 

Required Melt Rate (MR). 17-2 

Electrical. 17-4 

Pull-In (Applicator Open) and Drop-Out (Applicator Close) Time. 17-4 

Adhesive Mileage. 17-5 

Coating Data Sheet 17-6 

Coating Weights*. 17-6 

Speed Conversion Table. 17-7 

Temperature Conversion Table. 17-9 

Weights and Measures Conversions. 17-10 



Melters 


Web Content 

Description 

Melters | 1-1 



The Freedom Hot Melt Packaging System integrates the 

tankless Freedom Series melter with an automatic fill unit, 

RediFlex hoses, MinBlue II SureBead applicators and an Optix 

touch-screen control panel. 

The Freedom hot melt adhesive system is an adhesive melting, 

transfer, and dispensing system that offers users: 

• Freedom from mounting limitations 

• Freedom from manual adhesive filling 

• Freedom from confusing controls and diagnostics 

• Freedom from excessive adhesive use 

• Freedom from downtime due to char and contamination 

The important characteristics of the Freedom system are briefly 

described here. For more detailed information, refer to the 

melter manual. 

Freedom Hot Melt Adhesive Dispensing System 

Touch Screen Controls 

The system is controlled through a user-friendly color touch 

screen control system, called Optix, that all users can 

effectively operate. The Optix control system includes: 

• a color-coded (green, red, or yellow) status indication that indicates 

system health 

• easy setup of inputs/outputs 

• text-based indications for system problems 

• a system inventory and component identification function that shows 

what components are connected and provides their part numbers for 

easy reordering 

Integrated Fill System 

The Freedom system includes an integrated fill system. The 

melter reservoir stores only 1.1 kg (2.5 lb) of molten adhesive. 

Solid adhesive stored in an adhesive container is automatically 

transferred to the melter as needed. 

Easy to Service 

The melter’s internal components can be accessed entirely from 

the front, without removing the melter from its mount. 

Watch Video 

Smart Melt Technology 

When the Smart Melt technology is 

enabled, the melter’s internal zones 

automatically switch off when the 

integrated fill system has not activated 

for a user-specified amount of time. The 

system continues to maintain ready status 

until a fill signal is generated. 

EcoBead Technology 

Systems that include the EcoBead 

technology can provide adhesives savings 

of up to 60% while still maintaining 

full adhesive bond integrity. The 

EcoBead technology is enabled by using 

the touchscreen to choose the desired 

adhesive savings and to select a preprogrammed 

adhesive pattern. 



1-2 | Melters 



Specifications 

Freedom Series Melter 

• Tankless, virtually eliminates char 

• Saves energy 

• Fast system start up 

• Flexible mounting and integration 

Types of system 

Maximum pump rate 

Item 

Specification 

Tankless, automatically filled, non-circulating, 15:1 dual acting piston pump 

33 kg/hr (72 lb/hr) at 90 strokes/min 

Filter type 

Inside-out 

Maximum working hydraulic pressure 

Temperature range 

Ambient temperature range 

Temperature control stability 

10.3 MPa (1500 psi) 

40 to 204 °C (100 to 400 °F) 

0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) 

± 0.5 °C (±1 °F) 

Input/output capability 

4 inputs and 3 outputs (standard) 

Hose ports 

Up to four 

Electrical service 

200 to 240 VAC, 1 or 3 phase,50/60 Hz 

400/230 VAC 1 phase N/PE 50/60 Hz 

Melt rate (per hour) 

9 to 12 kg/hr (20 to 27 lbs/hr) 

2 hoses/applicators, 2000 W* 

Max. system power capacity 

4 hoses/applicators, 4000 W* 

*2000 W per 2 hose/2 applicator pair: 1200 W per hose/applicator pair and 1000 W per single channel 

Melter enclosure rating IP 54 

Melter weight (empty) 

45.4 kg (100 lb) 

Dimensions W x H x D 

838 mm x 533 mm x 279 mm 

33 in. x 21 in. x 11 in. 

Service envelope W x H x D 

889 mm x 787 mm x 406 mm 

35 in. x 31 in. x 16 in. 

Adhesive forms 

Pellets, pastilles, and mini-slats 

Maximum size 

Spherical (pastilles): 25 mm maximum 

Mini-slats: 25 mm maximum 

Adhesive transfer maximum rate 

275 kg/hr (600 lbs/hr) (dependent on adhesive type) 




Melters | 1-3 



Integrated Adhesive Filling 

• Level monitoring window 

• Quick change exhaust filter 

• Quick-disconnect pump 

• Removable cyclone top 

Operating air (dynamic) 

Operating air (static) 

Total air consumption 

Conditioning 

Pump 

Type 

Item 

Storage container capacity (single-feed, 120L) 

Enclosure rating 

Specification 

Minimum pressure 2.75 bar (0.275 mPa or 40 psi) 

Maximum pressure 5.5 bar (0.55 mPa or 80 psi) 

Maximum pressure 6.9 bar (0.69 mPA or 100 psi) 

At 3.75 bar (55 psi) (dynamic pressure), 680 liters/min (24 SCFM) when feeding 

Dry, non-lubricated air inlet connection 

3/8 in. NPT transfer 

Venturi filter mesh size 6 

MERV 

40 kg (88 lb) usable with grate 

64 kg (141 lb) usable without grate 

IP54 



1-4 | Melters 



Optix Controls 

• Text-based fault and diagnostic messaging 

• Component identification functionality 

• Choice of languages 

• Touch screen GUI 

Program storage 

Service intervals 

Item 

Password protection 

Touch screen 

50 with customer-defined name 

Specification 

1 customer settable (with customer-defined name) 

3 levels, numerical 

7-inch color, (800 x 480 WVGA) 

EcoBead Intermittent Bead Capability 

Pre-programmed patterns 10 per glue savings selection (total of 40) 

Adhesive savings 30, 40, 50, or 60% 

Beads per product 1 to 8 

Automatically identified components 

Displayed information 

Electronic nameplate information 

Inputs 

Input voltage 

Outputs 

Output type 

Contact rating 

Stability 


PID control values 

Hoses, applicators, melter 

System Inventory 

Part number, serial number, installation date 

Watts, amps, voltage 

Input/Output Interface 

4, customer assignable functions 

10 to 30 VDC, polarity insensitive 

3, customer assignable functions 

N.O. potential-free contact; all open when melter is off 

240 VAC @ 2 A and 30 VDC @ 2 A 

Temperature Control 

± 0.5 °C (± 1 °F) 

40 to 204 °C (100 to 400 °F) 

Optimized by component I.D. 




Melters | 1-5 



Freedom Series Hoses 

• Energy saving 

• Easy routing with mounts 

• Component I.D. enabled 

Item 

Maximum operating temperature 

Maximum hydraulic pressure 

Input voltage 

Specification 

204 °C (400 °F) 

10.34 MPa (1500 psi) diameter 

240 VAC 

Freedom Series Applicators 

• Configurable MiniBlue II Applicators* 

• MiniBlue II LP Applicators 

• E400 Applicators 

• Industry-best service life 

• Self-cleaning modules 

Item 

Operating temperature 

Operating air pressure¹ 

Working hydraulic pressure 

204 °C (400 °F) maximum 

3.4 to 5.5 bar (50 to 80 psi) 

103 bar (1500 psi) maximum 

Specification 

Nozzles MiniBlue ® II: Saturn ® , standard MiniBlue II SureBead ®: 

Saturn ® solenoid valves 


Maximum cycle rate 

Minimum bead deposition 

Adhesive viscosity 

Hydraulic seal 

Single module: SP, 4-way, 24 VDC 

Multi module: SP multi-module, 

4-way, 24 VDC 

240 VAC, 50/60 Hz initial 

200 VAC, 50/60 Hz optional 

8000/min 

2 ms (adhesive dependent) 

500 to 1500 cps optimal 

500 to >5000 cps capability 

Elastomer bellow (long service life) 

*Contact your Nordson Sales Representative for configurable applicators. 



1-6 | Melters 



Freedom System Product Configuration Tree 

Part Number 

Choose Melter 

Description 

1121223 Melter, 2 Hose/Applicator 


Choose Adhesive Storage Bin or Pump Box (1) 

Part Number 

Description 

1121952 

Adhesive Storage Container, Single- 

Feed 

Part Number 

Description 

1123015 Kit, Pump Box, Single-Feed, G3 

1123102 Kit, FulFill, Plexiglass, G3 

Choose Adhesive Transfer Hose Assembly 

Part Number 

Description 

1123375 Pump, Fill Hose, Cable, QD, 4 m 



1123372 Pump, Fill Hose, Cable, Economy, 4 m 

1123047 Pump, Fill Hose, Cable, 4 m 



Choose Hose 

Part Number 

Description 

1121305 Hose, Standard, 1.0 m 










Part Number 

Description 

1121909 Hose, WaterWash, 1.0 m 










Documentation 

Part Number 

Description 

1121631 Freedom Product Manual 

1121963 Freedom System Installation Guide 

1121655 Freedom Quick Reference Guide 

1121628 Freedom Hose Manual 

1096215 MiniBlue II Product Manual 

1120707 

MiniBlue II Low Profile Applicator 

Product Manual 

1048256 E400 Applicator Product Manual 




Melters | 1-7 



Part Number 

per UID 

Choose Applicator/s 

Please use the Miniblue II Sales Configurator 

(and be sure to choose the Freedom Option, 

or use one of the applicators listed below). 

Description 

MiniBlue II Configurable Applicators 

1121728 MB-II Low Profile 2 Mod 240V 0.88 in. 


1122120 MB-II Low Profile 2 Mod 240V 0.88 in. WW 


Accessories 

Part Number 

Description 

1121239 Floor Stand with Flange 

1121234 Caster Plate Kit for Floor Stand 

1121243 Bench Top Stand 

1123261 Transformer - 15 kVa 

1122085 Kit, Grate, Adhesive Storage, 120L, Pellets, G3 

1122769 Kit, Grate, Adhesive Storage, 120L, Slats, G3 

1123346 Freedom Melter Fill Inlet Air Flush Kit 

1122171 Solenoid Input Tubing Adapters (for 1/4 in. and 3/8 in. tubing) 

1121990 Solenoid Splitter Cable (1 signal to two solenoids) 



1-8 | Melters 



Freedom System (200V) Product Configuration Tree 

Part Number 

Choose Melter 

Description 




Part Number 

Description 

1121952 

Adhesive Storage Container, Single- 

Feed 

Part Number 

Description 

1123015 Kit, Pump Box, Single-Feed, G3 


Choose Adhesive Transfer Hose Assembly 

Part Number 

Description 








Choose Hose(s) 

Part Number 

Description 

1122027 Hose, 200V, 1.0 m 

1122028 Hose, 200V, 1.5 m 

1122029 Hose, 200V, 2.0 m 

1122030 Hose, 200V, 2.5 m 

1122031 Hose, 200V, 3.0 m 

1122032 Hose, 200V, 4.0 m 

1122033 Hose, 200V, 5.0 m 

1122034 Hose, 200V, 6.0 m 

1122035 Hose, 200V, 7.0 m 

1122036 Hose, 200V, 8.0 m 

Part Number 

Description 

1122368 Hose, 200V, WaterWash, 1.0 m 













Melters | 1-9 



Part Number 

per UID 

Choose Applicator/s 

Please use the Miniblue II Sales Configurator 

(and be sure to choose the Freedom Option, 

or use one of the applicators listed below). 

Description 

MiniBlue II Configurable Applicators 





Accessories 

Part Number 

Description 

1121239 Floor Stand with Flange 

1121234 Caster Plate Kit for Floor Stand 

1121243 Bench Top Stand 

1123261 Transformer - 15 kVa 



1123346 Freedom Melter Fill Inlet Air Flush Kit 

1122171 Solenoid Input Tubing Adapters (for 1/4 in. and 3/8 in. tubing) 

1121990 Solenoid Splitter Cable (1 signal to two solenoids) 



1-10 | Melters 



Freedom System—MultiFeed System (Feed System Components Only) 


Part Number 

Description 

1121953 Multi-Feed - 2 Feed 

1121081 Multi-Feed - 4 Feed 

Part Number 

Description 

1123149 Kit, Pump Box, Multi-Feed, G3 


Choose Sequencer Box (1) 

Part Number 

Description 

1122923 Kit, Sequencer, QD-2, G3 


Part Number 

Description 

1122857 Kit, Sequencer-2, G3 





Melters | 1-11 



Choose Adhesive Transfer Hose Assembly (1 per melter) 

Part Number 

Description 




Part Number 

Description 





Accessories 

Part Number 

Description 








Parts and Accessories 

Solenoid Valve-to-Melter Cables 

Part Descri[tion Note 

1100687 Cable Assy, Sol, M8, 3-wire, 5 m 

1100958 Cable Assy, Sol, M8, 3-wire, 10 m 

1100688 Cable Assy, Sol, 90-degree, M8, 3-wire, 5 m 

1100959 Cable Assy, Sol, 90-degree, M8, 3-wire, 10 m 

1121988 Kit, Cable, Extension, Sol, M8, 0.3 m Lg A 

1121989 Kit, Cable, Extension, Sol, M8, 90-degree, 0.3 m Lg A 

1121990 Kit, Cable, Splitter, Sol, M8,1 m TO 2F, 0.3 m LG A 

NOTE A: These extension and splitter cables can be used for additional routing configurations. 

Hose-to-Applicator Fittings 

Hose Size 

8 mm (5/16 in.), 

9/16 in. x 18 threads, 

37-degree JIC, size 6 

Applicator Body 

Thread Size 

9/16 in. x 18 threads, 

with O-ring 

Hose-to-Applicator 

Fitting Part Number 

Description 

972628 Straight fitting 

972647 45-degree swivel fitting 

972646 90-degree swivel fitting 

Optional Equipment 

Part Description Note 

1030537 Kit, Gauge, 1500 psi — 

1121239 Kit,Freedom,Mount,Floor,Fixed,DS1 

1121243 Kit,Freedom,Bench Support,DS1 A 

1121234 Kit,Freedom,Caster Plate, DS1 B 

1122108 Kit,Base Plate,Stand,Freedom C 

NOTE A: The melter bench stand is height-adjustable. 

B: Casters are for the melter floor stand only. 

C: This kit allows the melter to be free-standing, but not on casters. 





MiniBlue II LP Applicators—Freedom 

Part 

Description 

No. 

Modules 

1121728 MB2-BEL-LP-02ACA-022-F-F41 2 



Spacing 

Inches 

Volts 

Cordset 

240 F 

1122120 MB2-BEL-LP-02ACA-022-D-F41 WW 2 240 D 

0.88 

1121730 MB2-BEL-LP-02BCA-022-F-F41 2 200 F 

1122122 MB2-BEL-LP-02BCA-022-D-F41 WW 2 200 D 

Filter 

100 

mesh 

Solenoid 

Saturn Platinum 

24 VDC 

1121729 MB2-BEL-LP-04ACA-022-F-F41 4 

240 F 

1122121 MB2-BEL-LP-04ACA-022-D-F41 WW 4 240 D 

0.88 


1122123 MB2-BEL-LP-04BCA-022-D-F41 WW 4 200 D 

100 

mesh 


24 VDC 






This page intentionally blank 




Web Content 



Integrated Tankless Melter and Fill System 

Description 

ProBlue Liberty tankless system adds and melts only the 

adhesive you need, when you need it. 

Integrated tankless melter and fill system maintains 

adhesive levels, increasing uptime while delivering energy 

and maintenance savings that result in increased operating 

efficiency and lower per-package costs. 

A sensor monitors molten adhesive levels in the hopper 

and alerts the system when adhesive is needed. The closed 

system helps maintain adhesive bond strength by minimizing 

degradation that comes from prolonged thermal exposure, 

temperature variation and exposure to contaminants. 

Features 

• Hopper lid allows for easy access, yet keeps sealed design maintains 

adhesive purity by protecting from plant debris 

• Disposable hydraulic filter is easy to reach and eliminates the need for 

routine filter flushing 

• Automatic pressure discharge valve relieves pressure into melter in 

seconds 

• Quick-disconnect power and I/O plugs combined with a patented, 

quick-release base design help simplify set up 

• Service, maintenance and daily operation can be performed from one 

side of the melter 

• Plug-in modules increase uptime by allowing quick addition and 

removal of hoses and applicators 

ProBlue Liberty Adhesive Dispensing System 

Watch Video 

Benefits 

• Improves product quality and bond strength by maintaining consistent 

adhesive temperature, purity and bead volume 

• Increases efficiency and safety 

• Increases uptime with quick and easy maintenance provided by onesided 

access to board fuses, quick-disconnect electrical replacement 

elements and front access to filter, pump and controls 

• Increases plant operating efficiency by lengthening maintenance cycle 

and parts life while reducing machine jamming from pop-opens 







ProBlue Liberty Series Melter 

• Tankless, minimizes char 

• Saves energy 

• Fast system start up 

• Flexible mounting and integration 


Maximum melter set point 


Type of system 


Filter type 



Description 

Liberty 7 Liberty 14 

204 °C (400 °F) 

Pellets, pastilles, mini-slats 

Pastilles: 12 mm (0.472 in. diameter) 

Mini-slats: 12 mm x 12 mm (0.472 x 0.472 in.) 

Non-circulating grid/hopper (15:1 SP-style piston pump) 

32.7 kg/hr (72 lb/hr) Filter Type 

Saturn basket-style filter 

40 °C to 204 °C (100 °F to 400 °F) 

0 to 40 °C (32 °F to 100 °F) 

Temp. Control stability 

±0.5 °C (1 °F) 

4 inputs and 3 outputs - come as standard 


10 inputs and 7 outputs - with optional expansion board 

Standard 

Eithernet IP & Fieldbus optional 

Hose ports 5 9 

Electrical service standard 

200 to 240 VAC 

1 or 3 phase 50/60 Hz 

400/230 VAC 

1 or 3 phase N/PE 50/60 Hz 

200 to 240 VAC 


400/230 VAC 


w/optional transformer 

400 or 480 VAC 

400 or 480 VAC 

3 phase 50/60 Hz 


Holding capacity 1.7 kg (3.7 lb) 1.7 kg (3.7 lb) 

Melt rate (per hour) 7 kg (15 lb) 14 kg (30 lb) 

Throughput (per hour) 9 kg (20 lb) 14 kg (30 lb) 

Max. Hose/Applicator power capacity 

2 hoses/applicators 



*2000 W per 2 hose & 2 applicator pair; 

1200 W per hose & applicator pair and 1000 W per channel 

Unit dimensions (WxHxD) 

2000 watts 

4000 watts 

N/A 

539.1 x 485.9 x 371.9 mm 

(21.22 x 19.13 x 14.64 in) 

2000 watts 

4000 watts 

6000 watts 

606.7 x 571.5 x 390.6 mm 

(23.89 x 22.50 x 15.38 in) 







Integrated Adhesive Filling 

• Multi-feed option can service up to four melters 

• Large integrated agitator helps keeps adhesive flowing freely 

• Window provides adhesive level-at-a-glance visibility 

• Adhesive transfer hoses available in a variety or lengths 

• Easy, snap-in hose connections 

• Optional strainer baskets break up clumps of adhesive as it 

pours into container 

• Optional, electrical, quick disconnect kits make it easy to 

move adhesive storage container 

• Optional suction lance kit allows customers to use their adhesive supplier container 

• Optional pump box kit allows end users to design their own enclosure and allows OEM’s to integrate into the parent machine 


Description 

Maximum recommended operating temperature 40 °C 

Freedom 

Melter systems 

Liberty 

ProBlue Fulfill 

Fulfill Retrofit 

Pellets, pastilles, mini-slats 


Pastilles: 12 mm (0.472 in. diameter) 

Mini-slats: 12 mm x 12 mm (0.472 x 0.472 in.) 

Adhesive transfer maximum rate 

275 KG (600 lb)/hour (dependent on adhesive type) 

Transfer hose length 

4 m (13 ft.), 9 m (29.5 ft), or 18 m (59 ft) 

Air conditioning 

Dry, non-lubricated 

Operating air - Static 

Minimum: 

Maximum: 

Operating air - Static 

Maximum: 


Inlet air connection 

Dimensions (W x D x H) 

Adhesive container capacity (single-feed, 120L) 


Noise emission 

2.75 bar (0.275 MPa or 40 psi) 

5.5 bar (0.55 MPa or 80 psi) 

6.9 bar (0.69 MPa or 100 psi) 

At 3.75 bar (55 psi) (dynamic pressure), 680 liters/min (24 SCFM) when feeding 

¼-in. NPT female 

¼-in. BSPP female 

G ¼ female 

Single-feed Adhesive Container Clearance 480 x 554 x 917 mm (19 x 22 x 36 in.) 

Multi-feed Adhesive Container Clearance 688 x 667 x 1656 mm (26 x 27 x 65 in.) 



IP54 

76 dBa 






Parts & Accessories 

Melters 

Part 

Description 

1123327 Melter, PBL 7, 2HG 

1123328 Melter, PBL 7, 4HG 

1123329 Melter, PBL 7, 2H/G, 400/480V Delta 


1123331 Melter, PBL 14, 2H/G 

1123332 Melter, PBL 14, 4H/G 

1123333 Melter, PBL 14, 6H/G 




Optional Base 

Part 

Description 

1039840 Base Assy,1.5 KVA XFMR,ProBlue 

1039841 Base Assy,3.0 KVA XFMR,ProBlue 

1061030 Base, Expansion, 8 H/G, P10 

Adhesive Storage Container 

Part 

Description 

1121952 Container, Adh Storage, SF, G3 

1121953 Container, Adh Stoarge, MF, 2 Pump, G3 

1122081 Container, Adh Storage, MF, 4 Pump, G3 

Adhesive Transfer Hose Assembly 

Part 

Description 

1121967 Kit, FF, Adh Trans Assy, 4 m, Std, G3 

1121954 Kit, FF, Adh Trans Assy, 4 m, CL, G3 



1124610 Kit, FF, Adh Trans Assy, 4 m, STD,QD, G3 

1124611 Kit, FF, Adh Trans Assy, 4 m, CL,QD, G3 

1124612 Kit, FF, Adh Trans Assy, 9 m, CL,QD, G3 

1124613 Kit, FF, Adh Trans Assy,18 m, CL,QD,G3 

QD stands for Quick Disconnect 

Sequencer 

NOTE: Required if feeding multiple melters from a single source. 

Part 





QD stands for Quick Disconnect 

Accessories 

Part 

Description 

Description 

1122085 Kit, Grate, Adh Str, 120L, Pellets, G3 

1122086 Kit, Grate, Adh Str, 240L, Pellets, G3 

1122769 Kit, Grate, Adh Str, 120L, Slats, G3 

1122770 Kit, Grate, Adh Str, 240L, Slats, G3 

1123346 Kit, Air Flush, G3 

1123002 Kit, Pneum, 2 to 4 Feed Conv, MF, G3 

1121992 Kit, Adh Str Container Latch, G3 

1121806 Kit, Light Tower, FF G3 

1124328 Kit, Air Flush, MF, G3 

1124430 Kit, Air Flush, Wand, G3 

1125306 Kit, Light Tower, ATS* 

1125304 Kit ,Conversion, PB/PBL, 4H, 230V, ATS 




Kit, 24V & Serial Adapter Board, ATS (24V/Serial 

1125197 Adapter Board - purchase when installing 8 hose/ 

applicator expansion base) 

1124858 Kit, USB to Serial Adapter 

*For details on the Adhesive Tracking System (ATS), refer to the 

ATS section in this guide. 







Parts & Accessories (contd.) 

Suction Lance 

Note: For use with large open tote. 

Part 

Description 

1122132 Kit, FF, Suction Lance, 4 m, Gray, G3 

1122763 Kit, FF, Suction Lance, 4 m, Clear, G3 



Communication Devices 

Part 

Description 

1053289 Kit, Ethernet Card 

1053288 Kit, DeviceNet Card 

1036607 Kit, I/0 Expansion Card 

1053300 Kit, PROFIBUS Card 

1124963 Kit, PROFINET Card 

DeviceNet is a registered trademark of ODVA, Inc. 

Pump Box Kits 

Part 

Description 

1123015 Kit, Pump Box, SF, G3 

1123149 Kit, Pump Box, MF, G3 

1123102 Kit, FF, Plexiglass, G3 










Web Content 



Models 4, 7, and 10 

Description 

ProBlue 4, 7, and 10 melters set a new 

standard for hot melt adhesive application 

by providing performance and features 

to meet a wide range of packaging 

requirements. Building on the proven 

durability and reliability of Nordson Series 

3000 melters, ProBlue melters are designed 

to maximize uptime and reduce operating 

costs. Nordson ProBlue melters are simple 

and compact. These rugged, flexible, 

non–handed melters feature a smaller size 

and have a smaller service envelope to fit 

virtually any packaging line. 

Primary Features 

• Approximately twenty percent smaller size 

• Approximately fifty percent smaller service 

envelope 

ProBlue Series Melters 4, 7, and 10 

• Easy–to–use controls 

• High–level noise immunity 

• Saturn ® basket–style disposable filter 

• Rugged, non–handed design 

• Proven Nordson SP dual–acting piston pump 

• Cast–in heater 

• PID temperature control 

• Automatic pressure discharge valve (APD) 

• Low–level adhesive indicator 

• Communications options 








Parameter ProBlue 4 ProBlue 7 ProBlue 10 

Non-circulating tank (14:1 SP-style piston pump) 

Holding capacity kg (lb) 3.9 (8.6) 6.8 (15) 9.7 (21.4) 

Melt rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 4.3 (9.5) 8.2 (18) 11 (24) 

Throughput kg/hr (lb/hr) 6.8 (15) 10.9 (24) 12.4 (27.3) 

Pump rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 32.7 (72) 





40-230°C (100-450°F) 

0-50°C (32-122°F) 

±0.5°C (1°F) 

87 bar/8.7 MPa (1260 psi) 

Hose ports 5 5 9 

Hose/Applicator Capacity (Maximum) 2 or 4 2 or 4 2, 4, or 6 

Hose/Applicator Power 

Maximum melter power 

• 2 Hose/Applicator 

1000 W each Hose/Applicator pair (2000 W per Hose/Applicator module) 

4000 W 4200 W 4200 W 

• 4 Hose/Applicator 6000 W 6200 W 6200 W 

• 6 Hose/Applicator N/A N/A 8200 W 

Input/Output Capability Standard 

3 standard outputs - programmable for function 4 standard inputs - programmable 

for function 

Filter area cm 2 (in. 2 ) 71 (11) 


With optional transformer 

200 to 240 VAC 1∅ or 3∅ 50/60 Hz 

200 to 240 VAC (1∅ N/PE) 50/60 Hz 

400/230 VAC (3∅ N/PE) 50/60 Hz 

400 or 480 VAC 3∅ 50/60 Hz 

Weight kg (lb) (empty) 42 (93) 43 (95) 45 (99) 

Dimensions W x H x D mm 547 x 469 x 318 609 x 469 x 322 613 x 505 x 344 

(in.) (21.5 x 18.48 x 12.5) (24 x 18.5 x 12.7) (24.1 x 19.9 x 13.5) 

Service envelope W x H x D mm 648 x 502 x 362 711 x 564 x 362 714 x 656 x 391 

(in.) (25.5 x 19.75 x 14.25) (28 x 22.2 x 14.25) (28.1 x 25.8 x 15.4) 

Mounting mm (in) 381 x 249 (15.9 x 9.8) 

Approvals and certifications UL, CUL (1) , CE, ISO 9001 

(1) 

CUL is a legal CSA-equivalent in Canada. 

NOTES: 

1. Melter performance ratings are measured using a 1100 cps packaging grade adhesive with an application temperature of 

177°C (350°F) and a specific gravity of 0.97. 

2. Pump rate is maximum pump output while maintaining 90% of static hydraulic pressure for a given inlet air pressure. 







Part Numbers 

ProBlue Melter 200-240 VAC and 400/230 VAC with Standard 14:1 Pump 


2 Hose/Applicator 1022230 1022232 1022234 


6 Hose/Applicator — — 1022236 

ProBlue Melter 200-240 VAC and 400/230 VAC with 6:1 Pump 




ProBlue Melter 400 and 480 VAC with Standard 14:1 Pump 




ProBlue Melter 400 and 480 VAC with 6:1 Pump 




NOTE: 400 and 480 VAC melters must have a transformer base assembly. The assembly required is dependent on the total wattage 

used for the unit and hose/applicators in operation. Contact Nordson for assistance in selecting the correct transformer. 

Part Number 

Parameter 

1039840 Transformer Base Assembly, 1.5 kVA 

1039841 Transformer Base Assembly, 3.0 kVA 






Optional Accessories 

Description 

1036607 I/O expansion card kit 

1053300 PROFIBUS communications kit 

1124963 PROFINET communications kit 

1053288 DeviceNet communications kit 

1053289 Ethernet communications kit 

Part Number 

1061030 8 Hose/Applicator expansion base (ProBlue 10 only) 



1125304 Kit, Conversion, PB/PBL, 4H, 230V, ATS 




1125197 

Kit, 24V & Serial Adapter Board, ATS (24V/Serial Adapter Board - 

purchase when installing 8 hose/applicator expansion base) 


*For details on the Adhesive Tracking System (ATS), refer to the ATS section in this guide. 






Web Content 



Models 15/30/50 Large Capacity 

Description 

Nordson ProBlue melters are designed to maximize 

uptime and reduce operating costs. These rugged, 

flexible, non-handed melters fit on virtually any 

packaging line. 

Features: 

• Melter sizes and service envelopes closely match legacy 

products for easy integration into existing 

applications. 

• All sheet metal enclosures and large tank openings allow for 

easy operation and daily maintenance. 

• Status-at-a-glance indicators highlight: ready, fault, service 

and temperature status for tank, hose and applicator. 

• Simplified intuitive controls and service indicators require less 

user training and simplify maintenance scheduling. 

• Disposable filter reduces daily maintenance by eliminating 

routine filter flushing. 

• Standard tank low-level indicator and output protects against 

operator oversight and helps assure continuous production. 

• Standard programmable I/O (3 output and 4 input) facilitate 

parent machine integration. 

• Quick disconnect primary power and I/O plugs and 

pneumatic fittings provide easier installation. 

• Sub-base allows easy, quick access to mounting bolts and 

electrical knockouts for easier installation. 

ProBlue Series Melters 15, 30, 50 

• Easy-to-remove exterior panels are constructed of rugged sheet 

molded FRP and include a heavy duty tank lid. 

• Cast-in heating elements and PTFE-coated tanks provide fast 

warm-up time, improve heat transfer and reduce char buildup. 

• Remote temperature setback, hose/applicator enable/disable, 

and automatic temperature setback are standard programmable 

features to enhance operation. 

• Communications options and serial and network 

communications allow improved integration into parent 

machine control systems. 

• All major components are easily accessible from the front of 

the melter, and all major subsystems are easily replaced. 









Non-circulating tank (SP-style piston pump) 

Holding capacity kg (lb) 14.5 (32) 29 (64) 48.5 (107) 

Melt rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 18.1 (40) 27 (60) 28.6 (63) 

Throughput kg/hr (lb/hr) 18.1 (40) 30.6 (67.5) 28.6 (63) 

Pump rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 

Standard output (14:1) 

32.7 (72) — — 

High output (16:1) 60 (130) 60 (130) 60 (130) 

Single acting (12:1) 108 (240) — — 


40-230°C (100-450°F) 


0-50°C (32-122°F) 


±0.5°C (1°F) 


100 bar/10 MPa (1450 psi) 

Hose ports 9 

Hose/Applicator capacity (Maximum) 2, 4, or 6 

Hose/Applicator power 

1000 W each H/G pair (2000 W per H/G module) 


2 Hose/Applicator 

5000 W 6000 W 6000 W 

4 Hose/Applicator 7000 W 8000 W 8000 W 

6 Hose/Applicator 9000 W 10,000 W 10,000 W 

Input/Output capability standard 

3 standard outputs - programmable for function 

4 standard inputs - programmable for function 

Filter area cm2 (in.2) 71 (11) 


200 to 240 VAC 1∅ or 3∅ 50/60 Hz 

400/230 VAC (3∅ N/PE) 50/60 Hz 


400 or 480 VAC 3∅ 50/60 Hz (ProBlue 15 only) 

Weight kg (lb) (empty) 66 (145) 81.6 (180) 87 (192) 

Dimensions W x H x D mm 686 x 547 x 345 952 x 548 x 345 952 x 751 x 345 

(in.) (27 x 21.5 x 13.6) (37.6 x 21.6 x 13.6) (24.1 x 19.9 x 13.5) 

Service envelope W x H x D mm 787 x 859 x 392 1044 x 859 x 392 1044 x 1062 x 392 

(in.) (31 x 33.8 x 15.4) (41.1 x 33.8 x 15.4) (41.1 x 41.8 x 15.4) 

Mounting mm 581 x 249 669 x 249 

(in) (22.9 x 9.8) (26.3 x 9.8) 

Approvals and certifications UL, CUL (1) , CE, ISO 9001 

(1) 

CUL is a legal CSA-equivalent in Canada. 

NOTES: 

1. Melter performance ratings are measured using a 1100 cps packaging grade adhesive with an application temperature of 177 °C 

(350 °F) and a specific gravity of 0.97. 

2. Pump rate is maximum pump output while maintaining 90% of static hydraulic pressure for a given inlet air pressure. 





Part Numbers 

Melters with a Standard Output Dual Acting 14:1 Pump 


2 Hose/Applicator 1049316 — — 



Melters with a High Output Dual Acting 16:1 Pump 





Melters with a Single Acting 12:1 Pump 





NOTE: The ProBlue 15 melter will operate at 400 or 480 VAC when used with a transformer base assembly. 







Part Number 

1036607 I/O expansion card kit 

Description 

1053300 PROFIBUS communications kit 

1124963 PROFINET communications kit 

1053288 DeviceNet communications kit 

1053289 Ethernet communications kit 

1061031 8 Hose/Applicator expansion base (ProBlue 15 only) 






1125197 

Kit, 24V & Serial Adapter Board, ATS (24V/Serial Adapter 

Board - purchase when installing purchase 8 hose/applicator 

expansion base) 


*For details on the Adhesive Tracking System (ATS), refer to the ATS section in this guide. 







Web Content 

ProBlue ® and ProBlue Liberty ATS Melters 

Melters and Melter/Fill Systems with Adhesive Process Control 

ProBlue ATS Melters 

Combine simple operation with an adhesive 

tracking system (ATS) to maximize uptime, 

optimize adhesive consumption and improve 

production efficiency. 


• Installation is quick and easy. Compact size and 

a patented, centrally located manifold that allows 

hoses to run right or left means ProBlue melters 

fit on virtually any packaging line. 

• Quick-disconnect power and I/O plugs and 

a patented, quick-release base design further 

simplify set up. 

• Plug-in modules let you add or subtract hoses 

and applicators to meet changing production 

needs. 

• A disposable filter eliminates the need for routine 

filter flushing while helping prevent debris and 

contaminants in adhesive from reaching your 

products. 

• An integrated precision gear flow meter directly 

measures adhesive volume, and the system 

output signal can be used to stop the line, eject 

product or signal a light tower. 

• Maintain the proper adhesive deposit on each 

and every package to increase production 

efficiency and quality. 

• Track total adhesive consumption, per package 

add-on weight, total number of products and 

out-of-tolerance products. 

• Operator safety is improved with a patented 

automatic pressure discharge (APD) valve that 

relieves pressure into the melter tank in seconds. 

• Reduce costs by identifying adhesive and 

product waste. 

• Monitor and control in real time via optional 

Ethernet IP & Fieldbus; download historical 

data via USB 

• User adjustable adhesive volume upper and 

lower tolerance band limits to identify out-oftolerance 

produc 

ProBlue® ATS Melters 

4, 7 and 10 Liter Melters with Adhesive 

Process Control 

ProBlue Liberty ATS Melters 

A consolidated tankless melter and fill system maintains consistent 

adhesive levels, increasing uptime while delivering energy and 

maintenance savings that result in increased operating efficiency 

and lower per-package costs. 

A sensor in the reservoir monitors molten adhesive levels in the 

hopper and alerts the system when adhesive is needed. The closed 

system helps maintain adhesive bond strength by minimizing 

degradation that comes from prolonged thermal exposure, 

temperature variation and exposure to contaminants. 

An integrated precision gear flow meter directly measures adhesive 

volume and alerts the system when the amount of adhesive is out of 

a pre-determined band. The output signal can be used to stop the 

line, eject product or signal a light tower. By tracking the precise 

amount of adhesive dispensed onto a package, users can minimize 

adhesive waste and prevent pop-opens. 


• Track total adhesive consumption, per package add-on weight and total 

number of products 

• Download historical data via USB for process analysis 

ProBlue Liberty ATS 

Integrated Tankless Melter and Fill 

System with Adhesive Process Control 

• Hopper lid allows for easy access and sealed design maintains adhesive purity 

by protecting from plant debris 

• Automatic pressure discharge valve relieves pressure into melter in seconds 

• Service, maintenance and daily operation can be performed from one side of 

the melter 

• Real-time monitoring and control via optional Ethernet IP & Fieldbus 

• User adjustable adhesive volume upper and lower tolerance band limits to 

identify out of tolerance product 






ProBlue ATS Melter Specifications 

Type of System 

Parameter 

Maximum Pump Rate 

Filter Type 

Maximum Working Hydraulic Pressure 

Temperature Range 

Ambient Temp. Range 

Temp. Control Stability 

Specification 

Non-circulating tank (15:1 SP-style piston pump) 

32.7 kg/hr (72 lb/hr) 

Saturn® basket-style filter 

10.3 MPa (1500 psi) 

40 to 204 ºC (100 to 400 ºF) 

0 to 50 ºC (32 to 122 ºF) 

±0.5 ºC (1 °F) 

Input/Output Capability 

4 inputs & 3 outputs - come as standard; 10 inputs and 7 outputs - Standard with optional 

expansion board; Ethernet IP & Fieldbus optional 

Flow Meter 

Specification 

Flow Range 0.5 cc to 500 cc/min (0.03–29.9 kg/hr or 0.07–65.9 lb/hr) (assuming SG = 1.0) 

Displacement 1.0 cc/rev = 1 g/rev = 0.001 kg/rev = 0.0022 lb/rev (assuming SG = 1.0) 

Resolution 25mCC (25 mg or .055 lb, assuming sg = 1.0) 

Viscosity Range 

600 to 10,000 cps 

Output Signals 

2: enable and alarm, 24 VDC sourcing (PNP), 25 mA each 

Melter ProBlue 4 ProBlue 7 ProBlue 10 

Hose Ports 5 5 9 

Electrical Service 


200 to 240 VAC 1 or 3 phase 

50/60 Hz 200 to 240 VAC 

1 phase N/PE 50/60 Hz 

400/230 VAC 


w/ Opt. Transformer 400 or 480 VAC 



50/60 Hz 200 to 240 VAC 


400/230 VAC 


400 or 480 VAC 



50/60 Hz 200 to 240 VAC 


400/230 VAC 


400 or 480 VAC 


Holding Capacity 3.9 kg (8.6 lb) 6.8 kg (15 lb) 9.7 kg (21.4 lb) 

Melt Rate (per hour) 4.3 kg (9.5 lb) 8.2 kg (18 lb) 11 kg (24 lb) 

Throughput (per hour) 6.8 kg (15 lb) 10.9 kg (24 lb) 12.4 kg (27.3 lb) 

Volume 4 liter (244 in3) 7 liter (427 in3) 10 liter (610 in3) 

Max. System Power Capacity ProBlue 4 ProBlue 7 ProBlue 10 

2 hoses/applicators 4000 watts 4200 watts 4200 watts 

4 hoses/applicators 6000 watts 6200 watts 6200 watts 

6 hoses/applicators N/A N/A 8200 watts 

Melter Weight (empty) 42 kg (93 lb) 43 kg (95 lb) 45 kg (99 lb) 

Dimensions WxHxD ProBlue 4 ProBlue 7 ProBlue 10 

Unit mm(in) 547 x 469 x 318 

(21.5 x 18.5 x 12.5) 

609 x 469 x 322 

(24 x 18.5 x 12.7) 

613 x 505 x 344 

(24.1 x 19.9 x 13.5) 

Mounting mm(in) 381 x 249 (15 x 9.8) 381 x 249 (15 x 9.8) 381 x 249 (15 x 9.8) 

Installation mm(in) 648 x 502 x 362 

(25.5 x 19.75 x 14.25) 

711x 564 x 370 

(28 x 22.2 x 14.5) 

714 x 656 x 391 

(28.1 x 25.8 x 15.4) 





ProBlue Liberty ATS Melter Specifications 

Parameter 

Maximum melter set point 

Adhesive Forms 



Maximum Pump Rate 


Temperature Range 

Ambient Temperature Range 

Temp. Control Stability 

204 ºC (400 ºF) 


Specification 

Pellets 

Pastilles: up to 12 mm (0.472 in. diameter) 

Mini-slats: up to 12 mm x 12 mm (0.472 x 0.472 in.) 

Refer to the ProBlue Liberty melter section of this guide. 

Non-circulating grid/hopper (15:1 SP-style piston pump) 

32.7 kg/hr (72 lb/hr) 

10.3 MPa (1500 psi) 

40 ºC to 204 ºC (100 ºF to 400 ºF) 

0 to 40 ºC (32 ºF to 100 ºF) 

±0.5 ºC (1 ºF) 


Input/Output Capability 

4 inputs & 3 outputs - come as standard; 10 inputs and 7 outputs - with optional expansion 

board; Ethernet IP & Fieldbus optional 

Flow Meter 

Specification 

Flow Range 0.5 cc to 500 cc/min (0.03–29.9 kg/hr or 0.07–65.9 lb/hr) (assuming SG = 1.0) 

Displacement 1.0 cc/rev = 1 g/rev = 0.001 kg/rev = 0.0022 lb/rev (assuming SG = 1.0) 

Resolution 25mCC (25 mg or .055 lb, assuming sg = 1.0) 

Viscosity Range 

600 to 10,000 cps 

Output Signals 

2: enable and alarm, 24 VDC sourcing (PNP), 25 mA each 

Melter Liberty 7 Liberty 14 

Hose Ports 5 9 



200 to 240 VAC 1 or 3 phase 50/60 Hz 

400/230 VAC 


w/ Opt. Transformer 400 or 480 VAC Delta 


200 to 240 VAC 


400/230 VAC 


400 or 480 VAC Delta 


Holding Capacity 1.7 kg (3.7 lb) 1.7 kg (3.7 lb) 

Melt Rate (per hour) 7 kg (15 lb) 14 kg (30 lb) 

Throughput (per hour) 7 kg (15 lb) 14 kg (30 lb) 

Max. Hose/Applicator 

Power Capacity* 

Liberty 7 Liberty 14 

2 hoses/applicators 2000 watts 2000 watts 

4 hoses/applicators 4000 watts 4000 watts 

6 hoses/applicators N/A 6000 watts 

Unit Dimensions (WxHxD) 

539.1 x 485.9 x 371.9 mm 

(21.22 x 19.13 x 14.64 in) 

606.7 x 571.5 x 390.6 mm 

(23.89 x 22.50 x 15.38 in) 

*2000 W per 2 hose & 2 applicator pair: 1200 W per hose & applicator pair and 1000 W per channel. 






ProBlue ATS Melter Part Numbers 

Part Number 

Description 

1125122 Melter, ProBlue ATS 4, 2H/G 


1125124 Melter, ProBlue ATS 4, 2H/G, 400/480V Delta 












ProBlue Liberty ATS Melter Part Numbers 

Part Number 

Description 

1125080 Melter, ProBlue Liberty ATS 7, 2H/G 


1125082 Melter, ProBlue Liberty ATS 7, 2H/G, 400/480V Delta 









Part Number 

1125306 Kit, Light Tower, ATS 





Description 

1125197 Kit, 24V & Serial Adapter Board, ATS (24V/Serial Adapter Board - Purchase when installing 8 hose/applicator 

expansion base) 





Web Content 



External Flow Measuring and Process Control Device 

Description 

An easy-to-use ATS retrofit kit contains all the 

pieces required to add adhesive tracking capabilities 

to any Nordson packaging melter. An external gear 

flow meter can be connected to the manifold, and 

a control box can be easily mounted on the melter 

or nearby on the parent machine. 

The flow meter directly senses adhesive volume and 

alters the system when the amount of dispensed 

adhesive is out of a pre-determined band. The 

output signals from the control box can be used 

to stop the line, eject product, or signal a light 

tower. By tracking the precise amount of adhesive 

dispensed onto a package, users can minimize 

adhesive waste and prevent pop-opens. 


Features 

• Add adhesive tracking capabilities to existing ProBlue 

and non-ProBlue melters 

• Track total adhesive consumption, per package add-on 

weight, and total number of products 

• User-adjustable adhesive volume upper and lower 

tolerance band limits to identify out-of-tolerance 

product 

• Download historical data via USB for process analysis 

• Monitor and control ProBlue melters in real time via 

optional Ethernet IP and Fieldbus 

Benefits 

• Improves product quality and bond strength by 

maintaining consistent adhesive temperature, purity, 

bead volume, and confirming adhesive add-on weight 

• Increases plant operating efficiency by lengthening 

maintenance cycle and parts life while reducing machine 

jamming from pop-opens 

• Reduces costs by identifying adhesive and product waste 

• Minimize number of long hoses by mounting close to 

the point of application 

• Flexible mounting allows the meter to attach directly to 

the melter, either horizontally or vertically, or a remote 

location close to the point of application 






ATS Retrofit Kit Specifications 

Parameter 

Maximum system operating pressure 

10 Mpa (1,450 psi) 

Specification 

Instantaneous flow fate range 0.03–91 kg/hr (0.07–200.6 lb/hr) (assuming SG* = 1.0) 

Displacement 1.0 cc/rev = 1 g/rev = 0.001 kg/rev = 0.0022 lb/rev (assuming SG* = 1.0) 

Resolution 0.025 cc (25 mg) or (0.055 lb) (assuming SG* = 1.0) 

Viscosity range 

Output signals 

ATS retrofit manifold electrical 

requirements 

ATS control box power supply electrical 

requirements 

600–10,000 cps 

2 (Enabled Output and Alarm Output) 

24 VDC sourcing (PNP) 

25 mA each 

Number of hose/applicator channels required: 1 

Heater power: 350 W 

200 mA (maximum) 

24 VDC +/-10% 

Manifold construction Aluminum, type 6061-T6 

Flow meter construction 

Gears: 86L20 steel, case-hardened 

Gear shafts: Carbon steel, hardened and grounded (DIN 6325, M6) 

Body: 316 stainless steel 

Flow meter sensors Inductance: 1 mH (+/-10%) 

Resistance: 15 ohm (+/-10%) 

Frequency: 60 kHz (+/-10%) 

Temperature rating 

204 °C (400 °F) maximum 

Working temperature range 

-5–50 °C (23–122 °F) 

ATS control box IP rating 

IPX4 

*SG = specific gravity 







Dimensions 

Melter with Melter-Mounted ATS Retrofit 

A 

B C 

E 

D 

ProBlue 4 

ProBlue 7 

ProBlue 10 

ProBlue Liberty 7 

Melter A B C D E 

ProBlue Liberty 14 

ProBlue 15 

ProBlue 30 

ProBlue 50 

594.4 mm 

(23.4 in.) 

594.4 mm 

(23.4 in.) 

731.5 mm 

(28.8 in.) 

594.4 mm 

(23.4 in.) 

731.5 mm 

(28.8 in.) 

800.1 mm 

(31.5 in.) 

800.1 mm 

(31.5 in.) 

800.1 mm 

(31.5 in.) 

447.8 mm 

(17.63 in.) 

447.8 mm 

(17.63 in.) 

469.9 mm 

(18.5 in.) 

447.0 mm 

(17.6 in.) 

469.9 mm 

(18.5 in.) 

473.2 mm 

(18.6 in.) 

473.2 mm 

(18.6 in.) 

473.2 mm 

(18.6 in.) 

548.6 mm 

(21.6 in.) 

609.6 mm 

(24.0 in.) 

614.7 mm 

(24.2 in.) 

609.6 mm 

(24.0 in.) 

652.8 mm 

(25.7 in.) 

685.8 mm 

(27.0 in.) 

952.5 mm 

(37.5 in.) 

952.5 mm 

(37.5 in.) 

688.3 mm 

(27.1 in.) 

688.3 mm 

(27.1 in.) 

736.6 mm 

(29.0 in.) 

688.3 mm 

(27.1 in.) 

736.6 mm 

(29.0 in.) 

612.9 mm 

(24.1 in.) 

612.9 mm 

(24.1 in.) 

612.9 mm 

(24.1 in.) 

— 

— 

— 

614.7 mm 

(24.2 in.) 

660.4 mm 

(26.0 in.) 






Dimensions (contd.) 

ATS Control Box Melter or Bench Mounting Bracket Dimensions 

221.2 mm 

(8.71 in.) 

94.5 mm 

(3.72 in.) 

177.8 mm 

(7.00 in.) 

192.8 mm 

(7.59 in.) 

46.0 mm 

(1.81 in.) 

2 x M5 

116.8 mm 

(4.60 in.) 

ATS Control Box Wall Mounting Bracket Dimensions 

4 x M5 

204.0 mm 

(8.03 in.) 

179.3 mm 

(7.06 in.) 

133.4 mm 

(5.25 in.) 

23.1 mm 

(0.91 in.) 

114.3 mm 

(4.50 in.) 

222.3 mm 

(8.75 in.) 

238.3 mm 

(9.38 in.) 








ATS Retrofit Manifold 

4 x ∅ 0.26 

H 

139.7 mm 

(5.5 in.) 

8.9 mm 

(3.5 in.) 

154.4 mm 

(6.08 in.) 

69.9 mm 

(2.75 in.) 

124.0 mm 

(4.88 in.) 

Manifold Mounting 

Bracket Part Number 

Installation 

H 

mm (in.) 

1125498 Remote 175.5 (6.91) 

1125498 P10, L14 175.5 (6.91) 

1125504 P4/7, L7 234.4 (9.23) 

1125506 P15/30/50 207.3 (8.16) 






Part Numbers 

ATS Control Box 

Item 

Part 

Number 

Description 

1 1125299 

Kit, Control Box, ATS, 1 m (3 ft) power 

harness 

2 1125931 

Kit, Control Box, ATS, 6 m (20 ft) power 

harness 

2 1125932 Kit, Control Box, ATS, no power harness 

NS 1009989 

Power Supply, 24 VDC, 2.0 A, DIN 

mount (suitable for use with 1125932) 

1 2 

ATS Control Box Mounting Brackets 

Item 

Part 

Description 

Number 

1125647 

Brackets, Control, Melter Mount, PB4, 

ATS 

1 1125648 


ATS 

1125649 


ATS 

2 1125651 Brackets, Control, Bench Mount, ATS 

3 1125650 Brackets, Control, Wall Mount, ATS 

1 2 

3 

Air Filter/Regulator and Pneumatic 

Panel Assemblies 

Item 

Part 

Number 

1 1125471 

2 1125605 

3 1125608 

Description 

Kit, Regulator/Solenoid, PB4/7/10, ATS 

(for all P4/7/10 melters 

Kit, Regulator/Solenoid, PB15, Dual- 

Acting, ATS (for P15 melters with a 

dual-acting pump) 

Kit, Regulator/Solenoid, PB15, Single- 

Acting, ATS (for P15 melters with a 

single-acting pump) 

1 

2 

3 







Part Numbers (contd.) 

ATS Retrofit Manifold and Ship-With Kit 

Part Number 

1125508 

1125500 

1125604 

Description 

Manifold Assembly with Flow Meter,12-Pin 

Cordset, ATS (for ATS retrofit direct-mount 

installations on a ProBlue melter) 

Manifold Assembly with Flow Meter,6-Pin 

Cordset, ATS (for ATS retrofit remotemount 

installations using a Blue Series 

hose at the manifold inlet ) 

Manifold Assembly with Flow Meter, 

Water-Wash Cordset, ATS (for ATS retrofit 

remote-mount installations using a waterwash 

hose at the manifold inlet) 

ATS Manifold Mounting Plates 

Item 

Part 

Number 

1 1125498 

2 1125504 

3 1125506 

Description 

Plate, External Manifold, PB10 & 

Remote, ATS (for direct-mounting on 

P10 and L14 melters and for all remotemount 

installations) 

Plate, External Manifold, PB4, ATS (for 

direct-mounting on all P4, P7, and L7 

melters) 

Plate, External Manifold, PB15, ATS (for 

direct-mounting on all P15, P30, and 

P50 melters) 

1 2 3 

NOTE: Remote-mount installations require additional hot melt hoses, 

fittings, and extension cables. 










Web Content 


Fulfill ® Retrofit Adhesive Fill System 

Description 

Easy to install and operate, retrofit kits bring 

automatic filling to any Nordson tank melter. 

A sensor monitors melter tank adhesive levels and 

signals the system to add small quantities of adhesive 

at needed intervals. 

Features 

• Robust and reliable industry standard capacitance sensor 

maximizes uptime 

• Easy push-button sensor calibration 

• Integrated audible siren 

• Quick-change visible filter 

• Automatic fill system shut-off in fault condition 

• Flexible output can be configured to notify the PLC that 

the fill system is enabled, power is on and the fill system 

does not have a fault 

Fulfill Retrofit on ProBlue Melter 

Benefits 

• Improves product quality and bond strength by maintaining consistent adhesive temperature, purity and bead volume 

• Maximizes plant operating efficiency by increasing maintenance cycle and parts life while minimizing char and pop-opens 

• Improves safety by preventing exposure to hot adhesives and surfaces 

• Reduces installation time and parent machine integration complexity by eliminating need for power drop on ProBlue® melters 

• Prevents manual overfilling and spilling, and reduces broken tank lids 

• Fits Nordson melters in virtually any production space or environment 

• Minimizes maintenance and downtime associated with adhesive char, degradation and contamination 




Fulfill ® Retrofit 

Adhesive Fill System 


Parameter 

Specification 

Fits Nordson melters ProBlue 4, 7, 10, 15, 30, 50 

Mesa 4, 6, 9, & 14 

DuraBlue & VersaBlue 25, 50 & 100 (VA & VT) 

DuraBlue & AltaBlue 10/16 

AltaBlue 30/50 (TS) 

FM 200 

Universal 


Pellets, pastilles, mini-slats, 

Maximum size 

• Pastilles: 12 mm (0.472 in) diameter 

Adhesive transfer maximum delivery rate 

Adhesive storage container 

Transfer hose length 


Air conditioning 

Operating air pressure - dynamic 

• Minimum Pressure 

• Maximum Pressure 

Operating air pressure - static 

• Maximum Pressure 

Inlet air connection 


Power cord 

Suction lance dimensions (optional) 

Dimensions 

Single-feed adhesive bin clearance 

Multi-feed adhesive bin clearance 

Storage container capacity (single-feed, 120L) 


Noise emissions 

• Mini-slats: 12 mm x 12 mm (0.472 x 0.472 in) in length 

275 kg/hr (600 lb/hr) dependent on adhesive type and air pressure 

See Adhesive Store Containder data sheet 

4 m (13 ft), 9 m (29.5 ft), 18 m (59 ft) 

• 17 CFM @ 3.4 bar to transfer 105.3 kg/hr 

(223.2 lb/hr) with 4m hose @ 4m rise 

• 22 CFM @ 4.1 bar to transfer 112.5 kg 

(248 lb/hr) with 9m hose @ 4m rise 

• 30 CFM @ 6.2 bar to transfer 90.7 kg/hr 

(200 lb/hr) with 18m hose @ 4m rise 

Dry, non-lubricated 

2.75 bar, (0.275 MPa or 40 psi) 

5.5 bar (0.55 MPa or 80 psi) 

6.9 bar (0.69 MPa or 100 psi) 

¼-in. NPT female 

¼-in. BSPP female 

G ¼ female 

100-240 single phase 

Customer supplied, 14-18 AWG 

(L) 615 mm x max (W) 105 mm 

(24.21 in. x max 4.14 in.) 

(W) 480 mm x (D) 554 mm x (H) 917 mm (19 x 22 x 36 in) 

(W) 688 mm x (D) 667 mm x (H) 1656 mm (26 x 27 x 65 in) 



IP54 

76 dBA 






Lid and Control Box Assemblies 

Part Number 

Description 

1122812 Kit, Fulfill Retro, Lid & Ctrl, ProBlue 4 





1123083 Kit, Fulfill Retro, Lid & Ctrl, Mesa4, G3 




1123041 Kit, Fulfill Retro, Lid & Ctrl, D10/16,Alta TT, G3 

1122919 Kit, Fulfill Retro, Lid & Ctrl, Versa/Dura 25 

1122964 Kit, Fulfill Retro, Lid & Ctrl, Dura/Versa 50 

1122981 Kit, Fulfill Retro, Lid & Ctrl, Versa/Dura 100 

1123341 Kit, Fulfill Retro, Lid & Ctrl, FM 200 

1123289 Kit, Fulfill Retro, Lid & Ctrl, Alta 30 / 50 

1123093 Kit, Fulfill Retro, Lid & Ctrl, XC 200 

1122800 Kit, Fulfill Retro, Lid & Ctrl, Universal, G3 

1506144 Kit, Fulfill Retro, Lid & Ctrl, Universal, Long, G3 


Part 

Description 

1121952 Container, Adh Storage, SF, G3 

1121953 Container, Adh Stoarge, MF, 2 Pump, G3 

1122081 Container, Adh Storage, MF, 4 Pump, G3 

Suction Lance 

NOTE: For use with large open tote. 

Part 

Description 

1122132 Kit, FF, Suction Lance, 4M Gray, G3 

1122763 Kit, FF, Suction Lance, 4M Clear, G3 






Fulfill ® Retrofit 

Adhesive Fill System 

Parts and Accessories (contd.) 

Pump Box Kits 

Part 

Description 

1123015 Kit, Pump Box, SF, G3 

1123149 Kit, Pump Box, MF, G3 

1123102 Kit, FF, Plexiglass, G3 

Transfer Hose and Pump 

Part Number 

Description 

1121967 Kit, FF, Hose & Pump W/ Harness, 4M Std 

1121954 Kit, FF, Hose & Pump W/ Harness, 4M Clear 

1121955 Kit, FF, Hose & Pump W/ Harness, 9M Clear 

1121956 Kit, FF, Hose & HF Pump W/ Harness, 18M Clear 

1124610 Kit, FF, Hose & Pump W/ Harness, 4M Std,QD, 

1124611 Kit, FF, Hose & Pump W/ Harness,4M Clear,QD, 

1124612 Kit, FF, Hose & Pump W/ Harness, 9M Clear,QD, 

1124614 Kit, FF, Hose & HF Pump W/ Harness,18M Clear,QD 

Sequencer (Multi-Feed) 

Part Number 

1122857 Kit, Sequencer-2 

1122923 Kit, Sequencer, QD-2 

1122858 Kit, Sequencer-4 

1122922 Kit, Sequencer, QD-4 

Description 

Accessories 

Part Number 

1122085 Kit, Grate, Adh Storage, 120L, Pellets 

1122086 Kit, Grate, Adh Storage, 240L, Pellets 

1122769 Kit, Grate, Adh Storage, 120L, Slats 

1122770 Kit, Grate, Adh Storage, 240L, Slats 

1122346 Kit, Air Flush, G3 

1124328 Kit, Air Flush, Multi, FF2 

1124430 Kit, Air Flush, Wand, Fulfill 

1123002 Kit, Pneum, 2 To 4 Feed Conv, Multi-Feed 

1121550 Kit, Adh Storage Container Lock 

1121806 Kit, Light Tower, Fulfill 

Description 




Web Content 



Models A4, A10, and A16 

Description 

Nordson AltaBlue TT melters feature variable speed AC 

motors with spur-gear pumps and key-to-line capability 

in a compact melter design. AltaBlue TT melters satisfy 

the need for an easy-to-operate,low-maintenance melter 

to precisely deliver a wide variety of hot melt adhesives. 

A tubular PTFE-coated tank eliminates dead corners 

and minimizes adhesive degradation. The versatile, fullfeature 

control panel offers a choice of programming 

methods using either the keypad or arrow keys and 

intuitively displays system status. 

Features 

• Easy to install 

• Provide easy day-to-day operation 

• Service indicators simplify maintenance scheduling 

• Variable speed pump control and RPM display provides keyto-line 

capability 

• Easy-to-use controls eliminate complicated programming 

• Status-at-a-glance indicators graphically display the status of 

the tank, hose and applicator 

• Large accessible tank opening allows easier filling and cleaning 

AltaBlue TT A4 & A10 Melters 








Filter type 

Parameter AltaBlue TT 4 AltaBlue TT 10 AltaBlue TT 16 

Tank with spur-gear pump 


Holding capacity kg (lb) 3.9 (8.6) 9.7 (21.4) 15.5 (34.1) 

Melt rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 4.7 (10.3) 7.7 (17) 11.2 (24.7) 

Throughput kg/hr (lb/hr) 1 6.3 (13.9) 12.5 (27.5) 20 (44) 

Pump rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 1 35 (77) 35 (77) or 50 (110) 35 (77) 





40-230°C (100-450°F) 

0-50°C (32-122°F) 

±0.5°C (1°F) 

75 bar/7.5 MPa (1100 psi) 

Hose/Applicator capacity (maximum) 2 2 or 4 

Maximum system power capacity 

@ 240 VAC 



Input/Output capability standard 2 

Electrical service 2 

3355W 

N/A 

key-to-line 

200 VAC single phase, 50/60 Hz 

200 to 240 VAC single phase, 

50/60 Hz 

3915 W 

5915 W 

4415 W 

6415 W 


3 standard outputs - programmable for function key-toline 

200 VAC 1 or 3 phase 50/60 Hz 

200 to 240 VAC 1 or 3 phase 50/60 Hz 380/415 VAC-Y 

(3 phase N/PE) 50/60 Hz 

Weight (empty) 42 kg (92 lb) 76 kg (168 lb) 80 kg (175 lb) 

Dimensions W x H x D mm 

(in.) 

Service envelope W x H x D mm 

(in.) 

334 x 478 x 552 

(13.1 x 18.8 x 21.7) 

537 x 623 x 908 

(21.1 x 24.5 x 35.7) 

441 x 649 x 620 

(17.4 x 25.5 x 24.4) 

644 x 861 x 1126 

(25.4 x 33.9 x 44.3) 

Approvals and certifications UL, CUL, CE, ISO 9001 

(1) 

Actual rates will vary depending on adhesive type, application parameters and input voltage. 

(2) 

Permitted deviation from rated line voltage is ±10%. 

441 x 649 x 620 

(17.4 x 25.5 x 24.4) 

644 x 861 x 1126 

(25.4 x 33.9 x 44.3) 





AltaBlue TT Melter Part Numbers 

Model A4 

Part Number 

Melter Type 

No. of 

Hose/Applicator 

Voltage Pump Size Pump Rate 

7401360 

0.3 1.4 kg/hr 

Standard 2 

1080774 200 

7.73 35 kg/hr 

1080776 PA 2 7.73 35 kg/hr 

7402329 W I/O 2 200 0.3 1.4kg/hr 

7407362 

0.15 0.7 kg/h4 

7401359 0.3 1.4 kg/hr 

1083408 Standard 2 240 

0.62 2.8 kg/hr 

1083409 1.86 8.5 kg/hr 

1077981 7.73 35 kg/hr 

1080775 PA 2 240 7.73 35 kg/hr 

7402328 


0.3 1.4 kg/hr 

7402326 W I/O 2 240 

0.62 2.8 kg/hr 

7402327 1.86 8.5 kg/hr 

7403639 Feinfruf Pump 2 240 0.16 0.8 kg/hr 


Model A10 

Part Number 

7403640 

Melter Type 

No. of 


Voltage Pump Size Pump Rate 

3.71 17 kg/hr 

1080779 2 

7.73 35 kg/hr 


1080791 7.73 35 kg/hr 

1080790 4 200 

7.73 35 kg/hr 

1080798 

7.73 35 kg/hr 

2 

1080800 PA 

7.73 50 kg/hr 

1080799 4 7.73 35 kg/hr 

1083420 

0.62 2.8 kg/hr 

1083421 1.86 8.5 kg/hr 

1077982 7.73 35 kg/hr 

1080778 2 

7.73 50 kg/hr 


7402029* 0.3 DS 1.4 kg/hr 

7402021* 240 

0.62 DS 2.8 kg/hr 

7402022* 1.86 DS 8.5 kg/hr 

1080777 4 7.73 35 kg/hr 

1080795 

7.73 35 kg/hr 

2 

1080797 PA 

7.73 50 kg/hr 

1080796 4 7.73 35 kg/hr 

*Dual stream pumps 






Model A16 

Part Number Melter Type No. of Hose/Applicator Voltage Pump Size Pump Rate 

1080793 

2 

7.73 35 kg/hr 


1080794 4 7.73 35 kg/hr 

200 

1080803 

2 7.73 35 kg/hr 

PA 

1080804 4 7.73 35 kg/hr 

1077983 

2 

7.73 35 kg/hr 

1080792 Standard 

4 240 

7.73 35 kg/hr 

7402701 2 1.86 8.5 kg/hr 

1080801 

2 

7.73 35 kg/hr 

PA 

240 

1080802 4 7.73 35 kg/hr 




Web Content 



Models 15, 30, and 50 Liter 

Description 

Nordson® AltaBlue touch series melters are designed 

for precise, demanding hot melt adhesive applications. 

A choice of metering spur-gear pumps with variable 

speed AC motors and key-to-line functionality satisfies 

a wide range of manufacturing requirements. A 

non-stick tank and reservoir design reduces adhesive 

degradation while maximizing adhesive throughput. 

The Optix user interface offers a color LCD 

touch screen for intuitive control. AltaBlue touch 

series melters enable pressure and flow monitoring 

and control through optional control boards. 

This integrated solution simplifies the system and 

reduces cost while providing a means for measuring 

and controlling material dispense rate in response 

to production rate changes. Through variation 

management, material consumption is reduced 

while product quality and production efficiency are 

enhanced. 

Features 

• Offer intuitive control via Optix user interface 

• Enable pressure and flow monitoring and control through an 

integrated option 

• Provide reliable day-to-day operation 

AltaBlue Touch Melter 

• Simplify routine maintenance 

• Maximize production up-time 

• Serve a broad range of industries 








Parameter AltaBlue 15 AltaBlue 30 AltaBlue 50 

Release-coated tank and reservoir Spur-gear pump with variable AC motor 

Holding capacity kg (lb) 14.5 (32) 29 (64) 47.5 (104.7) 

Melt rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 15 (33) 30 (66) 50 (110) 

Throughput kg/hr (lb/hr) 28 (62) 45 (99) 50 (110) 

Number of pumps 

1.4 

(1 & 2) 

Pump rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 

Filter type 





Hose/Applicator capacity 

(maximum) 


Electrical service (3) 


Up to 2 dual 

or single stream 

Up to 4 dual or 4 single stream 

to 82.1 kg/hr 

(3 to 180.6 lb/hr) 


40–230 °C (100–450 °F) 

-5–40 °C (23–104 °F) 

±1 °C (2 °F) 

85 bar/8.5 MPa (1233 psi) 

One single-stream manifold: 7 connections 

Two single-stream manifolds: 3 connections per pump stream 

Dual-stream manifold: 2 connections per pump stream 

3 standard outputs - programmable for function 


230 VAC 3 phase without neutral (Delta) 50/60 Hz 

400 VAC-Y (3 phase N/PE) with neutral (star-WYE) 50/60 Hz 



Maximum external power capaity - 

Maximum load per receptacle 

(2 channels) 

• 2/4/6/8 hose/applicator melters 

NOTE: Total external wattage 

must not exceed 12,000 W. 

1000 W, any single hose or applicator 

1200 W, any hose/applicator pair 

2000 W, sum of hose/applicator pairs 1 and 2 

2000 W, sum of hose applicator pairs 5 and 6 

2000 W, any single hose or applicator 3 and 4 

2000 W, any single hose or applicator 7 or 8 

2000 W, hose/applicator pair 3 or 4 

2000 W, hose/applicator pair 7 or 8 









Parameter AltaBlue 15 AltaBlue 30 AltaBlue 50 

Maximum system power capacity: 

400 VAC Delta 

480 VAC Delta 

400 VAC Star WYE 

• 1-2 pump, 2 hose/applicator 



• 2 pump, 8 hose/applicator 





230 VAC Delta 




• 2 pump, 8 hose/applicator 




Weight (empty) (4) 

• 2 pump 

• 4 pump 

Dimensions: W x H x D mm (in.) 

• 2 pump 

• 4 pump 

Service envelope 

WxHxD mm (in.) 

• 2 pump 

• 4 pump 

8,380 watts 

12,053 watts 

13,890 watts 

- 

- 

- 

- 

9,124 watts 

13,124 watts 

15,124 watts 

- 

- 

- 

- 

200 kg (440 lb) 

- 

9,482 watts 

13,155 watts 

14,992 watts 

23,166 watts 

18,684 watts 

20,521 watts 

24,194 watts 

10,324 watts 

14,324 watts 

16,324 watts 

25,224 watts 

20,344 watts 

22,344 watts 

26,344 watts 

225 kg (500 lb) 

440 kg (970 lb) 

525 x 1465 x 950 (20.7 x 57.7 x 37.4) 

950 x 1465 x 950 (37.4 x 57.7 x 37.4) 

2355 x 1465 x 2780 (92.7 x 57.7 x 109.5) 

2780 x 1465 x 2780 (109.5 x 57.7 x 109.5) 

Approvals and certifications CE, ISO 9001 

Protection 

IP33 

(1) 


(2) 

Range given is for maximum pump rate of various pumps available. 

(3) 


(4) 

Weight depends on melter confi guration. 

12,420 watts 

16,094 watts 

17,931 watts 

25,232 watts 

20,750 watts 

22,587 watts 

26,161 watts 

13,524 watts 

17,524 watts 

19,524 watts 

27,474 watts 

22,594 watts 

24,594 watts 

28,594 watts 

250 kg (550 lb) 

472 kg (1041 lb) 






AltaBlue Touch Configuration 

BASE MELTER 

OPTIONS 

Tank Capacity 

Voltage 

Pump 1 

Pump 2 

Pump 3 

Pump 4 

Hose/ Applicator 

Flow Control 

Reserved 

Low Level 

Indicator 

I/O Indicator 

LCD Cover 

Host 

Communication 

Return Port 

Motion Stitch 

Sensor Type 

Reserved 

AB - 030 3 B B B B 6 \ A X L Y X E X X N X X X 

Boxes 

1-2 

Box 

3 

Boxes 

4-6 

Box 

7 

Box 

8 

Box 

9 

Box 

10 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Box 

13 

Box 

14 

Box 

15 

Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Box 

19 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Boxes 

23-25 

Base Melter 

Boxes 

1-2 AltaBlue 

Description 

AltaBlue Touch Melter, 2 pump platform 

AltaBlue Touch Melter, 4 pump platform 

Boxes 

4-6 Tank Capacity 

Code 

AT 

AF 

Description 

Code 

15 liter 015 

30 liter 030 

50 liter 050 

NOTE: Max. 2 pumps on 15L. Max 4 pumps on 30 and 50L. Dual stream 

pumps not allowed in any position on 30/50L three and four pump melters. 

Box 

7 Voltage 

Description 

Code 

240 VAC 3P Delta without neutral 3 

380-415 VAC Wye 4 

400 VAC Delta* without neutral 5 

480 VAC Delta* without neutral 6 

*With integrated transformer, use 240V hoses and applicators 

Box 

12 Hose/Applicator Pairs 

Description 

Code 

2 Hose/Applicator pairs 2 



8 Hose/Applicator pairs (1) 8 

(1) 

Only available on 3 and 4-pump 30/50L configurations. 

Boxes 

8-11 Pumps 

Description 

Code 

SN0015 - 0.7 kg/hr (Single-stream) 

I 


A 


B 


C 

SN0093 - 4.5 kg/h (Single-stream) 

D 

SN0186 - 8.9 kg/h (Single-stream) 

E 


F 


G 


H 

SH0371 - 17.8 kg/hr (stainless-steel pump) 9 

SH0773 - 37.1 kg/hr (stainless-steel pump) 

Z 

DN0030 - 1.4 kg/hr/stream (Dual-stream) 2 






SF0016 - 0.8 kg/hr (Feinpruf single-stream) 

J 


K 


L 


M 


N 


O 

SF0240 - 11.9 kg/hr (Feinpruf single-stream) P 

SF0300 - 14.4 kg/hr (Feinpruf single-stream) Q 

SF0450 - 21.6 kg/hr (Feinpruf single-stream) R 

DF0016 - 0.8 kg/hr/stream (Feinpruf dual-stream) S 

DF0030 - 1.4 kg/hr/stream (Feinpruf dual-stream) T 

DF0060 - 2.9 kg/hr/stream (Feinpruf dual-stream) U 

DF0120 - 5.7 kg/hr/stream (Feinpruf dual-stream) V 

DF0175 - 8.4 kg/hr/stream (Feinpruf dual-stream) W 

DF0240 - 11.5 kg/hr/stream (Feinpruf dual-stream) Y 

None 







Options 

Box 

14 Flow Control 

Description 

Pneumatic Pressure Control Valve (1) 

Circulation Control Valve 

Manual Pneumac Pressure Control 

Flow Control Bypass 

Pressure Build 

Manual PCV 

(1) 

Max 2 SS pumps, DS pumps not allowed. 

Code 

A 

V 

M 

F 

N 

X 

Box 

19 

Host Communication 

Ethernet 

PROFIBUS 

DeviceNet 

None 

PROFINET 

Description 


Code 

E 

D 

V 

X 

N 

PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS & PROFINET International. 

Box 

16 Low Level Indicator 

Description 

Low Level Indicator 

None 

Code 

L 

X 

Box 

20 Return Port 

Description 

Code 

1 Hose Return Port R 

None 

X 

Box 

17 I/O Indicator 

Box 

21 Motion Switch 

Description 

Code 

Description 

Code 

Motion Switch 

M 

Optional I/O installed 

Y 

None 

X 

None 

X 

Box 

18 LCD Cover 

Box 

22 Sensor Type 

Description 

Code 

Description 

Code 

Ni-120 

N 

LCD Cover 

C 

PT100 

P 

None 

X 











Web Content 


Description 

Nordson DuraBlue melters feature fixed-speed AC 

motors with gerotor gear pumps for easy-to-operate, 

low-maintenance hot melt adhesive application. A 

PTFE coated tube tank eliminates dead corners and 

minimizes adhesive char. The versatile control panel 

offers a choice of programming methods using either 

a keypad or arrow keys. 

Features 

• Pump operation can be controlled by a hand-held 

applicator or a footswitch. 

• Large accessible tank opening allows easier filling and 

cleaner operation. 

• Status-at-a-glance indicators highlight: ready, fault, service 

and temperature status for tank, hose and applicator. 

• Simplified intuitive controls and service indicators require 

less user training and simplify maintenance scheduling. 

• Quick-disconnect style plugs and pneumatic hose/ 

applicator fittings provide quick and easy hook-up of 

components. 

• Disposable filter eliminates routine filter flushing. All 

major components are easily accessible from the front of 

the melter, and all major subsystems are easily replaced. 

• Easy-to-remove exterior panels provide quick and simple 

maintenance. 

• PTFE-coated tanks reduce char buildup and minimize 

clean up. 

DuraBlue 4 L System 






Reservoir type 

Pump type 

Parameter DuraBlue 4L DuraBlue 10L DuraBlue 16L 

Maximum pump rate per hour kg (lb)( 1 ) 22 (48) 

Tank 

Gerotor 

22 (48) 35 (77) 

50 (110) 50 (110) 

Melt rate kg/hr( 2 ) 4.7 (10.3) 7.7 (17) 11.2 (24.7) 

Throughput kg/hr( 2 ) 6.3 (13.9) 12.5 (27.5) 20 (44) 

Maximum hydraulic pressure( 3 ) 

Filter Type( 4 ) 

75 bar/7.5 MPa (1100 psi) 

Saturn ® basket‐style filter 

Holding capacity L (in. 3 ) 4 (244) 10 (610) 16 (973) 

kg (lb) 3.9 (8.6) 9.7 (21.4) 15.5 (34.1) 




Electrical service( 5 ) 

40-230°C (100-450°F) 

0-50°C (32-122°F) 

±0.5°C (1°F) 

120 VAC 1∅ 60 Hz 

200 to 240 VAC 1∅ 50/60 Hz 

Hose/Applicator capacity (maximum) 2 

Hose/Applicator power 120V 

Hose/Applicator power 240V 


• at 120 VAC 

• at 240 VAC 

2400 W 

3355 W 

500 W per channel 

600 W per pair 

1000 W per two pair (1 module) 


1200 W per pair 

2000 W per two pair (1 module) 

2400 W 

3915 W 

2400 W 

4415 W 

Weight (empty) 42 kg (92 lb) 76 kg (168 lb) 80 kg (175 lb) 


IPX3 

Dimensions W x H x D mm 334 x 478 x 552 441 x 649 x 620 

(in.) (13.1 x 18.8 x 21.7) (17.4 x 25.5 x 24.4) 

Approvals and certifications (6) CE, CUL, ISO 9001 

(1) 

Values shown for melter at 60 Hz. 

(2) 


(3) 

Maximum pressure varies by unit. 

(4) 

Filter not available on all melters. 

(5) 


(6) 

Certifications are not universal to all melters. Contact Nordson for more information on specific units. 






Part Numbers 

L Series 

Melter 

Model 

Hose/ 

Applicator 

Pump 

Rate 

kg/hr 

(lb/hr) (1) 

Maximum 

Hydraulic 

Pressure 

bar/MPa 

(psi) 

Viscosity 

(cps) 

4L (D4L) 2 22 (48) 75/7.5 (1100) < 30,000 

Filtered 

120V 1Ø 

60 Hz (2) 240V 1Ø 

50/60 Hz (3) 

PA (4) VITON PA (4) VITON 

Filter 1069732 1031747 1069733 1031750 

No Filter - - 1069734 - 

10L (D10L) 2 22 (48) 75/7.5 (1100) < 30,000 Filter - 1026752 1069735 1026754 

10L (D10L) 2 50 (110) 41/4.1 (600) < 10,000 No Filter - 1026753 1069736 1026755 

16L (D16L) 2 35 (77) 75/7.5 (1100) < 30,000 Filter - - 1069737 1031898 

16L (D16L) 2 50 (110) 41/4.1 (600) < 10,000 No Filter - 1026760 1069738 1026761 

(1) 

All pump rates are shown at 60 Hz power supply. Pump rates at 50 Hz are lower and equal to 83% of their listed value. 

(2) 

All 120V DuraBlue “L” melters include a power cord and U.S., style 20 amp plug. 

(3) 

All 200-240V DuraBlue “L“ melters include a power cord without a plug. Wiring color follow international standards. 

(4) 

Parts designated as “PA” are recommended for use in product assembly applications with operating temperatures greater than 191°C 

(375 °F). PA-type O-rings provide exceptionally high chemical and temperature resistance. 





DuraBlue 4L System Selection 

DuraBlue 4L Systems have a pump rate of 22 kg/hr (48 lb/hr), operate at 600 psi hydraulic pressure, and process 

adhesive with viscosity up to10,000 cps. Filters are not used with these units. The table below shows the system 

unit numbers according to available voltage and hose/applicator combination. 

Description 

120V 1Ø 200V 1Ø 240V 1Ø 

60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 

L6 Hand-held Applicator, Extrusion 

L6 Hand-Held Applicator/Hose Assembly, 1.5 m (6 Ft) — — 1030231 

L6 Hand-Held Applicator/Hose Assembly, 3 m (10 Ft) 1031137 — 1030230 

AD-41 Hand-held Applicator, Extrusion (DuraBraid hose) 

Ad-41 Hand-held Applicator/Hp Hose Assembly, 2.4 m (8 Ft), 1mm (0.04 In.) 1030162 1031165 1030210 



AD-41 Hand-held Applicator, Swirl Adapter and Air Control Kit (DuraBraid hose) 

AD-41 Hand-held Applicator/Hp Hose Assembly, 2.4 m (8 ft), 1mm (0.04 in.) wide 

pattern CF 

1030165 1031168 1030213 

AD-41 Hand-held Applicator/Hp Hose Assembly, 3.6 m (12 Ft), 1mm (0.04 In.) 

Wide Pattern Cf 

1030166 1031169 1030214 

AD-41 Hand-held Applicator/Hp Hose Assembly, 4.8 m (16 ft), 1mm (0.04 in.) 

wide pattern CF 

1030167 1031170 1030215 

AD-31 Hand-held Applicator, Extrusion (DuraBraid hose) 

AD-31 Hand-held Applicator/Hp Hose Assembly, 2.4 m (8 ft), 

1.5 mm (0.06 in.) extended 

1040160 1044264 1044261 



1041161 1044265 1044262 



1040162 1044266 1044263 

Non-Coated Tank, AD-31 Hand-held Applicator, Extrusion (DuraBraid hose) 

AD-31 Hand-held Applicator/Hose Assembly, 2.4 m (8 ft), 


1042781 — — 



1042782 — — 



1042783 — — 

NOTES: 

All 120V DuraBlue 4 L Systems include a power cord. 

All 200V and 240V systems include a power cord without a plug. Wire colors follow international standards. 

Check total external wattage limitation before adding second hand-held applicator/hose assembly to DuraBlue 4L 120V units. 

The pump rate listed is for 60 Hz power supply. The pump rate at 50 HZ is lower and equal to 83% of the value shown. Processing 

adhesives with viscosities higher than the stated limit may reduce melter performance. 






DuraBlue 4L System Applicator and Hose Part Numbers 

Use the table below to order extra or spare Hose/Applicator combinations. 

Hand-held Applicator/Hose Assemblies and Manifold Mount Applicators 120V 240V 200V 

L6 Hand-held Applicator/Hose Assembly, 1.5 m (6 ft) — 1027445 — 

L6 Hand-held Applicator/Hose Assembly, 3 m (10 ft) 1027442 1027443 — 

AD-41 Hand-held Applicator/Hp Hose Assembly, 2.4 m (8 ft), 1 mm (0.04 in.) orifice diameter 1030220 1030225 1031160 

AD-41 Hand-held Applicator/Hp Hose Assembly, 3.6 m (12 ft), 1 mm (0.04 in.) orifice diameter 1030221 1030226 1031161 

AD-41 Hand-held Applicator/Hp Hose Assembly, 4.8 M (16 Ft), 1 Mm (0.04 In.) orifice diameter 1030222 1030227 1031162 

AD-31 Hand-held Applicator/Hp Hose Assembly, 2.4 m (8 ft), 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) orifice diameter 1040109 1044255 1044258 













Web Content 

Description 

DuraBlue large capacity adhesive melters are designed for 

simple, low-maintenance hot melt adhesive applications. 

Production flexibility is provided by a high-output gerotor 

pump with a choice of preset speed for the AC motors. 

The grid and reservoir tank design reduces adhesive 

degradation while maximizing adhesive throughput. An 

optional unheated hopper can double holding capacity to 

minimize refilling frequency. The simple, versatile control 

panel offers a choice of programming methods, using either 

the keypad or arrow keys. 

Features 

• Large, accessible tank opening allows for easier filling and cleaning. 

• Pump shut-off valve and single tool removal provide quick, easy pump 

replacement. 

• Quick plug-in hose/applicator pairs provide easy installation and 

replacement of equipment. 

• Status-at-a-glance indicators graphically display the tank, hose and 

applicator status. 

• Easy installation and day-to-day operation. 

• Easy-open panels make access to melter components quick. 

DuraBlue 50 Melter 




DuraBlue ® Large Capacity 


Parameter D25 D25H D50 D100 


Grid/Reservoir 

and Hopper 

Grid/Reservoir 

and Extended 

Hopper 

Grid/Reservoir and Hopper 

Pump type High Output Gerotor Spur Gear 

Number of pumps 1 1 or 2 

Pump size cc/rev 11.7 17.10/pump 

Maximum pump rate per hour kg (lb) 35, 45, or 90 (77, 99, or 198) 

50, 65, or 130 

(110, 143, or 286) 

Melt rate kg/hr (lb/hr) (1) 25 (55) 50 (110) 100 (202) 

Throughput kg/hr (lb/hr) (1) 37.5 (82.5) 75 (165) 135 (297) 

Holding capacity L (in 3 ) 

kg (lb) 

25 (1526) 

24.3 (53.4) 

50 (3051) 

48.5 (107) 

100 (6102) 

97 (213) 


40-230 °C (100-450 °F) 


0-50 °C (32-122 °F) 



±0.5 °C (1 °F) 

200 VAC 3∅ 50/60 Hz (2) 

200-240 VAC 3∅ 50/60 Hz 

380-415 VAC-Y (3∅ NP/E) 50/60 Hz 

400 VAC 3∅ 50/60 Hz (2) 

480 VAC 3∅ 50/60 Hz (2) 

Hose/applicator pairs 6 

Hose/applicator power 




1200 W per pair 2000 W per two pair (1 module) 

3 STD Outputs - programmable for function 

4 STD Inputs - programmable for function 

Hydraulic connections 6 

Maximum melter power 11,250 17,275 25,890 

Weight kg (lb) (empty) 195 (429) 210 (462) 245 (548) 330 (725) 


IP54 

Dimensions W x H x D mm 

(in.) 

885 x 1050 x 400 

(34.8 x 41.3 x 15.7) 

1000 x 1382 x 782 

(39.4 x 54.4 x 30.8) 

Approvals and certifications CE, CUL, UL, ISO 9001 

1100 x 1382 x 1035 

(43.3 x 54.4 x 40.8) 

(1) 

Rates depend on adhesive characteristics. 

(2) 

With integrated transformer, use 240V hoses and applicators. 






Part Numbers 

Model 

Number 

of 

Pumps 

D25 1 

Hose/ 

Applicator 

Pairs 

Pump Rate (per Pump) 

200-240V 

200V 

50/60Hz (1) 50/60 Hz 

Delta 3Ø Delta 3Ø 

380-415V 

Wye 

(3Ø N/PE) 

50/60 Hz 

400V 3Ø 

50/60 Hz (1) 480V 3Ø 

50/60 Hz (1) 

8144911 8144912 8144913 8144914 8144915 

D25H 1 35, 45, or 90 kg/hr 8144916 8144917 8144918 8144919 8144920 

1 (77, 99, or 198 lb/hr) 8144921 8144922 8144923 8144924 8144925 

D50 

6 

2 8144926 8144927 8144928 8144929 8144930 

D100 

1 50, 65, or 130 kg/hr 8144931 8144932 8144933 8144934 8144935 

2 (110, 143, or 286 lb/hr) 8144936 8144937 8144938 8144939 8144940 

Open Wheel Pot Filling - 2 Hose/Applicator, 24VDC P/S, Relays for Reversing Outputs if Desired 

D25 

35, 45, or 90 kg/hr 8144943 8144944 8144942 8144945 8144946 

D50 

1 2 

(77, 99, or 198 lb/hr) 8144947 8144948 8144949 8144950 8144951 

D100 

50, 65, or 130 kg/hr 

(110, 143, or 286 lb/hr) 

8144952 8144953 8144954 8144955 8144956 

Beverage - Ethernet Controlled Run-Up (Ethernet, Analog I/O, I/P Transducer, Pneumatic PCV) 

D25 

- 8144957 8144960 - 8144961 

35, 45, or 90 kg/hr 

D25H 1 6 

- 8144963 8144964 - 8144962 

(77, 99, or 198 lb/hr) 

D50 - 8144965 8144966 - 8144959 

Beverage - Run-Up (I/P Transducer, Pneumatic PCV) 

D25 

- 8069472 - - 8144967 

35, 45, or 90 kg/hr 

D25H 1 6 

- 8144968 - - 8144958 

(77, 99, or 198 lb/hr) 

D50 - 8144971 - - 8076853 

(1) 

With integrated transformer, use 240V hoses and applicators. 










Web Content 



Description 

Nordson VersaBlue Plus series melters are designed for 

precise, demanding hot melt adhesive applications. 

A choice of up to four single-stream or four dualstream 

metering spur-gear pumps with variable- speed 

AC motors satisfies a wide range of manufacturing 

requirements. A grid and reservoir tank design reduces 

adhesive degradation while maximizing adhesive 

throughput. A powerful industrial PC provides full 

control of the adhesive system via a touch-screen 

interface. 

The “Plus” of the VersaBlue Plus melters are the 

optional melter-integrated: 

• flow monitoring and closed-loop control 

• closed-loop pattern control 

• module response monitoring 

“Plus” Benefits with IPC Control 

• Automatic adjustment of material flow and pattern to meet 

established customer requirements. 

• Easy system integration using Nordson TruFlow products 

and/or OptiStroke needle stroke detection. 

• Simplify set-up, operation and monitoring of pattern and flow 

control with intuitive, easy-to-use touch screen interface. 

• Basic monitoring and reporting on melter display; more 

detailed information can be exported to a laptop or via field 

bus. 

• Optimized hydraulic section for improved response and 

automated pressure relief at machine stop. 

• Integrated control of external metering devices reduce system 

complexity. 

Features 

VersaBlue Plus 50 Melter 

• Install quickly and easily 



• Maximize uptime 

• Graphical, touch-screen system control with status of melter, 

flow and/or pattern control 

• Large, accessible tank opening allows easier filling and cleaning 

• Entry panels make access to melter components quick and easy 

• Pump shut-off valve and single-tool removal provide quick, 

easy pump replacement 







Parameter 

Configuration VB/VW VC/VX VD/VY VE/VZ 


Pump type 

V25 

Release-coated grid and reservoir 

Spur gear pump with variable AC motor 

Tank volume L (in 3 ) 25 (1526) 

Holding capacity kg (lb) 23.8 (53.4) 

Pump rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 1 & 2 1.4 to 82.1 (3 to 181) 

Filter type 

Saturn ® basket-style filter 

Melt rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 25 (55) 

Throughput kg/hr (lb/hr) 37 (81.4) 

Max. hydraulic pressure 

Max. number of pumps 

85 bar/ 8.5 MPa (1230 psi) 

Up to 4 single stream OR 4 dual stream 

Number of hose/applicator capacity 2, 4, 6, or 8 






10280 watts 

13880 watts 

17480 watts 

21080 watts 

Electrical service 4 50/60 Hz (V) 

3/PE AC 200 5 

3/PE AC 200-240 

3/N/PE AC 380-415 Y 

3/PE AC 400 5 

3/PE AC 480 5 

Input/Output capability 

TruFlow control 

Closed-loop pattern control 

Module response monitoring 

External metering devices 

Maximum pressure sensors 6 

Melter dimensions W x H x D mm (in.) 

Installation dimensions W x H x D mm (in.) 

9 outputs/13 inputs 

Up to 4 channels 



Up to 4 combined internal & external controllers 

8 internal 

1100 x 1382 x 1035 (43.3 x 54.4 x 40.8) 

2699 x 1205 x 1281 106.3 x 61.6 x 50.4) 

Weight 3 , empty kg (lb) 265 (584) 


Operating temperature range 


0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) 

40 to 230 °C (100 to 450 °F) 

± 1 °C (2 °F) 

Enclosure rating IP 54 

Approvals 

CE, UL 

(1) 

Actual rates will vary depending on adhesive type, application parameters 

and input voltage. 

(2) 


(3) 

Weight depends on melter configuraton. 

(4) 

Permitted deviation from rated line voltage is ± 10%. 

(5) 

With integrated transformer, use 240V applicators and hoses. 

(6) Up to 8 external sensors optional. 

Casters optional, PROFIBUS, PROFINET, ControlNet and Ethernet I/P 

optional. 

PROFIBUS and PROFINET are registered trademarks of PROFIBUS & 

PROFINET International. 

ControlNet and ControlLogix are registered trademarks of Rockwell 

Automation., Inc. 







Parameter V50 V100 

Configuration VB/VW VC/VX VD/VY VE/VZ VD/VY VE/VZ 


Pump type 


Spur gear pump with variable AC motor 

Tank volume L (in 3 ) 50 (3051) 100 (6102) 

Holding capacity kg (lb) 48.5 (107) 97 (213) 

Pump rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 1 & 2 1.4 to 82.1 (3 to 181) 

Filter type 


Melt rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 50 (110.2) 100 (220) 

Throughput kg/hr (lb/hr) 75 (165.4) 150 (330) 


Max. number of pumps: 

85 bar/8.5 MPa (1230 psi) 

Up to 4 single streem OR 4 dual stream 

Number of hose/applicator capacity 2, 4, 6, or 8 






15605 watts 

19205 watts 

22805 watts 

26405 watts 

20740 watts 

27940 watts 

31540 watts 

35140 watts 

Electrical service 4 50/60 Hz (V) 

3/PE AC 200 5 

3/PE AC 200-240 

3/N/PE AC 380-415 Y 

3/PE AC 400 5 

3/PE AC 480 5 


TruFlow control 

Closed-loop pattern control 

Module response monitoring 

External metering devices 

Maximum pressure sensors 6 

Dimensions W x H x D mm (in.) 

Installation dimensions W x H x D mm (in.) 





Up to 4 combined internal & external controllers 

8 internal 

1100 x 1382 x 1035 (43.3 x 54.4 x 40.8) 

2699 x 1788 x 1281 106.3 x 70.4 x 50.4) 

Weight 3 , empty kg (lb) 290 (639) 360 (794) 




0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) 

40 to 230 °C (100 to 450 °F) 

± 1 °C (2 °F) 


Approvals 

CE, UL 

(1) 

Actual rates will vary depending on adhesive type, application 

parameters and input voltage. 

(2) 


(3) 

Weight depends on melter configuraton. 

(4) 

Permitted deviation from rated line voltage is ± 10%. 

(5) 

With integrated transformer, use 240V applicators and hoses. 


Casters optional, PROFIBUS, PROFINET, ControlNet and Ethernet I/P 

optional. 

PROFIBUS and PROFINET are a registered trademarks of PROFIBUS & 


Allen-Bradley, ControlNet and ControlLogix are registered trademarks of 

Rockwell Automation., Inc. 






VersaBlue Plus Configuration 

BASE MELTER 

Melter Type Melter Capacity Separator 

Voltage 

Pump 1 

Pump 2 

Pump 3 

Pump 4 

Hose/ 

Applicator 

/ 

100 - L A B C D 4 / 

Boxes 1-2 Boxes 3-5 Box 6 Box 7 Box 8 Box 9 Box 10 Box 11 Box 12 Box 12 

Base Melter 

Boxes 

1-2 

Boxes 

3-5 

Box 

6 

Box 

7 

Melter Type 

Description 

Ni-120, Max:4-SS, 6 Hose/Applicator, IPC 

Ni-120, Max: 2-SS/DS, 6 Hose/Applicator, IPC 

Ni-120, Max: 4-SS, 8 Hose/Applicator, IPC/PLC 

Ni-120, Max: 3/4-SS/DS, 8 Hose/Applicator, IPC/PLC 

Pt100, Max: 4-SS, 6 Hose/Applicator, IPC 

Pt100, Max: 2-SS/DS, 6 Hose/Applicator, IPC 

Pt100, Max: 4-SS, 8 Hose/Applicator, IPC/PLC 

Pt100, Max: 3/4-SS/DS, 8 Hose/Applicator, IPC/PLC 

Melter Capacity 

Code 

VB 

VC 

VD 

VE 

VW 

VX 

VY 

VZ 

Description 

Code 

12 liter (26 lb) 012 

25 liter (55 lb) 025 

25 liter (55 lb) + Hopper 25H 

50 liter (110 lb) 050 


100 liter (220 lb) 100 


Separator 

Description 

Standard configurable melter - 

Engineered melter *** 

*** For clarification purposes only 

Voltage 

Code 

Description 

Code 

230V 1 Phase 1 

200V 3 Phase Delta 2 


400V 3 Phase WYE 4 



E 

Boxes 

8-11 

Pumps (1) 

Description 

Code 

SN0030 - 1.4 kg/hr 

A 

SN0046 - 2.2 kg/hr 

B 

SN0062 - 2.9 kg/hr 

C 

SN0093 - 4.5 kg/hr 

D 

SN0186 - 8.9 kg/h 

E 

SN0371 - 17.8 kg/hr 

F 

SN0773 - 37.1 kg/hr 

G 

SN1710 - 82.1 kg/hr 

H 

SH0371 - 17.8 kg/hr 9 

SH0773 - 37.1 kg/hr 

Z 

DN0030 - 1.4 kg/hr/stream 2 






SF0016 - 0.8 kg/hr 

J 

SF0030 - 1.4 kg/hr 

K 

SF0060 - 2.9 kg/hr 

L 

SF0090 - 4.3 kg/hr 

M 

SF0120 - 5.7 kg/hr 

N 

SF0175 - 8.4 kg/hr 

O 

SF0240 - ll.9 kg/hr 

P 

SF0300 - 14.4 kg/hr 

Q 

SF0450 - 21.6 kg/hr 

R 

SF1000 - 48.0 kg/h 1 

DF0016 - 0.8 kg/hr/stream 

S 


T 


U 


V 


W 


Y 

GN1160 - 11.5 kg/hr/stream 8 

External Motor % 

None 

X 

(1) 

Nordson (SN/DN) pumps cannot be combined with Feinpruf (SF/DF) 

pumps. 

Box 

12 

Hose/Applicator Pairs 

Description 

Code 

2 Hose/Applicator Pairs 2 










OPTIONS 

Flow Control 

Int. Pressure 

Indication 

Level Control 

Light Tower 

Main Switch 

Host 

Communications 

Key-to-Line 

Casters 

Enert Gas 

Filter Selection 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Drain Valve 

Ext. Pressure 

Indicator 

Heat Exchanger 

Motion 

Switch 

Applicator 

Solenoid Control 

ACM 

PLC 

TruFlow 

Safe Torque Off 

Reserved 

Box 

14 

Box 

15 

Options 

Box 

14 

Box 

15 

Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Flow Control 

Description 

Automatic Pneumatic Pressure Control 

Manual Pneumatic Pressure Control 


IPI w/ Output Pressure Control per Drive 

Automatic Flow control w. Min.-Speed 

Automatic Flow control 

Box 

19 

Pressure Build Up (Airless Pressure Control) 

Pressure Build Up With OPC 

Pressure Build Up with OPC & Pressure Relief 

Safety Valve With Indication Only (PCV plugged) 

None (Standard Manual Pressure Control) 

Internal Pressure Indication 

Description 

Internal Pressure Indication (IPI) 

None 

Level Monitoring 

Level Control 

Description 

Level Control w/ Bulk Feed Lid Ni-120) 

Level Control w/ Bulk Feed Lid 

(Ni-120) + Overfill Protection 

Level Control w/ Bulk Feed Lid (PT100) 

Level Control w/ Bulk Feed Lid (PT100) + 

Overfill Protection 

Level Monitoring, fixed measuring points 

None 

Light Tower 

None 

Light Tower 

Description 

Main Switch 

Box 

20 

Code 

P 

M 

F 

C 

T 

B 

N 

H 

K 

O 

X 

Code 

A 

X 

Code 

L 

B 

P 

C 

D 

F 

X 

Code 

W 

X 

Description 

Code 

Switch Red - 4 Pole 1 

Main Switch Black - 3 Pole 2 


None (Standard Main Switch Red - 3 Pole) X 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

X X X X 

Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box 

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 

Box 

19 

Host Communications 

Description 

Code 

PROFIBUS-DP with PMI 

D 

ControlNet with PMI 

N 

1 

Ethernet /IP with PMI E 

PROFINET IO with PMI 

p 

None 

X 

1 

Contact NWSG Marketing for availability 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Boxes 

24-26 

Box 

27* 

Key-to-lLne 

Description 

Key-to-Line per Drive (separate connectors) 

None (Standard Key-to-Line) 

Casters 

None 

Inert Gas 

None 

Casters 

Description 

Inert Gas 

Description 


Description 

0.8mm Filter with 85 bar safety valve 




Standard (0.2mm Filter w. 85 bar safety valve) 

Reserved 

Drain Valve 

None 

Reserved 

Description 

Drain Valve 

Description 

Code 

K 

X 

Code 

C 

X 

Code 

G 

X 

Code 

C 

D 

G 

H 

X 

Code 

X 

Code 

D 

X 

Box 

28* 

External Pressure Indicator 

Description 

Code 

External Pressure Indicator Inputs # 

None 

X 

*Options 27 to 34 are available on NW configurations only. 

Box 

29* 

Box 

30* 

Box 

31* 


None 

Motion Switch 

None 


Description 

Motion Switch 

Description 

Applicator Solenoid Control / Pattern Control 

Code 

E 

X 

Code 

M 

X 

Description 

Code 

Applicator Solenoid Control 

G 

2 Pattern Control Channels 2 




None 

X 

Box 

32* 

ACM 

Description 

Code 

ACM Connectivity 1 

None 

X 

Box 

PLC(1) 

33* 

Description 

A-B ControlLogix w/ ControlNet & PanelView 

600+ 

A-B ControlLogix w/ Ethernet and PanelView 

600+ 

None 

Box 

34* 

Box 

35 

Box 

36 

TruFlow 

Code 

Description 

Code 

1 TruFlow Channel 1 

2 TruFlow Channels 2 

4 TruFlow Channels 4 

Reserved 

X 

Terminal Block 

Ethernet I/P 

None 

Reserved 


Description 

Reserved 

Description 

B 

C 

X 

Code 

T 

E 

X 

Code 

X 












Web Content 

Description 

Models V12, V25, V50, and V100 Liter 

Nordson VersaBlue melters are designed for precise, 

demanding hot melt adhesive applications. A choice 

of metering spur-gear pumps with variable-speed 

AC motors satisfies a wide range of manufacturing 

requirements. A grid and reservoir tank design reduces 


throughput. A powerful industrial PC provides full 

control of the adhesive system via a touch-screen 

interface. 

Features: 





• Serve a broad range of industries 

VersaBlue V50 Melter 






Specifications: V12 and V25 Melters 




Spur-gear pump with variable speed AC motor 

Number of Pumps 1 or 2 

Maximum Pump Rate 1 & 3 

1.4 to 82 kg/hr (3 to 181 lb/hr) 

Filter Type Saturn ® basket-style filter 


Operating Temperature Range 4 

85 bars/8.5 MPa (1230 psi) 

40 to 230 °C (100 to 450 °F) 

Ambient Temperature Range 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) 

Temperature Control Stability ±1 °C (2 °F) 

Electrical Service 5 240 VAC 1 phase 50/60 Hz 6 

200 VAC 3 phase 50/60 Hz 7 

200 to 240 VAC 3 phase 50/60 Hz 

380 to 415 VAC-Y (3 phase N/PE) 50/60 Hz 

400 VAC 3 phase 50/60 Hz 7 

Maximum System Power Capacity 




6960 watts 

10560 watts 

14160 watts 

480 VAC 3 phase 50/60 Hz 7 

Input/Output Capability (Standard) 

7 outputs; 10 inputs 

Maximum Pressure Sensors 2 

Melter dimensions (W x H x D) 

Installation Dimensions (W x H x D) 

885 x 1382 x 582 mm 

(34.8 x 54.4 x 22.9 in) 

1445 x 1382 x 831 mm 

(56.9 x 54.4 x 32.7 in) 

Protection IP54 

9610 watts 

13210 watts 

16810 watts 

Holding Capacity 

Throughput (per hour) 

Melt Rate (per hour) 

Weight (empty) 2 

Number of Applicators 

12 L (732 in 3 ) / 11.6 kg (25.6 lb) 

1 18 kg (39.6 lb) 

1 14 kg (30.8 lb) 

190 kg (418 lb) 

2, 4 or 6 

25 L (1526 in 3 ) / 24.3 kg (53.4 lb) 

40 kg (88 lb) 

25 kg (55 lb) 

225 kg (495 lb) 

2, 4 or 6 

1 



2 

Weight depends on melter configuration. 

3 

Range given is for maximum pump rate of various pumps 

available. 

4 

High temperature unit available with operating range of 40 to 

250 °C (100 to 480 °F). 

5 


Casters optional. 

PROFIBUS and Ethernet I/P optional. 

PROFIBUS is a registered trademarks of PROFIBUS & PROFINET 

International. 

6 

12-liter melter only; there are hose/gun pair capacity restrictions. 

7 

With integrated transformer. 





Specifications: V50 and V100 Melters 





Spur-gear pump with variable speed AC motor 


Maximum Pump Rate 1 & 2 

1.4 to 82 kg/hr (3 to 180 lb/hr) 

Filter Type Saturn basket-style filter 


Operating Temperature Range 3 

85 bars/8.5 MPa (1230 psi) 

40 to 230 °C (100 to 450 °F) 

Ambient Temperature Range 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) 

Temperature Control Stability ±1 °C (2 °F) 

Electrical Service 4 200 VAC 3 phase 50/60 Hz 5 

200 to 240 VAC 3 phase 50/60 Hz 


400 VAC 3 phase 50/60 Hz 5 

480 VAC 3 phase 50/60 Hz 5 







Input/Output Capability (Standard) 

14875 watts 

18475 watts 

22075 watts 

N/A 

7 outputs; 10 inputs 

Maximum Pressure Sensors 2 

Melter dimensions (W x H x D) 

Installation Dimensions (W x H x D) 

1000 x 1382 x 782 mm 

(39.4 x 54.4 x 30.8 in) 

1760 x 1661 x 1125 mm 

(69.3 x 65.4 x 44.3 in) 

Protection IP54 

23490 watts 

27090 watts 

30690 watts 

34290 watts 

1100 x 1382 x 1035 mm 

(43.3 x 54.4 x 40.8 in) 

2111 x 1565 x 1496 mm 

(83.1 x 61.6 x 58.9 in) 


Throughput (per hour) 1 

Melt Rate (per hour) 1 


Number of Applicators 

50 L (3051 in 3 ) / 48.5 kg (106.7 lb) 

75 kg (165 lb) 

50 kg (110 lb) 

275 kg (606 lbs) 

2, 4, or 6 

100 L (6102 in 3 ) / 97.0 kg (213.4 lb) 

150 kg (330 lb) 

100 kg (220 lb) 

360 kg (798 lb) 

2, 4, 6 or 8 

1 



2 

Range given is for maximum pump rate of various pumps 

available. 

3 

High temperature unit available with operating range of 40 to 

250°C (100 to 480°F). 

4 


Casters optional. 

PROFIBUS and Ethernet I/P optional. 

PROFIBUS is a registered trademarks of PROFIBUS & PROFINET 


5 

With integrated transformer. 

6 







VersaBlue Melter Configuration 

BASE MELTER 

OPTIONS 

Melter Type 


Voltage 

Pump 1 

Pump 2 

Reserved 


Pairs 

Flow Control 

Inter. Pressure 

Indication 

Level Control 

Ligjt Tower 

Main Switch 

Host 

Communication 

Key-to-Linet 

Casters 

Inert Gas 

Filter and Safety 

Valve 

N/A 

Boxes 

1-2 

Boxes 

3-5 

- X \ X X X 

Box Box Box Box Boxes Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Boxes 

6 7 8 9 10-11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24-26 

Box 

1-2 

Box 

3-5 

Melter Type 

Description 

Standard Ni-120, 40-230 °C (100-450 °F) 

High-Temp., PT100, 40-250 °C (100-480 °F) 

Code 

VA 

VT 


Description 

Code 

12 L - 11.6 kg (25.3 lb) 012 

25 L - 24.3 kg (53.4 lb) 025 

50 L - 48.5 kg (107 lb) 050 

100 L - 97 kg (213 lb) 100 

Box 

8-9 

Pumps (1) 

Description 

Code 

SN0030 - 1.4 kg/hr (3.1 lb/hr) 

A 

SN0046 - 2.2 kg/hr (4.9 lb/hr) 

SN0062 - 2.9 kg/hr (6.5 lb/hr) 

C 

SN0093 - 4.5 kg/hr (9.8 lb/hr) 

D 

SN0186 - 8.9 kg/hr (19.6 lb/hr) 

E 

SN0371 - 17.8 kg/hr (39.2 lb/hr) 

F 

SN0073 - 37.1 kg/hr (81.6 lb/hr) 

G 

SN1710 - 82.1 kg/hr (180 lb/hr)(2) 

H 

SH0371 - 17.8 kg/hr (39.2 lb/hr) (hardened) 9 

SH0773 - 37.1 kg/hr (81.6 lb/hr) (hardened) Z 

None 

X 

Box 

7 

Voltage 

Description 

Code 

200-240V 1∅ 50/60 Hz (V12 only) 1 

200V 3∅ 50/60 Hz 

(integrated transformer) 

2 

200-240V 3∅ 50/60 Hz 3 

380-415V-Y 3∅ 50/60 Hz 4 

400V 3∅ 50/60 Hz 


5 

480V 3∅ 50/60 Hz 


6 

Box 

12 

Box 

14 


Description 

Code 


4 Hose/Applicator Pairs (3∅ only) 4 

6 Hose/Applicator Pairs (3∅ only) 6 

8 Hose/Applicator Pairs (100 L only) 8 

Flow Control (3) 

Description 

Automatic Pneumatic Pressure Control, 

KBV flow control 

Manual Pneumatic Pressure Control, KBV 

flow control 


Output Pressure Control, KBV flow control, 

requires IPI option, Box 15 

Pressure build-up (APC), requires IPI 

option, Box 15 

None 

Code 

P 

M 

F 

C 

E 

X 







Box 

15 

Internal Pressure Indication (3) 

Description 


None 

(1) 

Refer to the following page for pump specifications. 

(2) 

Not available with V12 units. 

Code 

A 

X 

Box 

19 


Description 


Ethernet/IP with PMI 

PROFINET IO with PMI 

None 

Code 

D 

E 

P 

X 

(3) 

Per pump. 

Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Level Control 

Description 


Level Control with Bulk Feed Lid 

Level Control with Bulk Feed Lid and 

Secondary Overfill Protection 

None 

Light Tower 

None 

Light Tower 

Description 

Main Switch 

Code 

L 

B 

P 

X 

Code 

W 

X 

Description 

Code 

Red - 4 Pole 1 

Black - 3 Pole 2 

Black - 4 Pole 3 

None (Standard Main Switch Red - 3 Pole) X 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Key-to-Line 

Description 

Key-to-Line per Drive 

(50 and 100 L only) 

None 

Casters 

None 

Inert Gas 

None 

Casters 

Description 

Inert Gas 

Description 

Filter and Safety Valve 

Code 

K 

X 

Code 

C 

X 

Code 

G 

X 

Description 

Code 

0.8 mm filter 85 bar (1235 psi) C 

0.2 mm filter 100 bar (1450 psi) D 

0.8 mm filter 100 bar (1450 psi) G 

0.2 mm filter 85 bar (1235 psi) X 

PROFIBUS and PROFINET are a registered trademarks of 

PROFIBUS & PROFINET International. 

Pump Selection 

Description SN0030 SN0062 SN0093 SN0186 SN0371 SN0773 SN1710 (1) 

Pump Size cc/rev 0.3 0.62 0.93 1.86 3.71 7.73 17.1 

Pump Rate kg/hr 1.4 2.9 4.5 8.9 17.8 37.1 82.1 

(lb/hr) (3.1) (6.5) (9.8) (19.6) (39.2) (81.6) (180) 

(1) 

Not available in V12. 










Web Content 



12, 25, and 50 Liter 

Description 

VersaBlue N Series melters are designed for precise, 

demanding hot melt adhesive applications. The 

VersaBlue N Series melters are available in a standard 

footprint as well as an expanded footprint that provides 

additional holding and pumping capabilities. A choice 

of up to four single-stream or dual-stream metering 

spur-gear pumps with variable-speed AC motors satisfies 

a wide range of manufacturing requirements. A grid and 

reservoir tank design reduces adhesive degradation while 

maximizing adhesive throughput. A powerful industrial 

PC provides full control of the adhesive system via a 

touch screen interface. 

Features 

• Graphical, touch-screen system control with status display of 

tank, hose(s) and applicator(s). 

• Entry panels make access to melter components quick and 

easy. 

• Large, accessible tank opening allows easier filling and 

cleaning. 

• Pump shut-off valve and single-tool removal provide quick, 

easy pump replacement. 

• Installs quickly and easily. 

• Provides easy day-to-day operation and simplifiies routine 

maintenance. 

• Maximize uptime. 

• Serve a broad range of industries. 

• Quick plug-in hose/applicator pairs. 

• Quick connect I/O & PROFIBUS® plugs. 

VersaBlue N 50 Melter 

PROFIBUS is a registerd trademark of PROFIBUS International. 







Parameter 

V12 

V25 

Standard Footprint 

Configuration VC/VX VB/VW VC/VX VD/VY VE/VZ 



Pump Type 

Spur gear with variable AC motor 

Tank Volume L (in 3 ) 12 (732) 25 (1526) 

Holding capacity kg (lb) 11.4 (25.6) 23.8 (52.4) 

Max. Pump rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 1 & 2 

1.4 to 48.0 kg/hr (3 to 105.6 lb/hr) 

Filter Type 


Melt rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 1 14 (30.8) 25 (55) 

Throughput kg/hr (lb/hr) 1 18 (39.6) 37 (81.4) 


85 bar/8.5 MPa (1230 psi) 


Up to 4 single stream or 2 dual stream 

Number of applicators 2, 4, or 6 

Max. hose/applicator power (W): 




Max. Pressure Sensors 6 

Elec. Service 50/60 Hz (V) 

9650 watts 

13250 watts 

16850 watts 

4 internal 

10280 watts 

13880 watts 

17480 watts 

3/PE AC 200 5 

3/PE AC 200-240 

3/N/PE AC 380-415 Y 

3/PE AC 400 5 

3/PE AC 480 5 



Melter Dimensions W x H x D mm (in.) 1000 x 1382 x 782 (39.4 x 54.4 x 30.8) 

Installation Dimensions W x H x D mm (in.) 2090 x 1661 x 1031 (82.3 x 65.4 x 40.6) 

Weight 3 , empty kg (lb) 225 ( 496) 250 (551) 


0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) 


40 to 230 °C (100 to 450 °F) 

Temperature Control Stability 

± 1 °C (2 °F) 


Approvals 

CE, UL 

(1 

(1) Actual rates will vary depending on adhesive type, application 


(2) Range given is for maximum pump rate of various pumps available. 

(3) Weight depends on melter configuraton. 

(4) Permitted deviation from rated line voltage is ± 10%. 

(5) With integrated transformer, use 240V applicators and hoses. 


Casters optional, PROFIBUS, PROFINET, ControlNet, and Ethernet I/P 

optional. 



ControlNet is registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation., Inc. 







V50 

Parameter 

Standard Footprint 

Configuration VB/VW VC/VX VD/VY VE/VZ 



Pump Type 

Spur gear with variable AC motor 

Tank Volume L (in 3 ) 50 (3051) 

Holding capacity kg (lb) 47.5 (1074.7 

Max. Pump rate kg/hr (lb/hr) (1) 

1.4 to 48.0 kg/hr (3 to 105.6 lb/hr) 

Filter Type 


Melt rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 50 (110) 

Throughput kg/hr (lb/hr) 75 (165) 


85 bar/8.5 MPa (1230 psi) 


Up to 4 single stream or 2 dual stream 

Number of applicators 2, 4, or 6 





Max. Pressure Sensors 6 

Electrical Service 50/60 Hz (V) 

15605 watts 

19205 watts 

22805 watts 

4 internal 

3/PE AC 200 5 

3/PE AC 200-240 

3/N/PE AC 380-415 Y 

3/PE AC 400 5 

3/PE AC 480 5 



Dimensions W x H x D mm (in.) 1000 x 1382 x 782 (39.4 x 54.4 x 30.8) 

Installation Dimensions W x H x D mm (in.) 2090 x 1661 x 1031 (82.3 x 65.4 x 40.6) 

Weight 3 , empty kg (lb) 275 (606) 290 (639) 


0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) 


40 to 230 °C (100 to 450 °F) 


± 1 °C (2 °F) 


Approvals 

CE, UL 

(1) Actual rates will vary depending on adhesive type, application 


(2) Range given is for maximum pump rate of various pumps available. 

(3) Weight depends on melter configuraton. 

(4) Permitted deviation from rated line voltage is ± 10%. 

(5) With integrated transformer, use 240V applicators and hoses. 


Casters optional, PROFIBUS, PROFINET, ControlNet, and Ethernet I/P 

optional. 



ControlNet is registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation., Inc. 






VersaBlue N Configuration 

BASE MELTER 

Melter Type Melter Capacity - 

Voltage 

Pump 1 

Pump 2 

Pump 3 

Pump 4 

Hose/ 

Applicator 

/ 

050 - L A B C D 4 / 

Boxes 1-2 Boxes 3-5 Box 6 Box 7 Box 8 Box 9 Box 10 Box 11 Box 12 Box 13 

Base Melter 

Boxes 

1-2 

Boxes 

3-5 

Box 

7 

Box 

12 

Melter Type 

Description 

Code 

Ni-120, Max:4-SS, 6 Hose/Applicator, IPC 

VB 

Ni-120, Max: 2-SS/DS, 6 Hose/Applicator, IPC 

VC 

Ni-120, Max: 4-SS, 8 Hose/Applicator, IPC/PLC 

VD 

Ni-120, Max:3/4-SS/DS, 8 Hose/Applicator, IPC/PLC 

VE 

Pt100, Max: 4-SS, 6 Hose/Applicator, IPC 

VW 

Pt100, Max: 2-SS/DS, 6 Hose/Applicator, IPC 

VX 

Pt100, Max: 4-SS, 8 Hose/Applicator, IPC/PLC 

VY 

Pt100, Max:3/4-SS/DS, 8 Hose/Applicator, IPC/PLC 

VZ 


Description 

Code 

12 liter (26 lb) 012 

25 liter (55 lb) 025 


50 liter (110 lb) 050 


Voltage 

Description 

Code 







Description 

Code 





Boxes 

8-11 

SN0030 - 1.4 kg/hr 

SN0046 - 2.2 kg/hr 

SN0062 - 2.9 kg/hr 

SN0093 - 4.5 kg/hr 

SN0186 - 8.9 kg/h 

SN0371 - 17.8 kg/hr 

SN0773 - 37.1 kg/hr 

SN1710 - 82.1 kg/hr (2) 

Pumps (1) 

Description 

SH0371 - 17.8 kg/hr 9 

SH0773 - 37.1 kg/hr 







SF0016 - 0.8 kg/hr 

SF0030 - 1.4 kg/hr 

SF0060 - 2.9 kg/hr 

SF0090 - 4.3 kg/hr 

SF0120 - 5.7 kg/hr 

SF0175 - 8.4 kg/hr 


SF0300 - 14.4 kg/hr 

SF0450 - 21.6 kg/hr 







None 

Code 

(1) 

Nordson (SN/DN) pumps cannot be combined with Feinpruf (SF/DF) 

pumps. 

(2) 

Maximum quantity of 2 SN1710 pumps on 12, 25, and 50 L melters. 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

Z 

J 

K 

L 

M 

N 

O 

P 

Q 

R 

S 

T 

U 

V 

W 

Y 

X 







OPTIONS 

Flow Control 

Int. Pressure 

Indication 

Level Control 

Light Tower 

Main Switch 

Host 


Key-to-Line 

Casters 

Reserved 


Reserved 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Drain Valve 

Ext. Pressure 

Indicator 


Motion 

Switch 

Applicator 


ACM 

PLC 

Reserved 


Reserved 

Box 

14 

Box 

15 

Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Box 

19 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

X X X X X X 

Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Box 

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 

Options 

Box 14 

Flow Control 

Box 

19 


Box 

28 


Box 15 

Box 

16 

Description 

Automatic Pneumatic Pressure 

Control 

Manual Pneumatic Pressure Control 


IPI w/ Output Pressure Control per 

Drive 

Automatic Flow control w. Min.- 

Speed 

Automatic Flow control 

Pressure build up (Airless 

pressure control) 

Safety valve with indication only 

(PCV plugged) 

None (Standard Manual 

Pressure Control) 


Description 


None 

Level Control 

Description 



Ni-120) 


(Ni-120) + Overfill Protection 


(PT100) 


(PT100) + Overfill Protection 

None 

Code 

P 

M 

F 

C 

T 

B 

N 

O 

X 

Code 

A 

X 

Code 

L 

B 

P 

C 

D 

X 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Description 

Code 


D 

ControlNet with PMI 

N 

1 

Ethernet /IP with PMI E 

PROFINET IO w PMI 

P 

None 

X 

1 

Contact NWSG Marketing for availability. 

Key-to-lLne 

Description 

Key-to-Line per Drive (separate 

connectors) 

None (Standard Key-to-Line) 

Casters 

None 

Reserved 

Casters 

Description 

Reserved 

Description 


Code 

K 

X 

Code 

C 

X 

Code 

X 

Description 

Code 

01 mm filter w/85 bar safety valve H 

0.8 mm filter w/85 bar safety valve C 

0.2 mm filter w/100 bar safety valve D 

0.8 mm filter w/100 bar safety valve G 

Standard (0.2 mm filter w/85 bar 

safety valve) 

X 

Box 

29 

Box 

30 

Box 

31 

Box 

32 

Box 

33 

Description 

Code 

External Pressure Indicator Inputs # 

None 

X 


Description 


None 

Motion Switch 

Description 

Motion Switch 

None 


Description 


None 

ACM 

Code 

E 

X 

Code 

M 

X 

Code 

G 

X 

Description 

Code 

ACM Connectivity 1 

None 

X 

PLC(1) 

Description 

A-B ControlLogix w/ ControlNet & 

PanelView 600+ 

A-B ControlLogix w/ Ethernet and 

PanelView 600+ 

None 

Code 

B 

C 

X 

Box 17 

Box 18 

Light Tower 

Description 

Light Tower 

None 

Main Switch 

Code 

W 

X 

Description 

Code 

Main Switch Red - 4 Pole 1 



None (Standard Main Switch 

Red- 3 Pole) 

X 

Boxes 

24-26 

Box 

27 

Reserved 

Drain Valve 

None 

Reserved 

Description 

Drain Valve 

Description 

Code 

X 

Code 

D 

X 

Box 

34 

Box 

35 

Box 

36 

Reserved 

Description 

Reserved 


Description 

Terminal Block 

Ethernet/IP 

None 

Reserved 

Description 

Reserved 

Code 

X 

Code 

T 

E 

X 

Code 

X 











Web Content 

Description 

VersaBlue XN and XC Series adhesive melters provide 

high speed, high volume hot melt adhesive delivery in 

a flexible platform with a wide range of configuration 

choices. Melters are available in 50, 100 and 200 liter 

tank sizes with twin tank configurations available for 

multiple adhesives. 

VersaBlue XN melters target nonwovens disposable 

applications by offering twin tanks for different 

adhesives, multiple metered pump streams, control of 

remote metering stations and applicators, PLC control, 

and many auxiliary temperature control channels. 

VersaBlue® XN and XC Series 


VersaBlue XC melters target high-consumption 

web coating applications that require high-output 

pumps, optional high-precision temperature controls, 

remote PLC control for coating stands, and several 

control system choices for wide-web production and 

integration. 

Features 

VersaBlue XN Melter Front 

• Multiple tank sizes 

• Release-coated grid and reservoir 

• Up to eight single-stream or eight dual-stream spur-gear 

metering pumps and variable-speed AC motors 

• Choice of control systems 

• Simplified and expanded configuration choices 

• Open electrical and hydraulic layout with removable access 

panels 

• Common parts with VersaBlue N Series melters 

• External control capability for total adhesive system control 




VersaBlue ® XN and XC Series 


Specifications - VersaBlue XN 

Parameter Single 50 Single 100 Single 200 

Number of tanks 1 1 1 

Tank volume L (in 3 ) 

50 (3051) 100 (6102) 200 (12,205) 

with extended hopper L (in 3 ) 

75 (4577) 150 (9154) 300 (18,307) 

Holding capacity kg (lb) 

47.5 (105) 95 (209) 190 (419) 

with extended hopper kg (lb) 

71.3 (157) 142.5 (314) 285 (628) 



Pump speed (rev/min): 

Minimum speed 

Maximum speed 

5 

80 


Single stream 

4 8 

Dual stream 

3 4 8 

Motor size (W) 250 

Maximum number of motors 4 8 

Maximum hose/applicator capacity 18 26 

Maximum hose/applicator power (W): 

each hose or applicator 

each hose/applicator pair 

total power available for H/G 

2000 

4000 

46000 

Maximum external drive controls(1) 6 

Maximum external (analog) pressure inputs 8 16 

Maximum external (digital) pressure inputs 12 

Maximum air run-up control channels 16 

Maximum melter power (W) 58100 68700 82900 

Electrical service 50/60 Hz (V) 

3/PE AC 200-240 

3/N/PE AC 380-415 Y 

Control system 

Service envelope: W x H x D mm (in.) 

Rockwell ControlLogix Siemens S7 

Filter area (cm 2 ) (in 2 ) 103 

Melter dimensions: W x H x D mm (in.) 

1460 x 2015 x 1250 1460 x 2015 x 1500 

(57.5 x 79.3 x 49.2) (57.5 x 79.3 x 59) 

1932 x 2244 x 1885 

(76.1 x 88.3 x 74.2) 

2182 x 2244 x 2135 

(85.9 x 88.3 x 84.1) 

1460 x 2015 x 2400 

(57.5 x 79.3 x 94.5) 

2182 x 2244 x 3035 

(85.9 x 88.3 x 119.5) 

Weight, empty kg (lb) 620 (1366.9) 820 (1807.8) 1470 (3240.8) 


0-50°C (32-122°F) 


40-230°C (104-450°F) 

Viscosity range (cps) 1,000 to 50,000 


85 bar/8.5 MPa 

Approvals 

CE 


(1) 

Melters can utilize unused internal motor controls for additional external drive controls. 







Parameter Twin 50/50 Twin 50/100 Twin 100/100 



With extended hopper L (in 3 ) 

50/50 (3051/3051) 50/100 (3051/6102) 100/100 (6102/6102) 

75/75 (4577/4577) 75/150 (4577/9154) 150/150 (9154/9154) 


with extended hopper kg (lb) 

47.5/47.5 (104.8/104.8) 47.5/95 (104.8/209.4) 95/95 (209.4/209.4) 

71.3/71.3 (157.2/157.2) 71.3/142.5 (157.2/314.2) 142.5/142.5 (314.2/314.2) 

Melt rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 50/50 (110/110) 50/100 (110/220) 100/100 (220/220) 

Throughput kg/hr (lb/hr) 75/75 (165/165) 75/125 (165/275) 125125 (275/275) 


Minimum speed 

Maximum speed 

5 

80 


Single stream 

8 

Dual stream 

6 7 8 


Maximum number of motors 8 

Maximum hose/applicator capacity 26 


each hose or applicator 

each hose/applicator pair 

total power available for H/A 

2000 

4000 

46000 

Maximum external drive controls (1) 6 

Maximum external (analog) pressure inputs 16 

Maximum external (digital) pressure inputs 12 

Maximum air run-up control channels 16 

Max. melter power (W) 72800 81350 8990 

Electrical service 50/60 Hz (V) 

3/PE AC 200-240 

3/N/PE AC 380-415 Y 


Rockwell ControlLogix Siemens S7 

Filter area cm 2 (in 2 ) 103 (16) 


1460 x 2015 x 1900 1460 x 2015 x 2150 1460 x 2015 x 2400 

(57.2 x 79.3 x 74.8) (57.2 x 79.3 x 84.7) (57.2 x 79.3 x 94.5) 


1932 x 2244 x 2535 

(76.1 x 88.3 x 99.8) 

2182 x 2244 x 2785 

(85.9 x 88.3 x 109.7) 

2181 x 2244 x 3035 

(85.9 x 88.3 x 119.5) 

Weight, empty kg (lb) 970 (2134) 1170 (2574) 1370 (3014) 

Ambient temperature range °C (°F) 

0-50°C (32-122°F) 

Operating temperature range °C (°F) 

40-230°C (104-450°F) 




Approvals 

CE 


(1) 

Melters can utilize unused internal motor controls for additional external drive controls. 











Specifications - VersaBlue XC 

Parameter XC 50 XC 100 XC 200 





50 (3051) 100 (6102) 200 (12,205) 

W/ extended hopper L (in 3 ) 

75 (4577) 150 (9154) 300 (18,307) 


47.5 (104.5) 95 (209) 190 (418) 

W/ extended hopper 

71.3 (156.9) 142.5 (313.5) 285 627) 




5 

Minimum speed maximum speed 

80 

Maximum number of pumps: 

Single stream (SN0003 - SN0773) 

0 4 8(1) 

Single stream (PU15-25-35-50/85) 

1 2 4 

Single stream (PUS700) 

1 2 

Dual stream 

0 4 8(1) 


Maximum number of motors 4 8 

Maximum hose/applicator capacity 8 14 

Maximum hose/applicator power (W): 

2000 

each hose or applicator each hose/applicator pair 

4000 

total power available for H/A 

46000 

Maximum external drive controls( 1 ) 1 

Maximum external (analog) pressure inputs 16 

Maximum melter power (W) 43400 53400 98400 

Elec. service 50/60 Hz (V) 

3/PE AC 200-240 

3/N/PE AC 380-415 Y 


IPC 

Rockwell ControlLogix Siemens S7 Remote PLC 

Filter area (cm 2 ) 103 


1460 x 2015 x 1250 1460 x 2015 x 1500 

(57.5 x 79.4 x 49.2) (57.5 x 79.4 x 59.1) 


1932 x 2244 x 1885 

(76.1 x 88.3 x 74.2) 

2182 x 2244 x 2135 

(85.9 x 88.3 x 84.1) 

1460 x 2015 x 2400 

(57.5 x 79.4 x 94.5) 

2181 x 2244 x 3035 

(85.9 x 88.3 x 119.5) 

Weight, empty kg (lb) 620 (1364) 820 (1804) 1470 (3234) 

Ambient temperature range C (F) 

0-50°C (32-133°F) 

Operating temperature range C (F) 

40-230°C (104-450°F) 




Approvals 

CE 


(1) 

Limited to 4 pumps when IP control system is selected. 






VersaBlue XN Configuration 

Tank 1 Tank 2 

Tank #1 

Capacity 

Casting 

Level 

Control 

Pump 1 

Pump 2 

Pump 3 

Pump 4 


Tank #2 

Capacity 

Casting 

Level 

Control 

Pump 5 

Pump 6 

Pump 7 

Pump 8 


VBN - 100 2 L A B C D 4 050 2 C A 2 A X 4 

Boxes 

1-4 

Boxes 5-7 

Box 

8 

Box 

9 

Box 

10 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Box 

13 

Box 

14 

Boxes 15-17 

Box 

18 

Box 

19 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Box 

24 

Base Melter 

Boxes 

5-7 

Box 

8 

Tank #1 Capacity 

Description 

Code 

50 liter 050 

50 liter w/ Hopper 50H 

100 liter 100 


None (Tank 2 Only) 

Casting (Tank #1) 

XXX 

Description 

Code 

SS pumps only (No DS Allowed) 1 

DS or SS pumps(1) 2 

None (Tank 2 only) 

X 

(1) 

Max 3 pumps on 050 or 50H capacity. 

Box 

9 

Box 

19 


Level Control (Tank #1) 

Description 

Level Control w/ BFV (Ni-120) 

Level Control w/ BFV (Pt100) 

Option B w/ Overfill Prot. 

Option C w/ Overfill Prot. 

None 


Level Control (Tank #2) 

Description 

Level Control w/ BFV (Ni120) 

Level Control w/ BFV (Pt100) 

Option B w/ Overfill Prot. 

Option C w/ Overfill Prot 

None 

NOTE: Requires heating zone 

Code 

L 

B 

C 

P 

D 

X 

Code 

L 

B 

C 

P 

D 

X 

Boxes 

10-13 & 

20-23 

SN0030 - 1.4 kg/hr 

SN0046 - 2.2 kg/hr 

SN0062 - 2.9 kg/hr 

SN0093 - 4.5 kg/hr 

SN0186 - 8.9 kg/h 

Pumps 

Description 

SN0371 - 17.8 kg/hr 

SN0557 - 26.7 kg/hr 

SN0773 - 37.1 kg/hr 

SN1710 - 82.1 kg/hr(1) 

Code 








SF0016 - 0.8 kg/hr 

SF0030 - 1.4 kg/hr 

SF0060 - 2.9 kg/hr 

SF0090 - 4.3 kg/hr 

SF0120 - 5.7 kg/hr 

SF0175 - 8.4 kg/hr 


SF0300 - 14.4 kg/hr 

SF0450 - 21.6 kg/hr 







None 

(1) 

Only available on 100L Single Stream Melter (”1” in box 8). Max 

2 pumps. 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

I 

G 

H 

J 

K 

L 

M 

N 

O 

P 

Q 

R 

S 

T 

U 

V 

W 

Y 

X 

Box 

14 

Hose/Applicator Pairs (Tank #1) 

Description 

Code 

4 Hose/Applicator 4 


None( 1) 

(1) 

Only with XXX in Box 5-7. 

Box 

15-17 

Tank #2 Capacity 

Description 

X 

Code 

50 liter 050 


100 liter 100 


200 liter (1) 200 

200 liter w/ Hopper (1) 20H 

(1) 

Tank #1 must be XXX in boxes 5-7 

Box 

18 

Casting (Tank #2) 

Description 

Code 


DS or SS pumps (1) 2 

(1) 

Max 3 pumps on 050 or 50H capacity. 

Box 

24 

Hose/Applicator Pairs (Tank #2) 

Description 

Code 



NOTE: Requires heating zone. 







Options 

Return Hose 

Flow 

Control 

Internal 

Pressure 

Indication 

External 

Pressure 

Inputs 

Digital Pressure 

Input 

Auxiliary 

Hose/Appl 

Pairs 

Auxiliary 

Motor Control 

Auxiliary 

Motor Control 

Type 

Voltage 

I/O & 

Indication 

Reserved 

Control 

system 

Air Run-up 

Applicator 

solenoid 

Control 

Sensor type 

Heat Exchanger/ 

ACM 

1 X A X X A X X 4 D A A X G P X 

Boxe 

25 

Box 

26 

Box 

27 

Box 

28 

Box 

29 

Box 

30 

Box 

31 

Box 

32 

Box 

33 

Box 

34 

Box 

35 

Box 

36 

Box 

37 

Box 

38 

Box 

39 

Box 

40 

Options 

Box 

25 

Return Hose (1) 

Description 

Code 

Tank 1 1 

Tank 2 2 

Tanks 1 & 2 3 

None 

(1) 

Includes 1 hose fitting and MPCV per return manifold. Requires 

heating zone per manifold. 

Box 

26 

Flow Control 

Description 

Auto flow cont. w/ min speed 

Auto flow cont. 

(1) 

Requires IPI in box 21. 

Box 

27 

X 

Code 

(1) Pressure Build-up N 

SV w/ Indication (no MPCV) 

None (Standard MPCV) 

Internal Pressure Indication (1) 

Description 

Post-filter pressure Indication 

Pre-filter pressure Indication 

Pre & Post filter pressureIndication 

None 

T 

B 

O 

X 

Code 

(1) 

Output pressure control is standard functionality when pressure 

indication is selected. 

Box 

28 

External Pressure Inputs 

Description 

A 

G 

H 

X 

Code 

4 inputs F 

8 inputs E 

(1) 12 inputs T 

(1) 16 inputs S 

None 

(1) 

Available only with twin tank and 200L configurations. 

Box 

29 

Digital Pressure Input 

Description 

X 

Code 

4 Inputs F 

8 Inputs E 

12 Inputs T 

None 

X 

Box 

30 

Box 

31 

Box 

32 

Auxiliary H/G Pairs (@ Elec. Panel) 

Description 

Code 

2 H/G (Included in Base Unit) A 

6 H/G B 

10 H/G C 

Auxiliary Motor Control (Qty) 

Description 

Code 

Max. 6 # 

None 

Auxiliary Motor Control Type 

Description 

X 

Code 

(1) AC PowerFlex 40 (750W) A 

(1) Servo Ultra 3000 S 

(2) 1x AC Lenze Vector 8200 L 

None (Standard) 

(1) 

Rockwell PLC only. 

(2) 

Only with S7 control system (A in box 36). 

Box 

33 

Box 

34 

Box 

35 

Voltage 

Description 

200-240 3P ∆ (Red Main Switch, 

3-Pole) 

200-240 3P ∆ (Black Main Switch, 

3-Pole) 

380-415 Y (Red Main Switch 

4-Pole) 

380-415 Y (Black Main Switch, 

4-Pole) 

I/O & Indication 

Description 

Standard -XS2 (Discrete) 

Warning Light Tower 

WLT and Discrete I/O 

None 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Description 

X 

Code 

2 

B 

4 

C 

Code 

D 

W 

K 

X 

Code 

X 

Box 

36 

Control System 

Description 

Siemens S7-300 w/ TP270 

ControlLogix ENet ext. PView1000 

ControlLogix CNet ext. PView1000 

Code 

A 

F 

T 

Box 

37 

Air Run-up (1) 

Description 

Code 

4 outputs 4 

8 outputs 8 

12 outputs 12 

16 outputs 16 

None 

X 

(1) 

Air run-up kit sold separately 

Box 

38 

Box 

39 

Box 

40 


Description 

Std VersaBlue 

Pat. Cont. through GS conn. 

None 

PT100 

Ni-120 

Sensor Type 

Description 

Heat Exchanger/ACM 

Description 


ACM Connectivity 

Heat Exchanger and ACM 

None 

Code 

G 

P 

X 

Code 

P 

N 

Code 

E 

A 

B 

X 






VersaBlue XC Configuration 

BASE MELTER 

Tank 

Capacity 

Casting 

Level 

Control 

Pump 1 

Pump 2 

Pump 3 

Pump 4 

Pump 5 

Pump 6 

Pump 7 

Pump 8 

Hose/ 

Applicator 

VBC - 20H 1 D H H H H X X X X 8 

Boxes 

1-4 

Boxes 

5-7 

Box 

8 

Box 

9 

Box 

10 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Box 

13 

Box 

14 

Box 

15 

Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Base Melter 

Box 

5-7 

Box 

8 

Tank Capacity 

Description 

Code 

50 liter 050 


100 liter 100 


200 liter 200 


Casting 

Description 


DS or SS pumps 2 

High displacement (PU) pumps only (1) 3 

(1) 

Castings machined for specific configuration, cannot be upgraded in the field 

Box 

9 


Level Control w/ BFV (Ni-120) (1) 

Level Control w/ BFV (PT100) (1) 

Option B w/ Overfill Prot. (1) 

Option C w/ Overfill Prot (1) 

None 

Level Control 

Description 

Code 

Code 

(1) 

Must select quantity of BFV inputs in Box 25 if options B, C, P, or D are configured. 

L 

B 

C 

P 

D 

X 

Box 

10-17 

Pumps (contd) 





SF0016 - 0.8 kg/hr 

J 

SF0030 - 1.4 kg/hr 

K 

SF0060 - 2.9 kg/hr 

L 

SF0090 - 4.3 kg/hr 

M 

SF0120 - 5.7 kg/hr 

N 

SF0175 - 8.4 kg/hr 

O 


P 

SF0300 - 14.4 kg/hr 

Q 

SF0450 - 21.6 kg/hr 

R 


S 


T 


U 


V 


W 


Y 

None 

X 

High Displacement Pumps 

SN1882 - 85.8 kg/hr (PU15/85) (1) 

A 

SN3135 - 142.9 kg/hr (PU25/85) (1) 

B 

SN4390 - 200.1 kg/hr (PU35/85) (1) 

C 

SN6272 - 286 kg/hr (PU50/85) (1) 

D 

SN11872 - 541.3 kg/hr (PU700) (2) 

E 

None 

X 

Box 

10-17 

Pumps 

Description 

Code 

SN0030 - 1.4 kg/hr 

A 

SN0046 - 2.2 kg/hr 

B 

SN0062 - 2.9 kg/hr 

C 

SN0093 - 4.5 kg/hr 

D 

SN0186 - 8.9 kg/h 

E 

SN0371 - 17.8 kg/hr 

F 

SN0557 - 26.7 kg/hr 

I 

SN0773 - 37.1 kg/hr 

G 

SN1710 - 82.1 kg/hr 

H 




(1) 

Max 1x on 50L, 2x on 100L and 4x on 200L. 

(2) 

Max 1x on 50L, 2x on 100L and 2x on 200L. 

Box 18 

Hose/Applicator Pairs (@ Tank) 

Description 

2 Hose/Applicator Z 

4 Hose/Applicator F 

8 Hose/Applicator E 

12 Hose/Applicator(1) T 

Code 

16 Hose/Applicator(1) S 

1-Ch Han15D (max. 8) #1 

Incl. 24-pin appl. Conns #2-8 each 

# 

(1) 

PLC and Remote Control only (A,B,C,F or T in Box 36). 







OPTIONS 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Return 

Filling Port 

Flow Control 

Internal 

Pressure 

Indication 

Ext. Pressure 

Inputs 

Reserved 

Auxiliary 

Hose / 

Applicator 

Aux. Motor 

Control 

Reserved 

Voltage 

I/O & 

Incication 

Melter Motor 

Control 

Control 

System 

Air Run-up 

Applicator 

Solenoid 

Control 

Sensor Type 

Heat 

Exchanger 

X X X X X X 1 X A X X A X X 4 D A A X G P X 

Box 

19 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Box 

24 

Box 

25 

Box 

26 

Box 

27 

Box 

28 

Box 

29 

Box 

30 

Box 

31 

Box 

32 

Box 

33 

Box 

34 

Box 

35 

Box 

36 

Box 

37 

Box 38 

Box 

39 

Box 

40 

Options 

Box 

19-24 

Box 

25 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Description 

Return Filling Port 

Description 

Code 

X 

Code 

One Port 1 

Two Ports (1) 2 

Three Ports (2) 3 

Four Ports (2) 4 

None 

(1) 

Only available on 100L and 200L. 

(2) 

Only available on 200L. 

Box 

26 

IPI w/ OPC (1) 

Flow Control 

Description 

Auto flow cont. w/ min speed 

Auto flow cont. 

Pressure Build-up (1) 

SV w/ Indication (no MPCV) 

None (Standard MPCV) 

(1) 

Requires IPI in box 21. 

X 

Code 

C 

T 

B 

N 

O 

X 

Box 

30 

Auxiliary H/A Pairs (@ Elec. Panel) 

Description 

Code 

2 Hose/Applicator (1) A 

6 Hose/Applicator (1) B 

10 Hose/Applicator (1) C 

None (2) 

(1) 

PLC and Remote Control only (A, B, C, F or T in Box 36). 

(2) 

Mandatory for IPC control (G,E,D,or N in Box 36). 

Aux H/G not available 

Box 

31 

Auxiliary Motor Control (1) 

Description 

1x AC PowerFlex 40 (750W) (2) 

1x AC PowerFlex 40 (3.7-kW) (2) 

1x AC Lenze Vector 8200 (550W) (3) 

1x AC Lenze Vector 8200 (3-kW) (3) 

None (Standard) 

(1) 

Not available w/ IPC control. 

(2) 

Only with A-B Control. 

(3) 

Only w/ S7 or remote control. 

Box 32 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Description 

X 

Code 

A 

E 

L 

F 

X 

Code 

X 

Box 36 

Box 37 


Description 

Siemens S7-300 w/ TP270 - 

PROFIBUS 

Remote S7 Ctrl. w/ Hi-Perf 

TempCtrl. 

Remote S7 Ctrl. w/o Hi-Perf 

TempCtrl. 

IPC 

IPC with Ethernet 

IPC with PROFIBUS 

IPC with ControlNet 

ControlLogix ENet ext. PView1000 

ControlLogix CNet ext. PView1000 

Air Run-up 

Code 

A 

B 

C 

G 

E 

D 

N 

F 

T 

Description 

Code 

4 programmable outputs (1) F 

8 programmable outputs (1) E 

12 programmable outputs (1) T 

16 programmable outputs (1) S 

6 outputs with IPC (2) 6 

None 

X 

(1) 

2PLC and Remote Control only (A,B,C,F or T in Box 36). 

(2) 

Connectors w/ power and K-T-L signal 

Box 

27 


Description 

Post-filter pressure Indication 

Pre-filter pressure Indication 

Pre & Post filter pressureIndication (1) 

None 

Code 

1) 

Not available with IPC control (G,E, D, or N in Box 36). 

Box 28 

External Pressure Inputs 

Description 

A 

G 

H 

X 

Code 

4 inputs (1) F 

8 inputs (1) E 

12 inputs (1) T 

16 inputs (1) S 

# Up to 8 inputs (2) # 

None 

NOTE: Requires IPI in box 21. 

(1) 

Only with PLC control. 

(2) 

Requires IPC control (G, E, D, or N in Box 36. 

Box 29 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Description 

X 

Code 

X 

Box 33 

Box 34 

Voltage 

Description 

200-240 3P ∆ (Red Main Sw., 

3-Pole) 

200-240 3P ∆ (Black Main Sw., 

3-Pole) 

380-415 Y (Red Main Switch, 

4-Pole) 

380-415 Y (Black Main Switch, 

4-Pole) 

I/O & Indication 

Description 

Standard -XS2 


WLT and Discrete I/O 

None 

Code 

2 

B 

4 

C 

Code 

D 

W 

K 

X 

Box 

35 

Melter Motor Control 

Description 

Code 

Motor w/ Encoder feedback (1) 

A 

Auxiliary fan (high displacement 

pumps) 

B 

None 

X 

(1) 

PLC and Remote Control only (A,B,C,F or T in Box 36). 

Box 38 

Box 39 

Box 

40 


Description 

Std VersaBlue 

Pat. Cont. through GS conn. 

None 

Sensor Type 

Description 

Pt100 

Ni-120 


Description 


None 

Code 

G 

P 

X 

Code 

P 

N 

Code 

E 

X 






Pump Selection: Versablue N, XN, XC Adhesive Melters 

Pump 

P/N 

Legacy \ 

Description 

Type 

Manu- Displacement 2 

facturer 1 cc/rev (in3/rev) 

Pump Rates 2 @ 

80 RPM kg/hr 

(lb/hr) 

SN0030 7109715 PR2m1 Single Stream Nordson 0.3 (0.02) 1.4 (3.1) 






SN0557 (3) 7116828 PR18m2 Single Stream Nordson 5.57 (0.34) 26.7 (58.9) 


SN1710 7116829 PR100m3 Single Stream Nordson 17.10 (1.04) 82.1 (180) 

SN1882 (4) 291995 PU15/85 Single Stream Nordson 18.82 (1.15) 85.8 (189.2) 




SN1187 (4) 201712 PU700 Single Stream Nordson 118.72 (7.25) 541.3 (1193.6) 

SH0371 (5) 7130225 PR12m2, hard Single Stream Nordson 3.71 (0.23) 17.8 (39.2) 

SH0773 (5) 7131840 PR25m2, hard Single Stream Nordson 7.73 (0.47) 37.1 (81.8) 

DN0030 7116580 PU2-2m1 Dual Stream Nordson 0.3 (0.02) 1.4 (3.1) 






DN0557 (3) 7116830 PU18-2m2 Dual Stream Nordson 5.57 (0.34) 26.7 (58.9) 

SF0016 401723 1 x 0.16 Single Stream Feinpruf 0.16 (0.01) 0.8 (1.8) 







SF0300 400758 1 x 3.00 Single Stream Feinpruf 3 (0.18) 14.4 (31.7) 


DF0016 316125 2 x 0.16 Dual Stream Feinpruf 0.16 (0.01) 0.8 (1.8) 






(1) 

Feinpruf pumps cannot be combined with other pumps. 

(4) 

Available on XC configurations only. 

(2) 

Stated displacement and pump rates are per stream. 

(5) 

Not available on VersaBlue XN/XC melters. 

(3) 

Available on XC and XN configurations only. 




Web Content 



Adhesive Melter Accessories 

VersaBlue N Filter Service Kits 

Part Number 

Description 

1120136 Filter Cartridge, Mesh size 0.1 mm, complete 

1120135 Filter Cartridge, Mesh size 0.1 mm, reinf, compl 

1120137 Filter Cartridge, mesh size 0.2 mm, reinf, compl 

394590 Service Kit, Filter 0.2 mm 

1120144 Filter Cartridge,Mesh size 0.2 mm, HT,complete 



1120148 Filter Cartridge Mesh size 0.8 mm, complete 

7109691 Service Kit, Filter 0.8 mm 

1120149 Filter Cartridge,Mesh size 0.8 mm, HT,complete 

Fittings and Accessories 

Straight Hose Fittings 

NOTE: VersaBlue N melters ship with one 8 mm hose fitting per stream. 

Part Number 

Description 

446617 8 mm 

419881 13 mm 

203786 16 mm 

45° Hose Fitting Adapter 

NOTE: Angle adapter fittings to be used in addition to straight fittings. 

Part Number 

Description 

250207 8 mm 

252075 13 mm 

446611 16 mm 

90° Hose Fitting Adapter 

NOTE: Angle adapter fittings to be used in addition to straight fittings. 

Part Number 

Description 

252582 8 mm 

250208 13 mm 

289331 16 mm 





Adhesive Melter Accessories 

Hose Fittings 

Part Number 

Description 

446617 Hose Fitting a9/16BUNF-a3/4UNF (NW8) 1 O-ring included 

419881 Hose Fitting a3/4UNF-a3/4UNF (NW13) 1 O-ring included 

203786 Hose Fitting a1 1.16-12F-a3/4UNF (NW16) 1 O-ring included 

Safety Valves 

Part Number 

207932 Safety Valve, 85 bar 

7106950 Safety Valve W/Limit Switch, 85 bar 

394592 Service Kit, Safety Valve 

Description 

Control Valves 

Part Number 

Description 

203059 Pressure Control Valve, 90 Bar, Adjustable 

207300 Pressure Control Valve, Pneumatically Controlled 

394600 Service Kit, Pressure Control Valve 

Temperature Sensor 

Part Number 

394597 Rtd Sensor Ni120 Kit 

7116067 Rtd Sensor Pt100 Kit 

Description 

Casters 

Part Number 

394793 Casters Kit 12, 25, and 50L 

7104872 Casters Kit 100L 

Description 

Light Tower 

Part Number 

394794 Light Tower Kit 

Description 

Interface Connectors 

Part Number 

729678 Standard I/O Interface (XS2) Kit 

729677 Key-to-Line (X55) Kit 

Description 




Web Content 



20 and 45 liter 

Description 

Nordson EZ Melt series melters are designed to deliver 

hot melt adhesive in support of low to mid-speed 

production. A choice of metering spur-gear pumps with 

variable-speed AC motors and key-to-line functionality 

satisfies a wide range of manufacturing requirements. 

A non-stick coated tank and reservoir design reduces 


throughput. The versatile control panel offers a choice 

of programming methods using either the keypad or 

arrow keys. 

Features 





EZ Melt Series 20 and 45 liter Melters 







Parameter 

Specification 


Release-coated tank and reservoir 

Spur-gear pump with variable AC motor 

Number of Pumps 

Up to two (2) single- or dual-stream 

Maximum Pump Rate 1&2 

0.7 to 37.1 kg/hr (1.6 to 81.6 lb/hr) 

Number of Hoses/Applicators Up to six (6) 

Filter type 


Operating Temperature Range 40° to 230 °C (100° to 450 °F) 

Maximum Working Hydraulic Pressure 85 bars/8.5 MPa (1230 psi) 


0–50 °C (32–122 °F) 


Ni120 


±1 °C (2 °F) 

Maximum External Power Capacity 

Hose/Gun Connector Positions 1–4 (each): 1,200 watts per pair/1,000 watts per channel 

Hose/Gun Connector Positions 5–6 (each): 2,000 watts per pair/2,000 watts per channel 

200 to 240 VAC 3 phase 50/60 Hz 

Electrical Service 3 


Input/Output Capability Standard 3 outputs/4 inputs programmable for function 

Melter Dimensions (W x H x D) 1054.5 x 1230 x 600 mm (41.5 x 48.4 x 23.6 in.) 

Installation Dimensions (W x H x D) 3000 x 1278 x 2600 mm (118 x 50.3 x 102 in.) 

Protection 

IP33 

Parameter 20 liter 45 liter 


20 L (1220 in 3 ) 

19 kg (42 lb) 

45 L (2746 in 3 ) 

43.5 kg (96 lb) 

Throughput (per hour) 1 24 kg (53 lb) 54 kg (119 lb) 

Melt Rate (per hour) 1 20 kg (44 lb) 40 kg (88 lb) 

Weight (empty) 4 205 kg (451 lb) 240 kg (529 lb) 

Maximum System Power Capacity 14740 W 16540 W 

Weight (empty) 42 kg (92 lb) 76 kg (168 lb) 

Notes: 

1 


2 


3 


4 






EZ Melt Product Configuration Tree 

Base Melter 

Melter Capacity Voltage Pump 1 Pump 2 Resvd. Resvd. 

Hose/ 

Applic. \ 

E Z - 0 2 0 4 E F X X 6 \ 

Box 1 Box 2 Box 3 Box 4 Box 5 Box 6 Box 7 Box 8 Box 9 Box 10 Box 11 Box 12 Box 13 

Options 

Flow 

control Resvd. Resvd. Resvd. Resvd. Resvd. Resvd. Resvd. Sensor Resvd. Resvd. Resvd. 

X X X X X X X X N X X X 

Box 14 Box 15 Box 16 Box 17 Box 18 Box 19 Box 20 Box 21 Box 22 Box 23 Box 24 Box 25 

EZ Melter 

Boxes 1–2 Description 

EZ EZ melter 

Tank Capacity 

Boxes 4–6 Description 

20 20 liter 

24 24 liter 

Voltage 

Box 7 Description 

3 240 VAC 3P Delta 

4 380–415 VAC Wye 

Pump 

Boxes 8–9 

Description 

I SN0015 — 0.7 kg/hr 

A SN0030 — 1.4 kg/hr 

B SN0046 — 2.2 kg/hr 

C SN0062 — 2.9 kg/hr 

D SN0093 — 4.5 kg/hr 

E SN0186 — 8.9 kg/hr 

F SN0371 — 17.8 kg/hr 

G SN0773 — 37.1 kg/hr 

9 SH0371 — 17.8 kg/hr 

Z SH0773 — 37.1 kg/hr 

2 DN0030 — 1.4 kg/hr/stream 








6 4 low, 2 high 

Box 14 

X 

V 

Flow Control 

Description 

Manual pressure 

control valve (PVC) 

Circulation control 

valve 

Sensor Type 


N Ni120 









Foam Systems 

Adhesive & Sealants Equipment Guide Foam Systems | 2-1 

Web Content 


Description 

The Nordson SureFoam dispensing system mixes 

reactive and non-reactive hot melt adhesive with 

inert gas to create a homogenous mixture. As the 

material is dispensed, the gas expands to create a 

closed-cell foam. The foamed material can be applied 

in swirl or bead patterns using Nordson dispensing 

hand-held applicators. SureFoam foaming systems 

are ideal for a wide variety of adhesive applications 

including packaging and assembly, such as cabinets and 

automotive. 

Manual Density Control 

Single adjustment density controls allow for easy setup 

of the foam process. Applications requiring up to 50% 

density reduction can be easily and quickly adjusted. 

Simple Interface 

The design utilizes an input signal from the applicator 

to trigger the mixing process. The melter provides 

precise, controlled heating and functional interlock. 

SureFoam System 

Watch Video 

User-Friendly Design 

Easy to maintain and service with minimal service items and few moving parts. 

Although applied by conventional means, the foamed material provides numerous benefits including: 

• Reduce adhesive consumption up to 50%, depending on adhesive. 

• Longer open time increases work time and provides greater flexibility. 

• Reduced sagging or running for uniform adhesive thickness. 

• Faster set time increases line speeds and production rates. Labor is reduced and less warehouse space is required for inventory. 

• Volumetric increase improves gap filling capability for improved bond strength. 

• Improved wetting increases the ability to penetrate impervious surfaces. 

• Increased penetration creates stronger bonds and results in fewer rejects. 

• Lower heat density reduces heat damage and improves operator safety. 



2-2 | Foam Systems 



Holding capacity 

Melt rate 

Delivery rate (1) 

Parameter 

Specification 

N/A 

N/A 

35 kg/hour (77 lb/hr) 

Density reduction (1) 50% 

Viscosity range (2) 

Gas supply 

Air supply 


Hose/Applicator or Hose/Handgun capacity 


• Heaters 

• Motor/Controls 

Dimensions (L x W x H) 

Weight (empty) 

Approvals and certifications 

(1) 

Actual rates can vary depending on adhesive viscosity and other characteristics. 

1000-30000 cps 

Industrial grade nitrogen 1500 psi minimum 

Clean dry compressed air 6 bar (90 psi) max 

38 - 232 °C (100 - 450 °F) 

Single 

240 Volt single phase, 50/60 Hz 700 Watts (supplied by melter) 

120 Volt or 240 Volt single phase, 90 watts 

349 mm x 260 mm x 476 mm 

13.75 in. x 10.25 in. x 18.75 in.) 

24 kg (53 lbs.) 

CE 

(2) 

Depends on required delivery rates and desired foam density. 

Part Numbers 

Part Number 

Description 

1076606 120 Volt, 50/60 Hz mixer motor/control, 240 Volt heater 

1076675 240 Volt, 50/60 Hz mixer motor/control, 240 Volt heater 

1089072 240 Volt, 50/60 Hz mixer motor/control, 240 Volt heater, PT100 




Web Content 

Foam Systems | 2-3 


Description 

The patented Ultra FoamMix System produces closedcell 

foam from a variety of flowable sealants. It allows 

manual or automated application to components 

with repeatable performance, eliminating the need 

for die-cut and foam-tape gaskets. The system mixes 

sealant materials or adhesives with low-pressure inert 

gas or plant air to produce a homogeneous mixture 

that creates a closed-cell foam when dispensed. The 

system processes and dispenses high-performance 

materials, including silicones, urethanes and plastisols 

at elevated or ambient temperatures. Because chemicals 

are not used, material composition remains unchanged. 

Foamed materials retain basic physical properties such 

as temperature and chemical resistance. 

In bonding applications the Ultra FoamMix system 

dramatically improves the performance of most hot 

melt materials and provides significant material savings 

at the same time. 

Straight-forward PLC controls use a user-friendly 

touch-screen programmed to display and operate in 

local languages. The controller can be cart mounted 

so it can be positioned or moved as needed within the 

10-meter cable length. And, the Ultra FoamMix PLC 

integrates system components like VDK applicators 

and material supply systems. A standard Ethernet 

connection is used for communication to simplify 

worldwide troubleshooting and technical support. 


Watch Video 

Gas content of foamed materials can be adjusted 

to control mechanical properties such as material 

durometer, compression set resistance and flexibility. 

Advanced Application Technology 

• Reduced adhesive consumption of up to 50 percent. 

• Increased open time provides greater process flexibility. 

• Faster set time for increased line speeds and production rates. Labor is reduced and less warehouse space is required for inventory. 

• Volumetric increase for greater gap filing capabilities. 

• Improved wetting increases the ability to bond impervious surfaces and enhances application versatility. 

• Lower heat density helps reduce substrate heat damage while improving operator safety. 





2-4 || Foam Systems 


General Specifications 

• Compact, service-friendly design 

• Siemensr S7 PLC with intuitive touch panel for easy operation and displays of all process parameters in many local languages 

• Integrated control of VDK applicators and material supply system (when specified as complete system) 

• Free selection of foam percentage from 0% (solid) up to 70% foam (gas ratio) depending on material 

• Foam unit for the generation of fine pored foam and higher foam ratios 

• Permanent sensor failure monitoring with visual display 

• Dry output contacts for Alarm and Ready signal 

• 0-10 Volt interface for external pump control 

• Week/Day timer (PLC) 

• Start-up pressure control 

• Choice of temperature sensor PT100, Ni-120 

• Ethernet connection for remote diagnostics & service 

Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens. AG. 

Ultra FoamMix Specifications 

NOTE: These specifications apply to the special stand-alone foam cube. 

Parameter 

Specification* 

Foam station pump sizes (1) 

Up to 18.9 liters/hour 

up to 30.2 liters/hour 

up to 54.6 liters/hour 

up to 126 liters/hour 

up to 210 liters/hour 

Gas injection 

Nitrogen or plant air (low pressure) 


3x 400 VAC + N + PE 

Max. adhesive pressure bar (psi) 100 (1450) 

Max. operating temperature °C (°F) 250 (478) 

Temperature sensors 

PT100 / Ni-120/ Fe-CuNi 

Hose connections 

8, 13, 16, 20mm 

No. of material outlets 1 or 2 

* This is a generic specification. Exact specifications of Engineered Systems are valid with order confirmation only. 

(1) 

Maximum output rate depends on material and foam rate. 

(2) 

Transformer may be needed for any other local power supply. 






Dimensions 

ca. 1708 

ca. 850 

ca. 990 









Web Content 



Description 

A Nordson Extruder is the first choice when processing 

“difficult” adhesives like Polyamide, Polyester or 

Polyolefin (APAO). These adhesives ask for a closed 

system to avoid degradation of the adhesive through 

carbonization and consequently loss of bonding 

performance or other problems caused within the 

system. 

Extruders enable homogeneous melting in a fully closed 

“melt‐on‐demand” system to provide a safe and reliable 

application process. 

Nordson extruders offer the fastest, easiest adhesive 

changes possible compared to other melters without 

time‐ and cost‐intensive cleaning procedures. 

The Nordson Ultra FoamMix EX Extruder offers a 

low‐maintenance, user‐friendly solution to improve 

mechanical properties of adhesives and provide material 

savings with a variety of high‐performance materials. 

Demanding materials like Polyamide or Polyolefin as 

well as other thermoplastics are foamed by low pressure 

nitrogen injection without chemicals so they retain their 

basic physical properties. 

Straight‐forward PLC controls provide a user‐friendly 

touch‐screen programmed to display and operate in 

local languages. The Ultra FoamMix Extruder controls 

easily integrate with the parent machine controls. 

Ultra FoamMix EX Extruder 





The Nordson Ultra FoamMix process dramatically 

improves the performance of most hot melt adhesives 

by mixing them with gas, creating a homogeneous 

solution. As the material is dispensed, the gas expands 

to create a closed-cell foam. The foamed material is 

applied like the more conventional approaches, but 

provides the following benefits: 



• Faster set time for increased line speeds and production rates. 

Labor is reduced and less warehouse space is required for 

inventory. 


• Improved wetting increases the ability to bond impervious 

surfaces and enhances application versatility. 

• Lower heat density helps reduce heat damage while improving 

operator safety. 


• Increased penetration creates stronger bonds and results in 

fewer rejects. 







• PLC control standard: easy integration into existing 

production lines 

• PROFIBUS® interface 

• Ethernet connection for remote diagnostics and service 

• Intuitive graphical touch panel in local languages 




Siemens ® S7 PLC with touch panel (5.7 in. or 10.4 in.) 

• Provide key-to-line interaction with parent machine through 

documented interfaces 

• Visual display of process data 

• ChemCoat® coated conical feeding hopper provide safe 

material supply 

• Cylinder and screw manufactured from tempered nitrified 

steel providing an extremely long lifetime Integrated Ultra 

FoamMix unit 

• Start-up circuit that monitors temperature drops and 

temperature fluctuations for all heating zones 

• All process parameter settings programmable 

• Multiple storage capability provides easy program selection 

• Free selection of foam percentage from 0% (solid) up to 70% 

foam (gas ratio) depending on material 


Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens. AG 

• Zero potential output contacts for reporting temperature 

drops and temperature fluctuations, and ready for operation 

signal. 

• Electronic pressure control for manual and automatic 

operation with excess pressure cutoff 

• Pressure build-up control with automatic switch-over to speed 

regulation during head control 

Parameter 


EX 30 UFM 

EX 60 UFM 

Max. Throughput kg/hr (lb/hr) ( 1 ) 30 (66) 60 (132) 

Foam output L/hr (in 3 /hr) ( 2 ) 60 (3660) 120 (7323) 

Hopper Volume L (in. 3 ) 40 (2640) 60 (3960) 

Rated Power of main drive kW 11 19.4 

Rated Power of UFM drives kW 4.4 6.6 

Rated Heating Power kW ( 3 ) 25.6 30.4 

Electrical Service ( 4 ) 

3x 400VAC + N+ PE 




PT100 / Fe-CuNi 


8, 13, 16, 20 mm 

No. of adhesive outputs 1 or 2 

*This is a generic specification. Exact specifications of Engineered Systems are valid with order confirmation only. 

(1) 

Maximum output rate depends on adhesive; indication is based on Polyamide. 

(2) 

Based on 50% gas. Up to 70% gas content possible. Maximum Foam rate depends on adhesive properties and 

process parameters. 

(3) 

Heating Power without hoses and applicators. 

*(4) 




~2010 



Dimensions 

EX 30 UFM 

~950 

~2564,50 

~2405 





Dimensions contd. 

EX 60 UFM 

1090 

1960 

2782 

2518 




Web Content 



Description 

The Nordson Ultra FoamMix PH Tanks offer a userfriendly 

solution to improve mechanical properties of 

adhesives and provide material savings with a variety of 

high-performance materials. 

Preferably non-critical adhesives which do not react 

with oxygen including PSAs are foamed by injecting 

low-pressure gas into the molten adhesive. Foaming 

without chemicals ensures materials retain their 

basic physical properties and is a sustainable for the 

environment. 

Straight-forward PLC controls use a user-friendly 

touch-screen programmed to display and operate in 

local languages. And, the Ultra FoamMix Tank controls 

easily integrate with the parent machine controls. 




Low-pressure gassing allows use of various gas supplies 

including inert gases or compressed air (depending on 

material). 

Ultra FoamMix PH Tank System 


The Nordson Ultra FoamMix process dramatically improves the performance of most hot melt adhesives by 

mixing them with gas, creating a homogeneous solution. As the material is dispensed, the gas expands to create 

a closed-cell foam. The foamed material is applied like the more conventional approaches, but provides the 

following benefits: 



• Faster set time for increased line speeds and production rates. Labor is reduced and less warehouse space is required for inventory. 


• Improved wetting increases the ability to bond impervious surfaces and enhances application versatility. 

• Lower heat density helps reduce heat damage while improving operator safety. 








• VX anti-stick and anti-oxidation coating for all surfaces 

coming into contact with hot melt. 

• Siemens® S7 PLC with intuitive touch panel for easy operation 

and displays of all process parameters in local languages 

• PROFIBUS® interface 

• Ethernet connection for remote diagnostics and service 

• Free selection of foam percentage from 0% (solid) up to 70% 

foam (gas ratio) (depending on material) 

• Selective temperature setbacks for prolonged production 

breaks 


• Dry output contacts for reporting temperature drops and 

temperature excursions as well as ready for operation signal 

• Double over-temperature protection 

• Freely programmable limit values in the PLC 

• Safety fuses 

• Plug-in pre-melt register 

• Foam circulation mode optional 

• Key-to-line function 

• Week/Day timer (via PLC) 

• Start-up pressure control incl. sensor hoop guard 

Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens. AG 

PROFIBUS is a registerd trademark of PROFIBUS & PROFINET International. 


Parameter 

PH 100 UFM PH 200 UFM PH 400 UFM 

Max. Melt rate kg/hr (lb/hr) (1) 100 (220) 200 (440) 400 (880) 

Foam output L/hr (in 3 /hr) (2) 100 (6102) 200 (1204) 400 (24408) 

Tank Volume L (in. 3 ) 100 (6102) 200 (1204) 400 (24408) 

Rated Power of UFM drives kW 5.6 9.8 15 

Rated Heating Power kW (3) 30 50 65 

Electrical Service (4) 

3 x 400 VAC + N+ PE 




PT100 / Ni-120/ Fe-CuNi 


8, 13, 16, 20 mm 

No. of UFM units 1 1 to 2 1 to 3 

No. of adhesive outputs 

1 or 2 per UFM unit 


(1) 

Maximum output rate depends on adhesive. 

(3) 

Foam rate depends on adhesive as well as on custom 

specification of the UFM unit. 

(3) 

Heating Power without hoses and applicators. 

(4) 







Dimensions 

PH 100 UFM 

1570 

PH 400 UFM 

1654 

2420 

2300 

3145,50 

1550 









Web Content 



200 Series 

Description 

FoamMelt FM200 processors melt thermoplastic 

adhesives and sealants, mix them in solution with 

precisely controlled quantities of an inert gas (CO 2 

or 

N 2 

) via a two-stage gear pump, and deliver a foam hot 

melt of uniform density. 

Processors include adjustable foam density control, 

individual temperature control of heat zones, 

temperature control accuracy to within ± 0.5 °C (1 °F) 

of setpoint, overtemperature protection, and electrical 

quick disconnects for hoses, applicators and solenoids. 

The FoamMelt processor line includes a wide selection 

of models with varying capacities, reservoir types, 

melt rates and controls to meet specific adhesive and 

application requirements. 

• Provide individual temperature adjustments for tank and/or 

grid and reservoir. 

FoamMelt 200 Processor 

• Include 3 horsepower, variable-speed AC electric drive. 

• Include a density controller assembly for handling hot melt 

viscosity ranges of 1,000 to 40,000 cps, including general 

purpose hot melts with relatively long pot lives and pressuresensitives. 

• Electronics meet IEC norms for static discharge and couplednoise 

immunity. 

Front Mounted Hydraulic System Controls 

The FM 200 unit incorporates the advanced Vista control system, which improves productivity by automating 

many operator functions. Vista controls offer the following features: 

• Superior noise immunity through advanced components and 

design techniques. 

• Fully-compatible with existing Nordson RTD applicators and 

hoses. 

• Control design permits customization of most system settings 

with password protection to minimize unauthorized access. 

Easy-to-operate control membrane with bright LED displays 

of actual and setpoint temperatures provide quick verification 

of all heat zones. 

• Standard 7-day clock with manual override allows automatic 

start-up and shutdown for each day of the week. Reducedtemperature 

standby mode minimizes adhesive degradation 

and lowers unit energy consumption during idle periods. 

• Programmable temperature alarm bands for each zone 

monitors and identifies potential problems before operation 

is effected. Other programmable features include overtemperature 

setpoint, sequential or simultaneous start-up, 

display of heater proportioning, and Celsius or Fahrenheit 

display. 

• Output contacts for System-Ready, Fault and Warning 

functions allow automated remote monitoring of system 

status. 

• Advanced diagnostics quickly locate a fault condition to help 

facilitate servicing. 





200 Series 

Features 

• Enhanced system provides advanced controls, improved 

serviceability and pinpoint temperature control. 

• Utilizes a patented process to improve material performance. 

The foaming process mixes inert gas with the hot melt 

material for increased open times and reduced material usage. 

• The pressure control valve, the filter/density controller and 

the drain valve are all front mounted to provide easy access for 

maintenance. 

• Advanced Vista control system improves productivity by 

automating many operator functions. 

• A density sensor located in the filter/density controller 

automatically monitors and adjusts the gas/adhesive mix. 


Parameter 

Specification 


Grid/reservoir and warm hopper 

Holding capacity kg (lb) Grid/reservoir/hopper 32 (70) 

Melt rate (1) kg/hr (lb/hr) 46 (100) 

Pump type 

Two-stage gear pump 

Maximum pump rate kg/hr (lb/hr) 

MCDR (2) MIDR (3) 

25 (55) standard pump 

34 (75) high output pump 

Maximum pump speed rpm 900 

Motor rating 

AC variable-speed, 3 HP 

Inert gas supply (industrial grade CO2 or N2) kPa (psi) 207-345 (30-50) 

Recommended operating air pressure (dry, filtered) kPa (psi) 620-830 (90-120) 

Viscosity range centipoise 1,000-40,000 

Type manifold 

External circulating 

Operating temperature ranges 

38 - 205°C (100 - 400°F) 

Hose ports (Hydraulic) 

4 (2 supply, 2 return) 

Hose capacity (Electric) 6 

Applicator capacity (Electric) 4 


Amperage (maximum) 

Voltage 

47 A 

220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3Ø 

400/230V, 50 Hz, 3/N/PE, 27 A 

Maximum system power capacity @ 230 VAC 15.0 kW (43 A) 

Weight kg (lb) 130 (285) 


CE 

(1) 

Actual rate can vary depending on adhesive viscosity and other 

characteristics. 

(2) 

Maximum Continuous Delivery Rate @ 50% density reduction. 

(3) 

Maximum Instantaneous Delivery Rate @ 50% density reduction 

and 50% applicator duty cycle - 1.0 second.. 






200 Series 

Selection Chart 

Part Number 

Description 

1001601 FM 200, 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3Ø, without neutral, standard pump 

1001602 FM 200, 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3Ø, without neutral, hi-output pump 

1001603 FM 200, 400/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3Ø, with neutral, standard pump 

1001604 FM 200, 400/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3Ø, with neutral, hi-output pump 

Accessories 

Accessory P/N Description Comment 

H-20 and H-200/ 

Best Choice applicator 

installation kits 

Hose installation kits noncirculating 

applicators 

Hand-held applicator 

installation kit dead-end 

hand-held applicators 

Electrical extension cords 

Hose fittings, 5/8 in. hoses 

Gas installation kits 

Density control/filter 

assemblies 

310197 H-20 applicator kit 

310198 H-200/Best Choice applicator kit 

Do not use with waterwash 

hoses. 

310790 Standard hose, 90° 

310791 Standard hose, 45° 

310792 Standard hose, straight 

111094 1.8 m (6 ft) automatic hose, 5/8 in. For recirculation loop. 

972120 Hand-held applicator hose connector 

Order one for each hand-held 

applicator. 

303536 5/16 in. hose-to-manifold fitting 

115577 1.8 m (6 ft) extension cord 


Order to connect jumper hoses 

to unit. 


719042 Automatic hose installation kit 

719023 Hose-to-manifold fitting 

972036 Hose to manifold, 90° 

719024 Hose-to-applicator fitting (straight) 

719047 Hose-to-applicator fitting (45°) 

271382 Carbon dioxide gas installation kit 

273170 Nitrogen gas installation kit 

142523 One-hole slug for low-viscosity materials 

142522 Two-hole slug for medium-viscosity materials Shipped with unit. 

142517 Four-hole slug for high-viscosity materials 





200 Series 

Dimensions 

81 cm 

(32 in.) 

107 cm 

(42 in. ) 71 cm 

(28 in.) 



Bulk Melters 


Web Content 

Bulk Melters | 3-1 

VersaDrum ® 

200-liter or 55-gallon Drum Melters 

Description 

Nordson VersaDrum bulk melters are designed for 

precise demanding hot melt adhesive application from 

200-liter or 55-gallon drums. With a variety of pump 

types and sizes, VersaDrum melters are customizable 

to accommodate a wide variety of adhesives and meet 

specific manufacturing requirements. A powerful 

industrial PC provides full control of the adhesive 

system via a touch-screen interface and displays 

messages, warnings, and indicators for every operator 

activity and machine status condition. 

VersaDrum bulk melters only melt the top surface 

of adhesive allowing the remaining material in the 

drum to stay solid to reduce thermal stress and protect 

bonding characteristics. Particularly well-suited for 

reactive adhesives, such as moisture-cure polyurethanes, 

the hydraulic passages are designed to eliminate dead 

spaces where undesired curing could result. 

For applications that require continuous operation, 

Nordson’s automatic changeover system links two bulk 

melters together to eliminate the downtime associated 

with drum changes. 

VersaDrum Melter 

VersaDrum melters: 

• Simplify installation and set-up 


• Offer production flexibility 

• Protect adhesive integrity 

Features 

• Graphical, touch-screen control 

• Single-side access for controls and drum changes 

• Variable speed motors 

• Precision gear pumps 

• Pressure control valve 

• Manual or automatic aeration systems 

• Adjustable drum clamp 

• Modular, non-stick axial, finned and smooth melt platens 



3-2 | Bulk Melters 

VersaDrum ® 




Parameter 

Drum diameter 

(Drum volume) 

Maximum pump rate 1 

Platen surface 

Number of hose/applicator pairs 





Temperature sensor 




Protection 

Approvals 

Options 

VersaDrum Bulk Melter 200 liter 

Gear pumps with variable speed AC motors 

571 mm (22.5 in) or [Japan only 567 mm (22.3 in)] 

(200 liter / 55 gallon) 


Finned (high melt), Axial or Smooth 

2 standard (hydraulic & electrical) 

up to 6 additional (electrical only) 

100 bar (1500 psi) 

200 bar (3000 psi) - HP piston pump only 

40 to 230 °C (100 to 450 °F) 

-5 to 40 C (23 to 100 °F) 

± 1 °C (2 °F) 

Ni 120 (or PT-100 optional) 

200 VAC 3 phase delta 50/60 Hz 


400 VAC 3 phase Y 50/60 Hz 




39 kW 

672 kg (1482 lb) 

IP54 

CE 

Output pressure control - flow control bypass or automatic pressure control 

PROFIBUS-DP, PROFINET IO, ControlNet, or EtherNet/IP Communications 

6 Additional temperature channels 

Pump choices - single stream, dual stream, hardened, or two pumps 

Fiber drum jacket 

Automatic or Manual aeration system 

Retractable drip shield 

Exhaust hood 

Warning light tower 

Pallet load frame 

(1) 


(2) 


(3) 







VersaDrum ® 


Dimensions 

Product dimensions 

• Width (W) 

• Height (H) 

• Depth (D) 

Dimensions mm (in.) 

Installation (service) dimensions 

• Width 

• Height 

• Depth 

VersaDrum 

1520 mm (59.9 in.) 

3010 mm (118.5 in.) 

740 mm (29.2 in.) 

2100 mm (82.7 in.) 

3010 mm (118.5 in.) 

1103 mm (43.5 in.) 

540 

1268 

1160 




VersaDrum ® 


VersaDrum Configuration 

BASE MELTER 

Melter Type 

Platen 

Surface 

Container Diameter 

Voltage 

Pump 

Number of 

Hose/ 

Applicator Pairs 

Maximum 

Temperature 

Temperature 

Sensor 

/ 

Boxes 

1-6 

Box 

7 

Box 

8 

Box 

9 

Box 

10 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Box 

13 

Box 

14 

Base Melter 

Boxes 

1-6 

Box 

7 

Box 

8 

Melter Type 

Description 

Code 

VD200- 

Platen Surface 

Description 

Code 

Smooth Surface 

U 

Axial Fins 

R 

Finned - High Melt 

P 


Description 

Code 

571 mm Drum (Worldwide Standard) D 

567 mm Drum (Japan Only) J 

Box 

10 

Pumps (contd.) 

SN6272 − 301.1 kg/hr (Standard − PU50/85) 

M 

SH0371 − 17.8 kg/hr (Hardened − PR12m2NH) 

P 


S 


R 

GH1160 − 55.7 kg/hr (Hardened Tool Steel Gerotor) T 

SH1891 − 90.8 kg/hr (Hardened − PU15/85-NH) 

U 

SH3135 − 150.5 kg/hr (Hardened − PU25/85-NH) V 

SH4390 − 210.7 kg/hr (Hardened − PU35/85-NH) W 

SH6272 − 301.1 kg/hr (Hardened PU50/85-NH) 

Z 

DN0093 − 2x4.5 kg/hr (Dual Stream − DS-PU6-2m1) 1 





Piston Pump − Low Pressure (100 bar) Configuration B 

Piston Pump − High Pressure (200 bar) Configuration A 

Box 

9 

Voltage 

Description 

Code 

200VAC 3 Phase Delta 50/60 Hz 2 


400VAC 3 Phase WYE 50/60 Hz 4 




Box 

11 

Number of Hose/Applicator Pairs 

Description 

Code 

2 Hose/Applicator Pairs (Primary Connections at Platen) 2 

4 Hose/Applicator Pairs (2 Additional Connections) 4 



Box 

10 

Pumps 

Description 

SN0371 − 17.8 kg/hr (Standard − PR12m2) 



GN1160 − 55.7 kg/hr (Standard Gerotor Pump) 




Code 

F 

C 

G 

H 

J 

K 

L 

Box 

12 

Box 

13 

Maximum Temperature 

Description 

Code 

150 °C / 300 °F L 

180 °C / 350 °F M 

230 °C / 450 °F H 

Ni-120 Sensors 

PT-100 Sensors 


Description 

Code 

N 

P 





VersaDrum ® 


OPTIONS 

Hose Fittings 

Drum Clamp 

or Jacket 

Aeration System 

Pressure 

Control Options 

Pressure Indication 

Warning 

Light Tower 

Main Switch 

Options 

Host 



Exhaust Hood 

Additional Pre-melting 

Features 

Pallet Load 

Two Pump Option 

External Pressure 

Indicator 

Application Type 

Reserved for 

future use 

Box 

15 

Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Box 

19 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Box 

24 

Box 

25 

Box 

26 

Box 

27 

Box 

28 

Box 

29 

Box 

30 

Options 

Box 

15 

Hose Fittings 

Description 

Code 

8 mm (5/16 in.) and 16 mm (5/8”) Hose Fittings X 

22 mm (7/8 in.) Hose Fitting K 

28 mm (1-1/8 in.) Hose Fittings M 

Box 

21 

Main Switch Options 

Description 

Code 

Red − 3 Pole 

X 

Red − 4 Pole 1 

Black − 3 Pole 2 


Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Box 

19 

Box 

20 

Drum Clamp or Jacket 

Description 

With Drum Clamp 

Fiber Drum Jacket 


Description 

Automatic 

Manual 

Pressure Control Options 

Description 

Manual Pressure Control Valve 

Pneumatic Pressure Control Valve 

Automatic Pressure Control 

Flow Control ByPass 

Output Pressure Control 


Description 

None 


Light Tower 

Code 

P 

F 

Code 

A 

X 

Code 

X 

M 

P 

F 

C 

Code 

X 

A 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Box 

24 

Box 

25 


Description 

None 

PROFIBUS-DP 


ControlNet 

EtherNet/IP 

Retractable Drip Shield 

Description 

None 

With Retractable Drip Shield 

None 

With Exhaust Hood 

Exhaust Hood 

Description 

Additional Pre-melting Features 

Description 

Additional Pre-melting features 

Bookbinding Spine-gluing 

Bookbinding Side-gluing 

Code 

X 

D 

P 

N 

E 

Code 

X 

D 

Code 

X 

E 

Code 

K 

B 

S 

None 

With Light Tower 

Description 

Code 

X 

W 

Box 

26 

Pallet Load Frame 

Description 

None 

With Pallet Load Frame 

Code 

X 

W 




VersaDrum ® 


Options (contd.) 

Box 

27 

Two Pump Option 

Description 

None 

Two Pumps with Single Key-to-Line for both 

Two Pumps with Individual Key-to-Line per drive 

Code 

X 

D 

K 

Box 

28 


Description 

Code 

External Pressure Indicator # 

Box 

29 

PUR 


Application Type 

Description 

Code 

P 

X 




Web Content 


VersaPail ® 

20-liter or 5-gallon Pail Melters 

Description 

Nordson VersaPail bulk melters are designed for 


20-liter or 5-gallon pails. With a variety of pump 

types and sizes, VersaPail melters are customizable to 

accommodate a wide variety of adhesives and meet 




messages and indicators for each operator activity and 

every machine status condition. 

Nordson VersaPail bulk melters are designed for 


20-liter or 5-gallon pails. With a variety of pump 

types and sizes, VersaPail melters are customizable to 

accommodate a wide variety of adhesives and meet 




messages and indicators for each operator activity and 

every machine status condition. 

For applications that require continuous operation, 

Nordson’s automatic changeover system links two bulk 

melters together to eliminate the downtime associated 

with pail changes. 

VersaPail Bulk Melter 20-liter 

VersaPail melters: 

• Simplify installation and set-up 


• Offer production flexibility 


Features 

• Graphical, touch-screen control 

• Single-side access for controls and pail changes 

• Variable speed motors 

• Precision gear pumps 

• Pressure control valve 

• Manual or automatic aeration systems 

• Pail centering and clamping for accurate pail positioning and 

control 




VersaPail ® 




Parameter 

Pail diameter 

(Pail volume) 

Maximum pump rate 1 

Platen surface 








VersaPail Bulk Melter 20 Liter 

Gear pumps with variable speed AC motors 

280 mm (11 in) or 286 mm (11.3 in) 

(20 liter / 5 gallon) 


Axial or Smooth 

2 standard (hydraulic & electrical) 

up to 4 additional (electrical only) 

100 bar (1500 psi) 

200 bar (3000 psi) - HP piston pump only 

40 to 230 °C (100 to 450 °F) 

-5 to 40 °C (23 to 100 °F) 

± 1 °C (2 °F) 

Ni 120 (or PT-100 optional) 



400 VAC 3 phase Y 50/60 Hz 




21 kW 


Protection 

Approvals 

Options 

332 kg (732 lb) 

IP54 

CE 

Output pressure control - flow control bypass or automatic pressure control PROFIBUS-DP, 

PROFINET IO, ControlNet, or EtherNet/IP Communications 

4 additional temperature channels 

Pump choices - single stream, dual stream, hardened, or two pumps automatic or 

Manual aeration system 

Casters 

Exhaust hood 

Warning light tower 

(1) 


(2) 


(3) 







VersaPail ® 


Dimensions 

Product dimensionss 

• Width (W) 


• Depth (D) 



• Width 

• Height 

• Depth 

VersaPail 

1190 mm (46.9 in.) 

1920 mm (75.6 in.) 

540 mm (21.3 in.) 

1570 mm (61.8 in.) 

1920 mm (75.6 in.) 

903 mm (35.6 in.) 

1920 

1190 

380 

87 

540 

276 




VersaPail ® 


VersaPail Configuration 

BASE MELTER 

Melter 

Type 

Platen 

Surface 

Container 

Diameter 

Voltage 

Pump 

Number of 

Hose/ 


Maximum 

Temperature 

Temperature 

Sensor 

/ 

Boxes 

1-6 

Box 

7 

Box 

8 

Box 

9 

Box 

10 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Box 

13 

Box 

14 

Base Melter 

Box 

1-6 

Melter Type 

Box 

10 

Pumps (contd.) 

Box 7 

Description 

VP020-- 


Description 


Smooth, with Soft Platen Seal 

Axial Fins 

Code 

Code 

U 

B 

R 


Q 


P 


S 


R 

GH1160 − 55.7 kg/hr (Hardened Tool Steel Gerotor) T 






Piston Pump − Low Pressure (100 bar) Configuration B 

Piston Pump − High Pressure (200 bar) Configuration A 

Box 8 


Box 9 

Description 

Code 

280 mm Pail (Europe) K 

286 mm Pail (North America and Asia) N 

Voltage 

Box 

11 


Description 

Code 

2 Hose/Applicator Pairs (Primary Connections at Platen) 2 



Box 

10 

Description 

Code 



400VAC 3 Phase WYE 50/60 Hz 4 

400VAC 3 Phase Delta 50/60 Hx 5 


Pumps 

Box 

12 


Description 

Code 

150 °C / 300 °F L 

180 °C / 350 °F M 

230 °C / 450 °F H 

Description 






GN1160 − 55.7 kg/hr (Standard Gerotor Pump) 


Code 

D 

E 

F 

C 

G 

H 

N 

Box 

13 


PT-100 Sensors 


Description 

Code 

N 

P 





VersaPail ® 


OPTIONS 

Hose Fittings 

Pail Clamp 

Aeration 

System 

Pressure 

Control 

Options 

Pressure 

Indication 

Warning 

Light Tower 

Main Switch 

Options 

Host 


Casters 

Exhaust Hood 

Additional Premelting 

Features 

Reserved for 

future use 

Reserved for 

future use 

External Pressure 

Indicator 

Reserved for 

future use 

Reserved for 

future use 

Box 

15 

Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Box 

19 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Box 

24 

Box 

25 

Box 

26 

Box 

27 

Box 

28 

Box 

29 

Box 

30 

Options 

Box 

15 

Hose Fittings 

Box 

21 


Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Description 

Code 

8 mm (5/16 in.) and 16 mm (5/8 in.) Hose Fittings X 

Pail Clamp 

Description 

Code 

With Pail Clamp 

P 

Without Pail Clamp 

X 


Description 

Code 

Automatic 

A 

Manual 

X 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Description 

Code 

Red − 3 Pole 

X 

Red − 4 Pole 1 



None 

PROFIBUS-DP 


ControlNet 

EtherNet/IP 


Description 

Casters 

Code 

X 

D 

P 

N 

E 

Box 

18 


Description 


Pneumatic Pressure Control Valve 


Flow Control ByPass 

Output Pressure Control 

Code 

X 

M 

P 

F 

C 

Box 

24 

Description 

None 

With Casters 

None 


Exhaust Hood 

Description 

Code 

X 

C 

Code 

X 

E 

Box 

19 

Box 

20 

None 


None 

With Light Tower 


Description 

Light Tower 

Description 

Code 

X 

A 

Code 

X 

W 

Box 

25 

Box 

28 

Additional Pre-melting Features 

Description 

Additional Pre-melting features 

Bookbinding Spine-gluing 

Bookbinding Side-gluing 


Code 

K 

B 

S 

Description 

Code 

External Pressure Indicator # 




VersaPail ® 






Web Content 



Description 

DuraDrum bulk melters are designed to provide 

simple, low-maintenance application of hot melt 

adhesives, sealants and butyls from 200-liter or 

55-gallon drums. Many standard features, such as 

manual pressure control and blow-off valves, simplify 

daily operation and maintenance, helping increase 

productivity. Choices of platen surfaces and gear 

pumps give DuraDrum bulk melters flexibility to meet 

a variety of production demands. 

DuraDrum bulk melters only melt the top surface 

of adhesive, allowing the remaining material in the 

drum to stay solid. This reduces thermal stress on 

temperature sensitive materials and protects the 

bonding characteristics. 

A graphical, membrane control panel simplifies 

programming and displays system status. The versatile 

control panel provides programming by either they 

keypad or arrow keys. 

DuraDrum Bulk Melter 

Features 

• Modular, non-stick axial, finned and smooth melt platens for 

quick change and easy clean-up 

• Dual hose/applicator configuration allows supply of two 

independent applications from a single bulk melter 

• Up to eight additional temperature control channels to 

control downstream hoses and applicators 

• Manual pressure control valve to control adhesive application 

pressure 

• Integral, programmable seven-day clock 

• Hand-held applicator trigger connections - pump can be 

turned on/off with hand-held applicator trigger to minimize 

adhesive degradation 

• Uses standard 3000 style Ni-120 Nordson hoses and 

applicators 







Parameter 

Specification 

Gear pumps with fixed speed AC motor 

Drum diameter mm (in.) 571 or 567 (22.5 or 22.3) 

Maximum pump rate( 1 ) kg/hr (lb/hr) 245 (450) 







2 (hydraulic & electrical) 

2 additional (electrical only) 

100 bar (1500 psi) 

40-230°C (100-450°F) 

-5 to 50°C (23 to 122°F) 

± 1°C (2°F) 

Ni-120 

200 VAC 3Ø delta 50/60 Hz 


400 VAC 3Ø Y 50/60 Hz 

Electrical service( 2 ) 





33,100 watts 

Weight( 3 ) kg (lb) (empty) 675 (1488) 




Protection 

IP54 

(1) 


(2) 


(3) 







Dimensions 


• Width (W) 


• Depth (D) 



• Width 

• Height 

• Depth 

DuraDrum 

1570 mm (61.8 in.) 

3010 mm (118.5 in.) 

740 mm (29.1 in.) 

2100 mm (82.7 in.) 

3010 mm (118.5 in.) 

1105 mm (343.5 in.) 

3010 

1570 





DuraDrum Configuration 

BASE MELTER 

Melter Type 

Platen 

Surface 

Container 

Diameter 

Voltage 

Pump 

Number of Hose/ 


Maximum 

Temperature 

Temperature 

Sensor 

/ 

Boxes 1-6 Box 7 Box 8 Box 9 Box 10 Box 11 Box 12 Box 13 Box 14 

Base Melter 

Box 

7 


Description 


Axial Fins 

Finned - high melt 

Code 

U 

R 

P 

Box 

10 

Pump Type (contd.) 

SN1891 - 18.91 cc/rev (Standard - PU15/85) 




J 

K 

L 

M 

Box 

8 


Description 

Code 

571 mm Drum (Worldwide Standard) D 

567 mm Drum (Japan Only) J 

SH0371 - 3.71 cc/rev (Hardened - PR6m1NH) 

SH0557 - 5.57cc/rev (Hardened - PR6m1NH) 

SH0773 - 11.60cc/rev (Hardened - PR6m1NH) 

GH1160 - 11.60 cc/rev (Hardened Gerotor) 

SH1891 - 18.91cc/rev (Hardened - PU15/85NH) 

P 

S 

R 

T 

U 

SH3135 - 31.35cc/rev (Hardened - PU25/85NH) 

V 

Box 

9 

Box 

10 

Voltage 

Description 

Code 

200 VAC 3 phase Delta 50/60 Hz 2 


400 VAC 3 phase WYE 50/60 Hz 4 




Pump Type 

Description 

Code 

SN0371 - 3.71 cc/rev (Standard - PR12m2) F 

SN0557 - 5.57 cc/rev (Standard - PR18m2) C 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

SH4390 - 43.90cc/rev (Hardened - PU35/85NH) W 

SH6272 - 62.72cc/rev (Hardened - PU50/85NH) Z 


Description 

Code 

6 H/A pairs (2 @ Platen and 2 additional) 6 


Description 

Code 

150 °C / 300 °F L 

180 °C / 350 °F M 

230 °C / 450 °F H 

SN0773 - 7.73 cc/rev (Standard - PR18m2) 

GN1160 - 11.60 cc/rev (Standard Gerotor) 

G 

H 

Box 

13 


Description 

Code 


N 






OPTIONS 

Hose Fittings 

Pail Clamp 

Aeration 

System 

Pressure 

Control 

Options 

Pressure 

Indication 

Warning 

Light Tower 

Main Switch 

Options 

Host 

Communcations 

Casters 

Exhaust Hood 

Additional 

Pre-Melting 

Features 

Reserved for future use 

Box 

15 

Box 

16 

Options 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Box 

19 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Box 

24 

Box 

25 

Box 

26 

Box 

27 

Box 

28 

Box 

29 

Box 

30 

Box 

15 

Hose Fittings 

Box 

22 


Description 

Code 

Description 

Code 

8mm (5/16”) and 16mm (5/8”) 

X 

None 

X 

22mm (7/8”) Hose 

28mm (1-1/8”) Hose 

K 

M 

Box 

23 

Casters 

Box 

16 

Pail Clamp 

None 

Description 

Code 

X 

Description 

Drum Clamp 

Fiber Drum Clamp 

Code 

P 

F 

Box 

24 

Exhaust Hood 

Description 

Code 

Box 

17 


None 


X 

E 

Manual 

Description 

Code 

X 

Box 

25 

Additional PreMelting Features 

Description 

Code 

Box 

18 


Description 

Code 

None 

With Additional Pre-Melting Features 

X 

K 


X 

Boxes 

26 - 30 

Future Usage 

Box 

19 


None 

Description 

Code 

X 

Description 

Code 

None 

X 

Box 

20 


Description 

Code 

None 

X 









Web Content 



Description 

DuraPail bulk melters are designed to provide simple, 

low-maintenance application of hot melt adhesives, 

sealants and butyls from 20-liter and 5-gallon pails. 

Many standard features, such as manual pressure 

control and blow-off valves, simplify daily operation 

and maintenance, helping increase productivity. 

Choices of platen surfaces and gear pumps give 

DuraPail bulk melters flexibility to meet a variety of 

production demands. 

DuraPail bulk melters only melt the top surface of 

adhesive, allowing the remaining material in the pail to 

stay solid. This reduces thermal stress on temperature 

sensitive materials and protects the bonding 


DuraPail bulk melters only melt the top surface of 

adhesive, allowing the remaining material in the pail to 

stay solid. This reduces thermal stress on temperature 

sensitive materials and protects the bonding 


DuraPail Bulk Melter 

Features 

• Choice of axial or smooth platen 

• Manual pressure control valve to control adhesive application 

pressure 

• Dual hose/applicator configuration allows supply of two 

independent applications from a single bulk melter 

• Four additional temperature control channels to control 

downstream hoses and applicators 

• Single-side control and pail-change access 

• Integral, programmable seven-day clock 

• Hand-held applicator trigger connections - pump can be 

turned on/off with hand-held applicator trigger to minimize 

adhesive degradation 

• Uses standard Best Choice (Ni-120) Nordson hoses and 

applicators 

• All controls and pail change operations are handled from one 

side of the unit 






Parameter 

Specification 


Gerotor or Gear pump with fixed speed AC motor 

Pail diameter mm (in.) 280 or 286 (11 or 11.3) 

Maximum pump rate (1) kg/hr (lb/hr) 92 (203) 







2 (hydraulic & electrical) 

2 additional (electrical only) 

100 bar (1500 psi) 

40 to 230°C (100 to 450°F) 

-5 to 50 C (23 to 122°F) 

± 1°C (2°F) 

Ni-120 




400 VAC 3Ø Y 50/60 Hz 




9100 watts 


Ni-120 

Protection 

IP54 

Weight kg (lb) (3) (empty) 335 (739) 




(1) 


(2) 

Permitted deviation from rated line voltage is ±10% 

(3) 







Dimensions 


• Width (W) 


• Depth (D) 



• Width 

• Height 

• Depth 

DuraPail 

1190 mm (46.9 in.) 

1920 mm (75.6 in.) 

540 mm (21.3 in.) 

1570 mm (61.8 in.) 

1920 mm (75.6 in.) 

903 mm (35.6 in.) 

540 

1268 

1160 





DuraPail Configuration 

BASE MELTER 

Melter Type 

Platen 

Surface 

Container 

Diameter 

Voltage 

Pump 



Maximum 

Temperature 

Temperature 

Sensor 

/ 

Boxes 

1-6 

Box 

7 

Box 

8 

Box 

9 

Box 

10 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Box 

13 

Box 

14 

Base Melter 

Box 

1-6 

Melter Type 

Box 

10 

Pump Type 

Box 

7 

Box 

8 

Description 

Code 

DP020-- 


Description 

Code 


U 

Axial Fins 

R 


Description 

Code 

280 mm Pail (Europe) K 

286 mm Pail (North America & Asia) N 

Description 

SN0093-4.5 kg/hr(Standard-PR6m1) 

SN0186-8.9 kg/hr(Standard-PR12m1) 

SN0371-7.8kg/hr(Standard-PR12m2) 



GN1160-55.7kg/hr(Standard Gerotor) 

SH0093-4.5kg/hr(Hardened-PR6m1NH) 





GH1160-55.7kg/hr(Hardened Gerotor) 

Code 

D 

E 

F 

C 

G 

H 

N 

Q 

P 

S 

R 

T 

Box 

9 

Voltage 

Description 

Code 



400 VAC 3 phase WYE 50/60 Hz 4 



Box 

11 

Box 

12 


Description 

4 Hose/Applicator pairs 

(2 at Platen and 2 additional) 


Code 

Description 

Code 

150 °C / 300 °F L 

180 °C / 350 °F M 

230 °C / 450 °F H 

4 

Box 

13 


Description 


Code 

N 






OPTIONS 

Hose Fittings 

Pail Clamp 


Pressure Control 

Options 

Pressure 

Indication 

Warning Light 

Tower 

Main Switch 

Options 

Host 

Communicatio 

Casters 

Exhaust Hood 

Additional 

Pre-Melting 

Features 

Reserved for future use 

Box 

15 

Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Box 

19 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Box 

24 

Box 

25 

Box 

26 

Box 

27 

Box 

28 

Box 

29 

Box 

30 

Options 

Box 

15 

Hose Fittings 

Box 

21 


Description 

Code 

Description 

Code 

8mm (5/16”) and 16mm (5/8”) 

X 

Red - Three Pole 

X 

Box 

16 

Pail Clamp 

Description 

With Pail Clamp 

Code 

P 

Box 

22 

None 


Description 

Code 

X 

Without Pail Clamp 

X 

Box 

23 

Casters 

Box 

17 

Manual 


Description 

Code 

X 

None 

With Casters 

Description 

Code 

X 

C 

Box 

18 


Description 


Code 

X 

Box 

24 

Exhaust Hood 

Description 

None 


Code 

X 

E 

Box 

19 

None 


Description 

Code 

X 

Box 

25 

Additional Pre-Melting Features 

Description 

None 

With Additional Pre-Melting Features 

Code 

X 

K 

Box 

20 

None 


Description 

Code 

X 

Boxes 

26 - 30 

None 

Future Usage 

Description 

Code 

X 








PUR Melters 

Adhesive & Sealants Equipment Guide PUR Melters | 4-1 

Web Content 


Description 

Nordson PURBlue 4 adhesive melters simplify use of 

moisture-cure reactive (PUR) hotmelt adhesives in 

two-, three-, or four-kilogram foil encased slugs. The 

user-friendly design offers simple, reliable operation 

with quick disassembly for ease of cleaning and 

maintenance. The “melt-on-demand” process uses 

only the adhesive needed so reduces thermal stress 

and protects bonding characteristics of the unused 

PUR, which remains sealed in its foil bag. Adjustable 

force on the foil bag delivers optimal contact between 

adhesive and melting grid to minimize adhesive residue 

in empty bags. The ability to easily use small volumes 

of the PUR helps increase productivity and reduce 

adhesive waste. 

PURBlue 4 melters: 

• Are easy to install and operate with no inert gas requirement 

• Provide easy day-to-day operation and maintenance 

• Utilize true melt-on-demand temperature control system 

• Maximize adhesive usage and reduce residual waste 


• Provide simple shutdown procedure for overnight or 

weekends 

PURBlue 4 Slug Melter 

Watch Video 

Features 

• Graphic indicators and easy-to-use controls simplify 

programming and system monitoring 

• Level sensors provide indicators and warnings for piston 

status, slug status and reservoir level 

• Easy-access panels make maintenance quick and easy 

• Single-tool, quick-release fasteners on all panels and covers 

• Pneumatic piston with level indicator provides optimal 

contact with melting grid and visibility of PUR use 

• Swiveling tank lid allows quick, easy change of foil bags 

• Variety of precision, variable-speed gear pumps available with 

key-to-line 

• Manual or automatic pressure control options 

• Sensor monitors lid operation 

• Flow-through output manifold with no dead spaces can 

accommodate up to three hoses 

• Quick plug-in hose/applicator pairs 

• Handgun trigger connections 



4-2 | PUR Melters 




Foil bag diameter 

Melt rate (per hour) 

Holding capacity 


Parameter 




Specification 

PUR slug melter with spur gear pump 

125 mm and 150 mm 

4 kg/hr (9 lb/hr) 

One slug plus 0.75 kg reservoir 

7.7 cc/rev. 

75 bar (1100 psi) 

Nickel RTD (Ni-120) 

40 to 175°C (100 to 350°F) 

Ambient temperature range 0 to 50°C (32 to 122° F) 

Viscosity range 




up to 50,000 cps 

200 VAC 1 or 3 phase 50/60 Hz 

200 to 240 VAC 1 or 3 phase 50/60 Hz 


6000 watts 



Key-to-Line 

Number of hose/applicator pairs 1 3 

Approximate weight (empty) 

Protection 

(1) 

Standard Blue SeriesTM hoses and applicators 

100 kg (221 lb) 

IP32 

Dimensions 

Dimensions mm (in.) PURBlue 4 

Product dimension 

• Width (W) 


• Depth (D) 


• Width 

• Height 

• Depth 

685 mm (27.0 in.) 

964 mm (37.9 in.) 

382 mm (15.0 in.) 

1112 mm (43.8 in.) 

964 mm (37.9 in.) 

782 mm (30.8 in.) 




PURBlue 4 Part Numbers 

PUR Melters | 4-3 


240 VAC 3 Phase Delta or 400 VAC 3 Phase Wye 

Part Number Hopper Size Pump Pressure Control 

1090912 130 mm SN1710 (PR100m3) Manual 




1105934 134 mm SN0371(PR12m2) Manual 




1095048 130 mm SN1710 (PR100m3) with Flow Control Option 









1107725 134 mm SN1710 (PR100m3) Automatic (low pressure) 

1108108 130 mm SN0371 (PR12m2) Automatic 















1106680 154 mm SN0031(PR2m1) with Flow Control Option 






200 VAC 3 Phase Delta (Primarily for Japan) 

Part Number Hopper Size Pump Pressure Control 








1097667 130 mm SN0371 (PR12m2 with Flow Control Option 


1102634 154mm SN0062 (PR4m1) Manual 

1107436 154mm SN0046 (PR3m1) Manual 





Web Content 



Description 

VersaPUR slug melters efficiently process polyurethane 

(PUR) hot melt adhesives from 20-liter foil-encased 

slugs. The melter was designed to be easy-to-use and 

easy-to-clean to simplify PUR use for a wider range of 

manufacturers. The highly-versatile VersaPUR melters 

are configurable for specific application requirements. 

Benefits 

• Reduce thermal stress and protect bonding characteristics 

with melt-on-demand technology. 

• Minimize or eliminate downtime with two adhesive level 

warnings. 

• Simple set-up and operation with intuitive, graphical touch 

screen control. 

• Easy cleaning and maintenance with smooth, nonstick 

release-coated surfaces and ready-access panels and 

components. 

VersaPUR Slug Melter 

Features 

• Graphical touch-screen control provides visibility and 

monitoring of system status. 

• Smooth, non-stick release coated surfaces and tiltable tank 

provide easy access and ease of clean-up and maintenance. 

• Stamp design minimizes the amount of adhesive remaining in 

the foil bag. 

• Industrial PC (IPC) provides intuitive melter control of all 

relevant functions – pump speed, temperatures, etc. – for 

reproducible adhesive bonding quality. 

• Two (2) measuring sensors installed in the reservoir provide 

both “slug low” and “slug empty” warnings to operator to 

minimize machine downtime. 

• Swiveling tank lid allows easy change of foil bags. 

• Refill hopper without machine stop as reservoir holds 

sufficient molten adhesive for replacing adhesive slugs. 

• Exhaust hood allows for emission-free change of foil bag. 

• Dead spaces in hydraulic passages eliminated to avoid 

undesired curing. 





Configuration Chart 

Melter Type 

Separator 

Slug Diameter 

Voltage 

Pump 


Pairs 

Maximum Operating 

Temperature 

Separator 

Flow Control 

Internal Pressure 

Indication 

Level Control 

Light Tower 


Host Commucations 

Key-to-Line 

Casters 

Air Dryer 

Exhaust Hood 

One-Way Clutch 

Box 

1-5 

Box 

6 

Box 

7 

Box 

8 

Box 

9-10 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Box 

13 

Box 

14 

Box 

15 

Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Box 

19 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Box 

24 

Base Melter 

Box 

1-5 

Box 

6 

Box 

7 

Box 

8 

Melter Type 

Description 

VersaPUR - slug melter 

Separator 

Description 

Code 

VPURS 

Code 

Standard configurable unit - 


***For Clarification Purposes Only 

Slug Diameter 

Description 

E 

Code 

280 mm (Europe) K 

286 mm (N.America) T 

Voltage 

Description 

Code 






Box 

9-10 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Pump 

Description 

Code 

SNOO30 

A 

SNOO46 

B 

SNOO62 

C 

SNOO93 

D 

SNO186 

E 

SNO371 

F 

SNO773 

G 

SN1710 

H 

None 

X 


Description 

Code 




Maximum Operating Temperature 

Description 

Code 

150 °C / 300 °F L 

180 °C / 350 °F M 

200 °C / 390 °F T 






Options 

Box 

13 

Separator 

Box 

19 


Description 

Code 

Description 

Code 

Separator for options / 

PROFIBUS-DP 

D 

ControlNet 

N 

Box 

14 

Flow Control 

Description 

Automatic Pneum. Pressure Control 

Code 

P 

EtherNet/IP 

PROFINET IO 

None 

E 

P 

X 

Manual Pneum. Pressure Control 


M 

F 

Box 

20 

Key-to-Line 

Output Pressure Control (requires IPI in 

Box 15) 

Standard manual Pressure Control Valve 

C 

X 

Description 

Independent Key-to-Line Per Pump 

None 

Code 

L 

M 

Box 

15 


Description 


None 

Code 

A 

X 

Box 

21 

Casters 

None 

Casters 

Description 

Code 

C 

X 

Box 

16 

Level Control 

Description 

Level Monitoring, fixed 

None 

Code 

F 

X 

Box 

22 

None 

Air Dryer 

Description 

Code 

X 

Box 

17 

Light Tower 

None 

Light Tower 

Description 

Code 

W 

X 

Box 

23 

Exhaust hood 

None 

Exhaust Hood 

Description 

Code 

E 

X 

Box 

18 


Description 

Code 

Box 

24 


Description 

Code 



J 

Main witch Black - 3 Pole 2 


None 

X 

Standard Main Switch Red - 3 Pole 

X 






Parameter 



Slug diameter 


Ambient temperature 


Approx. Weight 2 

Input/Output capability std. 

Degree of protection 

Specification 

Positive-displacement spur gear pump 

200 VAC 3-phase 50/60 Hz 


400 VAC 3-phase Y 50/60 Hz 



280 mm (11 in.) 

286 mm (11.26 in.) 

Ni120 

10 to 40°C (50 to 104°F) 

40 to 230°C (104 to 446°F) 

280 kg (617 lbs) 

6 inputs, 6 outputs 

IP54 

1 


2 


Options/Configurations 

Options 

Pump sizes 

Hose/Applicator pairs 

Thermostats 

Flow control 

Light tower 

Host communication 

Key-to-Line per pump 

Configuration 

SN0030, SN0046, SN0062, SN0093, SN0186, SN0371, SN0773, SN1710 

2, 4 or 6 hose/applicator pair (4, 8 or 12 external channels) 

150°C (300°F), 180°C (350°F), or 200°C (390°F) 




IPI w/Output Pressure Control per Drive 

Standard Manual Pressure Control Valve 

yes 

PROFIBUS-DP, ControlNet, Ethernet/IP, PROFINET IO 

yes 

PROFIBUS and PROFINET are registerd trademarks of PROFIBUS & PROFINET International. 






Dimensions 

(Maximum values, shown in mm) 

1711 

1100 

765 









Web Content 



Description 

VersaPUR tank melters incorporate a pressurized tank 

configuration and integral inert gas supply connection 

to protect PUR adhesive bonding integrity and prevent 

premature curing. 

The easy-to-clean concept means all components in 

contact with PUR, such as tank, grid and even the 

pump blocks, can be quickly, and to a large extent 

without tools, dismantled for cleaning. Additionally, 

VersaPUR melters have pump shutoff valves and quickdisconnect 

heater and sensor cables. 

Many new standard, programmable features simplify 

daily operation and maintenance to meet increased 

productivity requirements. VersaPUR tank melters are 

configurable, offering flexibility for specific production 

and application requirements. 

Features 

• Graphical touch-screen control provides visibility and 

monitoring of system status. 

• Smooth, non-stick release coated surfaces and tiltable tank 

provide easy access and ease of clean-up and maintenance. 

• Industrial PC (IPC) provides intuitive melter control of all 

relevant functions – pump speed, temperatures, etc. – for 

reproducible adhesive bonding quality. 

• Optional measuring sensor provides “tank low” warning to 

operator to minimize machine downtime. 

• Inert gas blanket produced from either integrated or external 

inert gas supply. 

• Pivoting tank lid allows for easy refill. 

• Exhaust hood allows for emission-free refilling of the tank. 

• Dead spaces in hydraulic passages eliminated to avoid 

undesired curing.Standard inputs/outputs plus option for 

additional communication protocols like PROFIBUS-DP, 

ControlNet, Ethernet/IP and PROFINET IO 

VersaPUR Tank Melter 

PROFIBUS is a registerd trademark of PROFIBUS & PROFINET 







Melter Type 

Separator 

Slug Diameter 

Voltage 

Pump 


Pairs 

Maximum Operating 

Temperature 

Separator 

Flow Control 

Internal 


Level Control 

Light Tower 


Host Commucations 

Key-to-Line 

Casters 

Air Dryer 

Exhaust Hood 


Box 

1-5 

Box 

6 

Box 

7 

Box 

8 

Box 

9-10 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Box 

13 

Box 

14 

Box 

15 

Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Box 

19 

Box 

20 

Box 

21 

Box 

22 

Box 

23 

Box 

24 

Base Melter 

Box 

1-5 

Box 

6 

Box 

7 

Box 

8 

Description 

VersaPUR - tank melter 

Description 

Melter Type 

Separator 

Code 

VPURT 

Code 

Standard configurable unit - 


***For Clarification Purposes Only 

Tank 

Description 

Description 

Slug Diameter 

Voltage 

E 

Code 

T 

Code 






Box 

9-10 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Pump 

Description 

Code 

SNOO30 

A 

SNOO46 

B 

SNOO62 

C 

SNOO93 

D 

SNO186 

E 

SNO371 

F 

SNO773 

G 

SN1710 

H 

None 

X 


Description 

Code 





Description 

Code 

150 °C / 300 °F L 

180 °C / 350 °F M 

200 °C / 390 °F T 






Options 

Box 

13 

Separator 

Box 

19 


Description 

Code 

Description 

Code 

Separator for options / 

PROFIBUS-DP 

D 

ControlNet 

N 

Box 

14 

Description 

Flow Control 

Automatic Pneum. Pressure Control 

Code 

P 

Ethernet/IP 

PROFINET IO 

None 

E 

P 

X 



M 

F 

Box 

20 

Key-to-Line 

Output Pressure Control (requires IPI in 

Box 15) 


C 

X 

Description 

Independent Key-to-Line Per Pump 

None 

Code 

K 

X 

Box 

15 


Description 


None 

Code 

A 

X 

Box 

21 

Casters 

None 

Description 

Casters 

Code 

C 

X 

Box 16 

Level Control 

Description 

Level Monitoring, fixed 

None 

Code 

F 

X 

Box 

22 

Air Dryer 

Air Dryer 

Description 

Code 

D 

None 

X 

Box 17 

Light Tower 

Light Tower 

None 

Description 

Code 

W 

X 

Box 

23 

Exhaust Hood 

Description 

Exhaust Hood 

Code 

E 

Box 18 


None 

X 

Description 

Code 


Main witch Black - 3 Pole 2 

Box 

24 


Description 

Code 


Standard Main Switch Red - 3 Pole 

X 


None 

J 

X 








Tank Opening Diameter 


Ambient Temperature 

Parameter 

Specification 

Positive-displacement spur gear pump 



400 VAC 3-phase Y 50/60 Hz 



296 mm (11.46 in.) 

Ni120 

10 to 40°C (50 to 104°F) 

Operating Temperature 40 to 230° C (104 to 446°F 

Approx. Weight 2 

Input/Output Capability Std. 

Degree of Protection 

280 kg (617 lbs) 

6 inputs, 6 outputs 

IP54 

1 


2 


Options/Configurations 

Options 

Configuration 

Pump Sizes 

SN0030, SN0046, SN0062, SN0093, SN0186, SN0371, SN0773, SN1710 



2, 4 or 6 hose/applicator pair (4, 8 or 12 external channels) 

Thermostats 

150°C (300°F), 180°C (350°F), or 200°C (390°F) 



Flow Control 


IPI w/Output Pressure Control per Drive 



yes 

Light Tower 

yes 

Host Communication 

PROFIBUS-DP, ControlNet, Ethernet/IP, PROFINET IO 

Key-to-Line Per Pump 

yes 

Air Dryer 

yes 

Integrated Exhaust Duct 

yes 

One-way Clutch 

yes 






Dimensions 

(Maximum values, shown in mm) 









Web Content 


MiniPUR Plus 

Polyurethane Melter System 

Description 

Compact melter simplifies and economizes use of 

polyurethane (PUR) hot melt adhesive for low-volume 

users. 

The Nordson MiniPUR Plus melter makes hot melt 

polyurethane (PUR) adhesive use simple and more cost 

effective for the small, low-volume user. The melter 

tank efficiently handles up to 4-liters of PUR adhesive 

from various formats including 2-kilogram slugs and 

granules. The MiniPUR Plus melter’s capability to 

create an inert gas blanket helps to preserve adhesive 

integrity. 

The MiniPUR Plus melter has a specially-designed lid 

for easy, reliable operation. It offers two levels of inert 

gas pressure protection, through a spring-assisted lid 

or a safety valve, and has a non-stick coating for easy 

cleaning. The tank is pressurized to keep outside air 

from entering the tank. 

The melter is easy to operate and maintain with 

variable speed AC motor, non-stick coated tank and 

easy access panels. MiniPUR Plus melters can be 

expanded with options including additional hose and 

gun pairs and I/O boards. 

MiniPUR Plus Melter System 

Features 

• Tank system enables use of cost-effective PUR adhesive forms. 

• Melter processes all the adhesive, so no residual waste. 

• Inert gas blanket allows adhesive to remain in the tank for 

up to several days without losing bonding integrity or having 

adhesive begin curing. 

• Simple connections and component accessibility make set-up 

and operation user-friendly. 

• Graphic indicators and easy-to-use controls simplify 

programming and system monitoring. 

• Reliable tank lid design has double air pressure protection and 

non-stick coating. 

• The design allows use of low cost, low usage inert gas supply. 

• The system supports a wide range of processing temperatures, 

including as low as 40° C (100° F) to accommodate heat 

sensitive substrates. 




MiniPUR Plus 





Throughput (per hour) 1 

Melt Rate (per hour) 1 

Parameter 

Maximum Pump Rate (per hour) 2 

Specification 

Tank with gerotor pump 

4 L (244 in 3 ) 

3.9 kg (8.6 lb) 

6.3 kg (13.9 lb) 

4 kg (8.8 lb) 

35 kg (77 lb) or 50 kg (110 lb) 

Number of Hoses/Applicators (per hour) 3 up to 2 


Operating Temperature Range 

Ambient Temperature Range 


Gas Pressure for Nitrogen Blanket 



@ 240 VAC 

Approx. Melter Weight (empty) 5 

Melter Dimensions: 

• Width 

• Height 

• Depth 

75 bars (1100 psi) 

40 to 180°C (100 to 356°F) 

0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F) 

± 0.5°C (1°F) 

0.2 bars (29 psi) 

120 VAC single phase 60 Hz 

200 to 240 VAC single phase 50/60 Hz 

3355 watts 

43 kg (95 lbs) 

334 mm (13.1 in.) 

560 mm (22.04 in.) 

652 mm (25.66 in.) 

1 Actual rates will vary depending on adhesive type, application parameters and input voltage. 

2 Values shown for melter @ 60 Hz. 

3 Permitted deviation from rated line voltage is ± 10%. 





MiniPUR Plus 


Part Numbers 

MiniPUR Plus Melters 

Pump Size 

(cc/rev) 

Pump Rate 

(kg/hr) 

0.3 1.4 

0.62 2.8 

1.86 8.5 

7.73 

35 

I/O Board 

Included? 

Part Number 

Description 

No 7407559 Melter,MiniPUR, Plus,240V,2H/G,1.4Kg/H 

Yes 7407560 Melter,MiniPUR, Plus,240V,2H/G,1.4Kg,I/O 





No 7407565 Melter,MiniPUR, Plus,240V,2H/G,35Kg/H 

Yes 7407566 Melter,MiniPUR, Plus,240V,2H/G,35Kg,I/O 

50 Yes 7407567 Melter,MiniPUR, Plus,240V,2H/G,50Kg,I/O 

NOTE: All AD-41 Hand-held applicators include a 1 mm (0.04”) oriface diameter nozzle. 

MiniPUR Accessories 

Part Number 

120V Hand-held Applicator/Hose Assemblies* 

Description 

1030220 AD-41 Hand-held Applicator/HP Hose Assembly, 2.4 m (8 ft), 1 mm (0.04”) oriface diameter nozzle 



240V Hand-held Applicator/Hose Assemblies 




*Check total external wattage limitation before adding second hand-held applicator/hose assembly to MiniPUR 120V systems. 

See 120V Blue series hand-held applicator/hose tree for details. 

Nitrogen Accessories 

Part Number 

Description 

1106554 Nitrogen Generator 

1108292 Kit, Regulator, Nitrogen Blanket, 10 psi, w/timer (used with nitrogen generator) 

1108290 Kit, Regulator, Low Pressure 3000-10-0 psi, w/timer (used with 3000 psi bottle) 

1108291 Kit, Regulator, High Pressure 6000-10-0 psi, w/timer (used with 6000 psi bottle) 




MiniPUR Plus 







Web Content 

Automated Dispensing Systems | 5-1 

Unity Basic 


Description 

Nordson® Unity Basic Series system is specifically 

designed and configured for precise hot melt 

dispensing using Nordson Unity dispensing systems. 

An easy-to-use Teach Pendant or a PC-based visionguided 

teaching system makes the Unity Basic Series 

system simple and intuitive to set up and program. 

True three-dimensional motion control allows 

easy programming of dots, lines, circles, arcs, and 

compound arcs. 

A variety of platform sizes makes them an ideal 

solution for batch processing of critical hot melt 

dispensing applications. 

Unity System 

Unity Basic Series system can work either as a 

standalone dispensing system or as a key station that is 

easily integrated into automated production lines. 

Features 

• Simplified setup and programming via intuitive iconbased 

Teach Pendant 

• Optional simple camera and UNITYMotion software make 

setup and programming intuitive 

• X/Y/Z tip location alignment sensor available 

• Reinforced X axis (on Unity 4X) increases system rigidity and 

improved accuracy 

• Upgradable to enhanced CCD vision camera with vision 

based bead compensation 

• On-screen preview of the dispensing path facilitates 

programming 

• Easy-to-use .dxf file conversion to program path 

• Wide range of work envelopes 

• Available in platforms ranging from 200 x 200 mm to 500 x 

500 mm 

Benefits 

• Easy-to-use visual programming means operators learn 

quickly 

• Faster cycle and batch times 

• Easy integration into any manufacturing operation 

• Reduced production, material, and ownership costs 

• Consistent adhesive volume output of changing viscosity 

materials (with enhanced CCD vision option) 

• Automated tip alignment saves reprogramming time 

Available Options 

• Teach Pendant 

• Simple Vision Kit 

• CCD Vision Kit 

• Tip Alignment Kit 

• Tip Height Detection Kit 

NOTE: Unity system robots are designed for use with Unity IC 

and Unity PURJet applicators. Refer to the Unity IC and 

PURJet sections of this guide for complete details and part 

numbers for these systems. 



5-2 | Automated Dispensing Systems 

Unity Basic 



Parameter Unity 2 Unity 3 Unity 4 Unity 4X Unity 5 

Number of Axes 3 3 3 3 3 

Maximum Working 

Area (X/Y/Z) 

200/200/50 mm 

(8/8/2 in.) 

300/300/100 mm 

(12/12/4 in.) 

400/400/100 mm 

(16/16/4 in.) 

400/400/100 mm 

(16/16/4 in.) 

500/500/150 mm 

(20/20/6 in.) 

Workpiece Payload 5 kg (11 lb) 10 kg (2 lb) 10 kg (2 lb) 10 kg (21 lb) 8 kg (18 lb) 

Tool Payload 3 kg (6 lb) 5 kg (11 lb) 5 kg (11 lb) 8 kg(17.7 lb) 3.5 kg (7.7 lb) 

Maximum Speed 

(per second) 

500/250 mm 

(20/10 in.) 

800/320 mm 

(31/13 in.) 

800/320 mm 

(31/13 in.) 

800/320 mm 

(31/13 in.) 

500/320 mm 

(2/13 in.) 

Unit Weight 21 kg (46 lb) 39.5 kg (87 lb) 44.5 kg (98 lb) 45.5 kg 47 kg (107 lb) 

Dimensions 

(W x H x D) 

375x414x510 mm 

(15x16x20 in.) 

490x517x645 mm 

(19x20x25 in.) 

590x617x645 mm 

(23x24x25 in.) 

590x617x705 mm 

(23x24x28 in.) 

690x717x815 mm 

(27x28x32 in.) 

Drive System 

Memory Capacity 

Data Storage 

General Purpose 

I/O 

Drive Method 

Dispensing 

Controller 

Power Supply 

Interpolation 

Repeatability 

Working 

Temperature 

3-phase micro-stepping motor 

100 programs 500~50,000 points/program 

CF card, USB 

8 inputs/8 outputs (16/16 optional) 

PTP and CP 

External 

Auto-switching, 100–240 VAC, 200 W 

3 axes (3D space) 

±0.02 mm 

10–40 °C (50–104 °F) 





Part Numbers 

Unity Basic 


NOTE: Unity system robots are designed for use with Unity IC and PURJet applicators. Refer to the Unity IC and PURJet sections of this guide 

for complete details and part numbers for these systems. 

Part Number 

Description 

7407847 Robot, Unity 2, 3 Axis, 200 x 200 x 50 mm 



7407851 Robot, Unity 4X, 3 Axis, 400 x 400 x 100 mm 


7411902 Robot, Unity 3-V, 3 Axis, 250 x 300 x 100 mm 


7410842 Robot, Unity 4X-V, 3 Axis, 350 x 400 x 100 mm 

7410843 Robot, Unity 4X-HV, 3 Axis, 350 x 400 x 100 mm 


7407853 Unity Robot, Teach Pendant 

7407854 Unity Robot, Simple Vision Camera 

Accessories 

Part Number 

Description 

7407856 Unity Robot, Tip Alignment Kit 

7407857 Unity Robot, Tip Height Detection Kit 

7028277 Robot Accessory, Fixture Plate, 300 mm 

1121906 Cable Assemby, Serial to USB, Unity 

1121438 Cable Assemby, Shielded, 37, D-Shell 

Teach Pendant for 

Unity Basic systems 

Simple vision camera for 

Unity Basic systems 




Unity Basic 






Web Content 


Unity 4XP 


Description 

Nordson’s vision-guided Unity 4XP semi-automated 

system is specifically designed and configured for 

precise hot melt dispensing using Nordson Unity 

dispensing systems. 

Specialized UNITYMotion software and integrated 

vision and laser height sensing capabilities make 

Unity automated systems quick to set up and easy to 

program. True threedimensional motion control allows 

easy programming of dots, lines, circles, arcs, and 

compound arcs. 

In addition, linear encoders provide precise bead 

placement while the smart CCD camera and optional 

laser height sensing systems automatically adjusts 

programs to compensate for both surface height 

changes and variations in product orientation. 

Unity 4XP System 

Features 

• UNITYMotion icon-based software simplifies setup and 

programming with advanced vision features 

• On-screen preview of the dispensing path facilitates 

programming 

• Closed-loop feedback with precision laser non-contact 

sensing 

• Vision based bead compensation adjusts for changing 

viscosity materials 

• Reinforced X axis increases system rigidity and improved 

accuracy 

• Fully mapped work area with correction table increase fluid 

placement accuracy 

• Easy-to-use .dxf file conversion to program path 

Benefits 

• Faster startup to introduce automation 

• Easy-to-use visual programming means operators learn 

• quickly 

• Improved product quality with more precise, accurate 

dispensing 

• Consistent adhesive volume output of changing viscosity 

materials 

• Increased production in reduced process time 

• Higher yields and production quality lead to reduced 

production cost, material waste and cost of ownership 

• Smart vision allows programming paths not possible with 

pendant based systems 

• Better dispensing due to precise control over tip to substrate 

gap with laser height sensing capabilities 


NOTE: Unity system robots are designed for use with Unity IC 

and Unity PURJet applicators. Refer to the Unity IC and 

PURJet sections of this guide for complete details and part 

numbers for these systems. 

• Laser Kits featuring clear and opaque surface reflective 




Unity 4XP 



Parameter 

Number of Axes 

Max. Working Area (X/Y/Z) 

Work Piece Payload 

Tool Payload 

Maximum Speed 

Unit Weight 


Drive System 

Memory Capacity 

Data Storage 

General Purpose I/O 

Drive Method 

Power Supply 

Interpolation 

Repeatability 

Working Temperature 

Teach Pendant 

Closed-loop Motor System 

Tip Detection System 

High-precision Vision 

Laser Height Detection 

Unity 4XP 

3 axes 

350/400/100 mm (14/16/4 in.) 

10 kg (2 lb) 

8 kg (17.7 lb) 

500/250 mm/sec (2/10 in.) 

58.5 kg (129 lb) 

811 x 647 x 705 mm (32 x 2.5 x 28 in.) 

5-phase micro-stepping motor 

PC storage 

PC storage 

8 inputs/8 outputs (16/16 optional) 

PTP & CP 

Auto-switching, 100–240 V 380 W 

3 axes (3D space) 

±0.01 mm 

10-40 °C (50–104 °F) 

Not included 

Included 

Included 

Included 

Optional 





Part Numbers 

Unity 4XP 


NOTE: Unity 4XP system robots are designed for use with Unity IC and PURJet applicators. Refer to the Unity IC and PURJet sections of this 

guide for complete details and part numbers for these systems. 

Part Number 

Description 

7407852 Robot, Unity 4XP, 3 Axis, 350 x 400 x 100 mm 

7407855 Robot, Unity, Camera, CCD Vision 

Accessories 

Part Number 

Description 

7407858 Robot, Unity, Laser Kit A (LK-G32A) 

7407859 Robot, Unity, Laser Kit B (IL-030) 

7028277 Robot, Unity, Accessory, Fixture Plate, 300 mm 

1121906 Cable Assemby, Serial to USB, Unity 

1121438 Cable Assemby, Shielded, 37, D-Shell 

High-precision camera (CCD) 

for Unity 4XP systems 

Laser kit A for Unity 4XP systems 




Unity 4XP 






Web Content 



Dispensing Systems 

Description 

Nordson’s Unity IC series dispensing systems provide 

an intelligent dispensing solution that is capable 

of automatically compensating bead size using an 

optional vision system that measures bead diameter 

and automatically compensates pressure to dispense the 

optimal bead size. 

The IC Series is available in a 30 ml or larger 310 ml 

configuration giving you the flexibility to choose the 

most appropriate package size for your particular 

application. When combined with the Unity tabletop 

automation system, overall accuracy and functionality 

are enhanced with vision guidance, linear encoded 

motion and easy-to-use dispensing software to optimize 

the process and motion control. 

The IC 300-E applicator is designed to meet the needs 

of high-end electronics assembly applications that 

require highly precise, clean dispensing. The unique 

snuff-back module delivers ultra-clean cutoff with no 

stringing. 

Unity IC Plus applicators are created for customers who 

want to maximize their PUR adhesive. The applicators 

feature a unique design that drastically reduces heating 

time at startup as well as purge time, creating a more 

efficient process for users. They are available in 30 and 

300 sizes, and come with standard heat covers that 

protect operators from burns. 

Features 

• Pneumatic modules deliver consistent dispensing down to a 

.25 mm width 

• Capable of utilizing heated and ambient materials 

• Dual heating zones in the IC 300-E applicator provide 

accurate heat temperature control 

• Interchangeable nozzles allow for customized dispensing 


Unity IC System 

Watch Video 

• Pre-warmers 

• Variety of Unity tabletop automation systems 

• Variety of Saturn and Unity nozzles from 25 gauge and larger 

• Unity HiTemp disposable syringe barrels for PUR and other 

high temperature materials available from Nordson EFD, call 

1-800-556-3484 for more information. 

NOTE: Unity IC Series systems are designed for use with Unity Basic 

robots, Unity 4XP robots, and Unity controllers. Refer to the 

other Unity sections of this guide for complete details and 

part numbers for Unity system components. 







Unity IC 30 Plus Applicator 

Weight 

Adhesive Viscosity 

Solenoid Valve Air Flow 


Weight 



Unity IC 300-E Applicator 

Weight 



Specification 

1.85 kg (4 lb) 

Varies depending on nozzle size and flow rate 

15 scfm minimum 

Specification 

2.62 kg (5.8 lb) 



Specification 

3.28 kg (7.2 lb) 



Electrical Specifications 


Supply Voltage 

Sensor Type 

Unity IC 300 Applicators 


Sensor Type 

Specification 

200–240 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz, 250 W (supplied from controller) 

120 ohm nickel 

Specification 









Part Numbers 

Basic Unity IC 30 Plus System 

Part Number 

1120889 Kit, Ship With, IC30/300 

7412901 Controller, Unity Touch* 

7413028 Applicator, Unity, IC30 Plus 

Description 

Basic Unity IC 300 Plus System 

Part Number 



7413029 Applicator, Unity, IC300 Plus 

Description 

Basic Unity IC 300-E System 

Part Number 



7410852 Applicator, Unity, IC300, NiI120, EP10 

Description 

*Unity Touch controllers provide dispensing control for Unity IC applicators. 

Robots 

Basic Unity IC Series systems are designed for use with Unity Basic and 4XP robots. Refer to the Unity Basic and 

Unity 4XP Series sections of this guide for complete details and part numbers for Unity robots. 






Nozzles 

Part Number 

Description 

7402750 Nozzle, Unity, IO 0.2 mm, TL 2 mm 



7402753 Nozzle, Unity, IO 0.2 mm, TL 4.5 mm 













1092244 Nozzle, Unity, MiniBlue,1.35 mm ID 

1092245 Nozzle, Unity, MiniBlue, 0.84 mm ID 




322014 Nozzle, Brown, Yellow, Purple, 0.014 Dia. X 0.050 

322016 Nozzle, Brown, Orange, Purple, 0.016 Dia. X 0.050 

322018 Nozzle, Brown, Red, Purple, 0.018 Dia X 0.050 

322020 Nozzle, Brown, Beige, Purple, 0.020 Dia X 0.050 




Web Content 




Description 

Nordson® Unity PURJet dispensing systems provide 

accurate dispensing of heated PUR adhesives in 30 

mL syringes and 300 mL cartridges. Unity dispensers 

help extend the useful life of the syringe to maximize 

material use and minimize residual waste. 

A variety of technologies combine to meet the 

stringent requirements for precise material dispensing 

in exacting processes of handheld/portable electronics 

manufacturing. This helps improve production and 

performance of applications including bonding, sealing, 

gasketing, encapsulation and attachment. 

With a variety of systems and accessories, Unity 

solutions can be configured to meet specific 

requirements. When combined with the Unity tabletop 

automation, overall accuracy and functionality are 

enhanced by use of vision, linear encoded motion, 

and easy-to-use dispensing software that optimizes the 

process and motion control. 

PurJet30 System 

Watch Video 

Features 

• Patented jetting technology allows for consistent and accurate 

placement of adhesive without the need to adjust for change in 

the z height of the substrate. 

• Non-contact dispensing applies adhesive accurately at high 

speeds 

• Easily dispenses into small grooves and other challenging 

geometries 

• Dispenses discrete dots of adhesive than can be overlapped to 

create a precise bead of material 

• Capable of continuous cycles at 150 HZ 


• Pre-warmers 

• Variety of Unity tabletop automations 

• Modules/nozzles: 0.004” and 0.007” 

• Unity tabletop automation system 

• Unity HiTemp disposable syringe barrels for PUR and other 

high temperature materials available from Nordson EFD, call 

1-800-556-3484 for more information 

NOTE: Unity PURJet systems are designed for use with Unity Basic 

robots, Unity 4XP robots, and Unity controllers. Refer to the 

other Unity sections of this guide for complete details and 

part numbers for Unity system components. 







Unity PURJet 30 Applicator 

Weight 




Weight 



Specification 

1.6 kg (3.4 lb) 



Specification 

3.36 kg (7.4 lb) 






Sensor Type 


Supply voltage 

Applicator Manifold 

Applicator Heater Block 

Specification 



Specification 









Part Numbers 

Basic PURJet30 System 

Part Number Description Note 

1099056 Applicator, Unity, PJ30, Ni120 

1120888 Kit, Ship-With, PURJet 30 

1123363 Module, PJ30, Fixed, 0.004 Orifice., 1 mm Tip Other jet modules are available. Refer to Modules. 


Basic PURJet 300 System 


7407659 Applicator, Unity, PJ300, Ni120 

1120888 Kit, Ship-With, PURJet 30 

1123363 Module, PJ30, Fixed, 0.004 Orifice., 1 mm Tip Other jet modules are available. Refer to Modules. 


1107104 Kit, Regulator, Seperator, Filter, Combo, Air Kit, PJ30 

*Unity Touch controllers provide dispensing control for Unity PURJet applicators. 

Modules 

Part Number 

Description 

1123363 Module, PJ30, Fixed, 0.004 Orifice., 1 mm Tip 

1123367 Module, PJ30, Fixed, 0.004 Orifice., 1.5 mm Tip 

1124096 Module, PJ30, Fixed, 0.004 Orifice., 2.6 mm Tip 

1124718 Module, PJ30, Fixed, 0.004 Orifice, 0.75 mm Tip, 0.35 Stroke 


1124846 Module, PJ30, Fixed, 0.004 Orifice, 0.75 mm Tip,1.50 Stroke 


1124719 Module, PJ30, Fixed, with Nozzle Adapter 

1123362 Module, PJ30, Adjustable, 0.004 Orifice, 1 mm Tip 

1123366 Module, PJ30, Adjustable, 0.004 Orifice, 1.5 mm Tip 

1123361 Module, PJ30, Fixed, 0.007 Orifice, 2.6 mm Tip 

Robots 

Unity IC Series systems are designed for use with Unity Basic and Unity 4XP robots. Refer to the Unity Basic and 

Unity 4XP Series sections of this guide for complete details and part numbers for Unity robots. 






Accessories 

Part Number 

Description 

1124025 Kit, Nozzle, 0.004 Dia., SST, PURJet30 

1120498 Kit, Nozzle, 0.007 Dia., SST, PURJet30 (optional), A, B 

1124150 Needle, PJ30, S7 Tool, Steel, 1.0 mm Tip, 60 Degree 

1124151 Needle, PJ30, S7 Tool, Steel, 1.5 mm Tip, 60 Degree 

7407795 Needle, Flat, 42 degree, 0.75 mm Tip, 0.35 mm Stroke 

1124475 Adjustable Air Cap Kit 

1106951 Air Cap, Fixed, 1.5 mm, PJ30 

7407861 Insulator, G1/8, 15 mm, PEEK, PURJet 

1121358 Kit, Solenoid, PURJet Upgrade 

1124720 Seat, Module, PJ30, Threaded Nozzle 




Web Content 



Control Systems 

Description 

Nordson’s Unity control systems are available in two 

versions designed to meet differing customer needs— 

the Unity C controller and the Unity Touch controller. 

Both systems are a compact size, compatible with 

both Unity IC and PURJet applicators, and easy 

to integrate with a parent machine for full process 

control. This updated, affordable technology is easier for 

operators to use. 

The Unity C controller is a simple solution that offers 

basic functions like temperature setting, applicator on/ 

off controls, pressure control and a purge function. 

Unity Touch and Unity C Controllers 

The Unity Touch controller features a 7-inch 

touchscreen with a friendly HMI and advanced 

controls. The interface gives quick access to language 

and recipe selection, uses a fluid detection sensing 

capability to visually display real-time adhesive level 

status, and provides multiple zone temperature 

monitoring. 

With a variety of systems and accessories, Unity 

solutions can be configured to meet specific 

requirements. When combined with the Unity 

automated tabletop dispensing robot and adhesive 

applicator, overall accuracy and functionality are 

enhanced by use of vision, linear encoded motion, 

and easy-to-use dispensing software that optimizes the 

process and motion control. 

Features 

• Unity Touch controllers allow users to make adjustments to 

pressure, temperature and other settings with a few quick 

screen taps 

• Both controllers allow users to integrate fully with the parent 

machine to control parameters like temperature, pressure and 

applicator on/off time 

• The Unity Touch controller’s system status-at-a-glance home 

screen uses a color-coded system to quickly tell operators when 

the system is heating, ready or has a fault 

• Both controllers allow users to collect data like adhesive life, 

number of products and number of dots jetted 





Control Systems 


Parameter 

Specification 

Storage Temperature 

-13 ºF (-25 ºC) to 158 ºF (70 ºC) 

Temperature Sensor Ni120 

Max. Input Pressure 

8 bar (116 psi) 

Degree of Protection IP 43 

Noise Emission 

50 dBA 

Min. Ambient Temperature 0 ºC (32 ºF) 

Max. Ambient Temperature 35 ºC (95 ºF) 

Humidity 

10 to 95%, non-condensing 

Min. Operating Temperature 40 ºC (100 ºF) (setpoint) 

Max. Operating Temperature 232 ºC (450 ºF) 

Unity C controller 

Specification 

Communication 

12 pin I/O, RS232 


310 mm (W) x 245 mm (D) x 215 mm (H) 

Weight 

6.5 kg (14.3 lb) 

Unity Touch Controller 

Specification 

Communication 

12 pin I/O, RS485, Ethernet (optional) 


310 mm (W) x 245 mm (D) x 215 mm (H) 

Weight 

7.5 kg (16.5 lb) 


Parameter 

Available Operating Voltage 

Max Power Requirements 

Operating Voltage Frequency 

200–240 VAC, 1 phase 

6A 

50/60 Hz 

Specification 

Part Numbers 

Part Number 

Description 

7412900 Controller, Unity C 

7412901 Controller, Unity Touch 



Extruder Systems 


Web Content 

Extruder Systems | 6-1 


Description 

A Nordson extruder is the first choice when processing “difficult” adhesives like polyamides, polyester, or 

polyolefin (APAO). These adhesives ask for a closed system to avoid degradation of the adhesive through 

carbonization and consequently loss of bonding performance or other problems within the system. 

Extruders enable homogeneous melting in a fully closed “melt-on-demand” system to provide a safe and reliable 

application process. 

Nordson extruders offer the fastest, easiest adhesive changes possible compared to other melters without time- and 

cost-intensive cleaning procedures. 

Convincing advantages at a glance: 

• Optimized for adhesive applications 

• A true “melt-on-demand” system, deliver the lowest possible 

thermal stress on the adhesive 

• No degrading or charring at all because it is a fully closed 

system 

• A self-cleaning system 

• Virtually maintenance free system 

• Option to change adhesives during production within a few 

minutes 

• Short heat-up times 

• Lower energy consumption per kilogram compared to 

conventional tank melters 

• Results in more economical operating costs of the complete 

application system 

EX extruder systems are for use in applications requiring the highest precision and performance with regard to 

temperatures and pressures. EX extruders are designated Engineered Systems, which are engineered to the specific 

requirements of our customers, offering the highest flexibility and grade of customization for a perfectly suited 

system. 

• Different sizes allows throughput of 1 kg to 250 kg per hour 


• PLC control standard: easy integration into existing production 

lines 

• PROFIBUS interface 

• Intuitive graphical touch panel in local languages 

• Provide key-to-line interaction with parent machine through 

documented interfaces 

• Visual display of process data standard 

• ChemCoat® coated conical feeding hopper provides safe material 

supply 

• Cylinder and screw manufactured from tempered nitrified steel 

providing an extremely long lifetime 


PROFIBUS is a registerd trademark of PROFIBUS & PROFINET 


EX Series Extruder 



6-2 | Extruder Systems 



Parameter 

Melt Rate (1) 

Operating Temperature Range 

Hydraulic Pressure 

Electrical Connection 


3–250 kg/hr (7–551 lb/hr) 

20–250 °C (68–482 °F) 

0–100 bar (0–1,450 psi) 

Description 

3 x 400V +N +PE/50–60 Hz (Trafo optional) 

Siemens ® S7 PLC with touch panel 

(5.7in. or 10.4 in.) 

• Start-up circuit that monitors temperature drops and 

temperature fluctuations for all heating zones. 

• Multiple storage capability provides easy program selection. 

• Permanent sensor failure monitoring with visual display. 

• Zero potential output contacts for reporting temperature 

drops and temperature fluctuations, and ready for operation 

signal. 

• Electronic pressure control for manual and automatic 

operation with excess pressure cutoff. 

• Pressure build-up control with automatic switch-over to 

speed regulation during head control. 

Temperature Sensors PT100, Ni120 (2) 

Heated Zones 

Metering Station 

Extruder, hose, applicator (additional heating zones optional) 

Metering stations are equipped with high-precision gear pumps for 

the most demanding applications. 

Pumps can be flanged to extruder output or alternatively installed 

as satellite PS metering stations with a hose between the extruder 

and the pump station. 

(1) 

The maximum melt rate and throughput depends on the material; indication is based on polyamide. 

(2) 

Ni120 for maximum 200 °C. 

Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG. 




Web Content 



EEX Extruder Series 

While featuring the same general advantages and benefits in 

processing demanding adhesives, the EEX series of extruders 

is a more simple, standardized and configurable system. 

Features 

• Microprocessor-controlled, multi-channel temperature control 

featuring staged heating. 

• Easy installation and operation. 

• Fault diagnostic program for all temperature cycles. 

• Start up delay with under- / over-temperature check for all heating 

zones. 

• Standard pressure control, optional pump station with variable AC 

drives for metering applications. 

• Water cooled draw-in zone, to be supplied by cooling circuity from 

customer or optional cooling device. 

• Cylinder and screw manufactured from tempered nitrified steel 

providing a extremely long lifetime. 

• ChemCoat® coated conical feeding hopper provide safe material 

supply. 

EEX Extruder Series 



Parameter 

Specification 

EEX 10 EEX 40 EEX 100 EEX 200 

Rated throughput kg/hr (lb/hr) (1) 10 (22) 40 (88) 100 (220) 200 (440) 

Hopper Volume L (in. 3 ) 15 (915) 30 (1830) 75 (4576) 150 (9153) 

Rated Power of main drive kW 2.2 5.5 11 22 

Max. no. of gear pumps 

(recirculating pumps optional) 

2 4 4 4 

Capacity per pump L/h (lb/hr) 10–40 (22–88) 10–40 (22–88) 

10–40 (22–88) 

40–160 (88–352) 

(max. 2 pumps) 

Max. operating temp. °C (°F) (2) 230 (446) 



Ni120 (3) / PT100 

10–40 (22–88) 

40–160 (88–352) 

(max. 2 pumps) 

Hose/Applicator connections 1–5 1–5 1–5 1–4 

(1) 

Maximum output rate depends on adhesive; indication is based on common EVA. 

(2) 

Operating Temperature depends on adhesive and auxiliary equipment, extruder without auxiliary equipment may be suitable up to 

260/496. 

(3) 

Ni120 for maximum 180 °C. 






Extruder 


Flanged Pump Station 

Pump MIDR 

Hose Connection 

Coding Device 

Hopper Level Sensor 

Standby-Temp. 

Setback 

Week/Day Timer 

Hopper Protection 

Grid 

Casters 

Protection Frame for 

Sensors 

Additional 


connections 

Special Request 

Box 

1–6 

Box 

8 

Box 

9 

Box 

10 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Box 

13 

Box 

14 

Box 

15 

Box 

16 

Box 

17 

Box 

18 

Box 

19 

Box 

23 

Boxes 

1–6 

Extruder Size 

Box 

10 

Pump MIDR 

Box 

8 

Box 

9 

Description 

EEX Extruder 10 kg/hr 




PT100 

Typ NI120 (1) 

(1) 

Up to 200 °C. 


Description 

Flanged Pump Station 

Code 

EEX010 

EEX040 

EEX100 

EEX200 

Code 

P 

N 

Description 

Code 

No pump selected 

X 

10 l/h max. per pump (1) (2) A 

20 l/h max. per pump (1) (2) B 

40 l/h max. per pump (1) (2) C 

1) (2) (3) 

80 l/h max. per pump( 

(EEX 100 /EEX 200 only) 

D 

(1) (2) (3) 

160 l/h max. per pump 


E 

(1) (2) (3) 

220 l/h max. per pump 

(EEX 200 only) 

H 

(1) 

Pump selection only possible if pump station 

selected. 

(2) 

All pumps have to be same size. 

(3) 

Pump D and E only possible up to 2-pump 

station. 

Description 

Code 

No Pump station (pressure controlled) 0 

Single pump station (1 pump) 1 

Single pump station with recirculating 

ports (1 out/1 in)* 

2 

Double pump station (2 pumps) 3 

Double pump station with recirculating 


4 

Quadruple pump station (4 pumps) 

not possible with EEX10 

5 

*Only in combination with a recirculating 

applicator. 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Hose Connection 

Description 

Code 

Hose connection 8 mm diameter 1 





Cooling Device 

Description 

Code 

No cooling device 

X 

Stand-alone cooling device* 


K 

Cooling device on extruder frame* 

(EEX 100 /EEX 200) 

R 

*Mandatory if customer does not supply cooling 

water circuit. 






Box 

13 

Hopper Level Sensor 

Box 

17 

Casters 

Box 

14 

Description 

Code 

No level sensor 

X 

1 Level sensor (Hopper empty) 1 

2 LS (Hopper empty + Hopper low 

level) 

3 LS (Hopper empty + Hopper low 

level + Hopper full) 

Standby Temperature - Setback 

2 

3 

Box 

18 

Description 

No casters, just feet 

With casters 

Protection Frame for Sensors 

Description 

No protection frame 

With protection frame 

Code 

X 

M 

Code 

X 

Q 

Box 

15 

Description 

No Standby/setback 

Standby / Setback Option* 

Week/Day Timer 

Description 

No Week/Day timer 

With Week/Day timer* 

Code 

X 

T 

Code 

X 

W 

Box 

19 

Additional Electrical Hose/ 

Applicator Connectors* 

Description 

Code 

No add. H/A connector 

X 

One add. H/A connector 1 

Two add. H/A connectors 2 

Three add. H/A connectors 3 

Four add. H/A connectors 

(not for EEX 200) 

4 

*For automatic startup and shutdown of the 

extruder. 

*Maximum number of connections depends on 

Pump Station, refer to table below. 

Box 

16 

Hopper Protection Grid 

Description 

Code 

No prot. grid(when AutoFill) 

X 

With protective grid* 

G 

*Mandatory if hopper is filled manually. 

Box 

23 

Special Request 

Description 

No Special Request 

Any special need to be specified and 

quoted upon request 

Code 

X 

T 

Pump Station Table 



Applicators 

Additional Electrical Hose/Applicator 

Connectors 

Code Box 3 

Description 

EEX10 

EEX40 

EEX100 EEX200 

0 No Pump station (pressure controlled) 1 4 4 3 

1 Single pump station (1 pump) 1 4 3 3 

2 

Single pump station with re-circulating 


2 3 2 2 

3 Double pump station (2 pumps) 2 3 2 1 

4 

Double pump station with re-circulating 


4 1 

5 Quadruple pump station (4 pumps) 4 

*Only in combination with a re-circulating applicator. 





Gear Pump Chart 

Part Number Type Layout 

Dimensions (mm) 

A B C 

Capacity 

(cc.rev) 

Output 

@100 rpm 

(L/hr) 

7521694 GP 03 M0.5 3 76 76 0.2 1.2 

7521751 GP 03 M1 3 76 76 0.4 2.4 

EEX 10 

EEX 40 

7521755 GP 03 M2 3 76 76 0.8 4.8 

7521703 GP 06 M2 6 76 76 1.7 10.2 

EEX 200 

100 

EEX 

7528130 GP 12 M2 12 76 76 3.5 21 

7521668 GP 25 M2 25 76 76 7 42 

7055336 GP 30 M2 30 76 76 8.4 50.4 

7523855 GP 50 M2 50 76 76 13.3 80 

7053428 GP 100 M1 15 195 120 16.7 100 

7525111* GP 160 M2 25 195 120 27 162 

7522285* GP 220 M2 35 195 120 37 222 

*Additional heating cartridges needed. 


EEX 100 

EEX 10/EEX 40 



Automatic Applicators 

Adhesive & Sealants Equipment Guide Automatic Applicators | 7-1 


Description 

Best Choice applicators are configurable, which 

means that each applicator is constructed to specific 

choices made when the applicator was ordered. The 

Best Choice Configurator allows the customer to 

quickly and easily determine the right applicator for 

the application, minimizing the need for specially 

engineered applicators and significantly reducing 

delivery time. Best Choice applicators are available in 

low-profile, multi-module and water wash designs. 

Machining centers are located throughout the world 

to ensure commonality of parts and expedient 

delivery of applicators. Best Choice applicators use a 

common manifold extrusion and can be configured for 

common air, independent air and programmed air. All 

applicators are tested prior to shipment to help assure 

performance. 

SolidBlue S module and gun body 

The EasyOn design provides machined surfaces 

on both the applicator body and applicator 

module. The two surfaces “mate” to deliver 

superior ease-of-use and to provide safety when 

servicing applicators. 

Best Choice applicators include: 

1. ClassicBlue zero cavity, reduced cavity and right angle airopen/spring-close 

modules 

2. SolidBlue A air-open/air-close modules 

3. SolidBlue S air-open/spring-close modules 

4. SureBead® A air-open/air-close modules 

5. SureBead® S air-open/spring-close modules 

• The Best Choice Configurator provides intuitive and stepby-step 

instructions to guide you through the process of 

building an applicator, offering choices in module spacing, 

cord set location, air specifications, voltage and hose 

connection, preinstalled solenoids and in-line filters. 

Blue = Air-Close 

Black = Spring-Close 

Gray = SolidBlue 

(ball and seat) 

Tan = SureBead 

(needle and seat) 

• The configurator demonstrates which specifications are 

possible and which are not, providing instantaneous answers 

to specific application questions. 

• Applicator covers for SolidBlue and SureBead are color coded 

for identification and thermally resistant, to enhance safety 

during maintenance. 

• The Unique Identifier (UID) Cross Reference function allows 

for easy conversion of the World Applicator platform to the 

new Best Choice applicators. By entering a specific applicator 

UID or part number, a list of recommended parts and 

dimensional sketch unique to the applicator is displayed. 



7-2 | Automatic Applicators 


Best Choice Applicator Specifications 

Specification 

Parameter 

ClassicBlue (all), 

SureBead/ Solid- 

Blue S 

SolidBlue A 

SureBead A 

Note 

Operating hydraulic pressure 

Operating air pressure 

Operating speed 



2.8–4.8 bar 

(40–70 psi) 

103 bar (1,500 psi) maximum 

Exceeds 3,500 cycles per minute 

3.1–5.5 bar (45–80 psi) A 

240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

200 VAC, 50/60 Hz optional (for low-voltage areas) 

204 °C (400 °F) maximum 

NOTE 

A: Recommended range. Dry, regulated, unlubricated air required for applicator operation. 

Best Choice Applicator Configuration Code 

The Best Choice configurator will help you select the applicator best suited to your application. Contact your 

Nordson representative to obtain the configurator program. Below is a typical configuration code listing and a 

table that interprets the code. When a configured applicator is ordered, Nordson assigns a unique identifier code 

to the assembly, and that number is stamped onto the applicator identifier plate. The identifier code can then be 

used to order new configured applicators, forgoing the configuration process. 

Applicator 

Model 

Module 

Type 

Number of 

Modules 

Voltage 

Air Type 

Module 

Spacing 

Cordset 

Cordset 

Position 

Solenoid 

Saturn 

In-line 

Filters 

Number of 

Hydraulic 

Ports 

SURS STD 04 A CA 022 T LB 3A0A E9 3 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

Box 

1 

Applicator Model 

Description 

ClassicBlue Reduced Cavity 

ClassicBlue Zero Cavity 

ClassicBlue Zero Cavity Extended 

ClassicBlue Right Angle 

SureBead S (air-open-spring-close) (AO/SC) 

SureBead A (air-open-air-close) (AO/AC) 

SolidBlue S (AO/SC) 

SolidBlue A (AO/AC) 

NOTE: Solid Blue S replaces Classic Blue Standard. 

Code 

CBRC 

CBZC 

CBZE 

CBRA 

SURS 

SURA 

SLBS 

SLBA 

Box 

2 

Box 

3 

Module Type 

Description 

Code 


STD 

Right Angle (Classic Blue Only) 

RA 

Zero Cavity 

ZC 

Reduced Cavity 

RC 

Zero Cavity Extended 

ZE 

Number of Modules 

Description 

Code 

Number of Modules 1–26 




Automatic Applicators | 7-3 


Box 

4 

Voltage 

Box 

7 

Cordset 

Description 

Code 

Description 

Code 

240 V A 

3000/Blue Series 

T 

200 V B 

Bulk Melter 

B 

Water Wash 

W 

Box 

5 

Air Type 

DIP (Dona Pro)



Best Choice Applicator Configuration Code (contd) 

Box 

8 

Cordset Position 

Box 

10 

Saturn In-line Filters 

Description 

Code 

Description 

Code 

Left Back 

LB 

50-Mesh, Straight 

E0 

Right Back 

RB 

50-Mesh, No Filter Inlet Fitting 

E1 

Left Side 

LS 

50-Mesh, 45° Angle 

E4 

Right Side 

RS 


E9 

Both Back 

BB 


F0 

Back 

BA 


F1 

Top Feed 

TF 


F4 


F9 

Box 

9 

Solenoid 

Description 

First character - # Air ports: 

3 Ports (AO/SC) 

Code 

3 





G0 

G1 

G4 

G9 

4 Ports (AO/AC) 4 

Second character - Voltage: 

24 VDC 

A 

100 VAC 

B 

120 VAC 

C 

200 VAC 

D 

240 VAC 

E 

Third character - LED option: 

Std (black) 

0 

Box 

11 

Number of Hydraulic Ports 

Description 

Code 

1 Hydraulic Port 1 

3 Hydraulic Ports 3 


LED (white) 1 

Fourth character - Solenoid Size: 

Saturn Platinum (SP) - not mounted to 

applictor 

Large Saturn CV (1/4 in. NPT) 

Small Saturn CV (1/8 in. NPT) 

Large Saturn - not mounted to 

applicator 

Small Saturn - not mounted to 

applicator 

S 

A 

B 

Y 

Z 






Module Selection Chart 

ClassicBlue 

right-angle 

(CBRA) 

Module Type Characteristics Application/Usage 

• ClassicBlue, right-angle module, 

adjustable (allows changes in bead 

placement) 

• Air-open, spring-close (AO/SC) 

operation 

• Includes an integrated right-angle 

nozzle 

ClassicBlue right-angle applicators 

provide 90-degree application 

flexibility for low-to-medium speed 

applications. 

ClassicBlue 

reduced cavity 

(CBRC) 

• ClassicBlue reduced cavity module, 

adjustable (allows changes in bead 

placement) 


operation 

• Available in four orifice sizes 

ClassicBlue reduced cavity applicators 

have an integrated nozzle and needle 

assembly that results in self-cleaning 

action and sharp cutoff. When used 

in low to medium speed applications, 

reduced cavity applicators provide 

clog-free/minimum drip operation, uniform 

beads, and consistent flow over 

a wide range of temperatures. 

NOTE: The standard Classic Blue Module is replaced with the Solid Blue S Module. 

Continued... 





Module Selection Chart (contd) 

Module Type Characteristics Application/Usage 

ClassicBlue 

zero cavity (ZC) and 

zero cavity case 

sealing (ZCS) 

Zero Cavity 

Extended (ZE) 

• ClassicBlue zero cavity module with 

micro-adjuster 


operation 

• Available in six orifice sizes 

Use ClassicBlue zero cavity applicators 

in critical applications that require 

consistent no-clog/no-drip operation, 

precise bead placement, and extrusion 

control. The close-tolerance, matched 

nozzle-and-needle assembly eliminates 

the formation of minute adhesive 

pockets that can lead to nozzle 

clogging, drool, and adhesive stringing. 

The movement of the needle within the 

nozzle creates a self-cleaning action, 

minimizing blockages and reducing 

maintenance. Applications for these 

applicators include case sealing, cap 

lining, nonwovens side seaming and 

elastic attachment, bonding, and gasketing. 

Zero cavity applicators feature a 

patented micro-adjust module. A 

micrometer adjustment screw at the 

top of the module can reduce adhesive 

flow by up to 30 percent. Additionally, 

minor variations in bead position can be 

achieved via a load adjustment mechanism. 

These adjustments are especially 

beneficial in high-speed, multi-module 

applicator applications. 

Continued... 






SolidBlue S 

(SLBS) 

Applicator Type Features Application/Usage 

• SolidBlue S standard module, springtension 

adjustable (not stroke-adjustable) 

• Air-open, spring-close (AO/SC) operation 

• Accommodates Saturn single-orifice 

and right-angle nozzles 

SolidBlue S applicators provide longer life 

than ClassicBlue applicators and deliver 

exceptional adhesive cut-off/ minimum-drip 

operation for medium-to-high speed applications. 

SolidBlue A 

(SLBA) 

• SolidBlue A standard module, nonadjustable 

• Air-open, air-close (AO/AC) operation 

• Factory installed Saturn solenoid valve 

• Accommodates Saturn single-orifice 

and right-angle nozzles 

SolidBlue A applicators provide better cutoff 

than SolidBlue S applicators (because of 

the air-open, air-close operation), provide 

extended service life beyond ClassicBlue 

applicators, and deliver exceptional accuracy 

for demanding applications. SolidBlue 

A applicators are recommended for use with 

adhesives that have a viscosity greater than 

1,250 cps and cycle rates below 15 ms. 

SureBead S 

(SURS) 

SureBead A 

(SURA) 

• High quality patterns with virtually 

clog-free operation, even when using 

“difficult to machine” low and medium 

viscosity adhesives 

• Maximum bead deposition capability 

• Air-open, spring-close (SureBead S) 

or air-open, air-close (SureBead A) 

operation 

• Colored ring on the removable nozzle 

easily identifies orifice size 

• Nozzles are interchangeable - change 

orifice sizes without removing the module 

from the applicator 

• Nozzle tip is maintained resulting in 

cleanly applied beads and better product 

seals 

SureBead modular hot melt applicators 

are designed for easy flushing by removing 

the nozzle from the module. Nozzles used 

with a SureBead applicator are designed 

to perform similar in function to reduced 

cavity and zero cavity nozzles. SureBead 

applicators are designed to dispense 

packaging grade adhesives. 









Web Content 




Description 

SolidBlue hot melt applicators with Myritex seals 

provide up to twice the industry-leading service life 

and reduce module replacement costs and unscheduled 

downtime. 

SolidBlue applicators and modules are available in two 

designs. SolidBlue S applicators feature air-open/springclose 

(AO/SC) and SolidBlue A applicators feature airopen/air-close 

(AO/AC) actuation. 

Applicator modules are fully rebuildable and key 

applicator body components are easily accessible for 

easier, faster maintenance. All single and multi-module 

applicators are built from the same applicator body 

platform for greater application flexibility and system 

compatibility. The Best Choice configurator allows you 

to quickly and easily determine the right applicator 

body for your application, minimizing the need for 

specially engineered applicators and reducing delivery 

time. 

Features 

• EasyOn module mounting feature reduces installation time 

and other benefits by providing: 

-- 

Guided, one-way fit (mated module and applicator body 

surfaces) 

-- 

Easier, safer installation (especially on applicator bodies 

located deep within machines) 

-- 

Backward compatibility (modules fit existing Nordson 

applicator bodies) 

-- 

Simpler design. 

• Color-coding identifies AO/AC and AO/SC actuation. 

• Plastic module cover offers protection during incidental 

contact. 

• Performance-matched Saturn® solenoid valves delivers fast 

cycle speeds and consistent opening. 

• New Myritex seals increase service, significantly reducing 

replacement costs, downtime and maintenance. 

• Inspection port allows visual monitoring of module 

performance. 

SolidBlue A and S Modules 

Watch Video 

• Large diameter heater improves service life. 

• SolidBlue S versions meet the performance requirements of 

most applications and include the benefits of long life. 

• SolidBlue S modules retrofit on ClassicBlue applicator bodies 

or are available as a complete SolidBlue S applicator assembly. 

Upgrade existing lines using with SolidBlue S applicators and 

Saturn solenoids. 

• Superior adhesive cut-off helps improve product quality and 

reduce rejects. 

• Factory-set stroke and precision components virtually 

eliminate the need for operator adjustment, producing 

consistent pattern placement. 

• RTD sensors and solid-state temperature control hold within 

±0.5 °C (1 °F) of setpoint, improving bead uniformity. 

• Quick-disconnect electrical plugs and easy-entry service panels 

speed installation and maintenance. 






Parts and Accessories - SolidBlue Applicators 

Use the Best Choice configurator to configure a single-module or multi-module applicator with mounted solenoid 

for a specific application and to obtain a part number and ordering information. The Best Choice configurator 

will also provide dimensions for a specified applicator. Order the configurator CD, part number 1059280, free of 

charge. You may also contact a Nordson representative to obtain a copy of the Best Choice configurator. 

All single module applicators and LP applicators have the same mounting hole configuration as legacy applicators. 

SolidBlue Low-Profile (LP) Applicators 

Low-profile applicators are not available for order through the Best Choice configurator. 

Part Number 

Description 

1057393 SolidBlue A, 2-module, 0.88 centers, CA, water wash 

1057394 SolidBlue A, 2-module, 0.88 centers, CA 

1057397 SolidBlue S, 2-module, 0.88 centers, CA 

1057398 SolidBlue S, 2-module, 0.88 centers, CA, water wash 

1057399 SolidBlue S, 2-module, 0.88 centers, CA, 200V 

1057400 SolidBlue S, 2-module, 0.88 centers, IA 


1057395 SolidBlue A, 4-module, 0.88 centers, CA 

1057396 SolidBlue A, 4-module, 0.88 centers, CA, water wash 


1057405 SolidBlue S, 4-module, 0.88 centers, CA, 200V 

1057406 SolidBlue S, 4-module, 1.00 centers, IA 

1057407 SolidBlue S, 4-module, 0.88-2.62-0.88 centers, CA 











Replacement Modules 

Part Number 

1054951 Module blank, SolidBlue/SureBead 

1052925 SolidBlue S module 

1052927 SolidBlue A module 

Description 


The multi-service device is used for Blue Series modules. Use the multi-service device for air cap adjustment, 

module removal, nozzle removal and applicator filter removal. Refer to the Accessories section for more 

information. 

P/N 1059671 

Insulating Applicator Jackets 

Part Number 

Description 

1065642 Jacket, applicator, BC, single, back, AO/SC* 

1066184 Jacket, applicator, BC, single, back, AO/AC* 

*For other jackets, contact application engineering. 






Dimensions 

40 23 mm 

(1 58 in ) 

57 38 mm 

(2 26 in ) 

40 23 mm 

(1 58 in ) 

98 46 mm 

(3 88 in ) 

83 01 mm 

(3 27 in ) 

This View Shown with Cover Off 

29 59 mm 

(1 17 in ) 

12 45 mm 

(0 49 in ) 

96 83 mm 

(3 81 in ) 

SolidBlue A 

SolidBlue S 





Web Content 

Description 

SureBead applicators and modules maximize application 

flexibility, produce clean patterns and deliver sharp cutoff 

with virtually clog-free operation. Modules feature needle 

and seat design and are smaller than previous SureBead 

models for better placement in machines. SureBead A 

features air-open/air close (AO/AC) and SureBead S 

features air-open/spring-close (AO/SC) actuation. 



Applicator modules are fully rebuildable and key 

applicator body components are easily accessible for 

easier, faster maintenance. All single and multi-module 

applicators are built from the same applicator body 

platform for greater application flexibility and system 

compatibility. The Best Choice configurator allows you 

to quickly and easily determine the right applicator body 

for your application, minimizing the need for specially 

engineered applicators and reducing delivery time. 

SureBead nozzles are similar in design to Nordson Saturn® 

nozzles, with gray upper ring to indicate a pressed-in seat 

with minimal engagement and a color-coded lower ring 

to indicate orifice size. The self-cleaning action of the 

integrated nozzle and needle assembly produces clean 

patterns and sharp cutoff. 

SureBead A and S Modules 

Watch Video 

Features 

Nordson SureBead applicators set the industry standard 

for trouble-free performance, delivering more uptime and 

productivity to your operations. 

• Self-cleaning, integrated needle and reduced cavity nozzle design* 

• Removable Saturn® style nozzles with color-coded rings 

• Myritex long-life seals 

• EasyOn Bowtie® one-way-fit mounting design 

• Color-coded, cool-to-touch module covers 

• Fully rebuildable gun modules 

Benefits 

• Clog-free operation minimizes downtime, maintenance, 

replacement and inventory costs 

• Error-free nozzle and bead size changes without removing 

gun module 

• Unique seals extend module service life 

• Guided, one-way fit for fast, easy installation increases 

uptime 

• Less operator exposure to heated surfaces improves safety 

• Rebuild kits lower replacement parts costs 

*Patented 







Parameter 


Operating air pressure 1 



Specification 

450 °F (230 °C) maximum 

3.1 to 5.5 bar (45 to 80 psi) 

103 bar (1500 psi) maximum 

Exceeds 3500 cycles per minute 

Precision nozzles 2 Single; selected nozzle comes mounted on module 

Nordson 24 VDC Saturn high-temperature solenoids 

Saturn ® solenoid valves 3 recommended for peak performance 

 

240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 


200 VAC, 50/60 Hz optional 

Notes: 

1. Recommended range. Dry, regulated, unlubricated air required for consistent gun operation. 

2. Optional SureBead nozzle/orifice diameters and centerline spacings are available. 

3. Nordson specifies 24 VDC Saturn high-temperature valves for pattern accuracy and extended service life. 

Dimensions 





Parts and Accessories - SureBead Applicators 



Use the Best Choice configurator to configure a single-module or multi-module applicator with mounted solenoid 

for a specific application and to obtain a part number and ordering information. The Best Choice configurator 

will also provide dimensions for a specified applicator. Order the configurator CD, part number 1059280, free of 

charge. You may also contact a Nordson representative to obtain a copy of the Best Choice configurator. 


Part 

1054951 Module blank, SolidBlue/SureBead 

1052928 SureBead S, 0.008 (purple) 

1052929 SureBead S, 0.012 (green) 

1052931 SureBead S, 0.016 (orange) 

1052932 SureBead S, 0.020 (beige) 

1056127 SureBead S, 0.032 (gold) 

1056128 SureBead S, 0.040 (turquoise) 

1052934 SureBead A, 0.008 (purple) 

1052935 SureBead A, 0.012 (green) 

1052936 SureBead A, 0.016 (orange) 

1052937 SureBead A, 0.020 (beige) 

1056129 SureBead A, 0.032 (gold) 

1056130 SureBead A, 0.040 (turquoise) 

Description 

Replacement Nozzle 

Part 

Description 

339695 Kit, Nozzle, 0.008 (purple) 

339696 Kit, Nozzle, 0.012 (green) 

339697 Kit, Nozzle, 0.016 (orange) 

339698 Kit, Nozzle, 0.020 (beige) 

1055563 Kit, Nozzle, 0.032 (gold) 

1055560 Kit, Nozzle, 0.040 (turquoise) 



The multi-service device is used for Blue Series modules. 

Use the multi-service device for air cap adjustment, 

module removal, nozzle removal and applicator filter 

removal. Refer to the Accessories section for more 

information. 

P/N 1059671 

Part Number 

1065642 

1066184 

Description 

Jacket, Applicator, BC, Single, Back, 

AO/SC* 

Jacket, Applicator, BC, Single, Back, 

AO/AC* 







Saturn Nozzles to SureBead Module Conversion Table 

Saturn Nozzle Size 

Part No. Description Size 

SureBead Nozzle Size 

AO/SC 

Module 

AO/AC 

Module 

322008 Nozzle,Br,Pur&Pur, 0.008 DIA x 0.050 0.008 1052928 1052934 

322008 Nozzle,Br,Blu&Pur, 0.010 DIA x 0.050 0.008 1052928 1052934 

322012 Nozzle,BR,GRN&Pur, 0.012 DIA x 0.050 0.012 1052929 1052935 

322014 Nozzle,Br,Yel&Pur, 0.014 DIA x 0.050 0.016 1052931 1052936 

322016 Nozzle,Br,Ora&Pur, 0.016 DIA x 0.050 0.016 1052931 1052936 

322018 Nozzle,Br,Red&Pur, 0.018 DIA x 0.050 0.020 1052932 1052937 

322020 Nozzle,Br,Bei&Pur, 0.020 Dia x 0.050 0.020 1052932 1052937 

322024 Nozzle,Br,Gry&Pur, 0.024 Dia x 0.050 0.032 1056127 1056129 

AO/SC 

SureBead Nozzles 

322110 Nozzle,Br,Blu&Brn, 0.010 Dia x 0.075 0.008 1052928 1052934 Part No. Description 

322112 Nozzle,Br,Grn&Brn, 0.012 Dia x 0.075 0.012 1052929 1052935 339695 Nozzle 0.008 (purple) 

322114 Nozzle,Br,Yel&Brn, 0.014 Dia x 0.075 0.012 1052929 1052935 339696 Nozzle 0.012 (green) 

322116 Nozzle,Br,Ora&Brn, 0.016 Dia x 0.075 0.016 1052931 1052936 339697 Nozzle 0.016 (orange) 

322118 Nozzle,Br,Red&Brn, 0.018 Dia x 0.075 0.016 1052931 1052936 339698 Nozzle 0.020 (beige) 

322120 Nozzle,Br,Bei&Brn, 0.020 Dia x 0.075 0.020 1052932 1052937 105563 Nozzle 0.032 (gold) 

322124 Nozzle,Br,Gry&Brn, 0.024 Dia x 0.075 0.032 1056127 1056129 105560 Nozzle, 0.040 (turquoise) 

322212 Nozzle,Br,Grn&Blu, 0.012 Dia x 0.100 0.008 1052928 1052934 

322214 Nozzle,Br,Yel&Blu, 0.014 Dia x 0.100 0.012 1052929 1052935 

322216 Nozzle,Br,Ora&Blu, 0.016 Dia x 0.100 0.016 1052931 1052936 

322218 Nozzle,Br,Red&Blu, 0.018 Dia x 0.100 0.016 1052931 1052936 

322220 Nozzle,Br,Bei&Blu, 0.020 Dia x 0.100 0.020 1052932 1052937 

322224 Nozzle,Br,Gry&Blu, 0.024 Dia x 0.100 0.032 1056127 1056129 

322312 Nozzle,br,grn&grn, 0.012 Dia x 0.150 0.008 1052928 1052934 

322314 Nozzle,Br,Yel&Grn, 0.014 Dia x 0.150 0.012 1052929 1052935 

322316 Nozzle,Br,Ora&Grn, 0.016 Dia x 0.150 0.012 1052929 1052935 

322318 Nozzle,Br,Red&Grn, 0.018 Dia x 0.150 0.016 1052931 1052936 

322320 Nozzle,Br,Bei&Grn, 0.020 Dia x 0.150 0.020 1052932 1052937 

322324 Nozzle,Br,Gry&Grn, 0.024 Dia x 0.150 0.032 1056127 1056129 

322412 Nozzle,Br,Grn&Blk, 0.012 Dia x 0.300 0.008 1052928 1052934 

322414 Nozzle,Br,Yel&Blk, 0.014 Dia x 0.300 0.008 1052928 1052934 

322416 Nozzle,Br,Ora&Blk, 0.016 Dia x 0.300 0.008 1052928 1052934 

322418 Nozzle,Br,Red&Blk, 0.018 Dia x 0.300 0.012 1052929 1052935 

322424 Nozzle,Br,Gry&Blk, 0.024 Dia x 0.300 0.020 1052932 1052937 

322428 Nozzle,Br,Blk&Blk, 0.028 Dia x 0.300 0.020 1052932 1052937 

* All percentages are calculated based on tested flowrates. Actual pressures may vary. 

AO/AC 




Web Content 



Description 

Select Series Applicators provide Nordson quality applicators to fit melters from ITW/Dynatec Hot Melt 

Technologies (HMT®) or Robatech. The Select Series applicators are equipped with the appropriate cordsets and 

proper electrical/hudraulic connectors for easy installation onto other manufacturers’ melters. 

Select Series automatic applicators are available in air-open-spring-close or air-open-air-close versions as offered in 

the Best Choice Series. These applicators deliver many benefits, including: 

• Industry-leading service life that enhances productivity. 

• Choice of Air-open/Spring-close or Air-open/Air-close versions. 

• Consistent life module to module maximizes uptime through predictable behavior. 

• Superior cutoff. Even with difficult materials, delivers accurate bead placement and attractive packages. 

• Excellent module-to-module synchronization on closing. 

Use the Best Choice Configurator to select your new/replacement applicator. 

Best Choice Applicator Configuration Code 

The Best Choice configurator will help you select the applicator best suited to your application. Contact your 

Nordson representative to obtain the configurator program. Below is a typical configuration code listing and a 

table that interprets the code. When a configured applicator is ordered, Nordson assigns a unique identifier code 

to the assembly, and that number is stamped onto the applicator identifier plate. The identifier code can then be 

used to order new configured applicators, forgoing the configuration process. 

Applicator 

Model 

Module 

Type 

Number of 

Modules 

Voltage Air Type Module 

Spacing 

Cordset 

Cordset 

Position 

Solenoid 

Saturn Inline 

Filters 

Number of 

Hydraulic 

Ports 

SURS STD 04 A CA 022 T LB 3A0A E9 3 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

Box 

1 


Box 

2 

Module Type 

Description 

Code 

Description 

Code 

ClassicBlue Reduced Cavity 

CBRC 


STD 

ClassicBlue Zero Cavity 

CBZC 

Right Angle (Classic Blue Only) 

RA 

ClassicBlue Zero Cavity Extended 

CBZE 

Zero Cavity 

ZC 

ClassicBlue Right Angle 

CBRA 

Reduced Cavity 

RC 

SureBead S (air-open-spring-close) (AO/SC) 

SURS 

Zero Cavity Extended 

ZE 

SureBead A (air-open-air-close) (AO/AC) 

SURA 

SolidBlue S (AO/SC) 

SLBS 

SolidBlue A (AO/AC) 

SLBA 

NOTE: Solid Blue S replaces Classic Blue Standard. 





Best Choice Applicator Configuration Code (contd.) 

Box 

3 


Box 

7 

Cordset 

Description 

Code 

Description 

Code 

Number of Modules 1–26 


T 

Bulk Melter 

B 

Box 

4 

Voltage 

Description 

Code 

240 V A 

200 V B 

Water Wash 

DIP (Dona Pro)




Box 

8 


Box 

10 

Saturn Inline Filters 

Description 

Code 

Description 

Code 

Left Back 

LB 


E0 

Right Back 

RB 


E1 

Left Side 

LS 


E4 

Right SIde 

RS 


E9 

Both Back 

BB 


F0 

Back 

BA 


F1 

Top Feed 

TF 


F4 


F9 

Box 

9 

Solenoid 

Description 

Code 




G0 

G1 

G4 

First character - # Air ports: 

3 Ports (AO/SC) 

3 

4 Ports (AO/AC) 4 

Second character - Voltage: 

24 VDC 

A 

100 VAC 

B 

120 VAC 

C 

200 VAC 

D 

240 VAC 

E 

Third character - LED option: 

Std (black) 

0 

Box 

11 


G9 


Description 

Code 

1 Hydraulic Port 1 



LED (white) 1 

Fourth character - Solenoid Size: 

Saturn Platinum (SP) - not mounted to 

applictor 

Large Saturn CV (1/4 in. NPT) 

Small Saturn CV (1/8 in. NPT) 

Large Saturn - not mounted to 

applicator 

Small Saturn - not mounted to 

applicator 

S 

A 

B 

Y 

Z 


Part Number 

Description 

1065642 Jacket, Applicator, BC, Single, Back, AO/SC* 

1066184 Jacket, Applicator, BC, Single, Back, AO/AC* 










Web Content 



Description 

MiniBlue II applicators set the industry standard 

for service life, speed, reliability, and performance, 

reducing maintenance and downtime. 

Features 

• Two interchangeable module technologies are available for 

MiniBlue II applicators: 

-- 

Enhanced ball-and-seat (BAS) design for excellent cutoff 

in the MiniBlue II BAS module 

-- 

Patented, self-cleaning, integrated needle and reduced 

cavity in the MiniBlue II SureBead module 

• Both module types incorporate patented Reflex seal 

technology for superior life 

• MiniBlue II BAS modules accept easily removable 

Nordson Saturn nozzles 

• MiniBlue II SureBead modules are available in sizes 

ranging from 0.008 in. to 0.040 in. for maximum 

application flexibility 

• MiniBlue II applicators are available in the following 

formats: 

-- 

Compact, energy efficient single-module slim line 

-- 

Single module and configurable standard body 

-- 

Direct fit retrofit for Best Choice SolidBlue® S and 

SolidBlue A applicators 

-- 

Multi-module Low-Profile (BAS module only) 

• Engineered, high-temperature plastic insulating covers 

are standard on MiniBlue II slim line applicators All 

applicators include Saturn® filters 

• Water-wash versions are also available 

MiniBlue II SureBead modules use only MiniBlue 

SureBead nozzles. 

Benefits 

MiniBlue II with plastic cover and SP solenoid 

Watch Video 

• Module and solenoid combination reduces the 

performance gap between pneumatic and electric 

applicators 

• Longest operating life of any pneumatic applicator in the 

packaging industry; reduces replacement frequency and 

cost 

• Fast cycle times and superior high-speed performance 

• Stronger air-open/air-close force promotes sharp cutoff, 

cleaner adhesive patterns and high-speed operation 

• Enables savings using intermittent bead dispensing 

• Reduces energy use up to 38 percent and improves safety 

by minimizing exposure to hot surfaces 

• Virtually eliminates nozzle clogging, minimizing downtime 

and maintenance with MiniBlue II SureBead module 





Configuration Code 

Use the MiniBlue II configurator to configure a single-module or multi-module applicator with mounted solenoid 

for a specific application and to obtain a part number and ordering information. The MiniBlue II configurator 

will also provide dimensions for a specified applicator. Contact a Nordson representative to obtain a copy of the 

MiniBlue II configurator. 


Module Type 

Number of 

Modules 

Voltage 

Air Supply 

Configuration 

Cordset Type 


Solenoid Valve 

Type 

Saturn Inline 

Filters 

Number of 

Hydraulic Ports 

Cover 

Manifold Style 

MB2 BEL 00 A CA T TS SP E4 1 000 000 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

Box 

1 


Box 

4 

Voltage 

MiniBlue II 

Description 

Code 

MB2 

Description 

Code 

240 VAC A 

200 VAC B 

Box 

2 

Module Type 

Description 

Code 

MiniBlue II Ball-and-Seat 

BEL 

SureBead With 0.008 Orifice Nozzle 008 



Box 

5 

Air Supply Configuration 

Description 

Common Air 

Independent Air 

Programmed Air 

Code 

CA 

IA 

PA 




Box 

6 

Cordset Type 

Description 

Code 

Box 

3 



Water Wash RTD 

T 

W 

Description 

Code 

Slimline 00 

Freedom Series 

Freedom Series, Water Wash 

F 

D 

Wide Module Applicator With 1 Module 01 

Multi-Module Applicator, WIth 2–8 Modules 02–08 






Box 

7 

Box 

8 

Top Service 


Description 

Left Side (configurable applicators only) 

Right Side (configurable applicators only) 

Left Back (configurable applicators only) 

Right Back (configurable applicators only) 

SP (Saturn Platinum) 

Solenoid Valve Type 

Description 

Code 

TS 

LS 

RS 

LB 

RB 

Code 

SP 

SD MiniMac, Line Speeds, 90 m/min 

(295 ft/min) SD 

SG (Saturn) 24 VDC, Rev. Function 

SG 

Box 

9 


Description 










On slim single-module applicators, the 

hose connector is located just above the 

integrated filter. On single- or multimodule 

configurable applicators, the filter 

is inline with the hose connector. 

Code 

E0 

E4 

E9 

F0 

F4 

F9 

G0 

G4 

G9 

SD solenoid valves may not be used in 

common air applicator configurations. 

If the production line speed is 90 m/min 

(295 ft/min) or less, any solenoid valves 

may be used. If the production line speed 

is greater than 90 m/min (295 ft/min), 

only SP solenoid valves may be used. 

Box 

10 


Description 

Code 

One Hose Port Centered On Back. 1 

One Hose Port On Each End And One 

Centered On Back. 

3 

One Hose Port On Each End And Three On 

Back (one in the center and one at each end) 5 

Box 

11 

Cover 

Description 

Code 

No Cover 000 

Soft Cover 010 

Box 

12 

Manifold Style 

Description 

Code 

Standard MiniBlue 000 

Mounts In Same Location As Best Choice 

Air-Close Applicator 

BCA 

Mounts In Same Location As Best Choice 

Spring-Close Applicator 

BCS 







Item Specification Note 

190 °C (400 °F) maximum 

System hydraulic pressure 103 bar (1,500 psi) maximum A 

Operating air pressure 3.4–5.5 bar (50–80 psi) B 

Maximum cycle rate 

Nozzles 


Saturn Solenoid valve power supply 

Minimum bead deposition 


8,000 cycles per minute 

Saturn, single orifice (controlled engagement) nozzles 

240 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 200 VAC, 50/60 Hz optional 

24 VDC, high-temperature, factory installed 

2 ms (adhesive dependent) 

500 to 1500 cps optimal 

500 to >5000 cps capability 

NOTE A: Recommended range. Dry, regulated, unlubricated air required for consistent applicator operation. 

B: System hydraulic pressures are application-dependent. Variables such as the adhesive type and product line 

speed must be considered when establishing an optimum system hydraulic pressure. 



Part 

Number 

Description 

1095703 Module, MiniBlue II, Ball and Seat 

1121479 Module, MiniBlue II, SureBead, 0.20 (0.008) Purple 

1121480 Module, MiniBlue II, SureBead, 0.31 (0.012) Green 

1121481 Module, MiniBlue II, SureBead, 0.41 (0.016) Orange 

1121482 Module, MiniBlue II, SureBead, 0.51 (0.020) Beige 

1121483 Module, MiniBlue II, SureBead, 0.81 (0.032) Gold 

1121484 Module, MiniBlue II, SureBead, 1.0 (0.040) Turquoise 

Nozzles 

Part 

Number 

Description 

1121473 Kit, nozzle, MiniBlue II, SureBead, 0.008 (Purple) 

1121474 Kit, nozzle, MiniBlue II, SureBead, 0.012 (Green) 

1121475 Kit, nozzle, MiniBlue II, SureBead, 0.016 (Orange) 

1121476 Kit, nozzle, MiniBlue II, SureBead, 0.020 (Beige) 

1121477 Kit, nozzle, MiniBlue II, SureBead, 0.032 (Gold) 

1121478 Kit, nozzle, MiniBlue II, SureBead, 0.040 (Turquoise) 

Heater 

Part 

Number 

Description 

734013 Heater Cartridge - Slim - 240V 

1061561 Heater Cartridge - Slim - 200V 

Cordsets 

Part 

Number 

Description 

Note 

1103014 Cordset, MiniBlue II A, B, C 

1124315 Cordset, Miniblue II, Multi, Water Wash B, C 

1103015 Cordset, Miniblue II, Slim, Water Wash A, C 

1121501 Kit, Cordset, Applicator, Freedom A, B, C 

1123116 Kit, Cordset, Applicator, Freedom, WW B, C 

1123115 

Kit, Cordset, Applicator, Freedom, WW, 

Slim 

A, C 

NOTE A: Used With Slimline Applicators. 

B: Used With Standard Applicators. 

C: Cordsets include RTDs. 

Applicator Insulating Covers 

Part 

Number 

Description 

1099297 Insulating Jacket MiniBlue Single Module Slim Body 

1099298 

Insulating Jacket MiniBlue Single Module Wide 

Body 






Integrated Filters 

Part 

Number 

Description 

1045502 Filter, 50 Mesh, Saturn, M14, 2 pack 



1123661 Kit, Filter, 50 Mesh, Saturn, M14, 5 pack 



Solenoids 

Part 

Number 

1095800 

1124235 

Description Where Used Notes 

Single-Module Solenoid, Saturn SP 

(M5 ports) 

Single-Module Solenoid, Saturn SP 

waterwash (M5 ports) 

1123910 Single Module Solenoid, P1 (M5 ports) 

771458 Single-Module Solenoid, SD Mini (M5 ports) 

1120826 

1124238 

Multi-Module Solenoid, Saturn SP 

(1/8 in. NPT ports) 

Multi-Module Solenoid, Saturn SP 

Waterwash (1/8 In. Npt Ports) 

1069020 Solenoid, Saturn, SG, 24 VDC, Rev. Function 

Used for single module applicators 

and independent actuation for 

multi-module applicators 






multi-module applicators. 




Used for common and 

programmed actuation 





Nordson recommended solenoid 

for standard stitching applications 

Nordson waterwash solenoid 

recommended for standard 

stitching applications 

High Performance solenoid, 

recommended for applications that 

demand the highest level of 

precision and repeatability 

Recommended where Compact 

profile is of the highest importance 

High flow SP not recommended 

for stitching applications 

High flow SP for waterwash, not 

recommended for stitching 

applications 

Available as a replacement only for 

legacy applicators 

Solenoid Cables 

Part 

Number 


1100687 Cable Assy, Solenoid, M8, 3-Wire, 5 m Used with SD, SP, and P1 

1100688 Cable Assy, Solenoid, 90 Deg, M8, 3-Wire, 5 m Used with SD, SP, and P1 

1100958 Cable Assy, Solenoid, M8, 3-Wire, 10 m Used with SD, SP, and P1 

1100959 Cable Assy, Solenoid, 90 Deg, M8, 3-Wire, 10 m Used with SD, SP, and P1 

1121990 Kit, Cable, Splitter Used with SD, SP, and P1 

1123970 Cable Assy, P1, Suppressed, 2 Pin Socket To M8 Used with P1 ONLY 

Connects one extension cable to 2 

solenoids 

Limits current to 2A maximum. 

Connects to standard M8 cable 





Solenoid Hard Tubing Replacement Kits 

Part 

Number 

Independent Air Kits 

Description Where Used Kit contents 

1123003 Kit, Sol Tubing, MB2, M5 X 48 

Slim & MBII BCA retrofit applicators with 

IA 

Contains 2 tubes and 2 O-rings 

1123004 Kit, Sol Tubing, MB2, M5 X 39 MBII Wide applicators with IA Contains 2 tubes and 2 O-rings 

1123005 Kit, Sol Tubing, MB2, M5 X 75 MBII BCS retrofit applicators with IA Contains 2 tubes and 2 O-rings 

Common and Programmed Air Kits 

1123672 

1123673 

1123674 

1123675 

Kit, Sol Tubing, MB2, Wide W/CA/ 

PA SG 

Kit, Sol Tubing, MB2, Wide W/CA/ 

PA SP 

Kit, Sol Tubing, MB2, BCA/BCS 

W/CA/PA SP 

Kit, Sol Tubing, MB2, BCS W/CA/ 

PA SP Special 

Wide body MBII applicator with common 

or programmed air and SG solenoid 

Wide body MBII applicator with common 

or programmed air and SP solenoid 

MBII BCA/BCS retrofit applicator with 

common or programmed air and SP 

solenoid 

MBII BCS retrofit applicator (only fits 

2 module, 22 mm pitch, w/LB or RB 

cordset position) 

Necessary hard tubing and fittings 




Solenoid Optional Flexible Tubing Connection Kits 

Part 


Number 

Kit, Cable, Splitter, Sol, M8, 1M to IA MBII with SP and SD solenoids Straight fittings + 90 banjo fittings + short 

735375 

2F, 0.3M LG 

(incl straight and 90 deg fittings) gun insert tubes + tubing + springs 

Kit, Flex Tubing, MB2 W/CA/PA CA/PA MBII with SP MM and SG 

735140 

Pre-assembled, 1/8 NPT + tubing +spring 

SP Multi & SG 

solenoids 

Note: If longer tubing is needed, order by meter, 252277. 

Solenoid Accessories and Spare Parts 

Part 

Number 


375291 O-ring SP and SD with M5 ports 

734262 Muffler, M5 SD 

1100452 Muffler, 1/8 in. NPT, Plastic, Compact SP 

1058058 Muffler, 1/8 in. NPT, Polyethylene SG 

1106321 Muffler Restrictor Service Kit SP Used when ashesvie viscosity is below 700 cps 

1082500 Muffler, R1/8 SP Used when reduced noise is required (




Dimensions 

MiniBlue II (Slim) Applicator with Saturn SP Solenoid 






MiniBlue II (Wide) Applicator with Saturn SP Solenoid 




Web Content 



Description 

Compact hot melt applicators deliver industry-best service 

life and superior, consistent high-speed performance 

MiniBlue II ball-and-seat adhesive applicators provide 

longer life than any other pneumatic applicators in the 

packaging industry. 

MiniBlue II ball-and-seat Low Profile (LP) applicators 

allow customers to: 

• quickly and easily replace older style low profile applicators and 

benefit from the industry-leading service life and performance of 

MiniBlue II applicators. 

• enable intermittent adhesive bead dispensing and adhesive 

savings with easy connection to EcoBead Pattern Generator for 

OptiBond solutions. 

• minimize maintenance, downtime, replacement parts and 

inventory costs using long-life MiniBlue II LP applicators. 

MiniBlue II LP applicators use standard Saturn Nozzles. 

MiniBlue II Low Profile with SP solenoid 

Features 

• MiniBlue II ball-and-seat module 

• Integrated Saturn filter 

• New Multi-module Saturn Platinum (SP) Solenoid 





MiniBlue II LP Applicators 

Part 

Number 

Description 

No. 

Modules 

1120413 MB2-BEL-LP-02ACA-022-T-F41 2 

Spacing 

Inches 

Volts 

1120648 MB2-BEL-LP-02ACA-022-W-F41 2 240 W 

0.88 

1120649 MB2-BEL-LP-02BCA-022-T-F41 2 200 T 

Cordset 

240 T 

1120714 MB2-BEL-LP-02BCA-022-W-F41 2 200 W 

1120414 MB2-BEL-LP-04ACA-022-T-F41 4 

240 T 

1120715 MB2-BEL-LP-04ACA-022-W-F41 4 240 W 

0.88 

1120716 MB2-BEL-LP-04BCA-022-T-F41 4 200 T 

1120717 MB2-BEL-LP-04BCA-022-W-F41 4 200 W 

MiniBlue II LP Applicators - Freedom 

Part 

Number 

Description 

No. 

Modules 

1121728 MB2-BEL-LP-02ACA-022-F-F41 2 

Spacing 

Inches 

Volts 

1122120 MB2-BEL-LP-02ACA-022-D-F41 2 240 D 

0.88 


Cordset 

240 F 

1122122 MB2-BEL-LP-02BCA-022-D-F41 2 200 D 

1121729 MB2-BEL-LP-04ACA-022-F-F41 4 

240 F 

1122121 MB2-BEL-LP-04ACA-022-D-F41 4 240 D 

0.88 


1122123 MB2-BEL-LP-04BCA-022-D-F41 4 200 D 

Filter 

100 

mesh 

100 

mesh 

Filter 

100 

mesh 

100 

mesh 

Solenoid 

Saturn Platinum 24 VDC 


Solenoid 




Replacement Module 

Part 

Number 

Description 

1095703 Module, MiniBlue II, Ball and Seat 

Heaters 

Part 

Number 

Description 

938149 Htr Cart, .25D x 2.75LG, 100W,240V, 2 Module 




Cordsets 

Part 

Number 

1103014 Cordset, MiniBlue II 

Description 

1124315 Cordset, MiniBlue II, Multi, Water Wash 

1121501 Kit, Cordset, Applicator, Freedom 

1123116 Kit, Cordset, Applicator, Freedom, Water Wash 

Cordsets include RTDs. 

Integrated Filters 

Part 

Number 

Description 












Nozzles 

Saturn 101XXXX Right-angle Single and Dual Orifice 

1011XXX 

1015XXX 

Orifice Diameter mm (in.) Bottom Ring 

Nozzle 

Angle 

0.20 

(0.008) 

Purple 

0.25 

(0.010) 

Blue 

0.31 

(0.012) 

Green 

0.36 

(0.014) 

Yellow 

0.41 

(0.016) 

Orange 

0.46 

(0.018) 

Red 

0.51 

(0.020) 

Beige 

0.61 

(0.024) 

Gray 

0.71 

(0.032) 

Black 

0.81 

(0.032) 

Gold 

1.02 

(0.040) 

Turquoise 

Brass 

Adapter, 

Stainless 

Steel 

Insert 

Single 90° 

Purple 

Dual 15° 

Brown 

Dual 30° 

Blue 

1011008 1011010 1011012 1011014 1011016 1011018 1011020 1011024 1011028 1011032 1011040 

1015812 1015814 1015816 1015818 1015820 1015824 1015828 

1015912 1015914 1015916 1015918 1015920 1015924 1015928 

Applicator-to-Hose Connectors 

Applicator-to-hose connectors are installed between the 

applicator and hose to ease hose routing and to help 

prevent bending or pinching of the hose. 

4 

1 

2 3 

Insulating Cuffs 

Insulating cuffs are used to insulate 

hose-to-applicator joints. 

Part 

Number 

Description 

273634 Cuff, Insulating, 64 mm (2.5 in.) 

273635 Cuff, Insulating, 50 mm (2.0 in.) 

274429 Cuff, insulating, 44 mm (1.75 in.) 

Item 

Part 

Number 

Description 

Note 

1 972657 

Connector, Hose, With O-ring, 

Straight 

A 

2 274179 Connector, Hose, With O-ring, 45° 

3 274180 Connector, Hose, With O-ring, 90° 

4 945032 • O-ring, Viton, 3/8 in. Tube B 

NOTE A: All applicators are shipped with this straight hose 

connector pre-installed on the applicator. 

B: This is the replacement O-ring for all hose 

connectors. 





Solenoid 

Part 

Number 

1120826 


Multi-Module Solenoid, Saturn 

SP (1/8 in. NPT ports) 

Used for common and programmed 

actuation 

High flow SP, not recommended for stitching. 

Solenoid Cabling 

Part 

Number 

Description 

Notes 

1100687 Cable Assy, Solenoid, M8, 3-Wire, 5 m 

1100688 Cable Assy, Solenoid, 90 Deg, M8, 3-Wire, 5 m 

1100958 Cable Assy, Solenoid, M8, 3-Wire, 10 m 

1100959 Cable Assy, Solenoid, 90 Deg, M8, 3-Wire, 10 m 

1121990 Kit, Cable, Splitter Connects one extension cable to 2 solenoids 

Solenoid Hard Tubing Replacement 

Part 

Number 

1120832 Tube, Long, 6MM OD, MB2 LP 

1120833 Tube, Short, 6MM OD, MB2 LP 

Description 

Solenoid Optional Flexible Tubing Connection Kits 

Part 

Number 

1123490 

1120831 


Kit, Flex Tubing, MB2 LP W/SP 

Multi, 90 Deg. 

Kit, Flex Tubing, MB2 LP W/SP 

Multi, Straight 

MBII LP, one 90 deg. one straight 

fitting 

MBII LP, straight fittings 

flexible kit with 90 deg legris 1065962, 

straight legris, and 6mm PTFE tubing 

LP remote mount, 1/4 tube OD x 1/8 NPT, 

both straight, one high temp, one std., 

PTFE tubing 

SP Solenoid Accessories and Spare Parts 

Part 

Number 

Description 

Notes 

1100452 Muffler, 1/8 in. NPT, Plastic, Compact 

1106321 Muffler Restrictor Service Kit Used when ashesvie viscosity is below 700 cps 

1082500 Muffler, R1/8 Used when reduced noise is required (




Dimensions 

MiniBlue II Low Profile - 2 module configuration 






MiniBlue II Low Profile - 4 module configuration 




Web Content 



For use with MiniBlue II Applicators 

Description 

Economical and easy to use, the EcoBead pattern 

generator lets you apply short, intermittent beads in 

place of long continuous beads by enabling your parent 

machine controls. The need to reprogram your PLC or 

add a conventional pattern controller is eliminated. 


The EcoBead device is easy to install and connects 

directly to a Saturn® Platinum (SP or P1) solenoid valve 

that provides air to a MiniBlue II adhesive applicator. 

Adhesive savings ranging from 30- to over 50-percent 

are common. Your savings will depend on your 

application. 

Features 

• Quickly enables intermittent adhesive bead dispensing in 

current operations 

• Easy in-line installation 

• Automatically adjusts to line speed changes 

• Optional USB programming module for customized patterns 

• No-tool installation. Programs set with a common screwdriver 

• IP 55 rated 

• Multi-colored status LEDs 

• Protective covers for programming switches 

• Needs no external power supply, encoder, trigger device or 

line- speed sensor 

EcoBead Pattern Generator - Installed on MiniBlue II 

(shown for illustration purposes only) 

Watch Video 

Benefits 

• Compatible with existing 24-volt control architectures 

• No costly PLC or controller program changes required 

• Assures programmed savings over a wide production range 

• Flexibility to meet a wide variety of requirements 

• Fast pattern and bead changes. Easy adjustments for adhesive 

optimization 

• Withstands demanding environments 

• Monitor performance at a glance 

• Prevents unauthorized changes or tampering 

• Lowest cost solution for intermittent bead dispensing 

Part Number 

Part Number 

1121012 Cover 

Description 





For use with MiniBlue II Applicators 





Web Content 



RC Type Modules 

Description 

Nordson MiniBlue applicators are ideal for applications 

with close flap compression sections. Close multimodule 

centerlines as small as 16 mm (0.63 in.) extend 

mounting and pattern flexibility in confined spaces. 

Single module MiniBlue applicators offer an 18 mm 

(0.71 in.) wide manifold. 

Compact and configurable, Nordson MiniBlue 

applicators are available with a choice of ball and seat or 

reduced cavity applicator modules. 

Two spring-loaded seals extend module operating life 

and reduce air section failure. These long-life hydraulic 

seals help improve durability and minimize maintenance 

and downtime. 

MiniBlue modules feature air-open/air-close (AO/AC) 

actuation, providing a strong closing force to minimize 

adhesive stringing, especially with aggressive and pressure 

sensitive adhesives. 

MiniBlue applicators feature Nordson’s EasyOn design, 

which provides: 

• Guided, one-way fit (mated module and applicator body 

surfaces) 

• Easier, safer installation (especially on applicator bodies located 

deep within machines) 

• Modules fit existing Nordson applicator bodies (backward 

compatibility). 

• Fixed reduced cavity or removable Saturn nozzles offer greater 

application flexibility. 

• MiniBlue applicators are compact and configurable for 

applications with close flap compression sections. 

• The MiniBlue configurator CD tool can design applicators from 

immediate input and can provide customers with immediate 

product drawings. 

Features 

MiniBlue Applicator 

• MiniBlue Modules fit existing Nordson H-100 or Mini100 

applicator bodies. 

• Integral 50-mesh filter prevents clogging 

• Factory-set stroke and spring-loaded seals provide pattern 

consistency and extend service life. 

• RTD sensors combined with solid-state proportional °C 

(1 °F) of setpoint, controls hold to within ± 0.5 improving 

bead uniformity. 

• Quick-disconnect electrical plugs speed installation and 

maintenance. 

• Advanced components and design techniques provide 

compliance with worldwide approval codes. 

NOTE: For BAS (Ball and Seat) version of this applicator, use 

MiniBlue II Applicator. 







Use the MiniBlue configurator to configure a single-module or multi-module applicator with mounted solenoid 

for a specific application and to obtain a part number and ordering information. The MiniBlue configurator will 

also provide dimensions for a specified applicator. Contact a Nordson representative or visit https://ppa.nordson. 

com to obtain a copy of the MiniBlue configurator. 


Module Type 

Number of 

Modules 

Cordset 


Air Type 

Saturn Inline 

Filters 

Additional Hose Ports 


Type 

MiB R16 03 T LS CA F0 3 SG A 00 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

Voltage 

Programmed Air 

Groups 

Box 

1 


Box 

4 

Cordset 

Description 

Code 

Description 

Code 

MiniBlue 

MiB 

Standard RTD 

T 

Box 

2 

Module Type 

Description 

Code 

Box 

5 

Water wash RTD 


W 

Reduced cavity, 0.20 mm (0.008 in.) 

R08 

Description 

Code 


R12 

Slim single-module applicator 

TS 


R16 

Left side (configurable applicators only) 

LS 


R20 

Right side (configurable applicators only) 

RS 

Box 

3 


Left back (configurable applicators only) 

Right back (configurable applicators only) 

LB 

RB 

Description 

Code 

Slim single-module applicator 

(18 mm [0.71 in.]), 1 module 

00 

Box 

6 

Air Type 

Configurable single-module applicator 

(40 mm [1.47 in.]), 1 module 01 

Common air 

Description 

Code 

CA 

Configurable multi-module applicator, 2–8 

modules 

02–08 

Independent air 

Programmed air 

IA 

PA 

NOTE: Use MiniBlue II Configurator for BAS Applicator. 





Box 

7 

Box 

8 

50-mesh, straight 

50-mesh, 45° angle 









Description 

Code 

E0 

E4 

E9 

F0 

F4 

F9 

G0 

G4 

G9 

On slim single-module applicators, the hose 

connector is located just above the integrated 

filter. On single- or multimodule configurable 

applicators, the filter is inline with the hose 

connector. 

Additional Hose Ports 

(all applicators have three hose ports) 

Description 

One hose port on each end and one centered 

on back. 

Code 

3 

Box 

9 

Box 

10 

Box 

11 

SD (small) 

Line speeds 

Solenoid Valve Type 

Description 

90 m/min (295 ft/min) 

SG (Saturn) All line speeds 

SD solenoid valves may not be used in 

common air applicator configurations. 

If the production line speed is 90 m/ 

min (295 ft/min) or less, either SD or 

SG solenoid valves may be used. If the 

production line speed is greater than 90 

m/min (295 ft/min), only SG solenoid 

valves may be used. 

Voltage 

Description 

Code 

SD 

SG 

Code 

230 VAC A 

200 VAC B 

Programmed Air Groups 

Description 

Code 

One hose port on each end and three on 

back (one in the center and one at each end) 

5 

Programmed air (two module groups only) 

200 VAC B 

PA 









204 °C (400 °F) maximum 

System hydraulic pressure 103 bar (1,500 psi) maximum A,B 



Nozzles 


3.4–5.5 bar (50–80 psi) 

5 bar (73 psi) optimal 

Exceeds 4,200 cycles per minute 

0.20, 0.30, 0.41, and 0.51 mm (0.008, 0.012, 0.016, and 

0.020 in.) reduced-cavity modules; all Saturn nozzles 

240 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 200 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Solenoid valve power supply 24 VDC only E 

Note: A. MiniBlue applicator modules operate as air‐open, air‐close valves. The loss or elimination of air pressure to the applicator solenoid valve 

without a corresponding reduction in system hydraulic pressure may cause the applicator modules to remain open. 

B. System hydraulic pressures are application‐dependent. Variables such as the adhesive type and product line speed must be considered when 

establishing an optimum system hydraulic pressure. 

C. Use dry, regulated, unlubricated air for consistent applicator operation. 

D. On reduced‐cavity applicators, the nozzle is an integral part of the applicator module. E: Contact Nordson for information regarding an 

alternate power supply. 

C 

D 


Part Number 

1099967 Module replacement kit, .008RC 




Description 





Dimensions 

128 27 mm 

(5 05 in ) 

6 1 mm 

(0 2 in ) 

14 3 mm 

(0 5 in ) 

9 96 m m 

(0 04 in ) 

133 5mm (5 2 in ) 

12 m m 

(0 5 in ) 

0 32 mm 

(0 013 in ) 

15 8 mm (0 8 in ) 

70 5 mm 2 8 in ) 

74 35 m m 

(2 93 in ) 

84 1 mm 

(3 3 in ) 

57 1 mm 

(2 2 in ) 

97 mm (3 8 in ) 

127 15 mm (5 00 in ) 

For Filter Change 

7 93 mm (0 31 in ) 

9 mm (0 3 in ) 

15 88 mm (0 52 in ) 

18 mm (0 7 in ) 

Slim, single-module applicator with SD solenoid valve 







128 27 m m 

(5 05 in ) 

1 08 m m 

(0 04 in ) 

2 

4 

3 

1 

39 07 mm (1 54 in ) 

6 1 mm 

(0 2 in ) 

5 06 m m 

(0 20 in ) 

0 24 m m 

(0 01 in ) 

12 m m 

(0 5 in ) 

15 8 mm (0 8 in ) 

70 5 mm 2 8 in ) 

74 35 m m 

(2 93 in ) 

84 1 mm 

(3 3 in ) 

(Saturn) 

57 1 mm 

(2 2 in ) 

97 mm (3 8 in ) 

127 15 mm (5 00 in ) 

For Filter Change 

7 93 mm (0 31 in ) 

9 mm (0 3 in ) 

15 88 mm (0 52 in ) 

18 mm (0 7 in ) 

Slim, single-module applicator with SG solenoid valve 






13 mm 

(0 5 in ) 

94 mm 

(3 7 in ) 

73 mm 

(2 9 in ) 

78 7 mm 

(3 1 in ) 

88 45 (Saturn) 

155 mm 

(6 1 in ) 

(5 5 in ) 

50 8 mm 

(2 0 in ) 

44 mm 

(1 73 in ) 

If water resistant 

45 mm (1 77 in ) 

141 3 mm 

(5 6 in ) 

228 mm 

(9 0 in ) 

13 mm 

(0 5 in ) 

88 45 (Saturn) 

78 7 mm 

(3 1 in ) 

72 4 mm 

(2 9 in ) 

94 mm 

(3 7 in ) 

44 mm 

(1 73 in ) 

If water resistant 

45 mm (1 77 in ) 

50 8 mm 

(2 0 in ) 

141 mm 

(5 6 in ) 







66 mm 

(2 6 in ) 

44 mm 

(1 7 in ) 

If water-resistant 

45 mm (1 78 in ) 

13 mm 

(0 5 in ) 

155 mm 

(6 1 in ) 

(78 7 mm 

(3 1 in ) 

88 45 mm Saturn 

94 mm 

(3 7 n ) 

62 mm 

(2 4 in ) 

90 mm 

(3 5 in ) 

11 mm 

(0 43 in ) 


12 mm (0 47 in ) 

Pitch 

8 mm 

(0 32 in ) 

50 8 m m 

(2 0 in ) 

146 mm 

(5 7 in ) 

141 3 mm 

(5 6 in ) 

71 5 mm 

(2 8 in ) 

228 mm 

(9 0 in ) 

14 3 mm 

(0 6 in ) 

13 mm 

(0 5 in ) 

6 3 mm 

(0 2 in ) 

45 03 mm 

(1 8 in ) 

15 88 mm 

(0 6 in ) 

0 9 mm 

(0 04 in ) 

(78 7 mm 

(3 1 in ) 

72 4 mm 

(2 9 in ) 

94 mm 

(3 7 in ) 

88 45 mm Saturn 

8 mm 

(0 32 in ) 

Pitch 

11 mm 

(0 43 in ) 


12 mm (0 47 in ) 

14 78 mm 

0 7 in ) 

50 8 m m 

(2 0 in ) 

141 mm 

(5 6 in ) 





Web Content 

Description 

The PatternPro applicator features a rotating disk design, 

which allows you to rotate the modules on the applicator 

body, easily creating new patterns and dramatically 

reducing downtime during product changeover. 

A series of O-rings and separate air and hydraulic 

passages allow the disk and applicator module to pivot 

on their axes while adhesive and air flow uninterrupted 

to the modules. 

A small work envelope allows the PatternPro applicator 

to fit into tight parent machine constraints, where 

standard multi-module applicators will not. 



PatternPro applicators are available with reliable Nordson 

air-open/spring-close SolidBlue S Series modules. Special 

applicators can be ordered for use with MiniBlue II (BAS 

or SB), ClassicBlue zero cavity or SureBead S reduced 

cavity modules. 

Closer bead-to-bead positioning permits more flexibility 

than stacked module applicators. Bead repositioning can 

be accomplished without moving the entire applicator. 

PatternPro Applicator 

Features 

• Provides close bead-to-bead spacing. 

• Speed pattern changes during product changeover reducing 

downtime. 

• A variety of modules are available for use to address different 

applications. 

• Unique rotating disk design allows modules to pivot without 

adhesive leakage. 

• Standard 40 mm (1.58 in.) and 70 mm (2.76 in.) module pitch 

applicators cover most traymaking, cartoning and wrap-around 

carton sealing applications. 

This is a configurable product. Contact your Nordson 

representative for additional information. 






Dimensions - Select Models 












Dimensions - Select Models (contd.) 












Dimensions - Select Models (contd.) 




Web Content 



Description 

Series H-20 Automatic Hot Melt Applicators 

provide consistent bead deposition in high-flow, 

intermittent applications using high-viscosity hot 

melts and other filled thermoplastic materials. Several 

different applicator configurations are available to 

satisfy individual case sealing and product assembly 

requirements. 

• Longer life cartridge design improves service life. 

• Air-open spring-close design provides speeds that exceed 

4,200 cycles per minute and ensures consistent performance 

and reliability. 

• Applicators are available with RTD sensors for precise 

temperature sensing and control of applicator temperatures to 

within ±0.5 °C (1 °F) of setpoint. 

• Both standard and large ball-and-seat designs offer high-flow 

capability. 

• Choice of controlled-engagement single-orifice nozzles, 

precision multi-orifice nozzles and extended nozzle assemblies 

provides pattern versatility. 

• Applicators are available with water-resistant design, 

integral-filtered bodies, nozzle extension assemblies, variable 

temperature controls and integral slot nozzles. 

Standard H-20 

• High-flow versatility and the largest nozzle 

• Selection of any applicator design. 

H-20 Large Ball and Seat 

• Large ball-and-seat design (LBS) features large bore fittings 

and a larger ball-and-seat for handling high-viscosity or 

filled materials. Ideal for drum melters, the H-20 LBS 

accommodates 5/16 and 5/8 in. hose diameters. 

Micro-Adjust H-20 

H-20 Pneumatic 

Applicator & Module 

• Built-in heated filter removes char and contaminants that can 

inhibit flow and clog nozzles. 

• Filter is easily accessible for cleaning. 

• Three filter screen sizes are available to meet requirements. 

• Integrated filter body applicators feature high-capacity filters, 

providing up to 10 times the service interval of inline filters 

Filtered H-20 

• Built-in heated filter removes char and contaminants that can 

inhibit flow and clog nozzles. 

• Filter is easily accessible for cleaning. 

• Three filter screen sizes are available to meet requirements. 

• Integrated filter body applicators feature high-capacity filters, 

providing up to 10 times the service interval of inline filters. 







Parameter 

Working hydraulic pressure MPa (psi) 

Specification 

230 °C (450 °F) maximum 

10.34 (1,500) maximum 

Operating air pressure (1) MPa (psi) 0.28–0.48 (40–70) 


Nozzle series (2) 


Exceeds 4,200 cycles/minute 

Single and multi-orifice with fixed and optional engagements; 

232XXX, 231XXX and 220XXX domed, right-angle adapter 

with 236XXX series 

240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

200 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

(1) 

Recommended range. Dry, regulated, nonlubricated air required 

for consistent applicator operation. Module performance and 

durability will be negatively affected if operated outside the 

recommended range. Volumetric air requirements will vary with 

applicator configuration and application. 

NOTE: Use H-20 applicators for high-flow, intermittent 

applications. They are excellent for dispensing high 

viscosity and filled materials. H-20 cartridge design 

provides approximately four times the life of previous 

design when used with packaging-grade hot melts. 

(2) 

Specify and order nozzles separately. 

Selection Charts 

H-20 RTD Applicators 

H-20T 

H-20T-L 

Model Part Number Voltage Comments 

274702 240 2300-style cordset 

276096 200 

H-20 LBS-T - 5/16 in. Hose 120664 

H-20 LBS-T - 5/8 in. Hose 136537 

H-20-T Micro-Adjust Needle 274728 

H-20-1 Filtered Body 815138 240 

H-20-TW 276778 waterwash, 2300-style cordset 

H-20 LBS - 5/8 in. Hose 276954 

Series 5000 drum melters, drum melter rectangular connection 

(unit end) 






H-20 Thermostat Applicator 

H-20A (HM IV) 

Model Part Number Voltage Temperature °C (°F) Comments 

153010 

273385 

498661 

240 

240 

200 

175 (350) 

190 (375) 

190 (375) 

H-20A, 80A (Series 2000) 272716 240 175 (350) QD plug 

H-20B 

270082 

153045 

240 

200 

standard cordset 

175 (350) circulating standard 

cordset 

H-20C 153130 120 

H-20E 240683 240 circulating Model VII 

H-20 LBS - 5 / 16 in. Hose 272269 standard cordset 

H-20 LBS - 5 / 8 in. Hose 272270 

H-20 Micro-Adjust Needle 272261 

H-20W (HM IV) 241969 waterwash 

H-20-1 Filtered (HM IV) 815162 standard cordset 

H-20 Filtered (Series 2000) 815134 QD plug 

A200 Applicator Heads 

Effective April 19, 2002, the Slautterback A-200 Applicator Heads are no longer available as an A-200 labeled head. 

The A-200 Head is an H-20 LBS applicator that is mounted on a Slautterback system. Nordson has released the H20 

heads to support our Slautterback customers. The H20 LBS replacements are listed below. These heads are in stock 

and available for immediate shipment. 

Nordson Part 

Description 

1024510 Applicator, H20-LBS, 100 ohm RTD 

1024511 Applicator, H20 LBS, SB, 300° Thermostat 








Thermostat Options 

Temperature °C (°F) Part Number Temperature C (°F) Part Number 

55 (130) 804839 150 (300) 271936 

65 (150) 804837 165 (325) 271928 

80 (175) 804836 286 (350) 271929 

95 (200) 804835 190 (375) 271930 

105 (225) 271933 205 (400) 271931 

120 (250) 271934 220 (425) 271932 

135 (275) 271935 230 (450) 271937 

NOTE: Cordset retrofit kit (P/N 273906) converts standard H-20 applicators for use with Series 2000 applicators and hoses. RTD 

hoses and applicators provide more consistent patterns than thermostat systems. RTD systems increase component life and reduce 

maintenance costs. Consult your Nordson representative. 

Dimensions 

Model 

H-20A, H-20T, H-20D, H-20F 

H-20 LBS - 5/16 in. Hose H-20 (micro) 


A B C D E 

44.5 (1.75) 87.4 (3.77) 117.6 (4.63) 103.1 (4.06) 19.1 (0.75) 

H-20B, H-20C 58.7 (2.31) 87.4 (3.44) 104.9 (4.13) 104.9 (4.13) 28.7 (1.13) 

H-20E 57.2 (2.25) 88.9 (3.5) 104.9 (4.13) 106.4 (4.19) 28.7 (1.13) 

H-20 LBS - 5/8 in. Hose 44.5 (1.75) 87.4 (3.44) 129.3 (5.09) 103.1 (4.06) 19.1 (0.75) 

H-20W 41.4 (1.63) 111.3 (4.38) 114.3 (4.50) 103.1 (4.06) 19.1 (0.75) 

A 

38 1 mm 

(1 50 in ) 

13 0 mm (0 50 in ) 

14 2 mm 

(0 56 in ) 

142 7 mm 

(5 62 in ) 

C 

B 

111 2 mm 

(4 38 in ) 

Top View 

19 0 mm 

(0 75 in ) 

Side View 

E 

Front View 




Web Content 



Description 

Modular AG900+S dispensing heads accurately dispense 

high-performance adhesives and sealants with viscosities 

up to one million cps. The patented AG900+S is 

compatible with most automated dispensing equipment 

and provides configuration flexibility for various 

gasketing, sealing and bonding applications. 

• Configurable design accurately dispenses solid and foamed 

high-performance materials, including silicones, plastisols, 

urethanes, epoxies, butyls and hot melts. 

• Standard or custom nozzle-and-needle designs meet specific 

deposition requirements. 

• Zero-cavity nozzle-and-needle assembly provides positive shutoff 

to help eliminate clogs and dripping. 

• Standard actuation provides air to open spring to close. 

Optional air assist to close is available for high pressure 

applications. 

• Optional pressure regulator reduces pressure fluctuations 

during applicator opening, maintaining consistent output. 

• Hose interface options reduce stress on hoses and robots. 

• Compact size and weight accommodate most operations. 

• Dowel-pin construction facilitates remounting accuracy after 

service. 

AG-900+S Dispensing Module 

Watch Video 

Module Part Numbers 

Part Number 

Description 

1088351 Applicator Module, AG900+S 

1065451 Applicator Body, Adapter, Steel, AG900+S (Replacement Part Only) 

1086828 Replacement,Cartridge and Piston Assembly, AG900+S 

Solenoid Part Numbers 

Part Number 

Description 

1069250 Saturn Solenoid, AOAC, 24VDC, 1/8 NPT, QD Plug, W/Light 

1069257 Saturn Solenoid, AOAC, 120VDC, 1/8 NPT, QD Plug 

1073542 Kit, AG900+S, Fittings to Small Saturn Solenoid 







• Cold 

• Hot 

Parameter 

Ambient 

230 °C (450 °F) max 

Specification 

Regulated pressure MPa (psi) 10.34 (1,500) 

Maximum input pressure MPa (psi) 

3000 psi @ 121 °C (250 °F) / 1500 psi above 121 °C (250 °F) 

Operating air pressure MPa (psi) 0.41–0.69 (60–100) 


3,200 cycles/minute 

Viscosity range centipoise 1,000–1,000,000 


220–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

270 W (applicator/regulator), 100 W (swivel) 

Weight kg (lb) 

• Cold 

• Heated 

1.8 (4.0) 

2.5 (5.5) 

SINGLE POSITION 

ACTUATOR 

REGULATOR 

REGULATOR 

ADJUSTMENT 

MATERIAL 

IN 

Y AXIS 

SWIVEL 

APPLICATOR 

NEEDLE 

NOZZLE 

X AXIS SWIVEL 











AG900+S Configurations 

Module Configuration 

Heated or Cold 

Cordset 

Voltage 

Nozzle Type 

Overall Nozzle 

Length, L1 

(5mm Increments) 

Secondary Nozzle 

Length, L2 


Primary Nozzle 

Diameter, D1 


Secondary Nozzle Diameter, 

D1 


Oriface Size 

(0.5mm Increments) 

A G 9 . / / / / . 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 

Boxes 

4–5 

Box 

6 

Box 

7 

Box 

8 


Description 

Code 

Module Only 00 

Module W/Adapter Block & Lock 10 

Module W/Regulator, SAE Adapter 

& Lock 

Heated or Cold 

Description 

Heater for 910 

Heater for 930 

Cold 

None 

Cordset 

Description 

Bm Style Cordset 

T-Style Cordset 

Not Applicable 

Voltage 

30 

Code 

H 

H 

C 

X 

Code 

B 

T 

X 

Description 

Code 

240 V A 

200 V B 

Not Applicable 

X 

Boxes 

11–13 

(2) 

Select “X” for no nozzle 

Overall Nozzle Length(2), 

L1 (5mm Increments) 

X X X 

Boxes 

15–17 

Secondary Nozzle Length(3)(4) 


X X X 

(3) 

Select “X” for no nozzle or if D2 = D1 

(4) 

Pricing for nozzles with L2 in excess of 25mm must be reviewed 

by Engineering 

Boxes 

19–20 

Primary Nozzle Diameter(2)(5), 

D1 (1mm Increments) 

X X X 

(2) 


(5) 

D1 must be less than or equal to 13mm 

Boxes 

22–23 

Secondary Nozzle Length(3), 


X X X 

(3) 


Boxes 

25 & 27 

(2) 


Orifice Size(2) ( 

0.5mm Increments) 

X . X 

(19 mm) L1 

Box 

9 

Nozzle Type(1) 

L2 

size 

Zero Cavity 

No nozzle 

Description 

Code 

Z 

X 

D2 

D1 

(1) 

Pricing includes set of 3 needle nozzle assemblies with applicator 

and engineering 

Nozzle/ 

Module 

Flange 

D1 must be less than or equal to 13 m 






AG900+S Nozzle Configurations 

Nozzle Type 

Nozzle Type 

Overall Nozzle 

Length, L2 



Length, L2 


Primary Nozzle Diameter, 

D1 



Diameter, D1 


Oriface Size (0.5mm 

Increments) 

N Z L . A G 9 0 0 . . / / / / . 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 

Box 

11 

Zero Cavity 

Nozzle Type( 1) 

Description 

Code 

Z 

(19 mm) L1 

L2 

size 

(1) 

Pricing is subject to review by Engineering 

D2 

D1 

Boxes 

13–15 

Overall Nozzle Length, L1 (5mm Increments) 

X X X 

Nozzle/ 

Module 

Flange 

D1 must be less than or equal to 13 m 

Boxes 

17–19 

Secondary Nozzle Length (2)(3) 


X X X 

(2) 

Pricing for nozzles with L2 in excess of 25mm must be reviewed 

by Engineering 

(3) 


Boxes 

21–22 

Primary Nozzle Diameter(4), 


X X X 

(4) 

D1 must be less than or equal to 13mm 

Boxes 

24–25 

Secondary Nozzle Length(3), 


X X X 

(3) 


Boxes 

27&29 

Orifice Size 

(0.5mm Increments) 

X . X 





Dimensions 

5 51 

1 68 

1 90 

38 

75 

2 14 

1 57 

55 

20 

1 13 

75 

5 81 

4 42 

2 38 

2 63 

NOTE: All dimensions are in inches 




Web Content 



Description 

Compact, all-electric e.dot+ applicators provide precise, 

high-speed dot or bead placement, quiet operation and 

a long service life. 

Easy to install e.dot+ applicators operate in 

combination with a specially designed small diameter 

hose and an external applicator driver, allowing direct 

plug and play connections between the adhesive melter, 

applicator, driver and hose. Nordson e.dot applicators 

have on-times as low as 0.4 ms and cycle rates as fast as 

1.8 ms and a service life in excess of 200 million cycles. 

The ball and nozzle/seat design provides excellent 

repeatability, pattern control and consistency, delivering 

superior dot patterns and minimizing adhesive stringing 

or tailing. The e.dot+ applicator features a removable 

armature and seat and interchangeable nozzles, allowing 

for easy maintenance. Manual stroke adjustment allows 

for re-zeroing of the module after servicing. The e.dot+ 

module coil connector allows fast module exchange. 

The all-electric design of the e.dot+ applicator 

eliminates the need for compressed operating air, 

dynamic seals and frequent module maintenance. An 

integrated Saturn filter simplifies maintenance and is 

necessary for clean operation. 

NOTE: The e.dot+ electric applicator can be driven by various 

devices. Refer to the Applicator Driver Selection Chart and 

the Applicator Driver Comparison Chart in the Controls 

section for more information. 

Features 

e.dot+ Applicator 

Watch Video 

• Delivers accurate dot placement. 

• Requires minimal space for installation and service. 

• Quick, easy installation. 

• Operates quietly. 

• Fast-acting coil delivers small dots/beads at fast line speeds. 

• Reduced cavity nozzle dispenses consistent dots/beads at 

varying line speeds. 

• Integrated Saturn filter removes contaminants from adhesive 

flow path. 

• Quick-disconnect cordset simplifies installation. 





e.dot+ Applicator Specifications 

Service life 

Response time 

Parameter 



Working viscosity 

Maximum viscosity 

Electrical connections 

Electrical requirements 

Heating method 

Integrated saturn filter 


*minimum on-time 0.4 ms viscosity dependent; use e.dot+ application guide. 

**dependent on pattern; use e.dot+ application guide. 

Specification 

200 million cycles 

1.8 ms* 

100 bar (1450 psi) 

48 Bar (700 psi) 

1000 cps 

5000 cps 

Quick-disconnect 

See applicator driver specifications 

Cartridge heater 

200 Mesh 

185 °C (365 °F) 

Maximum 200 °C (392 °F)** 

Applicator Driver Specifications 

NOTE: See Section 10, Controls for applicator driver part numbers. 

Parameter 

LogiComm Control 

System 

LogiComm OEM 

Applicator Driver Board 

LogiComm Applicator 

Driver 

e driver Single Box 

Capacity 

4 or 8 channels per 

board 

4 channels per board 4 or 8 channels per board 1 channel 


100–240 VAC, 

50/60 Hz 

110–230 VAC, 

50/60 Hz 

24 VDC 

100–240 VAC, 

50/60 Hz 

170–264 VAC, 

50/60 Hz 

Maximum Applicator 

Power Capacity 

160 Watts 110 Watts 160 Watts 95 Watts 

Input line fuses 3 Amps 2 Amps 3 Amps 2 Amps 

Trigger source options 

NPN or PNP 

(24 VDC sink/source) 

24 VDC NPN or PNP 24 VDC and 5 VDC 

Enclosure rating IP-30 IP-20 

IP-X4 terminal block version 

IP-30 connector version 

IP-20 







A 200 mesh filter comes standard with e.dot applicators. 

e.dot+ Applicators and Modules 

Part Number 

7302215 Applicator, Top Feed, .25 mm Nozzle 



7302218 Applicator, Rear Feed, .25 mm Nozzle 



7301602 Module, .25 mm Nozzle 



Description 

Applicator Service Kits 

Part Number 

Description 

7302201 Kit, Seal Service, Module, e.dot+ 

7302202 Kit, Armature, Spring, 0.25 mm Nozzle 



1062529 Kit, Cordset, Round Connector, W/Heater And RTD 

7300512 Kit, Service, O-ring, 10 pc., Seal, Module-to-Applicator, e.dot+ 

Cables 

Part Number 

1096060 Cable, 2M, 9-Pin to Fly Leads 



1041835 Cable, 10M, 4-Pin to 9-Pin 

Description 

Nozzles 

Part Number 

Description 

7301540 Nozzle, 0.25 mm, with O-ring 

7301541 Nozzle, 0.3 mm, with O-ring 

7301542 Nozzle, .035 mm, with O-ring 

7300511 Kit, Service, O-ring, 10 pc., Seal, Module-to-Applicator, e.dot+ 

Saturn Integrated Filters 

Part Number 

1045520 Applicator Filter Kit 200 Mesh 

Description 





e.dot+ Small Diameter Hoses 

Part Number 

1040295 Hose, 2 m (6.56 ft.) 

1040296 Hose, 3.5 m (11.5 ft.) 

1040297 Hose, 5 m (16.4 ft.) 

Description 

Applicator Dimensions 

Top Feed 

25 mm 

(0 98 in ) 

9 mm 

(0 35 in ) 

64 3 mm 

(2 53 in ) 

30 6 mm 

(1 2 in ) 

21 mm 

(0 82 in ) 

26 9 mm 

(1 06 in ) 

95 mm 

(3 74 in ) 

54 8 mm 

(2 16 in ) 

25 mm 

(0 98 in ) 

71 mm 

(2 79 in ) 

40mm 

(1 57 in ) 

15 2 mm 

(0 60 in ) 

500 mm 

(19 68 in ) 

Rear Feed 

25 mm 

(0 98 in ) 

21 mm 

(0 83 in ) 

9 mm 

(0 35 in ) 

91 8 mm 

(2 53 in ) 

30 6 mm 

(1 2 in ) 

13 5 mm 

(0 53 in ) 

26 9 mm 

(1 06 in ) 

95 mm 

(3 74 in ) 

22 8 mm 

(0 89 in ) 

25 mm 

(0 98 in ) 

40 mm 

(1 57 in ) 

71 mm 

(2 79 in ) 

15 2 mm 

(0 60 in ) 

500 mm 

(19 88 in ) 




Web Content 



Description 

The E-400B applicator dispenses hot melt adhesive in 

bead form. An applicator driver provides all-electric 

actuation, eliminating the need for compressed air. 

Adhesive enters the inlet port of the E-400B applicator 

and flows through the manifold into the module seat, 

which is sealed by the end of the armature. When the 

coil is energized by the applicator driver, the armature 

lifts off the seat, allowing adhesive to flow. The armature 

is held off the seat by the magnetic attraction of the 

coil. When the applicator driver de-energizes the coil, 

the coil loses its magnetic attraction and the armature 

is forced back into the seat by a return spring, stopping 

the adhesive flow. 

E-400B applicators are available in top and rear feed 

configurations. 

The E-400 BAS module’s hydraulic section can be easily 

disassembled for easy cleaning. 

E-400 BAS uses standard Saturn nozzles. 

Intended Uses 

The E-400B applicator is designed for 

• Industrial applications that require the deposition of a precise 

bead of hot melt adhesive onto a moving substrate 

• Small diameter hoses designed and manufactured by Nordson 

Corporation 

• Electric applicator drivers and pattern controllers designed 

and manufactured by Nordson Corporation 

Contact your Nordson Representative for additional configurations. 


E400 Electric Applicator 

Part 

Number 

Description 

1031013 ES401-RC-T-F, Rear Feed Applicator 

1031635 ES401-RC-T-F, Top Feed Applicator 

1122275 

E400-01-F. Applicator For Use With Freedom 

System 

1086385 Module Service Kit, E-400B B, Bead, Stl Seat 

E-400B Drivers 

The E-400B driver will work for most applications. 

Use the E-400B Driver Application Guide software to 

determine if the driver will work for your application. To 

access the E-400 Application Guide, go to www.enordson. 

com/support and select the E-400 Application Guide link 

to download the software. 

Part 

Description 

1045869 Driver, E-400B, Non-Programmable, High-Viscosity 

1039761 Cable, Applicator-to-Driver, E-400B, 12 m 





E-400B Applicator Specifications 


Adhesive viscosity up to 1.200 cps A 

Operating hydraulic pressure 


82 bar (1,200 psi) 

103.4 bar (1,500 psi) maximum 

175 °C (350 °F) nominal 

190 °C (375 °F) maximum 

Operating speed up to 6,000 cycles per minute A 

A 

Nozzle selection (bead) 


Any standard nozzle or Saturn precision nozzle 

220−240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

NOTE 

A: Actual cycle rates and maximum operating temperatures depend on the application. Use the ES-400 Application Guide 

software to determine the operating speeds for a specific application. 

Torque Specifications 

Dimensions 

Item 

Hose connector 

Bead nozzle 

E-400B module bracket 

(clamp) screw 

Torque Specification 

10−14 N•m (7−10 ft-lb) 

4.5 N•m (40 in.-lb) 

1.7 N•m (15 in.-lb) 

9 60 mm 

(0 38 in ) 

94 38 mm 

(3 72 in ) 78 51 mm 

(3 09 in ) 

9 86 mm 

(0 39 in ) 

24 89 mm 

(0 98 in ) 

12 45 mm 

(0 49 in ) 

51 59 mm 

(2 03 in ) 




Web Content 



Description 

Nordson EM-100 electric applicators provide the 

versatility of attaching one to eight valve modules to 

a single heated manifold that is supplied by a single 

hose. The EM-100 applicator extrudes beads or dots 

of adhesive or other thermoplastic material for a wide 

range of packaging and product assembly applications. 

The inlet to the applicator manifold uses Nordson’s 

standard O-ring port, and is compatible with the 

Nordson Saturn® inline filters. 

EM-100 applicators allow users to specify the 

number and spacing of modules needed for a specific 

application. The spacing from nozzle tip to nozzle tip 

can be as close as 44.45 mm (1.75 in.) and up to a total 

manifold width of 609.6 mm (24 in.). 

EM-100 applicators accept AC or DC signals to 

energize the electric coil on standard or high-speed valve 

modules. The path for driver signal to the EM-100 

applicator coil is provided by an external signal cable 

assembly (purchased separately). Two screws attach the 

valve modules to the manifold for quick removal or 

replacement. EM-100 applicators eliminate the need 

for compressed air or a complex valving mechanism. 

The valving assembly consists of a single moving part, 

two static O-rings and a solenoid mounted on the valve 

block. 

All ports are electrically active. Individual valve modules 

and blanking kits arrange on the manifold to yield 

specific adhesive pattern spacing. A choice of left, right, 

or top feed port to the manifold is available and must 

be specified for each manifold. The product uses the 

same nozzles as the Slautterback E-100, E-100XT, 

M-100 and the Nordson H-20 applicators. 

Features 

EM-100 Electric Applicator 

• Operates at up to 6000 cycles per minute to meet the most 

demanding applications. 

• Arrangement of up to eight individual valve modules on the 

manifold yields specific adhesive pattern spacing. 

• All electric design ensures performance and reliability. 

• Versatile design and wide nozzle spacing allows for use in a 

wide range of packaging and product assembly applications. 

• Resistance temperature detector (RTD) sensors offer precise 

temperature control to within ±1 °C (1 °F) for exceptional 

pattern consistency. 

• Compatible with Nordson Saturn in-line filters. 

NOTE: The EM-100 Series electric applicators can be driven by 

various devices. Refer to the Applicator Driver Selection 

Chart and the Applicator Driver Comparison Chart in the 

Controls section for more information. 






Parameter 

Specification 

Mounting 

Manifold specific 

Hose connections Male JIC no. 6 or 8 

Heater voltage 

200 or 240 VAC 

Coil voltage 

120, 200 or 270 VAC 

Connector 

Quick disconnect coil connector 

Viscosity Maximum 25,000 cps (1) 

Warm-up time 

15 minutes 

Adhesive operating pressure 

344.5–5512 kPa (50–800 psi) 

Temperature control 

RTD 

(1) 

For applications with higher viscosities, contact Nordson. 


The EM‐100 Series applicator is offered as a multi‐module applicator with various module centerline distances and 

actuating sequences. Please contact the Nordson Application Engineering group to address your needs. 

EM-100 Module Replacement 

Part Number Coil Voltage Comments 

1033644 120V AC Valve 

1033645 120V DC Valve 

1033646 120V Continuous Duty Valve 

1033647 200V AC Valve 

1033648 200V DC Valve 


1033650 240V AC Valve 

1033651 240V DC Valve - For HS Valve and DC Driver 


1033653 240V High Speed AC Valve 

1033654 240V High Speed DC Valve (Stemmed valve) 






Driver Cable Assembly for EM Series Electric Applicators 

Cordset Adapter 

Coil Signal 

XXXXXX 

Temperature Controls 

EM Series Applicators 

Part Number 

Description 

1046343 EM Applicator Series Signal Cable, 4.6 m (15 ft), 115V 




1032447 EM Applicator Series Signal Cable, 4.6 m (15 ft), 230V Water Wash 

1032448 EM Applicator Series Signal Cable, 9.1 m (30 ft), 230V Water Wash 









Web Content 


SureSeal Non-Contact 

Sift-Proof Applicator 

Description 

Sift-proof systems provide high-integrity hot melt 

barrier seals that eliminate product loss caused by 

granular products sifting and dusting through seams 

and openings at carton corners. In addition, these 

seals prevent foreign particles, insects or moisture from 

entering liner-less cartons. 

The Nordson SureSeal non-contact sift-proof applicator 

surpasses the performance of conventional, multi-bead 

applicators. A cantilevered mounting bracket 

reduces costly downtime by allowing operators and 

maintenance personnel complete access 

to all service components, which can 

be replaced on-line in less than 

2 minutes. 

Pattern flexibility is achieved using 

individual screw-in nozzles that can be 

replaced without removing the nozzle 

plate from the applicator. Optional nozzle blanks can 

be used to yield specific adhesive pattern spacing on the 

substrate. 

An all-electric design eliminates the need for 

compressed air, dynamic seals and high maintenance 

components, providing longer service life and lowering 

operating costs. SureSeal modules have up to 10 times 

the life of a typical pneumatic applicator. High-flow 

valves support line speeds of over 450 cartons per 

minute. 

Features 

SureSeal sift-proof applicator 

• Improves adhesive usage by 25–50% compared to pneumatic 

sift-proof systems. 

• Installs quickly and easily with integrated, slotted, applicator 

mounting bracket. 

• Optimizes adhesive pattern length using high-speed, high-flow 

module design, reducing stringing and angel hair for cleaner 

operation. 

• Allows changes in carton size and style with minimum 

downtime using quick-change nozzle plates and nozzle blanks. 

Nozzle plate 

SureSeal Sift-Proof Applicator 

• Hardened steel nozzle plate resists scratches. 

• Eases nozzle replacement using screw-in nozzles that can be 

changed without removing the nozzle plate. 

On-line replacement in less than 2 minutes 

• Remove the combined disposable heater and resistance 

temperature detector (RTD) by hand, reducing maintenance 

time. 

• Speed coil and armature replacement. Single piece, disposable 

coil and armature assembly are easily clipped into place. 

• Speed coil and armature replacement. Single piece, disposable 

coil and armature assembly are easily clamped into place. 

NOTE: The Sure Seal Series electric applicators can be driven by 

various devices. Refer to the Applicator Driver Selection 

Chart and the Applicator Driver Comparison Chart in the 

Controls section for more information. 




SureSeal Non-Contact Sift-Proof Applicator 


8-inch Applicator 

Parameter 



Maximum operating speed (application dependent) 

Applicator heating method 


Specification 

204 °C (400 °F) maximum 

68.9 bar (1000 psi) 

450 carton/minute, 76.2–121.92 m/min.. (250–400 ft./min) 

Cartridge-type electric resistance heaters 

230 VAC, 600–900 W (depending on applicator configuration) 


Parameter 



Maximum operating speed (application dependent) 

Applicator heating method 


Specification 

230 °C (446 °F) max. 

68.9 bar (1000 psi) 

450 cartons/min. 76.2–121.9 m/min. (250–400 ft./min.) 

Cartridge-type electrical resistance 

230 VAC, 600–800 W (depending on applicator configuration) 






Dimensions 


4 x 2 54 cm 

4 x (1 0 in ) 

10 16 cm 

(4 00 in ) 

2 87 cm 

(1 13 in ) 

20 95 cm 

(8 25 in ) 

21 00 cm 

(8 25 in ) 

10 80 cm 

(4 25 in ) 

5 80 cm 

(2 00 in ) 

12 22 cm 

(4 81 in ) 

11 38 cm 

(4 44 in ) 

1 3 cm 

(0 51 in ) 

22 22 cm 

(8 76 in ) 

26 26 cm 

(10 14 in ) 

19 15 cm 

(7 54 in ) 

16 15 cm 

(6 36 in ) 

15 13 cm 

(5 98 in ) 






4 x 2 54 cm 

4 x (1 0 in ) 

2 87 cm 

(1 13 in ) 

10 16 cm 

(4 00 in ) 

2 05 cm 

(0 81 in ) 

42 54 cm 

(16 75 in ) 

2 05 cm 

(0 81 in ) 

12 22 cm 

(4 81 in ) 

42 54 cm 

(16 75 in ) 

38 10 cm 

(15 00 in ) 

19 15 cm 

(7 54 in ) 

16 15 cm 

(6 36 in ) 

11 38 cm 

(4 44 in ) 

43 81 cm 

(17 25 in ) 

15 13 cm 

(5 98 in ) 

46 68 cm 

(18 38in ) 

Overall 



Non-Contact 

Adhesive & Sealants Equipment Guide Non-Contact | 8-1 

Web Content 


Description 

Universal Applicators represent the very latest in 

adhesive spray application performance and flexibility. 

Universal applicators feature the popular pneumatically 

actuated Universal series modules. These modules 

provide application flexibility by accepting numerous 

nozzle types on a single platform. 

Commonality of components minimizes spares 

requirements and vastly improves serviceability. This 

compact, advanced design delivers uniform heating and 

accurate adhesive output in support of a wide variety of 

product assembly applications. 

Universal Speed-Coat Module and Summit Nozzle 

Universal Applicator Insulating Jackets 


UA with CF200, UM22 

or UM25 Modules - Standard Spray 

UA with UMSC or UMSN Modules and 

Adapters - Standard Spray 

Manifold 

Length 

50 mm 

Manifold 

Length 

100 mm 

Manifold 

Length 

150 mm 

Manifold 

Length 

275 mm 

Manifold 

Length 

400 mm 

Manifold 

Length 

525 mm 

1081273 1089856 1087890 1089857 1089858 1090005 

1096129 1096130 1096131 1096132 1096133 1096134 

UA with SolidBlue Modules Bead/Slot 1081274 1090006 1090007 1090008 1090009 1090020 

Speed-Coat Applicator - High Speed Spray 1093554 NA 1096125 1096126 1096127 1096128 



8-2 | Non-Contact 


UA Configurator 

U A - U M 2 5 X E 0 8 - M X V C N / 0 2 5 . 0 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 

Boxes 

1-4 

Box 

5 

Box 

6 

Boxes 

7-8 

Box 

10 

Module Type 

Description 

Code 

200 Series Controlled Fiberization CF22 

22mm Universal Module 



Universal Speed-Coat (High Speed) 

22mm Universal Module, Right Angle 

25mm Universal Module, Right Angle 

No Modules 


Optistroke 

Special 

Module Option 

Description 

Module Spacing 

Description 

UM22 

UM25 

UM50 

UMSC 

UR22 

UR25 

XXXX 

Code 

X 

O 

S 

Code 

(1 or 2 Modules) X 

Even 

Special 


Description 

E 

S 

Code 

Enter 2-digit number ## 

Nickel 120 Ohm RTD 

Cordset 

Description 

Platinum 100 Ohm RTD 

Water Resistant 

Hardwired 

Special 

Code 

T 

M 

H 

P 

S 

Box 

11 

Box 

12 

Box 

13 

Box 

14 

Boxes 

16-19 

Electrical Zone 

Description 

Code 


X 

Low Power 8 

Special 

S 

Filter 

Description 

Code 

Vertical 

V 

Threaded 

F 

Module Actuation 

Description 

Code 

Common 

C 

Independent 

I 

Programmed 

P 

Solenoid Value 

Description 

Code 

None / NA 

X 

24VDC Direct 

N 

Special 

S 

Even Spacing, mm 

Description 

Code 

Enter 4-Digit Number As Indicated ###.# 

Note: Review the following sections for more information on the selections available. 




Web Content 

Non-Contact | 8-3 


Description 

AltaSpray Plus applicators provide the flexibility and 

performance capabilities of a single-platform, hot 

melt adhesive dispensing design. The streamlined, 

economical configuration helps reduce initial 

investment and ongoing cost of ownership. Simplified 

system connectivity and fewer cabling requirements 

optimize applicator use with AltaBlue series adhesive 

melters. 

Interchangeable modules and nozzles add 

manufacturing efficiency and improve product 

performance. AltaSpray Plus applicators are 

compatible with Universal UM25 and UM50 

modules, and CF200 modules. Modules accept 

numerous dispensing technologies, including CF200 

nozzles and Universal CF, Summit and Signature 

nozzles for lamination; and Universal SureWrap and 

Allegro nozzles for elastic attachment. 

The angled manifold reduces air turbulence, 

improving pattern stability and web-routing options. 

An integrated air heater uses a thin-film flow design 

that enhances heating efficiency to produce consistent 

spray patterns, while reducing power consumption. 

Optional custom-fitted insulating jackets reduce 

heat loss, increase energy efficiency, and significantly 

minimize chance of incidental contact with heated 

surfaces. 

AltaSpray Plus Applicator With Universal UM25 Modules and 

Universal Signature Nozzles. 

Features 

• Efficiently accommodate numerous spraying and coating 

technologies 

• Minimize cost of ownership and initial investment 

• Simplify installation and service with less downtime 

Uniform thermal profile and advanced hydraulic 

features deliver superior product performance, 

increased efficiency and output uniformity. Common 

parts minimize inventory and speed product 

changeovers. The AirGuard separator protects the air 

chamber from adhesive contamination when changing 

modules. The ability to rebuild all components 

increases service life and reduces cost of ownership. 





Part Numbers 

Alta Spray Plus Applicators 

Applicator Width Plus PN Description RTD Type Support Module Similar AltaSpray PN 

50 mm 

100 mm 

200 mm 

300 mm 

400 mm 

500 mm 

600 mm 

800 mm 

1000 mm 

1200 mm 

7407289 XXE01-TXVCX-ASP Ni120 UM25/UM50 7402704 

7407290 XXE01-MXVCX-ASP PT100 UM25/UM50 7402709 

7407226 XXE04-TXVCX/025.0-ASP Ni120 UM25 1081326 

7407227 XXE04-MXVCX/025.0-ASP PT100 UM25 1081327 

7407228 XXE02-TXVCX/050.0-ASP Ni120 UM50 None 

7407229 XXE02-MXVCX/050.0-ASP PT100 UM50 None 






































Solenoid Valve Installation Kit 

NOTE: Purchased Separately - Includes Solenoid and All Fittings Required for Installation. 


Part Number 

Description 

Number Required Per Module 

1082801 Kit, Install, Solenoid, 24VDC One Solenoid Supports up to 100 mm Coverage 

Alta Spray Applicators Insulating Jackets 

NOTE: Purchased Separately. 

Part Number 

Description 

Applicator Compatibility 

Maximum Coverage 

7407301 Kit, Jacket, Insulating, Applicator, 50 mm, ASP 50 mm 










Module Service Kits 

Part Number 

Description 

860892 Kit, CF200 Module Rebuild, One Module, With Needle 

1055411 Kit, CF200 Module Rebuild, Ten Modules, With Needle 

1049909 Kit, Rebuild, Minor, UM22/UM25/UM50 

1049908 Kit, Rebuild, Major, UM22/UM25/UM50 

1049908 Kit, Tool, Rebuild, UM22/UM25/UM50 





Heater Service Kits 

NOTE: Kits include heater cartridge with pre-crimped ferules and a terminal block. 

Kit 

Part Number 

7407311 Kit, Heater ,Cartridge, 0.75D,1.62L,300W120V 

7407312 Kit, Heater, Cartridge, 0.50D,3.75L,600W,240V 

7407313 Kit, Heater, Cartridge, 0.50D,9L,800W,240V 









Description 

Sensor Service Kits 

NOTE: Kits include sensor cartridge with pre-crimped ferules and a terminal block. 

Kit 

Part Number 

1082564 

1082565 

Configuration 

All T-style 

(Nickel 120 Ohm RTD Based) 

All M-style 

(Platinum 100 Ohm RTD Based) 

Description 

Kit, service, sensor, RTD, Ni-120 

Kit, service, sensor, RTD, PT100 

Filter Service Kit 

NOTE: Kits include filter screen and O-ring. 

Top Level 

Part Number 

Configuration 

Description 

1082562 All Designs - Order One Kit Per Filter Kit, service, screen, filter, 0.006 






Nordson CF-200 modules offer consistent performance 

and long life in an economical package. These 

pneumatically actuated modules are fully rebuildable 

and compatible with twist-on disk or unibody style CF 

nozzles. 

• Modular design provides ease of operation and maintenance 

for reduced downtime. 

• Fine spray pattern cools before reaching substrate, eliminating 

burn-through. 

• Edge control to within 3 mm (1/8 in.) allows precise adhesive 

placement without overspray. 

NOTE: CF-200 modules are compatible with disk and unibody style 

twist-on nozzles. 

CF-200 Modules 


Parameter 

Module width 

Nozzle compatibility 




Maximum hydraulic flow 

Actuation air pressure 

Specification 

22 mm 

Disk and Unibody style twist-on CF Nozzles 

70-205 °C (160-400 °F) 

1.38-5.52 MPa (200-800 psi) 

8.96 MPa (1300 psi) 

110 g/min @10,000 cps, 14g/m2 @ 300 m/min 

0.41 MPa (60 psi) recommended 

CF Modules 

NOTE: CF-200 modules are compatible with disk and unibody style twist-on nozzles. 

Part Number 

Description 

144906 Standard Module 

753166 Right Angle Module 

860924 22 mm Blank Module 





Universal 22 mm (UM22) 

Nordson UM22 Universal modules offer speed, 

repeatability and long life in an economical package. 

These pneumatically actuated modules feature an 

innovative seal cartridge assembly that simplifies 

rebuilding, and ensures repeatable performance. UM22 

modules are compatible with the Universal series nozzles, 

providing application flexibility and reducing inventory 

requirements. Modules are fully compatible with 

applicators equipped with 200-Series spray modules 

mounted on 22 mm or greater centers. 

• Single platform eliminates the need for application-specific 

designs and reduces spare parts requirements, minimizing 

inventory costs 

• Seal cartridge simplifies rebuilding and provides consistent 

module performance 

• Trouble-free nozzle cleaning maximizes uptime 

• Patented single-screw clamp mechanism allows quick nozzle 

replacement, enabling fast changeovers 

• Compatibility with the Nordson OptiStroke TM needle stroke 

detection system reduces product waste and confirms hot melt 

adhesive dispensing performance 

• Proven valve technology helps maximize productivity by 

performing reliably in demanding applications 

NOTE: UM22 modules are compatible with all 22 mm Universal 

style nozzles. 


Parameter 

Module width 







Cycles (1) 

Specification 

22 mm 

All 22 mm Universal nozzles 

70-205 °C (160-400 °F) 

1.38-5.52 MPa (200-800 psi) 

8.96 MPa (1300 psi) 

110 g/min @10,000 cps, 14g/m 2 @ 300 m/min 


Up to 2500 cycles/minute 

(1) 

Maximum number of cycles depends on operating and control air pressure, as well as adhesive viscosities. 

Part Numbers 

Part Number 


1054932 Right Angle Design Module 

1063255 Universal Style Blank Module 

1049909 Rebuild Kit, UM22/25, Minor 

1049908 Rebuild Kit, UM22/25, Major 

Description 







Nordson UM25 Universal modules offer speed, 

repeatability and long life in an economical package. 




modules are compatible with the Universal series 

nozzles, providing application flexibility and reducing 

inventory requirements. Modules are fully compatible 

with applicators equipped with 200-Series spray 

modules mounted on 25 mm or greater centers. 

• Single platform eliminates the need for application-specific 


inventory costs. 


module performance. 

• Trouble-free nozzle cleaning maximizes uptime. 


replacement, enabling fast changeovers. 

• Compatibility with the Nordson OptiStroke TM needle stroke 


adhesive dispensing performance 



performing reliably in demanding applications.Compatibility 

with the Nordson OptiStroke TM needle stroke detection 

system reduces product waste and confirms hot melt adhesive 

dispensing performance. 


style nozzles and 22 mm Universal CF Nozzles. 

Parameter 

Module width 







Cycles (1) 

Specification 

25 mm 


70-205 °C (160-400 °F) 

1.38-5.52 MPa (200-800 psi) 

8.96 MPa (1300 psi) 




(1) 


Part Numbers 

Part Number 


1050434 Right Angle Design Module 


1049909 Rebuild Kit, UM22/25, Minor 

1049908 Rebuild Kit, UM22/25, Major 

Description 






Nordson UM50 Universal modules represent an 

economical choice for continuous coating applications. 




modules are compatible with the Universal series 

nozzles, providing application flexibility and reducing 

inventory requirements. Modules are fully compatible 

with applicators equipped with 200–Series spray 

modules mounted on 50 mm or greater centers. 

• Single platform eliminates the need for application–specific 


inventory costs. 


module performance. 

• Trouble–free nozzle cleaning maximizes uptime. 

• Patented single–screw per nozzle clamp mechanism allows 

quick nozzle replacement, enabling fast changeovers. 


performing reliably in demanding applications 


style nozzles and 22 mm Universal CF Nozzles. 


Parameter 

Module width 







Cycles (1) 

Specification 

50 mm 


70-205 °C (160-400 °F) 

1.38-5.52 MPa (200-800 psi) 

8.96 MPa (1300 psi) 




Note: Maximum number of cycles depends on operating and control air pressure, as well as adhesive viscosities. 

Part Numbers 

Part Number 



1049909 Rebuild Kit,UM22/25,Minor 

1049908 Rebuild Kit,UM22/25,Major 

Description 






High Speed Universal (UMSC) 

Nordson 25mm Universal SpeedCoat Modules are 

pneumatically actuated, rebuildable and feature snuffback 

operation, enhancing pattern control at the leading 

and trailing edges. Universal SpeedCoat modules are 

compatible with the Universal series nozzles, thereby 

offering application flexibility and reducing inventory 

requirements. 

• Optimized snuff-back control module supports increased 

line speeds and delivers precise adhesive cutoff, minimizing 

contamination between patterns. 

• State of the art speed and long life meets demanding 

production requirements. 

• Reliable, pneumatically actuated design. 

• Includes and easily serviced close-coupled 24 VDC solenoid 

valve. 


replacement, enabling fast changeovers. 

• Compatibility with Nordson Optistroke TM needle stroke 


adhesive dispensing performance. 


performing reliably in the most demanding applications. 

NOTE: UMSC Modules are Compatible with all 25mm Universal 

Style Nozzles and 22mm Universal CF Nozzles. 


Parameter 

Specification 

Module width 

25 mm 




70-205 °C (160-400 °F) 


1.38-5.52 MPa (200-800 psi) 


8.96 MPa (1300 psi) 




5-6 bar (72-87 psi) 

Cycles (1) 

Up to 9000 cycles/min 

Control voltage 

24 VDC 

Note: Maximum number of cycles depends on operating and control air pressure, as well as adhesive viscosities. 

Part Numbers 

Part Number 

Description 

1050550 UMSC Module, Complete With Spray Adapter 

1049216 Spray Adapter Kit 

7103660 Control Module Only 









Web Content 


Spray Nozzles 

Controlled Fiberization Nozzles 

Description 

Nordson Controlled Fiberization (CF) nozzles deliver 

consistent, accurate adhesive patterns for a wide variety of hot 

melt adhesive spray applications. CF nozzles utilize a series of 

radially tangential air jets to oscillate a single adhesive fiber, 

producing patterns ranging from dense, high strength bonds 

to open patterns for high permeability. Traditional CF nozzles 

are available in two different styles: disk and unibody. These 

nozzles are compatible with the CF200 series modules. 

CF Nozzles 

Watch Video 

CF Disk Nozzles 

Standard Frequency (6-hole) Bronze CF Disk Nozzles 

Part Number Orifice Diameter mm (in.) Pattern 

860548 


.30 (.012) 

1047071 Wide 

758432 

Narrow 

860226 .46 (.018) 


1047073 Wide 

860435 


.51 (.020) 

1047074 Wide 

100728 .64 (.025) Standard 

810381 


.76 (.030) 

1047074 Wide 

Disk Nozzle Accessories 

Part Number 

Description 

754766 Torque Limiting Wrench, 2.26 N•m (20 in.-lb) 

119202 Nozzle Retaining Nut 

901915 Nozzle Cleaning Kit, Pin Vise With Probes 




Spray Nozzles 


Unibody CF Spray (6-hole) Nozzles 

CF Spray Nozzles 

These nozzles are compatible with CF-200 module and Universal style modules with use of an adapter. 


756952 

Narrow 

152168 

.30 (.012) 


1046126 Wide 

1047032 

Narrow 

152171 

.46 (.018) 


1046150 Wide 

1047033 

Narrow 

152172 

.51 (.020) 


1046151 Wide 

1047034 

Narrow 

156698 

.64 (.025) 


1046152 Wide 

1060556 

Narrow 

152173 

.76 (.030) 


1046156 Wide 

1020638 CF Nozzle Adapter, Universal Modules 

Unibody Standard Frequency (6-hole) Color-Coded Steel Spray Nozzles 

These nozzles are compatible with CF-200 modules and Universal-style modules with use of an adapter. 

Part Number Orifice Diameter mm (in.) Pattern Color Code 

753488 .30 (.012) Standard Brown 

753489 .36 (.014) Standard Gray 

753491 .41 (.016) Standard Green 

753492 


Blue 

.46 (.018) 

1046158 Wide Yellow 

753493 


Red 

.51 (.020) 

754963 Wide Orange 

753494 .64 (.025) Standard Pink 

753495 


Black 

.76 (.030) 

1046160 Wide Purple 

753496 1.02 (.040) Standard Maroon 






Spray Nozzles 


High Frequency (12-hole) Bronze CF Unibody Nozzles 

These nozzles are compatible with CF-200 module and Universal-style modules with use of an adapter. 


755957 


.30 (.012) 

1046125 Wide 



755530 


.46 (.018) 

1046128 Wide 



756115 


.76 (.030) 

1046154 Wide 


Unibody Nozzle Accessories 

Part Number 

Description 

940031 Nozzle O-ring Seal 

133665 Nozzle O-ring Seal. 10 Pack With Insertion Tools 

133664 Nozzle O-ring Seal. 25 Pack With Insertion Tools 

133663 Nozzle O-ring seal. 100 Pack With Insertion Tools 

754767 Torque Limiting Wrench, .57 N•m (5 in.-lb) 

901915 Nozzle Cleaning Kit, Pin Vise With Probes 




Spray Nozzles 






Web Content 


Spray Nozzles 

Universal Controlled Fiberization Nozzles 

Description 

Nordson Universal Controlled Fiberization (CF) nozzles 

deliver consistent, accurate adhesive patterns for a 

wide variety of hot melt adhesive spray applications. 

Universal CF nozzles utilize a series of twelve radially 

tangential air jets to oscillate a single adhesive fiber, 

producing high frequency patterns ranging from 

dense, high strength bonds to open patterns for high 

permeability. Universal CF nozzles feature a resilient seal 

for positive sealing and a recessed conical tip to reduce 

the likelihood of damage. These nozzles are compatible 

with Universal series modules. 

Universal CF Nozzles 

Watch Video 

High Frequency (12-hole) Coated Brass Universal-Style CF Spray 

Nozzles 

These nozzles are compatible with Universal-style modules. No adapter is required. 



1053964 .30 (.012) Wide 


1053966 .41 (.016) Wide 


1054731 .46 (.018) Wide 


1052500 .51 (.020) Wide 


1053967 .64 (.025) Wide 


1053968 .76 (.030) Wide 

1019706 O-ring Seal for Universal CF Nozzles 

1020638 CF Nozzle adapter, Universal Modules 




Spray Nozzles 

Universal Controlled Fiberization Nozzles 





Web Content 


Spray Nozzles 

Summit Nozzles 

Description 

Nordson Summit nozzles deliver superior control of 

fiber size, density and pattern width for numerous 

product assembly applications. This innovative design 

uses four radically tangential air jets to oscillate single 

adhesive fibers, producing a crossing pattern that 

enhances bonding performance. Controlled adhesive 

fiber deposition provides greater application uniformity 

and enhanced product quality. These nozzles are 

available in versions compatible with UM22 and UM25 

modules. Universal Summit nozzles are reversible and 

may be oriented for either right-hand or left-hand 

coverage. 

Summit Nozzle 

Watch Video 

22 mm Universal Summit Coated Brass Spray Nozzles 

Part Number No. of Orifices Pattern 

1047423 

1/4 L/R Orientation (~5.5 mm [0.22 in.] width coverage) 

1 

1047409 1/4 Centered 

1047424 

1/2 L/R Orientation (~11 mm [0.44 in.] width coverage) 

2 

1047420 1/2 Centered 

1047425 

3/4 L/R Orientation (~16.5 mm [0.66 in.] width coverage) 

3 

1047421 3/4 Centered 

1047426 4 Full Coverage (~22 mm [0.88 in.] width coverage) 

1043328 O-ring Seal for 22mm Universal Summit Nozzles 

25 mm Universal Summit Coated Brass Spray Nozzles 


1035875 

1/4 L/R Orientation (~6.35 mm [1/4 in.] width coverage) 

1 

1035876 1/4 Centered (~6.35 mm [1/4 in.] width coverage) 

1035879 


2 


1035629 

3/4 L/R Orientation (~19 mm [3/4 in.] width coverage) 

3 

1035883 3/4 Centered (~19 mm [3/4 in.] width coverage) 

1035886 4 Full Coverage (~25mm [1 in.] width coverage) 





Spray Nozzles 

Summit Nozzles 





Web Content 


Spray Nozzles 

Signature ® Continuous Spray Nozzles 

Description 

Nordson Signature nozzles deliver superior pattern 

control and process robustness for diverse product 

assembly applications. This all steel design uses process 

air to oscillate adhesive fibers, producing a dense 

random pattern ideally suited to numerous continuous 

web coating and product assembly applications. Patterns 

are exceptionally uniform and edge control is good. 

These nozzles are available in versions compatible with 

UM22 and UM25 modules. Universal Signature nozzles 

are reversible and may be oriented for either right–hand 

or left-hand coverage. Consider low-flow nozzles when 

flow rate per full coverage nozzle is less than 10 grams/ 

min. 

Signature Continuous Nozzle 

Watch Video 

22 mm Universal Signature Steel Spray - Continuous - Standard Flow 


1074327 3 1/4 L/R Orientation (~5.5 mm [0.22 in.] width coverage) 

1074326 5 1/2 L/R Orientation (~11 mm [0.44 in.] width coverage) 

1074325 8 3/4 L/R Orientation (~16.5 mm [.66 in.] width coverage) 

1074324 10 Full coverage (~22 mm [0.88 in] width coverage) 

254146 Quad-ring Seal for 22mm Universal Signature Nozzles 

22 mm Universal Signature Steel Spray - Continuous - Low Flow 





1095246 10 Full Coverage (~22 mm [0.88 in] width coverage) 





Spray Nozzles 

Signature ® Continuous Spray Nozzles 

25 mm Universal Signature Steel Spray - Continuous - Standard Flow 


1072293 3 1/4 L/R Orientation (~6.35 mm [1/4 in.] width coverage) 


1072291 9 3/4 L/R Orientation (~19 mm [3/4 in.] width coverage) 

1072290 12 Full Coverage (~25 mm [1 in] width coverage) 


25 mm Universal Signature Steel Spray - Continuous - Low Flow 


1035875 


1 


1035879 


2 


1035629 

3/4 L/R Orientation (~19 mm [3/4 in.] width coverage) 

3 

1035883 3/4 Centered (~19 mm [3/4 in.] width coverage) 

1035886 4 Full Coverage (~25mm [1 in.] width coverage) 





Web Content 


Spray Nozzles 

Signature ® Intermittent Spray Nozzles 

Description 

Nordson Signature nozzles deliver superior pattern 

control and process robustness for diverse product 

assembly applications. This all steel design uses process 

air to oscillate adhesive fibers, producing a dense 

random pattern ideally suited to numerous intermittent 

web coating and product assembly applications. Patterns 

are exceptionally uniform and edge control is good. 

These nozzles are available in versions compatible with 

UM22 and UM25 modules. Universal Signature nozzles 

are reversible and may be oriented for either right-hand 

or left-hand coverage. 

Signature Laminating Nozzle 

Watch Video 

22 mm Universal Signature Laminating Nozzles - Intermittent 





1092283 10 Full Coverage (~22 mm [0.88 in] width coverage) 

254146 Quad-ring Seal for 22 mm Universal Signature Nozzles 

25 mm Universal Signature Laminating Nozzles - Intermittent 




1088479 9 3/4 L/R Orientation (~19 mm [3/4 in.] width coverage) 

1088478 12 Full Coverage (~25 mm [1 in] width coverage) 

254146 Quad-ring Seal for 25 mm Universal Signature Nozzles 




Spray Nozzles 

Signature Laminate Nozzles 





Web Content 


Spray Nozzles 

SureWrap ® Nozzles 

Description 

SureWrap nozzles accurately apply hot melt adhesive 

filaments to form discrete adhesive masses (discrete 

bond points) on the elastic strands used for elasticized 

legs, leg cuffs, and waistbands on baby diapers, 

training pants, and adult incontinence products. The 

patented SureWrap nozzle uses an integral strand guide 

to stabilize the elastic strand and an angular spray 

trajectory to maintain performance at high production 

speeds. Four air openings associated with each adhesive 

opening dispense four radially tangential air streams, 

causing the adhesive filament to move in a spiral 

pattern. The spiraling adhesive filament wraps around 

each strand, forming discrete adhesive masses with no 

useful adhesive on the strand between adjacent discrete 

adhesive masses. These discrete adhesive masses optimize 

adhesive bonding, minimize adhesive usage, and result 

in uniform elastic retractive forces. For a more detailed 

explanation of the recommended use of SureWrap 

nozzles, refer to Manual Part Number 1103674. 

SureWrap Nozzle 

SureWrap nozzles may be made to order for specific 

elastic configuration requirements. Nozzles are 

available in standard nickel plated brass construction 

with steel inserts to resist wear or all steel versions and 

are compatible with Universal series modules. 

22 mm Universal SureWrap 

Coated Brass Spray Nozzles for 

Thin Elastic 

Part Number No. Of Orifices Spacing mm (in.) 

1092336 1 N/A 

1092402 

3 (.12) 

1092349 2 

4 (.16) 

1092339 5 (.20) 

1092344 

3 (.12) 

1092405 3 

4 (.16) 

1092341 5 (.20) 

1092403 

3 (.12) 

1092406 4 

4 (.16) 

1092401 5 (.20) 

1043328 

O-ring Seal for 22mm Universal SureWrap 

Nozzles 


Coated Steel Spray Nozzles for 

Thin Elastic 


1094438 1 N/A 

1098940 

3 (.12) 

1094437 2 

4 (.16) 

1094436 5 (.20) 

1098943 

3 (.12) 

1060251 3 

4 (.16) 

1094435 5 (.20) 

1060435 

3 (.12) 

1060252 4 

4 (.16) 

1088841 5 (.20) 

1043328 


Nozzles 




SureWrap ® Nozzles 


Coated Brass Spray Nozzles for 

Thin Elastic 


1092330 1 N/A 

1092337 

3 (.12) 

1090528 2 

4 (.16) 

1092308 5 (.20) 

1092348 

3 (.12) 

1090529 3 

4 (.16) 

1092309 5 (.20) 

1092400 

3 (.12) 

1092345 4 

4 (.16) 

1092404 5 (.20) 

1022028 


Nozzles 


Coated Steel Spray Nozzles for 

Thin Elastic 


1085563 1 N/A 

1060603 

3 (.12) 

1060604 2 

4 (.16) 

1069921 5 (.20) 

1054753 

3 (.12) 

1069920 3 

4 (.16) 

1090368 5 (.20) 

1080828 

3 (.12) 

1054752 4 

4 (.16) 

1077926 5 (.20) 

1022028 


Nozzles 




Web Content 


Spray Nozzles 

Allegro Elastic Coating Nozzles 

Description 

Allegro nozzles accurately apply hot melt adhesive to 

elastic strands used for elasticized legs, leg cuffs, and 

waistbands on baby diapers, training pants, and adult 

incontinence products. The patented Allegro nozzle 

uses an integral strand guide to stabilize the elastic 

strand, proven slot coating technology, and postslot 

coating pattern air to form the adhesive around 

the entire elastic strand. Allegro nozzles are all-steel 

construction with a proprietary coating for durability 

and improved resistance to the wear associated with the 

high-speed guiding of the elastic. 

Allegro nozzles may be made to order for specific elastic 

configuration requirements. Nozzles are available in 25- 

22-mm sizes and are compatible with Universal series 

modules. 

Allegro Nozzle 

Watch Video 

22 mm Universal Allegro Nozzles 

Part Number No. Of Streams Spacing mm (in.) 

1120749 1 N/A 

1120750 

2 (.08) 

1120751 3 (.12) 

2 

1120752 4 (.16) 

1120753 5 (.20) 

1120754 

2 (.08) 

1120755 3 (.12) 

3 

1120756 4 (.16) 

1120757 5 (.20) 

1120758 

2 (.08) 

1120759 3 (.12) 

4 

1120760 4 (.16) 

1120761 5 (.20) 

NOTE: All nozzles include O-ring part 1043328. 

25 mm Universal Allegro Nozzles 

Part Number No. Of Streams Spacing mm (in.) 

1120762 1 N/A 

1120763 

2 (.08) 

1120764 3 (.12) 

2 

1120765 4 (.16) 

1120766 5 (.20) 

1120767 

2 (.08) 

1120768 3 (.12) 

3 

1120769 4 (.16) 

1120770 5 (.20) 

1120771 

2 (.08) 

1120772 3 (.12) 

4 

1120773 4 (.16) 

1120774 5 (.20) 

NOTE: All nozzles include O-ring part 1022028. 




Spray Nozzles 

Comparison Chart 

Universal Spray Nozzle Comparison Chart 

Nozzle 

Strengths/ 

Application 

Requirements 

CF Nozzles 

High-strength 

bonding 

Summit 

Nozzles 

High-strength 

coating 

Continuous 

Signature 

Nozzles 

High-speed, 

continuous 

coating 

Intermittent 

Signature 

Nozzles 

High-speed, 

intermittent 

coating 

Control Coat 

Nozzles 

High-speed 

intermittent 

uniform 

coating 

SureWrap 

Nozzles 

Elastic 

attachment 

Allegro 

Nozzles 

Elastic 

attachment 

Intermittent 

Capability ● ● ● N/A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 

Bond Strength ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 

Robust/Operating 

Range ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 

Edge Control ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● N/A N/A 

Pattern 

Uniformity ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 

Line Speed ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 

Initial Investment ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 

● 

Best 

● 

Better 

● 

Good 

N/A 

Not applicable or not intended to provide this capability 




Web Content 



Common to All Non-contact Application Systems 

Air Control Kits and Accessories 

Part Number Description Comment 

1056192 Process Air Control Kit, 4-20 mA 

1056193 Process Air Control Kit, 0-10 VDC 

1056194 Transducer, Air Control, I/P, 4-20 mA 

1056195 Transducer, Air Control, E/P, 0-10 VDC 

1036518 Process Air Control Kit, 4-20 mA 

1036520 Process Air Control Kit, 0-10 VDC 

1044432 Transducer, Air Control, I/P, 4-20 mA 

1059047 Transducer, Air Control, E/P, 0-10 VDC 

1058993 Cable, Transducer, Air Control, 30 m (98 ft) 

1059041 Cable, Transducer, Air Control 20 m (65.5 ft) 

1059045 Cable, Transducer, Air Control 10 m (33 ft) 

1059046 Cable, Transducer, Air Control 30 m (98 ft), bare end 

NOTE: Line reference cables are not included in the kits and must be purchased separately. 

0-1 bar (0-15 psi) range 

0-3.5 bar (0.50 psi) range 

Line reference (input) signal cables 





Common to All Non-contact Application Systems 






Hand-Held Applicators | 9-1 


Description 

Versatile AD-41 hand-held applicators adapt to production 

requirements with easy pattern conversions from extrusion to 

swirl or wide-pattern spray. A range of designs offers choice of 

dispensing orientations for ergonomic function and pinpoint 

bead placement, including bottom-feed, top-feed, and downapply 

positioning. 

Features 

• Exposed hydraulic fitting and quick-disconnect electrical cordset 

speed installation and servicing. Pre-assembled hand-held applicators 

do not require wiring or assembly to install. 

• Pattern adapters and a wide variety of nozzle styles and sizes provide 

easy pattern conversions for application-specific performance. 

• Bottom-feed, top-feed and down-apply configurations provide diverse 

product assembly and sealing applications options. 

• 360° swivel action gives a wide range of motion without hose 

twisting, improving maneuverability and reducing hose stress. 

• Optional air control kit permits on-off control of air flow via the 

trigger switch, allowing simultaneous control of both air and adhesive 

flow for defined swirl or spray pattern control and repeatability. 

• AD-41 LBS model incorporates a large ball-and-seat and larger flow 

paths for high-viscosity, filled materials and high-flow applications. 

• Ergonomic design features include balanced handgrip and smooth 

pivot action to minimize operator fatigue and provide accuracy at any 

angle. 

• An ever-cool handle provides comfortable operation and reduces burn 

risks by containing heated components and flow paths within the 

hand-held applicator body, not the handle. 

• Convenient thumb safety switch locks the trigger to help prevent 

accidental dispensing. 

• Impact-resistant shell and durable hose connectors, nozzle adapters 

and internal components extend service life. 

• RTD temperature control maintains temperature stability to provide 

consistent adhesive viscosity and reduce temperature fluctuations that 

negatively affect flow and cause char formation. 

• Operating temperatures range from 55–230 °C (130–450 °F) to use 

with a variety of adhesive formulations and substrate properties. 

AD-41 Top Feed Hand-Held Applicator with 

Swirl Adapter and Hose 

AD-41 Hand-Held Applicator 



9-2 | Hand-Held Applicators 




Parameter 


Air pressure (1) MPa (psi) 

Swirl 

Wide pattern swirl 

Specification 

55–230 °C (130–450 °F) 

10.34 (1,500) maximum 

0–0.1 (0–15) 

0.03–0.55 (5–80) 

Air consumption (2) 

Swirl MPa (psi) 

Wide pattern swirl MPa (psi) 

Extrusion nozzle orifice diameters (3) mm (in.) 


1.2 scfm maximum 


0.51, 0.76, 1.02, 1.27, 1.52, 2.29 

(0.020, 0.030, 0.040, 0.050, 0.060, 0.090) 

1.07, 1.55, 2.29, 3.30 (0.042, 0.061, 0.090, 0.130) 

Extended 

1.57, 2.36, 3.18, 3.96 (0.062, 0.093, 0.125, 0.156) 

Extended for AD-41 LBS 

Swirl 

0.64, 0.76, 1.17 (0.025, 0.030, 0.046) 

Spray pattern width mm (in.) 

6–38 (0.25–1.5) 

Swirl (3) 

38–152 (1.5–6.0) 

Wide-pattern spray (4) 


240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

200 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Melter compatibility 

PA-2510, Series 3000V, 3000 and 2300, DuraBlue 

240 VAC 

PA-2510, DuraBlue 

120 VAC (5) 

Hose compatibility 

240 VAC 

120 VAC 

AD-41 240V hoses 

AD-41 120V hoses 

Weight kg (lb) 0.64 (1.4) 

(1) 

Recommended range. 

(2) 

Includes operating and spray air requirements for AD-41 hand-held applicators with swirl or spray pattern adapters. 

(3) 

Order and purchase nozzles separately. 

(4) 

Pattern adapter for wide pattern spray is complete. It does not require a separate nozzle purchase. 

(5) 

120V Melters require 30 amps. Consult a Nordson representative to ensure that the system configuration does not exceed the available 

wattage. 







Melter Model 

Part 

Number 

Voltage 

Wattage 

Hose 

Diameter 

Compatible Melters 

Bottom-feed SBS (1) 306957 

Top-feed SBS DuraBlue (1) 306988 

240 

5/16 

3000V, 3000, 2300, 

5000 (4)(5)(6) , BM20 (6) , 

DuraBlue 

Bottom-feed SBS (1)(2) 306963 

Top-feed SBS (1)(2) 306990 

120 100 

DuraBlue 

Top-feed LBS (3) 332280 

Bottom-feed LBS (3) 330750 

240 

3000V, 3000, 2300, 

5000 (4)(5)(6) , BM20 (6) , 

DuraBlue 

Bottom-feed SBS HMT (1) 725817 120 80 HMT 

Bottom-feed SBS 1) 1031712 200 100 DuraBlue 

(1) 

Standard Ball-and-Seat (SBS) design. 

(2) 

Consult a Nordson representative to ensure that system configuration does not exceed available wattage. 

(3) 

Large Ball-and-Seat (LBS) configuration. 

(4) 

SBS hand-held applicator and swirl adapters (306983 or 306984) must be used for swirl patterns. 

(5) 

Pattern adapters only work with SBS hand-held applicators. 

(6) 

BM melters require use of BM hose (725634 or 725911). 





Dimensions 

Dimensions 

mm (in.) 

Length 222.3 (8.75) 

Depth (without nozzle) 160.3 (6.31) 

Width 41.1 (1.62) 






AD-41 Nozzles and Accessories 

Component Part Number Description Comment 

306981 Down-apply Extrusion Adapter Order extrusion nozzle separately. 

Pattern adapters 

Wide Pattern Swirl 

Nozzles 

Extrusion nozzles 

Extended extrusion 

nozzles 

306982 Down-apply Swirl Adapter 

306983 Swirl Adapter 

306984 Wide-pattern spray adapter 

131635 1.17 mm (0.046 in.) Orifice Dia, Blue Disk 

131998 0.76 mm (0.030 in.) Orifice Dia, Black Disk 

125607 0.64 mm (0.025 in.) Orifice Dia, Gold Disk 

238252 0.51 mm (0.020 in.) Orifice Dia 













Use wide pattern nozzles, ordered 

separately. Configuration similar to 

down-apply extrusion adapter shown in 

illustration. Use with air control kit (P/N 

306970) to activate air with hand-held 

applicator trigger. 

Use wide pattern nozzles, ordered 

separately. Use with air control kit (P/N 

306970) to activate air with hand-held 

applicator trigger. 

Use with air control kit (P/N 306970) 

to activate air with hand-held applicator 

trigger. Wide-pattern swirl nozzles 

Use with swirl and down-apply swirl 

adapters. 

Use for AD-41 standard (SBS) and 

top-feed. 

Use for AD-41 standard (SBS) and 

top-feed. 

Use for AD-41 LBS. 

(1) 

Secure nozzle plates with nozzle cap (P/N 102406), which is included with swirl hand-held applicators. Order and purchase nozzle 

plates separately from hand-held applicators. 

(2) 

Includes one-piece nozzle-and-nut assembly. Order and purchase nozzles separately from hand-held applicators. 









Web Content 


Series AD-31 Extrusion Hand-Held 

Applicators 

Description 

Series AD-31 extrusion hand-held applicators are compact, 

lightweight hand-held applicators that provide a wide range 

of pattern capabilities. These durable hand-held applicators 

combine efficient design and reliable performance for 

manually dispensing hot melt adhesives, sealants and other 

thermoplastic materials. A wide selection of models satisfies 

a full range of applications. 

Features 

• Compact, lightweight design weighs 0.80 kilogram (1.75 lb) for 

handling ease. 

• Distinctive ever-cool handle provides comfortable operation and 

helps reduce risk of burns by containing heated components and 

adhesive-flow paths within the hand applicator body, not the 

handle. 

• Impact-resistant molded shell extends service life. 

• A 360° swivel connector eliminates hose twisting. 

• Hand-held applicators employ either a preset thermostatic 

temperature sensor or a RTD (resistance temperature detector) 

sensor. RTD sensing provides temperature control precision by 

reducing temperature fluctuations that negatively affect flow and 

cause char formation. 

• Choice of standard and extended nozzles with varying orifice 

diameters meets numerous deposition requirements. 

• Hand-held applicators accommodate broad range of Nordson 

melters and hose diameters. 

AD-31 Hand-Held Applicator with DuraBraid Hose 

• The AD-31 LBS uses a large ball-and-seat and larger 

flow paths for handling high-viscosity or filled 

materials. 

• Models used with gear-pump drum melters have a 

microswitch in the hand applicator handle to control 

the motor clutch and regulate adhesive flow. 


Description 



Specification 

230 °C (450 °F) maximum 

10.34 (1,500) maximum 

Extrusion nozzle orifice diameters (1) 

Standard mm (in.) 

Extended mm (in.) 


0.51-2.29 (0.020-0.090) 

1.07-3.96 (0.042-0.156) 

240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

100 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

200 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Weight kg (lb) 0.80 (1.75) 

(1) 

Order and purchase nozzles separately; select from nozzles in AD-41 Accessories. 




Series AD-31 Extrusion Hand-Held Applicators 

Dimensions 

Dimensions 

mm (in.) 

Length 187.5 (7.38) 

Depth (without nozzle) 160.3 (6.31) 

Width 41.1 (1.62) 







Melter 

Hand Applicator 

Model 

Part Number 

Hose Dia. 

(in.) 

Seat Voltage Wattage 

Sensor 

Type 

3000, DuraBlue 

5/16 SBS (1) 

AD-31 T-PA 174933 (2)(3) 

AD-31 T 179766 

240 80 

AD-31 T 274765 (2) 

AD-31 T-PA 1001321 (3) 

AD-31 TL 274752 (2) 200 60 

AD-31 TL-PA 175299 (2)(3) 

AD-31 T 307712 (2) 120 80 

AD-31 T-PA 725953 (2)(3) 

RTD 

(1) 

SBD = Small Ball-and-Seat. 

(2) 

Used with hoses having corrugated plastic covers. 

(3) 

Recommend high performance (HP) design for polyamide applications. 

AD-31 Extrusion Hand-Held Applicator Nozzles 

Part Number Description Hand Applicator Models 

238252 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), 238 Male Threaded, SBS A, C, D, E, H, L, P, T, TL 

238253 0.8 mm (0.030 in.), 238 Male Threaded, SBS 




274968 1.1 mm (0.042 in.), Male Threaded Extended, SBS A, C, D, E, H, L, P, T, TL 

274969 1.6 mm (0.061 in.), Male Threaded Extended, SBS 



804387 1.6 mm (0.062 in.), Male Threaded Extended, LBS B, K 

271683 2.4 mm (0.093 in.), Male Threaded Extended, LBS 












Web Content 



Description 

The AD-31 swirl and wide pattern swirl hand-held applicators 

produce a helical pattern with minimal thermal distortion on 

heat-sensitive substrates. Precise control of pattern density 

and thickness provides dense or open patterns for achieving 

the best adhesion. AD-31 hand-held applicators are ideal for 

pressure-sensitive hot melt adhesives, operate without heated 

air and provide adjustment to vary spray pattern width. 

Features 

• Hand-held applicators perform well with room-temperature 

compressed air. 

• A variety of nozzles vary pattern deposition weight and width. Widths 

range from 6 to 152 mm (0.25 to 6 in.). 

• Lower heat density of swirl patterns minimizes thermal distortion on 

heat-sensitive substrates. 

• Compact, lightweight design weighs 0.8 kilogram (1.75 lb) for 


• Distinctive ever-cool handle provides comfortable operation and helps 

reduce risk of burns by containing heated components and adhesiveflow 

paths within the hand applicator body, not the handle. 

• Impact-resistant molded shell extends service life. 

• A 360° swivel connector eliminates hose twisting. 

• Hand-held applicators employ either a preset thermostatic 

temperature sensor or a RTD (resistance temperature detector) sensor. 

RTD sensing provides temperature control precision by reducing 

temperature fluctuations that negatively affect flow and cause char 

formation. 

• AD-31 wide pattern swirl hand-held applicators have large internal 

air passages that provide higher air flow rate at lower atomizing 

pressures. Select hand-held applicators have higher wattage heaters 

to compensate for the cooling tendency caused by higher air and 

adhesive flow rates. 

• Wide pattern swirl nozzles provide high adhesive. 

• Hand-held applicators accommodate broad range of Nordson melters. 


Hand-Held Applicator 




AD-31 Swirl and Wide Pattern 

Swirl Hand-Held Applicators 



Parameter 


Air pressure (1) 

Swirl 

Wide pattern swirl 


Swirl MPa (psi) 

Wide pattern swirl MPa (psi) 

Specification 

230ºC (450ºF) maximum 

10.34 (1,500) maximum 

0-0.1 (0-15) 

0.03-0.55 (5-80) 



Pattern width (3) 

Swirl mm (in.) 

Wide pattern swirl mm (in.) 


6-38 (0.25-1.5) 

38 to 152 (1.5 to 6) 

240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

200 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Weight kg (lb) 0.8 (1.75) 

(1) 


(2) 

Includes operating air and spray air requirements. 

(3) 

Order and purchase nozzles and nozzle plates separately; see AD-31 Swirl Hand-Held applicator Accessories. Achievable pattern width 

depends on adhesive/sealant specifications. RTD-controlled hand-held applicators recommended for pattern precision. 







Dimensions 

Dimensions 

mm (in.) 

Length 187 (7.38) 

Depth (w/o nozzle) 160 (6.31) 

Width 41 (1.62) 







Melter Model 

3000, 2300, 

DuraBlue 

Hand-Held 

Applicator Part Number Hose Diameter Voltage Wattage 

Model (1)(3) 

AD-31 STR 101206 (2) 

5/16 240 80 

AD-31 STR-WP 137217 (2) 

AD-31 SCR 101207 

(1) 

Requires air hose installation kit (P/N 324287); see AD-31 Swirl Hand-Held applicator Accessories. 

(2) 


(3) 

All hand-held applicators have RTD type sensors. 

AD-31 Swirl Hand-Held Applicator Nozzles and Accessories 

Accessory Part Number Description Comment 


Nozzles 

131635 1.17 mm (0.046 in.), Blue Disk (2) 

131998 0.76 mm (0.030 in.), Black Disk (2) 

125607 0.64 mm (0.025 in.), Gold Disk (2) 

Nozzle Plates for AD-31 860548 0.30 mm (0.012 in.) Orifice 

Swirl (1) 860574 0.36 mm (0.014 in.) Orifice 

860575 0.41 mm (0.016 in.) Orifice 

860226 0.46 mm (0.018 in.) Orifice 

860435 0.51 mm (0.020 in.) Orifice 

100728 0.64 mm (0.025 in.) Orifice 

810381 0.76 mm (0.030 in.) Orifice 

810382 1.02 mm (0.040 in.) Orifice 

810300 1.27 mm (0.050 in.) Orifice 

Kits 324287 Air Hose Kit 

Order for all AD-31 swirl 

hand-held applicators. 

(1) 

Secure nozzle plates with nozzle cap (P/N 102406), which is included with swirl hand-held applicators. Order and purchase nozzle 

plates separately from hand-held applicators. 

(2) 

Includes one-piece nozzle-and-nut assembly. Order and purchase nozzles separately from hand-held applicators. 





Web Content 


Description 

AD-31 spray hand-held applicators use compressed air to 

atomize hot melt adhesive. Independent atomizing air and 

pattern air control allows adjustment of pattern size, shape 

and density. 

Features 

• Independent controls for atomizing and pattern air utilize one 

standard spray nozzle that yields pattern widths ranging from 51 to 

203 mm (2 to 8 in.). 

• Micro-adjust feature alters material flow at the nozzle orifice. 

• Two independently heated and controlled temperature zones improve 

temperature stability to minimize the cooling effect of expanding 

spray air. Each zone, located in the pivot sleeve and in the nozzle 

section, contains a separate heater and temperature sensor, allowing 

use of room temperature compressed air. 

• Depending on the applicator, hand-held applicators employ either 

a preset thermostatic temperature sensor or a RTD (resistance 

temperature detector) sensor. RTD sensing provides temperature 

control precision by reducing temperature fluctuations that negatively 

affect flow and cause char formation. 

• Hand-held applicators with RTD sensors require an extra temperature 

control channel for the hand applicator nozzle section. Cordsets that 

connect the control channel to the nozzle section are available in 

different lengths to accommodate hose length. 

• A 260 °C (500 °F) overtemperature thermostat in the nozzle section 

shuts off heater power in case of abnormally high temperature 

conditions. 

• A 190 °C (375 °F) thermostat is standard on thermostatically 

controlled hand-held applicators. Optional thermostats for different 

temperature settings are available for customer installation. 

• Distinctive ever-cool handle provides comfortable operation and helps 

reduce risk of burns by containing heated components and adhesiveflow 

paths within the hand applicator body, not the handle. Impact 

resistant molded shell extends service life. 

• A 90° hose swivel permits ease of movement and limits hose twisting. 

• Hand-held applicators accommodate broad range of Nordson melters. 

AD-31 Spray Hand-Held Applicator 







Parameter 


Specification 

230 ºC (450 ºF) maximum 

10.34 (1,500) maximum 

Air pressure (1) MPA (psi) 0.28–0.55 (40–80) 


4 scfm maximum 

Pattern width (3) mm (in.) 51–203 (2–8) 

240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 


120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

200 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Weight kg (lb) 1.5 (3.25) 

(1) 


(2) 

Includes operating air and spray air requirements. 

(3) 

Achievable pattern width depends on adhesive/sealant specifications. RTD-controlled hand-held applicators recommended for pattern 

precision. 






Dimensions 

Dimensions 

mm (in.) 

Length 213 (8.40) 

Depth (without nozzle) 210 (8.25) 

Width 53 (2.08) 






Melter Model 

3000, 2300, 

DuraBlue 

Hand-Held 

Applicator Part Number Hose Diameter Voltage Wattage 

Model (1)(3) 

AD-31 STR 101206 2) 

5/16 240 80 

AD-31 STR-WP 137217 (2) 

AD-31 SCR 101207 

(1) 

Requires air hose installation kit (P/N 324287); see AD-31 Spray Hand-Held Applicator Accessories. 

(2) 


(3) 

All hand-held applicators have RTD type sensors. 

AD-31 Spray Hand-Held Applicator Accessories 

Accessory Part Number Description Comment 

104992 Hand Applicator Cordset, 2.4 m (8 ft) 

Cordsets 




Controller 

107246 Standalone Controller 

Kits 324287 Air Hose Kit 

Cordsets required for AD-31 ST, STL 

and SC hand-held applicators. (1) Order 

at least the same length as hose. 

Order for AD-31 SC used w/drum 

melters; or when no spare temperature 

control channels are available on Series 

2300, 3000 or 6000 applicators. 

Order for all units except Model 115/Hot 

Shot. 

(1) 

When used with Series 2300, 3000 or 6000 applicators, the cordset can connect to a spare channel, if available. If no spare 

temperature control channels are available, or when using an AD-31 SC hand applicator, use a standalone controller (part 107246) with 

the appropriate cordset. 





Web Content 


Description 

Select Series hand-held applicators provide Nordson quality 

hand-held applicators to fit melters from Hot Melt 

Technologies (HMT ). The AD-31/AD-41 hand-held 

applicators are equipped with the appropriate cordsets and 

proper electrical/hudraulic connectors for easy installation 

on other manufacturers’ melters. 

The Select Series hand-held applicators are available in 

the AD-31 or in the AD-41 version. These hand-held 

applicators deliver many benefits, including: 

• Lightweight, ergonomic design with “ever cool” handgrip offers 

greater operator comfort, increasing productivity and reducing 

physical stress. 

• Efficient, on-line nozzle conversions for AD-41 hand-held 

applicators deliver a variety of interchangeable nozzles for 

extrusion, swirl or spray. 

• Top feed or bottom feed AD-41 hand-held applicators give you 

more flexibility. 

• 360 degree swivel connector eliminates hose twisting and permits 

smooth operation, even at 1500 psi. 

• AD-31-PA hand-held applicators are ideal for polyamide 

applications or for chemically agressive and/or high-temperature 

adhesives. 


Hand-Held Applicators for HMT 

ProFlex 

Part Number 

725916 AD-31-H 

725817 AD-41-H 

Description 











Web Content 


Description 

Ergonomically designed hand-held applicators help 

minimize physical stress and fatigue in manually 

applying hot melt adhesives to horizontal substrates. 

When combined with the appropriate tool-balance 

devices, Series FP-200 hand-held applicators allow the 

operator to maintain a neutral wrist position. Weightsupported 

design and ergonomic configuration help 

reduce worker fatigue and physical stress in benchtop 

gluing applications such as automotive panels, appliance 

panels and furniture. 

Features 

• FP-200 hand-held applicators for 2300, 3000 and PA-2500 

applicators include heat shields and are designed to meet, CE, 

UL, and C-UL compliance requirements. 

• Suspension package includes a mast, overhead swing arm and 

tool balancer that bear the weight of the hand-held applicator. 

• Hand-held applicator assembly easily moves left or right and in 

or out on the swing arm relative to operator position. 

• Selection of modules and nozzles provides spiral spray or bead 

extrusion to meet deposition requirements. 

• For FP-200 hand-held applicators accommodating 2300, 3000 

and PA-2500 melters, kits are available to convert swirl handheld 

applicator to extrusion and extrusion hand-held applicator 

to swirl. 

• Patented Controlled Fiberization hand-held applicators permit 

exceptional control of spiral pattern density and size, yielding 

narrow and wide pattern versatility without overspray. 

• Bead extrusion hand-held applicators are available in standard 

and reduced cavity designs with a choice of nozzle and orifice 

diameters. 

• Trigger handle adjusts throughout a range of positions, and 

auxiliary guide handle permits two-handed use for further 

control. Handle position accommodates either left or righthand 

use. 

• Light-touch trigger activates an air valve or microswitch in 

hand-held applicator handle, providing instant adhesive flow. 

FP-200 Hand-Held Applicator Dispensing Swirl Pattern 

• Patented multi-plane swivel provides angle movement up 

to 2° from centerline to further reduce wrist stress. 

• Compact body design optimizes pattern visibility and 

maneuvering in difficult-to-reach areas. 

• Modules are interchangeable for ease of cleaning and 

replacement. 

• Air-open, spring-close hand-held applicator design 

includes long-life seals and provides superior cutoff, 

pattern uniformity, and the ability to dispense a wide 

range of hot melt adhesives and sealants. 

• Precise RTD sensing controls hand-held applicator 

temperature to within ±0.5. 

• Quick-disconnect electrical plugs speed installation and 

servicing 






Parameter 

Specification 

Pattern type (1) 

• FP-200 standard 

• FP-200 reduced cavity 

• FP-200 CF 

• FP-200 CF-WP 

• Bead 

• Bead 

• Swirl 

• Wide swirl 


230 °C (450 °F) maximum 


10.34 (1,500) maximum 

Air pressure (2) MPa (psi) 

• FP-200 standard and reduced cavity 

0.21-0.42 (30-60) 

• FP-200 CF swirl and wide pattern 0.27-0.48 (40-70) 

Air consumption 


Spray pattern width (3) mm (in.) 

• FP-200 CF 

6-38 (0.25-1.5) 

• FP-200 CF-WP 25-152 (1-6) 

Nozzle orifice diameters (4) mm (in.) 

• FP-200 standard 

0.203-0.61 (0.008-0.024) 

• FP-200 extended extrusion 0.64-4.75 (0.025-0.187) 

• FP-200 reduced cavity 0.20-0.51 (0.008-0.020) 

• FP-200 CF swirl 0.20-1.27 ( 0.008-0.050) 

• FP-200 CF swirl - wide pattern 0.64-1.17 (0.025-0.046) 


220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

(1) 

FP-200 hand-held applicators are compatible with most Nordson applicators, both RTD and thermostatic-based technology. 

(2) 

Recommended range. Dry, regulated, unlubricated air required for consistent hand-held applicator operation. Module performance 

and durability will be negatively affected if operated outside the recommended range. Volumetric air requirements will vary with hand-held 

applicator configuration and application. 

(3) 

Maximum achievable swirl pattern width depends on adhesive being dispensed. 

(4) 

Order nozzles separately on standard extrusion hand-held applicators. For reduced cavity modules, specify nozzle diameter with handheld 

applicator purchase as nozzle is an integral component of RC modules. 






FP-200 Hand-Held Swirl Applicator Components 





FP-200 Hand-Held Extrusion Applicator Components 






FP-200 Suspension System Components 






The Flat Panel system requires: 

• An FP-200 hand-held applicator 

• An air hose control kit (unless otherwise specified) 

• A hose 

• A suspension package 

• A nozzle 

Melter Pattern Type Part Number Voltage Wattage 

3000, DuraBlue 

Swirl 234896 

Extrusion 

234897 

1004770 

Swirl 307714 

Extrusion 307715 

Wide variety of alternate configurations are available as custom specials; lead times and prices may be greater. Consult a Nordson 

representative. 

240 

120 

160 

Series FP-200 Hand-Held Applicator Nozzles and Accessories 

Nozzle/Accessory P/N Description Comment 

Floor Mount 

Suspension Package 


Nozzles 

157330 

3 ft. Radius, Swing Arm, 90° Swing, 

4.5 Kg Capacity (10 Lb) Tool Balancer 

725471 

6 ft. Radius, Swing Arm, 75° Swing, 

6.8 Kg Capacity (15 lb) Tool Balancer 




Includes one-piece nozzle and nut assembly. 

Swirl Nozzles 104100 0.20 mm (0.008 in.) Orifice Dia Use with retainer P/N 119202. 











Continued... 






Nozzle/Accessory P/N Description Comment 

Extended Extrusion 710245 0.64 mm (0.025 in.) Orifice Dia Refer to Nozzles section for bead nozzles. 

Nozzles 





Modules 

157266 CF-200 Swirl/Wide Pattern Module 

276119 Extrusion Module, H-200 Standard Adjustable 

117714 

Extrusion module, H-200 Reduced Cavity, 

0.30 mm (0.012 in.) Orifice 

117804 

Extrusion module, H-200 Reduced Cavity, 

0.41 mm (0.016 in.) Orifice 

117715 

Extrusion module H-200 Reduced Cavity, 

0.51 mm (0.020 in.) Orifice 

Miscellaneous 303029 

Conversion Kit, Hand-Held Applicator, Swirl To 

Extrusion 

303028 

Conversion Kit, Hand-Held Applicator, Extrusion 

To Swirl 

234965 Heat Shield, Swirl Hand-Held Applicator 

303009 Heat Shield, Swirl Hand-Held Applicator 

234970 Heat Shield, Extrusion Hand-Held Applicator 

725154 Heat Shield, Extrusion Hand-Held Applicator 

1098523 Tool Balancer, 3.0 kg (6.6 lb) Capacity 

1098747 Tool Balancer, 5.0 kg (11 lb) Capacity 

Order nozzle separately. 

Converts swirl hand-held applicator to extrusion. 

Order heat shield and nozzle separately. 

Converts extrusion hand-held applicator to 

swirl. Order heat shield and nozzle separately. 

Order with kit (P/N 303028). 

Included with hand-held applicator (P/N 

234896). 

Optional. Order separately for hand-held applicators 

(P/N 175745, 231025 and 23209). 

Order with kit (P/N 303029). 

Included with hand-held applicator (P/N 

234897). 

Optional. Order separately for hand-held applicators 

(P/N 175746, 231024 

and 176122). 

Included with suspension package 

(P/N 157330). 

Included with suspension package (P/N 

725471). 

169725 Multi-plane Swivel, Replacement 

938129 

Heater, 1.0 x 25.4 mm 

(0.038 in. x 1.00 in.), 240 V, 80 W 

Order 2 per hand-held applicator. 

724795 Heated Air Manifold Kit 

324287 Air Hose Control Kit Includes air gauge and regulator. 








Coating Heads 

Adhesive & Sealants Equipment Guide Coating Heads | 10-1 

Web Content 


Description 

Speed-Coat applicators combine the latest Nordson 

technology and manufacturing techniques to meet 

today’s high-speed production and application accuracy 

requirements. The applicator’s robust design simplifies 

set-up, delivers long life operation and produces a highly 

repeatable pattern, maximizing productivity. 

Its flexible design enables the applicator to be customized 

according to application requirements and its compact 

design is smaller than other comparable slot applicators, 

helping to ensure it fits easily on any production line. 

Speed-Coat applicators are the successor to the popular 

EP11 and EP12 slot coating product offerings. 

Speed Coat 

Features 

• Optimized retract on close (“snuff-back”) control module 

supports significant increases to line speeds and delivers precise 

adhesive cutoff, minimizing contamination between patterns. 

• Quick-change module and filter assemblies maximize 

productivity by reducing replacement time by 50 percent. 

• Nozzle design simplifies applicator set-up and ensures 

application quality when web routing or web tension is not 

optimized. 

• Self-cleaning nozzle minimizes contamination and clogging 

during application, maximizing uptime. 

• Integrated module and applicator body delivers fastest response 

time in the industry. 

• Unique applicator design is milled precisely, helping to ensure 

exceptionally uniform distribution across the web. 

• Optional ant-stick coating simplifies applicator maintenance 

and allows processing of reactive hot melt adhesives. 

• Recirculation modules are available for applications with long 

gaps between patterns, or to keep adhesive circulating through 

system during machine stops. 

• Double module design (DM), with alternating module 

actuation, enables extremely short gaps between patterns. 



10-2 | Coating Heads 



Parameter 

Specification 

Operating speed (1) 

Up to 9,000 cycles/minute 


200°C (392°F) maximum 

Application Width (2) 

up to 500 mm/19.5 in. 


Ni-120 or Pt100, FeCuNi 

Control Type 

Electro Pneumatic 

Operating air pressure MPa (psi)- (3) 0.5-0.6 (72.5 -87.0) 


230 VAC, 50/60 Hz 


23.5 - 28 VDC 

Supply current (control) 

2.0 A per standard solenoid 

(1) 


(2) 

Wider application widths are available upon request. 

(3) 

Oil-free air must be used. 

Dimensions 

185 mm/7.3 in. 

145 mm/5.7 in. 

L* 

* Depends on application width 




Coating Heads | 10-3 



Box 1-2 3-4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 

Code SC - - / 

Box 

3-4 

Applicator Design 

Code 

Box 12 Hose Fitting Code 

Single Module Design 

SM 

8 mm, 5/16 in., 45 Deg, 9/16 UNF 3 

Double Module Design 

DM 

13 mm,1/2 in., 45 Deg, 3/4 UNF 4 

16 mm, 5/8 in., 45 Deg, 11/16 UNF 5 

Box 

6 

Nozle Width (mm) 

Code 

8 mm, 5/16 in., Straight, 9/16 UNF 7 

13 mm, 1/2 in., Straight, 3/4 UNF 8 

16 mm, 5/8 in,, Straight, 11/16 UNF 9 

Box 

8 


J-type Thermocouple 

Pt100 Platinum RTD 

Ni-120 Nickel RTD 

Code 

J 

P 

N 

Box 

14 

Body Options 

Chemcoated Body 

Steel Body (Chemcoat ® ) 


Code 

C 

F 

X 

Box 

9 

Shimplate Filter Mesh Size Code 

0.10 mm 0.08 mm 1 

0.15 mm 0.08 mm 8 

Box 

15 

Overdrive Capable 


Solenoid 

Code 

Z 

X 

0.20 mm 0.10mm 2 

Box 

10 

Nozzle Style 

NW Application 

CT Application 

Abrasive Resistant (NW) 

Code 

A 

B 

R 

Box 

16 

Hydraulic Option 

One Filter / Module Per Bead 

Grouped Hydraulic Zones 

One hydraulic zone for all 

modules (Standard) 

Code 

O 

M 

X 

No Nozzle Assembly Included 

X 

Box 17 Needle Stroke Detection Code 

Box 

11 

Via hose (6) 


Code 

C 

Without Needle Stroke Detection 

(Standard) 

X 

Direct 

D 

Boxes 

18-20 

Reserved 

Code 

Reserved 

X 





Part Numbers 

Control Module 

Part Number 

Description 

7103660 Control Module, SC, 24V Booster Complete 

7103670 Control Module, SC, 24/48V, ES 70, Complete 

Filters 

Part Number 

Description 

465447 Filter Bayonet SC-SM(20), Mesh Size 0.08, Complete 

465703 Filter Bayonet SC-SM(20), Mesh Size 0.1, Complete 

462998 Filter Sleeve, Mesh Size 0.08, With Spring 

206461 Filter Sleeve, Mesh Size 0.1, With Spring 

Nozzle Seal 

Part Number 

401853 Quad Ring, 8.2 x 1.78 

Description 




Web Content 



Description 

TrueCoat high-performance, configurable slot applicators 

deliver precise continuous or intermittent coatings. 

Precision crafted and extremely reliable, the TrueCoat 

applicator’s body and nozzle design offer exceptional 

thermal performance and application accuracy. 

The flange-on solenoid and quick-change filter and 

nozzle deliver fast pattern changes and quick, easy 

maintenance. 

The TrueCoat nozzle and body length can be configured 

in 30 mm (1.18 in.) increments (starting with base 

module of 100 mm, the smallest configurable version 

is 130 mm). In addition, a 70 mm ‘Minibody’ exists 

that cannot be extended. The TrueCoat heads are used 

for intermittent applications at medium line speeds, or 

high-precision continuous coatings. The nozzle and body 

length along with the new body shape provide compact 

overall size for installation in tight machine spaces. 

TrueCoat Slot Applicator 

Watch Video 

TrueCoat applicators are available in standard application 

widths up to 720 mm (28 in.), or larger upon special 

request. TrueCoat applicators are the successor to 

the popular EP45 and EP51/52 slot coating product 

offerings. 

Features 

• One technology can be configured for continuous or 

intermittent applications, reducing spare parts inventory. 

• Redesigned, quick-change, replaceable slot nozzle drastically 

reduces time required to change application widths/formats. 

• Quick-change filter cartridges and flange-on solenoids enable 

quick, easy maintenance. 

• Compact body design allows installation in tight spots. 

• Optional anti-stick surface coating eases cleaning and 

maintenance. 






Parameter 

Specification 

Operating speed (1) 

Up to 4,000 cycles/minute 



Application width (2) 

up to 720 mm / 28 in. 


Ni-120 or Pt100, FeCuNi 

Control type 

Electro Pneumatic 

Operating air pressure MPa (psi) 0.5-0.6 (72.5 -87.0) 


230 VAC, 50/60 Hz 


24 VDC 

(1) 


(2) 

Wider application widths are available upon request. 

(3) 


Dimensions 

L* 

190 mm/7 5 in 

190 mm/7 5 in 

230 mm/9 in 

*Depends on application width 

L* 

174 mm/7 in 

*Depends on application width 







Box 1-3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 

Code KTC - - / 

Box 

5 

Nozzle Width (mm) 

Code 

Box 

12 


Code 

Nozzle Width (mm) 

# mm 

Via Hose 

C 

Direct 

D 

Box 

7 

Body Type 

Minibody (70 mm) 

Normal 

Code 

M 

X 

Box 

13 

Hose Fitting 

Code 

8 mm 1 

13 mm 2 

Box 

8 


J-type Thermocouple 

Pt100 Platinum RTD 

Ni-120 Nickel RTD 

Code 

J 

P 

N 

Box 

15 

16 mm 2 

Body Options 

Code 

Chemcoated Body 

C 


X 

Box 

9 

Filter 

Code 

No Filter 

X 

Mesh Size 0.1 mm 1 

Box 

16 

Steel Body 

Steal Body (browned) 

Code 

F 

Mesh Size 0.2 mm 2 

Box 

10 

Shimplate Filter Mesh Size Code 

Box 

17 

Reserved 

Reserved 

Code 

X 

0.2 mm 0.1 mm 2 

0.3 mm 3 

0.4 mm 4 

0.5 mm 5 

Box 

18 

One Filter / Module 

Hydraulic Option 

Code 

O 

No Shim 

X 

One Hydraulic Zone For All 

Modules (Standard) 

X 

Box 

11 

Nozzle Style 

Intermittent Application 

Continuous Application 

Code 

A 

B 

Box 

19 

High-Flow Modules 

High-Flow Modules 

Code 

H 

No Nozzle Assembly Included 

X 

Box 

20 

Reserved 

Code 

Reserved 

X 





Part Numbers 


Part Number 

Description 

7103612 Control Module DC-D3 Fixed Stroke W/Valve 

7103613 Control Module DC-D5 Adjustable Stroke W/Valve 

Filters 

Part Number 

Description 

465703 Filter Bayonet MW0,1 W/Pressure Relief 

7106789 Filter Bayonet MW0,2 W/Pressure Relief 

7103614 Filter Bayonet MW0,1 W/Pressure Relief L100 mm 

7103616 Filter Bayonet MW0,2 W/Pressure Relief L100 mm 

206461 Filter Sleeve, Mesh Size 0.1, W/Spring 

7103625 Filter Sleeve, MW0, 2 W/Spring 

7103615 Filter Sleeve, MW0, 1 100 mm Long W/Spring 

7103617 Filter Sleeve, MW0, 2 100 mm Long W/Spring 

Nozzle Seal 

Part Number 

401853 Quad Ring, 8.2 x 1.78 

Description 





Web Content 


Description 

TrueCoat FS slot applicators combine consistent, 

reliable performance with application flexibility to 

improve product quality and production efficiency. The 

TrueCoat FS applicator can apply a variety of adhesives 

in continuous operation to a wide range of substrates, 

including paper, veneers, foils or films. These coated 

substrates are then applied to different types of boards 

(including chipboard, honeycomb panels, etc.) used in 

numerous furniture and woodworking applications. 

TrueCoat FS Slot Applicator 

The TrueCoat FS applicator delivers a consistent 

application of adhesive to the web in both crossweb 

and machine directions. Application (add-on) 

weights and coating width, using a patented coating 

width adjustment design, can be adjusted even during 

production. The motor-driven width adjustment from 

either side facilitates frequent application width changes 

and reduces operational risk by delivering the correct 

input signal for the grammage control software. Precise 

metering and accurate temperature control reduce 

adhesive consumption and improve product quality. 

TrueCoat FS applicators are designed for consistent 

application in continuous operation. 

Features 

• Optimized, uniform adhesive distribution yields high product 

quality and reduces adhesive consumption. 

• Automatic, motor-driven width control supports quick, easy 

applicator setup and changeovers. 

• Optional add-on control software tied to application width and 

speed. 

• Quick-exchange filters and solenoids make maintenance faster 

and easy. 

• Specially-designed, compact body fit allows installation into 

tight spots and supports better web routing. 

• Quick-exchange slot nozzle reduces the time needed for 

maintenance and increases machine uptime. 

• Coating width geometry with increased lifetime due to 

enhanced contact surface. 






Parameter 

Specification 

Nozzle slot size 0.4 mm 

Coating speed 

10 to 60 m/min (32.8 to 196.85 ft/min) 




Ni-120 

Operating air pressure (1) 

4 to 6 bar (58 to 87 psi) 

Maximum adhesive pressure (2) 

30 bar (435 psi) 


230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 phase 

Degree of protection 

IP50 

(1) 


(2) 

Maximum pressure for this application; 100 bar is the maximum the applicator can safely handle. 

Parameter 

Application width 

Polyurethane (PUR) 

Ethylene Vinyl Acetate (EVA) 

Polyolefin (PO) 

100 to 700 mm (3.94 to 27.56 in.) 100 to 700 mm (3.94 to 27.56 in.) 

200 to 1,000 mm (7.87 to 39.37 in.) 100 to 1,000 mm (3.94 to 39.37 in.) 

200 to 1,400 mm (7.87 to 55.12 in.) 100 to 1,400 mm (3.94 to 55.12 in.) 

Coating weight 30 to 80 g/m 2 40 to 80 g/m 2 EVA 

30 to 80 g/m2 PO 

Adhesive viscosity 10,000 to 35,000 mPa*s 10,000 to 50,000 mPa*s 






380mm /15 in. 

Dimensions 

380mm / 15 in. 

179mm / 7.1 in. 

179mm / 7.1 in. 

110mm / 4.3 in. 

380mm /15 in. 

110mm / 4.3 in. 

200mm / 7.9 in. 

Control panel (depth is 60 mm/2.4 in.) 

380mm / 15 in. 

Control box (depth is 210 mm/8.3 in.) 

200mm / 7.9 in. 

Applicator dimensions vary depending on configuration. 

Part Numbers 

TrueCoat FS Slot Applicator 

The TrueCoat FS slot applicator includes the applicator and both drives (1), the control box (2), 

the control panel (3), and connection cables (4). 

(1) Applicator and Drives 

Material 

Coating Width 

(mm) 

(2) Control Box (3) Control Panel (4) Cables 

100–700 P/N 7189191 - TC-FSPUR standard (1) 

PUR 200–1000 P/N 7186020 - TC-FSPUR grammage current (2) 

200–1400 P/N 7186282 - TC-FSPUR grammage voltage (3) P/N 7157980 

Control panel for flat 

100–700 P/N 7157979 - TC-FS1400 EVA standard (1) 

lamination 

EVA or PO 100–1000 P/N 7157978 - TC-FS1400 EVA fieldbus (4) 

100–1400 Control box for grammage control (contact Nordson) 

(1) 

Without grammage control software. 

(2) 

Includes grammage control: 4–20 mA line speed input and 0–10V signal output to supplying melter/pump. 

(3) 

Includes grammage control: 0–10V line speed input and 0–10V signal output to the supplying melter/pump. 

(4) 

Fieldbus CANopen communication (ProfiNet available) 

P/N 7150059 

Control cable set 






Part Number Description Contents 

7144345 Control module, TC-D5, fixed, lift w/valve Complete control module 

460246 Solenoid valve, 3/2 way, 24V, 2.5 W, NC flg. Solenoid valve 

7143146 Service kit, sealing, TC module, D5 Seals, O-rings, and quad ring 

Filters 

Part Number Description Contents 

7167051 Filter, bayonet, MW 0.2, w/pressure relief, L150 Complete filter assembly 

7150049 Service kit, filter sleeve, MW 0.2, L150 Filter sleeve and O-rings 




Web Content 



Description 

EZ Coat slot applicators are designed for safe processing, 

long cycle life and repeatable application patterns in 

continuous or intermittent operation. Based on proven 

technology and optimized with advanced flow and 

thermal analysis tools, EZ Coat applicators offer reliable 

performance and simplified set-up. 

Three blank shims of varying thicknesses are 

provided with each EZ Coat applicator for customer 

customization. These slot applicators provide flexibility 

in positioning relative to the substrate for added pattern 

control. 

Quick-change solenoids and an optional quick-change 

filter enable fast, easy maintenance. A compact body 

design and single adhesive inlet facilitate installation in 

constrained spaces. 

A variety of application widths are available for patterns 

up to 320 mm. 

Features 

• Provide easy, reliable slot coating technology to meet 

application requirements in low- to mid-speed adhesive 

bonding processes. 

• Simplify set-up and maintenance 

• Deliver reliable coating application 

EZ Coat Slot Applicator 






Parameter 

Maximum Intermittent Cycles (1) 

Operating Temperature 

Maximum Application Width 

Maximum Adhesive Viscosity 

Temperature Sensors 

Module Actuation Air Pressure (2) 

Electrica 

Control Voltage 

Specification 

Up to 3,000 cycles/minimum 

200 °C (392 °F) maximum 

320 mm (12.6 in.) 

10,000 cps/mPAS 

Ni120 

4 to 6 bar (58 to 87 psi) 

230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 phase 

24 VDC 

(1) 

The number of cycles may vary depending on operating pressure and control air pressure, as well as adhesive viscosities. 

(2) 


Dimensions 







Part Numbers 

EZ Coat Applicators 

Part Number Description (1) Nozzle Width (mm) 

Maximum Application 

Width (mm) 

7410388 EZCOAT-1-N-080-040 80 40 

7410387 EZCOAT-1-N-120-080 120 80 

7410386 EZCOAT-2-N-200-160 200 160 

7410385 EZCOAT-3-N-280-240 280 240 

7410384 EZCOAT-4-N-360-320 360 320 

(1) 

Configuration legend: 

EZCOAT = EZ Coat applicator 

1–4 = Number of control modules 

N = Ni120 temperature sensor 

080–360 = Nozzle width (mm) 

040–320 = Application width (mm) 

Coating Nozzles 

Part Number Description Nozzle Width (mm) 

Maximum Application 

Width (mm) 

7186735 Kit, Coating Nozzle, EZ Coat-1 DL080 AB040 80 40 







7103612 Control Module, TC-D3, fixed lift, w/valve For intermittent and continuous applications. 

Filter Assembly 

Part Number 

Description 

7410389 Kit, Filter Assembly, MW 0.08, EZ COAT 









Web Content 



AltaSlot-c and AltaSlot-i 

Description 

AltaSlot applicators offer continuous (AltaSlot-c) 

or intermittent (AltaSlot-i) configurations designed 

for safe processing, long cycle life and repeatable 

application patterns. Based on long-proven thermal and 

hydrodynamic technology, AltaSlot applicators offer 

reliable performance and simplified set-up. 

In addition to a pre-cut shim, a blank shim is 

provided with each AltaSlot applicator for customer 

customization. These slot applicators provide flexibility 

in positioning relative to the substrate for added pattern 

control. 

Quick-change filter cartridges and solenoids enable fast, 

easy maintenance. A compact body design and single 

adhesive inlet facilitate installation in constrained spaces. 

AltaSlot-c Applicator 

A variety of application widths are available as is a choice 

between nickel or platinum RTD sensors. 

Features 

• Choose continuous or intermittent operation 

• Simplify set-up and maintenance 

• Reliable coating application 

AltaSlot-i Applicator 







Parameter 

Maximum Intermittent Cycles (1) 

Operating Temperature 

Maximum Application Width 

Maximum Adhesive Viscosity 


Module Actuation Air Pressure (2) 

Electrica 


Up to 4,000 cycles/min 

200 °C (392 °F) maximum 

Specification 

Continuous: 700 mm (27.56 in.) 

Intermittent: 350 mm (13.78 in.) 

Continuous: 80,000 cps/mPAS 

Intermittent: 10,000 cps/mPAS 

Ni120, PT100 

5 to 6 bar (72.5 to 87 psi) 

230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1 phase 

24 VDC 

(1) 

The number of cycles may vary depending on operating pressure and control air pressure, as well as adhesive viscosities. 

(2) 


Dimensions 

AltaSlot-c 

AltaSlot-i 








Part Numbers 

AltaSlot-c 

P/N 


No. of 

Modules 

Sensor 

Body/Nozzle 

Width 

Maximum 

Pattern Width 

Number of 

Heated Zones 

Hose 

Fitting 

7147751 AS-c-1-N-160-100 1 Ni120 160 mm 100 mm 1 8 mm 

7147752 AS-c-2-N-250-200 2 Ni120 250 mm 200 mm 1 8 mm 

7147753 AS-c-3-N-340-300 3 Ni120 340 mm 300 mm 2 8 mm 

7147754 AS-c-4-N-460-400 4 Ni120 460 mm 400 mm 2 8 mm 

7147755 AS-c-5-N-550-500 5 Ni120 550 mm 500 mm 2 13 mm 

7147756 AS-c-6-N-640-600 6 Ni120 640 mm 600 mm 2 13 mm 

7147757 AS-c-7-N-760-700 7 Ni120 760 mm 700 mm 3 13 mm 

7147741 AS-c-1-P-160-100 1 PT100 160 mm 100 mm 1 8 mm 

7147742 AS-c-2-P-250-200 2 PT100 250 mm 200 mm 1 8 mm 

7147743 AS-c-3-P-340-300 3 PT100 340 mm 300 mm 2 8 mm 

7147744 AS-c-4-P-460-400 4 PT100 460 mm 400 mm 2 8 mm 

7147745 AS-c-5-P-550-500 5 PT100 550 mm 500 mm 2 13 mm 

7147746 AS-c-6-P-640-600 6 PT100 640 mm 600 mm 2 13 mm 

7147747 AS-c-7-P-760-700 7 PT100 760 mm 700 mm 3 13 mm 

AltaSlot-i 

P/N 


No. of 

Modules 

Sensor 

Body/Nozzle 

Width 

Maximum 

Pattern Width 

Number of 

Heated Zones 

Hose 

Fitting 

7121941 AS-i-1-N-110-70 1 Ni120 110mm 70 mm 1 8 mm 

7121942 AS-i-2-N-180-140 2 Ni120 180mm 40 mm 1 8 mm 

7121943 AS-i-3-N-250-210 3 Ni120 250mm 10 mm 1 8 mm 

7121944 AS-i-4-N-320-280 4 Ni120 320mm 280 mm 2 8 mm 

7121945 AS-i-5-N-390-350 5 Ni120 390mm 350 mm 2 8 mm 

7121951 AS-i-1-P-110-70 1 PT100 110mm 70 mm 1 8 mm 

7121952 AS-i-2-P-180-140 2 PT100 180mm 140 mm 1 8 mm 

7121953 AS-i-3-P-250-210 3 PT100 250mm 210 mm 1 8 mm 

7121954 AS-i-4-P-320-280 4 PT100 320mm 280 mm 2 8 mm 

7121955 AS-i-5-P-390-350 5 PT100 390mm 350 mm 2 8 mm 











Web Content 


Description 

The EB 60 Flex edge banding applicator delivers 

accurate, consistent hot melt adhesive application to the 

band or the board/panel for edge banding applications. 

“Edge-ondemand” technology and volume compensation 

eliminate excess air or adhesive from being expelled 

during coating width changes, meaning even the first 

panel produced is saleable. Manufacturers save material 

costs, decrease setup and maintenance time, and improve 

product quality. 

Precise control of adhesive application allows use of only 

the amount of adhesive necessary for the optimum bond 

without the need for over application and subsequent 

clean-up. 

EB 60 Flex applicators provide flexibility both in the 

adhesives you can use and the panel shapes that can be 

supported. Hot melt adhesives can include ethylene vinyl 

acetate (EVA), polyolefins and reactive polyurethanes 

(PUR). And, the ability to apply adhesive directly to 

the band – soft forming – means you are not limited to 

shapes with flat surfaces or edges. 

A motorized version uses a motor to adjust the nozzle 

width based on input from a touch-screen control panel. 

The manual adjust version relies on a hand wheel for 

nozzle width adjustment. 

EB 60 Flex Edge Banding Slot Applicator 

Features 

• Volume compensation for high-quality, saleable product from 

the first panel 

• Automated width adjustment 

• Nozzle closing system 

• Flexibility in material use and production 

• Easy integration to a wide variety of OEM systems and software 

• Reduction in material costs and maintenance 






Application/Coating Width 

Parameter 


Maximum Operating Air Pressure 

Maximum Adhesive Pressure (1) 


5 to 60 mm (0.2 to 2.4 in.) 

200 °C (392 °F) 

6 bar (87 psi) 

30 bar (435 psi) 

Ni120 

Specification 

Operating Voltage 

Motor Control: 230V, 50/60 Hz, 1 phase 

Motor: 24V 

Applicator Weight (approx.) 

Manual Version: 6.82 kg (15 lb) 

Motorized Version: 10 kg (22 lb) 


IP50 

(1) 

Maximum pressure for this application; 100 bar is the maximum the applicator can safely handle. 

Dimensions 

280 mm / 11 in. 145 mm / 5.7 in. 

370 mm / 14.6 in. 

60 mm / 2.4 in. 

0 mm 

77 (3 in.) 

55 mm / 2.2 in. 

Manual Adjustment 







265 mm / 14.4 in. 

145 mm / 5.7 in. 

385 mm / 15.2 in. 

60 mm / 2.4 in. 

0 mm 

55 mm / 2.2 in. 

77 (3 in.) 

380mm /15 in. 

Motorized Adjustment 

380mm / 15 in. 

179mm / 7.1 in. 

380mm /15 in. 

110mm / 4.3 in. 

200mm / 7.9 in. 

Control Panel for Motorized Control 

380mm / 15 in. 

Control Box for Motorized Control 

179mm / 7.1 in. 

110mm / 4.3 in. 





Part Numbers 

EB 60 Flex Applicators 

Part Number 

Description 

7150056 Applicator, EB 60 Flex, LH, Ni120, MAN, 5–60 mm 

7150086 Applicator, EB 60 Flex, RH, Ni120, MAN, 5–60 mm 

7133515 Applicator, EB 60 Flex, LH, Ni120, DRV, 5–60 mm 

7133354 Applicator, EB 60 Flex, RH, Ni120, DRV, 5–60 mm 

LH = Left-handed applicator design 

RH = Right-handed applicator design 

MAN = Manual coating-width adjustment 

DRV = Motor-driven coating-width adjustment 

5–60 mm = Possible coating width (minimum 5 mm to maximum 60 mm) 

Control Box 

Part Number 

7561646 Control Box, Edge Banding without Gateway 

7157958 Control Device, Edge Banding Applicator 

Description 


Part Number 

Description 

7183068 Control Module, SB60, 3.5 mm Needle Stroke, Flange Valve Module/Solenoid, Tandem 

Tandem = dual-needle seal technology 

Coating Nozzles 

Part Number 

Description 

7133525 Coating Nozzle, EB 60 Flex, Left-Hand , EB/Right-Hand SF, S, 0.5 mm Slot Opening (shim slot width) 

7133351 Coating Nozzle, EB 60 Flex, Right-Hand EB/Left-Hand SF, 0.5 mm Slot Opening (shim slot width) 

EB = Edge Banding 

SF = Strip-Feed 





Web Content 


Description 

The EP 48 PRO applicator delivers accurate, consistent 

hot melt adhesive application to book spines. Precise 

control of adhesive application allows use of only the 

amount of adhesive necessary for the optimum bond 

without the need for over application. 

EP 48 PRO applicators provide on-demand adhesive 

application so even the first book produced after a spine 

width change is saleable. Changes in adhesive viscosity 

and/or spine thickness are automatically adjusted for 

with volume compensation technology. Continuous 

automatic adjustment for accurate, real-time volumetric 

PUR application provides consistent, reliable spine 

gluing: adhesive thickness, width, and length end-to-end 

of the book. 

EP 48 PRO Bookbinding Slot Applicator 

EP 48 PRO applicators integrate into parent machines 

including integration into parent machine controls. 

Volumetric measurement calculates the amount of 

adhesive needed and the automatically adjusted pump 

applies the correct adhesive volume. 

Intuitive, graphical on-screen programming simplifies 

production changeovers to accommodate different book 

specifications and requirements. 

The EP 48 PRO applicator is part of a complete Nordson 

solution, the PURePro system. The combination 

of Nordson’s applicator, hose and slug melter protect 

adhesive from exposure to the moisture in air that can 

cause premature curing of the PUR adhesive. 

Features 

• No need to purge between spine width changes as volume 

is equalized inside the applicator to avoid squeeze-out or 

introduction of air into the nozzle. 

• Increased productivity with shorter changeover time and less 

maintenance. 

• Higher-quality bond and appearance with little or no squeezeout 

or inconsistent book spines. 

• Reduced adhesive use, so cost, due to precise, consistent 

adhesive application. 

• Efficient, effective PUR adhesive use due to the closed 

dispensing system. 






Parameter 

Specification 

Application Width 

1.5–60 mm (0.06–2.4 in.) 


180 °C (356 °F) 

Operating Adhesive Pressure 

40 bar/4 MPa (580 psi) 

Maximum Operating Air Pressure 

6 bar/0.6 MPa (87 psi) 

Maximum Adhesive Viscosity (1) 8,000 cps/MPas (8 Ms/m 2 ) 

Operating Voltage 

230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, single phase 


Ni120 

Weight (approx.) 

53 kg (117 lb) 


IP54 

(1) 

Additional adhesives are being and will be evaluated. 


appr. 654 appr. 323 

appr. 316 

Automated Adjust EP 48 PRO Applicator with Angled Motor Adapter (shown without filter) 

appr. 680 

appr. 340,5 

appr. 192 

Manual Adjust EP 48 PRO Applicator with Straight Motor Adapter (shown with filter) 






Part Numbers 

EP 48 PRO Applicators 

Part Number 

Description 

Width 

Adjustment 

Pump Adapter 

Design 

Filter 

Assembly 

7561640 Applicator, EP 48, PRO, 1-60 BoD AUT ANG Automatic Angled No 

7561641 Applicator, EP 48, PRO, 1-60 BoD, MAN STR Manual Straight No 

7561642 Applicator, EP 48, PRO, 1-60 BoD, MAN ANG Manual Angled No 

7561643 Applicator, EP 48, PRO, 1-60 BoD, AUT ANG wF Automatic Angled Yes 

7561644 Applicator, EP 48, PRO, 1-60 BoD, MAN STR wF Manual Straight Yes 

7561645 Applicator, EP 48, PRO, 1-60 BoD, MAN ANG wF Manual Angled Yes 

BoD = Book on Demand 

Control Cabinet 


7566431 Control Cabinet, EP 48 PRO 

Plates for Side-Gluing 

Part Number 

Description 

735427 Service Kit, EP48-BoD, Guide Plate, Side-Gluing, 1 x 1 










Nozzles 

Adhesive & Sealants Equipment Guide Nozzles | 11-1 

Web Content 


Description 

Nordson precision nozzles provide superior control 

of pattern placement and bead width to maximize 

product quality and reduce rejects. Flow accuracy and 

consistency increase application control and reduce 

adhesive usage. Wide tip design increases durability and 

cut-off control. 

• Close-tolerance machining of new bright-finish adapters 

provides bead placement accuracy within 

• ±4° from centerline, improving product quality and reducing 

adhesive costs. In comparison, typical nozzles can vary up to 

±19° from centerline. 

• Precision manufacturing and close-tolerance control of nozzleinsert 

inside diameter and engagement maximize deposition 

control for adhesive pattern consistency of ±5°, compared to 

±35° with typical nozzles. 

• Controlled bore and engagement provide accurate, consistent 

flow that results in uniform patterns and long-term adhesive 

savings without jeopardizing bond quality. 

• Controlled engagement delivers uniform velocity, permitting 

up-firing and through-rail delivery while maintaining bead 

placement with minimal splashback. 

• Wide tip design resists substrate-contact damage for long 

service life. 

• Improved heat transfer to tip provides cleaner cut-off with 

packaging-grade hot melts. 

• Accessories include nozzle cleaning kits and replacement 

probes to help extend nozzle life and preserve pattern 

performance. 

Saturn ® Precision Nozzles 

Saturn precision nozzles provide visual identification 

of orifice diameter and engagement length via colorcoded 

rings. These rings are your guarantee of a genuine 

Nordson Saturn nozzle. Unique Nordson color-coding 

simplifies nozzle replacement, reduces risk of incorrect 

nozzle installation and decreases downtime. Saturn 

nozzles provide the same superior control of pattern 

placement and bead width as all Nordson precision 

nozzles. 

• Peel-off label identifiers shipped with each nozzle affix to the 

gluing station for an additional reference that indicates color 

codes, part number and actual dimensions. 

• Proper nozzle replacement maintains product quality and 

eliminates downtime caused from incorrect or inferior nozzles. 

• Patented Saturn precision nozzles directly replace series 

237XXX nozzles and right angle nozzles used on Blue Series, 

E-350 and E-380 models. Choose Saturn right angle nozzles 

for low-profile applicators. 

• Two color-coded Saturn rings on the nozzle circumference 

identify orifice diameter and engagement length for quick 

reference. 

• Visual color reference helps eliminate incorrect nozzle 

replacements. 



11-2 | Nozzles 


Nozzles for Best Choice, MiniBlue II BAS, and E400 Electric Applicators 

Saturn 322XXX 

Single Orifice 

with Insert 

Optional Engagement 

Saturn 3224XX 

Long Engagement 

with Insert 

7.6 mm (0.300 in.) 

322XXX 

Saturn 

Single 

Orifice 

Brass 

Adapter, 

Stainless 

Steel Insert 

Engagement 

mm (in.) 

Top Ring 

1.3 (0.050) 

Purple 

1.9 (0.075) 

Brown 

2.5 (0.100) 

Blue 

3.8 (0.150) 

Green 

7.6 (0.300) 

Black 

0.20 

(0.008) 

Purple 

0.25 

(0.010) 

Blue 

0.31 

(0.012) 

Green 


0.36 

(0.014) 

Yellow 

0.41 

(0.016) 

Orange 

0.46 

(0.018) 

Red 

0.51 

(0.020) 

Beige 

0.53 

(0.021) 

Brown 

0.61 

(0.024) 

Gray 

322008 322010 322012 322014 322016 322018 322020 322024 

322110 322112 322114 322116 322118 322120 322124 

322212 322214 322216 322218 322220 322224 

0.71 

(0.028) 

Black 

322312 322314 322316 322318 322320 322324 1058927 

322412 322414 322416 322418 322421 322424 322428 

Saturn 101XXXX Right-angle Single and Dual Orifice 

1011XXX 

1015XXX 


Nozzle 

Angle 

0.20 

(0.008) 

Purple 

0.25 

(0.010) 

Blue 

0.31 

(0.012) 

Green 

0.36 

(0.014) 

Yellow 

0.41 

(0.016) 

Orange 

0.46 

(0.018) 

Red 

0.51 

(0.020) 

Beige 

0.61 

(0.024) 

Gray 

0.71 

(0.032) 

Black 

0.81 

(0.032) 

Gold 

1.02 

(0.040) 

Turquoise 

Brass 

Adapter, 

Stainless 

Steel 

Insert 

Single 90° 

Purple 

Dual 15° 

Brown 

Dual 30° 

Blue 

1011008 1011010 1011012 1011014 1011016 1011018 1011020 1011024 1011028 1011032 1011040 

1015812 1015814 1015816 1015818 1015820 1015824 1015828 

1015912 1015914 1015916 1015918 1015920 1015924 1015928 




Nozzles | 11-3 


Multi Orifice Nozzle Bead Spacing Table 

Distance from Substrate 

(inches) 

Angle Between Nozzles 

19 22.5 15 30 60 90 

Resulting Bead Spacing in Inches 

0.125 0.04 0.05 0.03 0.07 0.14 0.25 

0.250 0.08 0.10 0.07 0.13 0.29 0.50 

0.375 0.13 0.15 0.10 0.20 0.43 0.75 

0.500 0.17 0.20 0.13 0.27 0.58 1.00 

0.625 0.21 0.25 0.16 0.33 0.72 1.25 

0.750 0.25 0.30 0.20 0.40 0.87 1.50 

0.875 0.29 0.35 0.23 0.47 1.01 1.75 

1.000 0.33 0.40 0.26 0.54 1.15 2.00 

1.125 0.38 0.45 0.30 0.60 1.30 2.25 

1.250 0.42 0.50 0.33 0.67 1.44 2.50 

1.375 0.46 0.55 0.36 0.74 1.59 2.75 

1.500 0.50 0.60 0.39 0.80 1.73 3.00 

1.625 0.54 0.65 0.43 0.87 1.88 3.25 

1.750 0.59 0.70 0.46 0.94 2.02 3.50 

1.875 0.63 0.75 0.49 1.00 2.17 3.75 

2.000 0.67 0.80 0.53 1.07 2.31 4.00 

2.125 0.71 0.85 0.56 1.14 2.45 4.25 

2.250 0.75 0.90 0.59 1.21 2.60 4.50 

2.375 0.79 0.94 0.63 1.27 2.74 4.75 

2.500 0.84 0.99 0.66 1.34 2.89 5.00 

2.625 0.88 1.04 0.69 1.41 3.03 5.25 

2.750 0.92 1.09 0.72 1.47 3.18 5.50 

2.875 0.96 1.14 0.76 1.54 3.32 5.75 

3.000 1.00 1.19 0.79 1.61 3.46 6.00 

3.125 1.05 1.24 0.82 1.67 3.61 6.25 

3.250 1.09 1.29 0.86 1.74 3.75 6.50 

3.375 1.13 1.34 0.89 1.81 3.90 6.75 

3.500 1.17 1.39 0.92 1.88 4.04 7.00 

3.625 1.21 1.44 0.95 1.94 4.19 7.25 

3.750 1.26 1.49 0.99 2.01 4.33 7.50 

3.875 1.30 1.54 1.02 2.08 4.47 7.75 

4.000 1.34 1.59 1.05 2.14 4.62 8.00 

4.125 1.38 1.64 1.09 2.21 4.76 8.25 

4.250 1.42 1.69 1.12 2.28 4.91 8.50 

4.375 1.46 1.74 1.15 2.34 5.05 8.75 

4.500 1.51 1.79 1.18 2.41 5.20 9.00 





2380XX Domed Nozzles 

2380XX 

Single Orifice, One 

Piece 

Engagement 

mm (in.) 

0.31 

(0.012) 

0.36 

(0.014) 

2380XX Drilled Single Orifice 

Orifice Diameter mm (in.) 

0.41 

(0.016) 

0.46 

(0.018) 

0.51 

(0.020) 

0.76 

(0.030) 

0.89 

(0.035) 

1.02 

(0.040) 

1.27 

(0.050) 

Brass 

238004 238005 238006 238007 238008 238009 238058 238010 

2.54 (0.1) 

Stainless Steel 238011 238012 238002 238013 238000 238001 238057 238003 

A 

A 

A 

Single 

Dual 

Dual O/A 

A 

A 

B 

A 

120 o 120 o 

Triple 

Quad 

2380XX Domed Nozzles 

Triple Radial 

238XXX Domed Nozzles Phosphor 

Bronze (1) 

020 

(0.008) 

0.25 

(0.010) 

0.31 

(0.012) 


0.36 

(0.014) 

0.41 

(0.016) 

0.46 

(0.018) 

0.51 

(0.020) 

0.61 

(0.024) 

0.76 

(0.030) 

Single 15° 703299 706078 238015 704891 702927 238016 

Single 30° 704542 714977 238017 238018 804520 238019 

Single 45° 703464 705512 702598 238020 707218 238021 238022 

Single 60° 706057 238023 238024 238025 

Dual 15° 238059 238053 238063 238054 130495 238055 238056 

Dual 20° 238060 238062 715190 114927 238067 

Dual 30° 804871 703270 238506 704936 114928 805512 238500 238026 238501 

Dual 45° 238534 238525 238526 238527 238528 238529 238530 238027 238531 

Dual 60° 238061 709371 238064 238028 238068 238029 238030 

Dual 0/15° 805397 715462 238031 238032 238033 

Dual 0/45° 119360 804761 132567 238034 715872 238035 238036 

Triple 30° 238037 238065 238038 238069 238039 238071 238040 

Triple 45° 238041 238066 238042 238070 238510 238072 

Triple 60° 238043 807506 238044 708028 238045 238046 

Triple Radial 30° 805257 238047 238048 238049 238050 

Quad 40/90° 709479 714855 714856 808696 238051 238052 

(1) 

Use with retainer P/N 152926. 






Nozzles for H-20, E-100XT, EM-100, M-100, and Series 700 Electric Applicators 

These nozzles are comparable to the 73233 Series. They have a .050 in engagement and are 5/32 in. larger. 

232XXX and 226XXX Single Orifice Nozzles 

232XXX Standard Single Orifice with 

Insert, Optional Engagement 

226XXX Standard Single Orifice, 

Long Engagement (no insert shown) 

232XXX 

Single 

Orifice With 

Insert 

Engagement 

mm (in.) 

0.20 

(0.008) 

0.25 

(0.010) 

0.31 

(0.012) 

0.36 

(0.014) 


0.41 

(0.016) 

0.46 

(0.018) 

0.51 

(0.020) 

0.61 

(0.024) 

0.81 

(0.032) 

1.03 

(0.040) 

Brass 1.3 (0.050) 232000 232001 232003 232007 232011 232015 232019 232023 

Insert (1)(2) 3.8 (0.150) 232006 232010 232014 232018 232022 232026 226744 226745 

Adapter, 

Stainless 

1.9 (0.075) 232002 232004 232008 232012 232016 232020 232024 

Steel 2.5 (0.100) 232005 232009 232013 232017 232021 

232025 

(1) 

Use standard 232XXX and 226XXX nozzles for all applications except those requiring the nozzle guard feature of 231XXX nozzles. 

(2) 

Use with retainer 152290. 

226XXX Single Orifice With Insert 

Engagement 

mm (in.) 

0.31 

(0.012) 

0.36 

(0.014) 


0.41 

(0.016) 

0.46 

(0.018) 

0.53 

(0.021) 

0.61 

(0.024) 

0.71 

(0.028) 

Brass Adapter, Stainless Steel Insert (1)(2) 7.6 (0.300) 226727 226728 226729 226730 226731 226732 226733 

(1) 


(2) 

Comparable to the 65289-0XX Series single orifice nozzle for the E100XT, M-100 and EM-100 applicators. 





1022XXX Extended Nozzles 

1022XXX 

1022XXX Extended Nozzle 

1022XXX 

Extended 

Nozzles 

Engagement 

mm (in.) 

0.25 

(0.010) 

0.38 

(0.015) 

0.51 

(0.020) 


0.64 

(0.025) 

0.76 

(0.030) 

1.27 

(0.050) 

1.52 

(0.060) 

2.29 

(0.090) 

For E-100XT, 

M-100 and 

EM-100 

Modules 

3.8 (.150) 1022638 1022639 1022640 1022641 1022642 1022648 1022660 1022661 

65089 Series Multi-Orifice Cone Nozzles (0.030 Engagement) 

Part Number No. of Orifice Diameter mm (in.) Pattern Angle 

1022665 2 0.46 (0.018) 60° 

1022666 2 0.53 (0.021) 60° 

1022667 2 0.31 (0.012) 60° 

1022668 2 0.71 (0.028) 45° 

1022669 2 0.71 (0.028) 60° 

1022670 2 (dual) 0.53 (0.021) 45° and 30° 

1022671 2 0.46 (0.018) 30° 

1022672 2 0.53 (0.021) 30° 

1022673 3 0.46 (0.018) 45° 

1022674 3 0.41 (0.016) 45° 

1022675 8 0.46 (0.018) 45° 






231XXX Single Orifice Nozzles 

231XXX(1) Single Orifice With Insert 

Engagement 

mm (in.) 

0.20 

(0.008) 

0.25 

(0.010) 


0.31 

(0.012) 

0.36 

(0.014) 

0.41 

(0.016) 

0.46 

(0.018) 

0.51 

(0.020) 

Brass Adapter, Stainless Steel Insert (2) 1.3 (0.050) 231208 231210 231212 231214 231216 231218 231220 

1.9 (0.075) 231621 231312 231314 231316 231318 231320 

2.5 (0.100) 231412 231414 231416 231418 231420 

3.8 (0.150) 231612 231614 231616 231618 231620 

(1) 


(2) 


Comparable to 65006 series nozzles 

2310XX Long Engagement Nozzles 

231XXX Single Orifice, Long Engagement (no insert shown) 

2310XX(1) Single Orifice With Insert, 

Long Engagement 

Engagement 

mm (in.) 

0.31 

(0.012) 

0.36 

(0.014) 


0.41 

(0.016) 

0.46 

(0.018) 

0.53 

(0.021) 

0.61 

(0.024) 

0.71 

(0.028) 

Brass Adapter, Stainless Steel Insert (2) 7.6 (0.300) 231003 231005 231008 231018 231027 231040 231060 

(1) 


(2) 






Long Engagement Domed Nozzles 

Single, Centered Single, Offset Dual, Centered Dual, Offset 

Long Engagement Domed Nozzles (1)(2) 

Engagement 

mm (in.) 

Steel, Black Oxide-coated 

0.36 

(0.014) 


0.41 

(0.016) 

0.46 

(0.018) 

0.51 

(0.020) 

Single, 0°, Centered 0.36 (0.150) 301959 724771 301969 

Single, 15°, Offset 0.36 (0.150) 301960 724671 301970 

Single, 22.5°, Offset 0.36 (0.150) 301961 724788 301971 

Dual, 0°, 45°, Offset 0.31 (0.100) 234878 

Dual, 0°, 45°, Offset 0.36 (0.150) 234876 301965 724770 301975 

Dual, 16°, Offset 0.36 (0.150) 301962 301967 301972 

Dual, 24°, Centered 0.36 (0.150) 301963 301968 301973 

Dual, 30°, Centered 0.31 (0.100) 226773 226774 301980 

Dual, 30°, Centered 0.36 (0.150) 301964 189174 301974 

Dual, 45°, Centered 0.36 (0.150) 301966 724789 301976 

Dual, 60°, Centered 0.31 (0.100) 226784 301979 725017 301981 

Triple, 45°, 0°, 45°, Centered 0.36 (0.150) 234877 

Phosphor Bronze 

Dual, 24°, Centered 0.36(0.150) 301977 228827 301978 

(1) 

Used to increase hydraulic pressure range in gear-to-line and run-up applications. Requires at least 2413.16 kPa (350 psi) for clean 

cut-off. 

(2) 







220XXX Domed Nozzles 

120 

o 

120 

o 

A 

A 

A 

B 

A 

Dual 

Triple 

Quad 

Triple Radial 

220XXX (1) Domed Nozzles 

1.3 mm (0.050 in.) Engagement 

0.20 

(0.008) 

0.25 

(0.010) 

Phosphor bronze (2) 


0.31 

(0.012) 

0.36 

(0.014) 

0.41 

(0.016) 

0.46 

(0.018) 

0.51 

(0.020) 

Dual 16° 132488 220019 705831 220053 703684 

Dual 24° 709983 220009 705205 220045 

Dual 30° 702681 703661 220007 220067 702948 706743 808255 

Dual 45° 220000 220001 220002 220003 220004 220005 220006 

Dual 60° 712230 712231 703669 220046 220047 

Triple 30° 220048 704115 220049 804487 

Triple 45° 220010 220011 220012 220013 220014 220015 220016 

Triple 60° 704380 220050 100651 220051 

Radial Triple 22.5° 704113 220034 703469 804760 220052 

Quad 35/76° 220020 220021 220022 220023 220024 220025 220026 

Steel, black oxide coated (2) 

Dual 16° 220060 231151 231156 220066 231158 

Dual 24° 220059 231152 231157 220077 231159 

Dual 30° 220058 220071 159417 220078 220080 

Dual 45° 220054 220055 220056 220057 220081 

Triple 30° 220068 220072 220073 220079 220082 

Triple 45° 220064 231153 220074 

Radial Triple 22.5° 220069 231154 220075 

Quad 35/76° 220061 220062 220076 

Radial Quad 22.5° 220070 231155 220065 

(1) 

Comparable to the 73262 Series button nozzles. Additional sizes are available. Contact Nordson for more information. 

(2) 






Male-Threaded Nozzles for AD-31 and L4, AD-41, L5, and L7 Extrusion Hand-Held 

Applicators 

238XXX Male‐threaded Nozzle 

238XXX Male-threaded Stainless Steel 

AD-31 A, C, D, L, T, TL 

AD-41 Standard and Top Feed (1) Single Orifice 

(1) 

Standard AD-41 hand-held applicators have a small ball-and-seat design (SBS). 

0.50 

(0.020) 


0.78 

(0.030) 

1.02 

(0.040) 

1.52 

(0.060) 

2.29 

(090) 

238252 238253 238254 238256 238259 

Male‐threaded Extended Nozzle 

Male-threaded Extended Nozzles 

1.07 

(0.042) 

1.55 

(0.061) 

1.57 

(0.062) 


2.29 

(0.090) 

2.36 

(0.093) 

3.18 

(0.125) 

3.30 

(0.130) 

3.96 

(0.156) 

AD-31 A, C, D, L, T, TL 

AD-41 Standard and Top Feed (1) Copper 

Body, Stainless Steel Insert, Brass Fitting 

274968 274969 274970 274971 

P/N ID 4 6 9 12 

AD-31 B, K(2) 

AD-41 LBS (3) Copper 

804387 271683 271684 271685 

P/N ID 6 9 12 15 

(1) 

Standard AD-41 hand-held applicators have a small ball-and-seat design (SBS). 

(2) 

Engagement is 64.8 mm (2.55 in.). 

(3) 

LBS signifies a large ball-and-seat configuration. 






AD-31 and AD-41 Swirl and Wide Pattern Swirl Hand-held 

Applicators, FP-200 Hand-held Applicators 

Swirl Nozzle 

Retainer 

Special 

Nozzle 

Wide 

Pattern 

Swirl(1) 

0.20 

(0.008) 

0.25 

(0.010) 

0.31 

(0.012) 

0.36 

(0.014) 

0.41 

(0.016) 


0.46 

(0.018) 

0.51 

(0.020) 

0.64 

(0.025) 

0.76 

(0.030) 

1.02 

(0.040) 

1.17 

(0.046) 

125607 131998 131635 

1.27 

(0.050) 

Swirl(2) 104100 104101 860548 860574 860575 860226 860435 100728 810381 810382 810300 

(1) 

Single-piece. 

(2) 

Use retainer 119202 (H-200) or 102406 (AD-31). 

FP-200 Nozzles 

0.64 

(0.025) 


1.07 

(0.042) 

1.55 

(0.061) 

2.29 

(0.090) 

4.75 

(0.187) 

Extended Extrusion 710245 709018 710246 724268 703223 





Nozzles for H-20 Automatic Applicators with Right-Angle Adapter 

236XXX Base Nozzle 

H‐200 Integrated Right‐angle Adapter 

(P/N 222495) (1) 

E‐700 T‐Bar 

H‐20, E‐700 Right‐angle Adapter 

(P/N 179756) (2) 

(1) 

H-200 integrated right-angle sold as a module only, 222495. Purchase 236 series nozzles separately. 

(2) 

Order retainer P/N 152290 and 236 series nozzles separately. P/N 152290 is the standard retainer nut for H-20 and E-700 applicators. 

236XXX Specialty Nozzles 

Single Orifice With Insert 

Stainless-steel Adapter With Insert 

Engagement 

mm (in.) 

0.20 

(0.008) 

0.25 

(0.010) 


0.31 

(0.012) 

0.36 

(0.014) 

0.41 

(0.016 

0.46 

(0.018) 

0.51 

(0.020) 

1.3 (0.050) 236208 236210 236212 236214 236216 236218 236220 

1.9 (0.075) 236621 236312 236314 236316 236318 236320 

2.5 (0.100) 236412 236414 236416 236418 236420 

3.8 (0.150) 236612 236614 236616 236618 236620 

Nozzle Blank — 098403 

2360XX Specialty Nozzles 

Single Orifice, One Piece 

Engagement 

mm (in.) 

0.41 

(0.016) 


0.46 

(0.018) 

0.53 

(0.021) 

0.61 

(0.024) 

(0.028) 

Brass 7.6 (0.300) 236008 236018 236027 236040 236060 

0.71 






Nozzles for E-900 and EM-900 Modules 

Straight Orifice Nozzles 

Part Number Orifice Size mm (in.) Engagement mm (in.) 

1026682 0.41 (0.016) 7.62 (0.300) 

1026683 0.46 (0.018) 7.62 (0.300) 

1026684 0.51 (0.020) 7.62 (0.300) 

1026685 0.64 (0.025) 7.62 (0.300) 

1026686 0.89 (0.035) 7.85 (0.309) 

1026687 1.27 (0.050) 0.000 

1026688 0.20 (0.008) 1.27 (0.050) 

1026689 0.25 (0.010) 1.27 (0.050) 

1026700 0.30 (0.012) 1.27 (0.050) 

1026701 0.25 (0.010) 1.91 (0.075) 

1026702 0.30 (0.012) 1.91 (0.075) 

1026703 0.36 (0.014) 1.91 (0.075) 

1026704 0.41 (0.016) 1.91 (0.075) 

1026705 0.46 (0.018) 1.91 (0.075) 

1026706 0.51 (0.020) 0.000 

1026707 0.30 (0.012) 3.81 (0.150) 

1026708 0.46 (0.018) 3.81 (0.150) 

1026709 0.51 (0.020) 3.81 (0.150) 

1026710 0.64 (0.025) 3.81 (0.150) 

1026711 0.76 (0.030) 3.81 (0.150) 

1026712 0.89 (0.035) 3.81 (0.150) 

1026713 1.02 (0.040) 3.81 (0.150) 





Button Nozzles 

Part Number Number of Orifice Orifice size mm (in) Pattern Degree 

1026714 1 0.51 (0.020) 30 

1026715 2 0.30 (0.012) 30 

1026716 2 0.41 (0.016) 30 

1023717 2 0.41 (0.016) 90 

1026718 2 0.46 (0.018) 30 

1026719 2 0.46 (0.018) 45 

1026720 2 0.51 (0.020) 30 

1026721 2 0.51 (00.20) 45 

1026722 2 0.64 (0.025) 45 

1026723 2 0.64 (0.025) 90 

1026724 3 0.51 (0.020) 30 

1026725 3 0.64 (0.025) 60 

1026726 4 0.51 (0.020) 90 and 45 

Swirl Nozzles 

Part Number 

1026094 Nozzle and Nut, Fine Swirl, 0.025 in. Orifice 

1026090 Nozzle and Nut, 0.030 in. Orifice 



1026087 Kit, Swirl Adapter 

Description 






Right Angle Nozzles 

Single Orifice 

Two Orifice 

Part Number (1) Number of Orifice Orifice Size mm (in.) 

1026727 1 0.71 (0.028) 

1026728 1 0.30 (0.012) 

1026729 1 0.36 (0.014) 

1026730 1 0.41 (0.016) 

1026731 1 0.46 (0.018) 

1026732 1 0.51 (0.020) 

1026733 1 0.64 (0.025) 

1026734 1 0.76 (0.030) 

1026735 1 1.02 (0.040) 

1026736 2 0.36 (0.014) 

1026737 2 0.41 (0.016) 

1026738 2 0.46 (0.018) 

1026739 2 0.51 (0.020) 

1026740 2 0.64 (0.025) 

1026741 2 0.76 (0.030) 

1026742 2 1.02 (0.040) 

1026743 (2) 2 0.30 (0.012) 

1026744 (2) 2 0.36 (0.014) 

1026745 (2) 2 0.41 (0.016) 

(1) 

These are not interchangeable with E350 Nozzles. E-900 and EM-900 threads are 1/2-24, while E350 threads are 3/8-24 UNF-2B. 

(2) 

90 degree pattern width. 












Component 

Part 

Number 

Description 

Comment 

Nozzle Cleaning Kit 

E-100 nozzle 

Cleaning Kit 

Adapter/Nut Pair 

901915 Cleaning kit 

901925 • Tool Box Assembly 

901916 • Pin Vise 

901922 • Probe, 0.12 mm (.007 in.) Diameter 



1031803 Cleaning Kit 

909222 • Probe, 0.12 mm (.007 in.) Diameter 25 probes per vial 



1032002 • Probe, 0.46 mm (.018 in.) Diameter 10 probes per vial 






1019233 • Tools, Pin Vises 

804204 Adapter 

Includes pin vise, three vials of nozzle probes 

(25 probes per vial) and wooden box. Items 

may be ordered individually. 

All vials in the cleaning kit include 10 probes 

unless noted otherwise. 

Use with H-20 nozzles on H-200 applicators. 

804205 Retaining Nut Use with P/N 804204. 












Approximate pattern widths at 25 mm (1 in.) increments from nozzle tip for automatic applications using 

standard and custom multi-orifice nozzles. 





Pattern Width Graphs (contd.) 



Hoses 


Hoses | 12-1 

Web Content 


Description 

Nordson advanced-technology hot melt hoses are the 

industry standard for consistent temperature control 

and safe operation. Advanced-technology hoses extend 

performance and durability using (Nomex®) aramid 

insulation. This feature, along with thermal-sensing 

accuracy, automated manufacturing and parallel ground 

paths, provides unmatched performance, durability and 

safety. 

• Aramid insulation significantly improves chemical resistance 

and moisture sensitivity. 

• Chlorine-free materials eliminate hardware corrosion caused 

by emissions at elevated temperatures. 

• Insulation retains hose flexibility, and electrical and mechanical 

properties well beyond system operating temperatures. 

Insulation will not melt or support combustion in the air. 

• Four layers of overlapped aramid-felt insulation increase 

thermal efficiency, control heat loss, improve durability and 

reduce external temperature. 

• Nordson RTD-style and TC Series Pt100 (RTD) hoses feature 

area sensors that use temperature averaging over a set hose 

length to generate a reliable reading of hot melt temperature. 

• TC Series thermocouple (TC) hoses use point sensors at 

a discrete point. Automated manufacturing maintains 

consistent thermocouple positioning for accurate and 

consistent temperature readings. 

• Precision fabrication and calibration prior to assembly ensure 

that resistance and control values match, eliminating the 

need for temperature control calibration at installation. 

• Low watt-density heating elements reduce hot spot potential 

that can cause char. 

• Closely spaced wraps deliver efficient and uniform heat 

transfer for controlled startup and consistent flow rates. 

• Two separate ground paths protect personnel from injury 

and equipment from damage. 

• Dedicated low-resistance ground reduces the possibility of 

high-impedance faults. 

• Electrical connections use make-first, break-last pins at the 

applicator and unit ends to prevent powering the hose or 

applicator without ground connection. 

• Nordson RTD-style water-wash hoses have improved water 

resistance and greater flexibility for tight installation. Plugs 

are rated to IP67 with the Nordson hose/applicator rated 

IPX6. 

• Accessories include brackets, inline filters, fittings, hose 

protector, and suspension support. 

NOTE: Refer to information shipped with the hose for electrical 

connector data. 

Nomex is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont de Nemours and 

Company 

Minimum Radii for Hoses 

Medium-Pressure (“Standard”) Hoses 

Industry 


Size 

Hose 

"Dash" 

Number 

Inside 

Diameter 

(inches) 

Core Bend 

Radius 

Hose Bend 

Radius 

0.25 4 0.187 2.0 6.0 

0.31 5 0.250 2.5 6.5 

0.37 6 0.312 4.0 8.0 

0.5 8 0.406 4.6 9.0 

0.62 10 0.500 5.5 10.0 

0.75 12 0.625 6.5 11.0 

1 16 0.875 9.0 14.0 

1.25 20 1.125 ----- 17.0 

High-Pressure (“Standard”) Hoses 

Industry 


Size 

Hose 

"Dash" 

Number 

Inside 

Diameter 

(inches) 

Core Bend 

Radius 

Hose 

Bend 

Radius 

0.25 4 0.222 1.50 5.5 

0.37 6 0.308 2.50 6.5 

0.5 8 0.401 2.875 7.5 

0.62 10 0.495 3.25 8.0 

0.75 12 0.617 3.875 9.375 

1 16 0.867 5.00 10.0 

1.25 20 1.118 12.00 17.0 

1.5 24 1.375 14.00 19.0 



12-2 | Hoses 



Maximum operating temperature 

Maximum hydraulic pressure (1) 

5/16 in., 1/2 in., MPa (psi) 

1-1/8 in. MPa (psi) 

5/8 in. MPa (psi) 

Parameter 

230 °C (450 °F) 

10.34 (1,500) 

8.27 (1,200) 

6.894 (1,000) 

Specification 



Estimated hose weight with adhesive 

(1) 

Varies with hose diameter. 

240 VAC, 200 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

UL, CUL, TÜV, CE (RTD versions only) 

5/16 in. hose, appx. 1/2 pound per foot 

5/8 in. hose appx. 1 pound per foot 

Wattage Calculations for Hoses and Applicators on the PA2500 System 

Pump Type Wattage for Hoses and Applicators = Hose Wattage + Applicator 

Piston 

900 Watts (Max.) 

(ft/Hose) X 30 W for HP hoses (450 °F Max.) 

OR 

(ft/Hose) X 20 W for Standard (375 °F Max.) 

Applicator Wattage (1) 

Gerotor 

645 Watts (Max.) 

(ft/Hose) X 30 W for HP Hoses (450 °F Max.) 

OR 

(ft/Hose) X 20 W for Standard (375 °F Max.) 

Applicator Wattage (1) 

(1) 

Applicator Wattages: AD-31 80 W CF-201 150 W 

AD-41 100 W 

SolidBlue S 150 W 

FP-200 160 W 

Wattage Calculations for Manual Applicators and Hoses for 120V DuraBlue 

Melters 

Max. Wattage 

for Any Hose 

or Applicator 

Max. Wattage 

for a Hose/ 

Applicator Pair 

500 W 600 W 

Total Wattage Limitation for all 

Hoses and Applicators 

Max. 

Wattage 

1045 W 

985 W 

Melter Model 

D4L and D10L 

(22 kg/hr) 

D10L and D16L 

(45 kg/hr) 

= Hose Wattage + Applicator 

Length (ft) X 30 W/ft for HP Hose 

(450 °F max) OR 

Length (ft) X 20 W/ft for Standard Hose 

(375 °F max) 

AD-41 - 100 W 

FP-200 - 160W 




Hoses | 12-3 


Hose Selections 

Hoses are listed by type, diameter, control type and melter. Sensors vary by melter type. Nordson extends 

advanced-technology construction to the entire product line. 

Blue Series RTD-Style Automatic Applicator Hoses 5/16 in. Diameter: Blue 

Series, FoamMelt 200 Processors, and SureFoam 

5 

3 

4 

Unit End 

Applicator End 

2 

1 

Applicator Plug End (3) 

Blue Series hoses ship with permanent hose mounts as indicated in chart. 

Automatic, 240V 

5/16 in. Dia. 

Description Part Number Watts 

Length No. of 

M FT Hangers 

274790 56 0.6 2 0 

274791 120 1.2 4 1 

274792 184 1.8 6 2 

274793 248 2.4 8 3 

274794 312 3.0 10 3 

274795 376 3.6 12 4 

274796 504 5.0 16 5 

223836 632 6.0 20 7 

274797 760 7.4 24 8 

276739 51 0.6 2 0 

276740 120 1.2 4 1 

276741 184 1.8 6 2 

276742 248 2.4 8 3 

276743 312 3.0 10 3 

143300 340 3.6 12 4 

276744 456 5.0 16 5 

223837 572 6.0 20 7 

276745 688 7.4 24 8 

Continued... 

Automatic, 240V, Water Wash (1) 5/16 in. Dia. 

Use with all Nordson RTD-style water-wash hand-held 

applicators. 

NOTE: The unit end cordset is not compatible with the 

AquaGuard system. 



12-4 | Hoses 


Blue Series RTD-Style Automatic Applicator Hoses 5/16 in. Diameter: Blue 

Series, FoamMelt 200 Processors, and SureFoam (contd.) 

Automatic, 240V, Hi-Flex (2) 5/16 in. Dia. 


NOTE: HiFlex is distinguished by a blue nylon thread in the outer 

braid. 

Automatic, 240V, Water Wash (1) Hi-Flex (2) 

5/16 in. Dia. 

Use for all Blue Series melters. 

NOTE: The unit end cordset is not compatible with the AquaGuard 

system. 

Automatic, 120V, Low Watt 

5/16 in. Dia. 

Automatic, 120V, Standard Watt (4) 

5/16 in. Dia. 


5/16 in. Dia. 

M 

Length 

FT 

No. of 

Hangers 

107288 120 1.2 4 1 

107286 184 1.8 6 2 

107287 248 2.4 8 3 

107289 312 3.0 10 3 

107310 376 3.6 12 4 

104008 504 5.0 16 5 

223838 632 6.0 20 7 

100832 760 7.4 24 8 

155183 109 1.2 4 1 

155184 167 1.8 6 2 

155185 224 2.4 8 3 

155186 282 3.0 10 3 

155187 340 3.6 12 4 

155188 456 5.0 16 5 

223839 572 6.0 20 7 

155189 688 7.4 24 8 

309396 355 5.0 16 5 

307016 445 6.0 20 7 

309397 535 7.4 24 8 

307006 246 2.4 8 3 

307007 373 3.6 12 4 

307008 500 5.0 16 5 

307009 627 6.0 20 7 

307010 754 7.4 24 8 

276150 47 0.6 2 0 

276151 120 1.2 4 1 

276152 184 1.8 6 2 

276153 248 2.4 8 3 

276154 312 3.0 10 3 

276155 376 3.6 12 4 

276156 504 5.0 16 5 

Continued... 




Hoses | 12-5 


Automatic, 200V, Hi-Flex ( 2) 

5/16 in. Dia. 

Automatic, 20V, water wash (1) Hi-Flex (1) 

5/16 in. Dia. 


M 

Length 

FT 

No. of 

Hangers 

129556 100 1.2 4 1 

129557 153 1.8 6 2 

129559 206 2.4 8 3 

129561 259 3.0 10 3 

129562 313 3.6 12 4 

129564 419 5.0 16 5 

296908 100 1.2 4 1 

296909 153 1.8 6 2 

296910 206 2.4 8 3 

296911 259 3.0 10 3 

296912 313 3.6 12 4 

296913 419 5.0 16 5 

(1) 

Use standard Nordson water-wash hoses with RTD-style H-21 hand-held applicators. 

(2) 

Hi-Flex construction hoses must be used in moving applicator applications. Contact Nordson for details about Hi-Flex hoses. 

(3) 

Standard plug shown. Water-wash plugs are round Amphenol® connectors. 

(4) 

Consider the wattage available for hoses and applicators on 120V melters. Contact Nordson to ensure that available system wattage is 

not exceeded. 



12-6 | Hoses 


RTD-Style Automatic Applicator Hoses 5/8 in. Diameter: Blue Series, 

FoamMelt 200 Processors, SureFoam, VersaDrum, VersaPail, DuraDrum, and 

DuraPail 


Length 

M FT 

Automatic, 200 V, Hi-Flex (1) 

129566 123.75 1.2 4 

5/8 in. Dia. 

129568 189.75 1.8 6 

129569 255.75 2.4 8 

129571 321.75 3.0 10 

129572 387.75 3.6 12 

1123925 519.75 5.0 16 

Automatic, 240 V, Hi-Flex (1) 

129575 123.75 1.2 4 

5/8 in. Dia. 

129576 189.75 1.8 6 

1123928 255.75 2.4 8 

129578 321.75 3.0 10 

1123929 387.75 3.6 12 

1123926 519.75 5.0 16 

1010811 660 6.0 20 

1010813 831 7.4 24 

(1) 

Hi-Flex construction hoses must be used in moving applicator applications. Contact Nordson for more information. 

RTD-Style e.dot Hoses 


Length 

M FT 

Electric, 240V, 1/4 in. Dia. 

1040295 189 2 6 

1056635 238 2.5 8 

1040296 337 3.5 12 

1040297 485 5.0 16 




Hoses | 12-7 


Automatic Applicator Hoses, 5/16, 5/8, 1-1/8 in. Diameter, RTD Control: BM 20/ 

BM 200 Drum Melters 

Automatic, 230V, Hi-Flex (1) 

5/16 in. Dia. 


5/8 in. Dia. 


11/8 in. Dia. 


Length 

M FT 

276946 225.99 3.0 10 

276947 365.49 5.0 16 

276948 551.26 7.4 24 

276949 689.94 9.1 30 

276934 348.73 3.0 10 

276935 594.51 5.0 16 

276936 858.1 7.4 24 

276937 972.87 9.1 30 

100706 460.64 3.0 10 

100707 699 5.0 16 

(1) 

Hi-Flex construction hoses must be used in moving applicator applications. Contact Nordson for more information. 



12-8 | Hoses 


RTD-Style AD-31 Hand-Held Applicator Hoses 5/16 in. Diameter: Blue Series, 

FoamMelt 200 Processors, and SureFoam 


Length 

M FT 

274798 224 2.4 8 

115833 282 3.0 10 

Hand-held Applicator, AD-31, 240V, Corrugated Cover (1) 

130785 340 3.6 12 

5/16 in. Dia 

274799 456 5.0 16 

101354 688 7.4 24 

133913 224 2.4 8 

Hand-held Applicator, AD-31, 240V, DuraBraid Cover (2)(3) 

138927 282 3.0 10 

5/16 in. Dia. 

1044277 340 3.6 12 

1044278 456 5.0 16 


276533 206 2.4 8 

5/16 in. Dia. 

276534 419 5.0 16 

307011 246 2.4 8 

307012 373 3.6 12 

Hand-held Applicator, AD-31, 120V, Corrugated Cover (1)(3) 

307013 500 5.0 16 

5/16 in. Dia. 

307014 627 6.0 20 

307015 754 7.4 24 

309398 174 2.5 8 


309399 264 3.6 12 

5/16 in. Dia. 

309400 355 5.0 16 

Low Watt Design(4) 

307017 445 6.0 20 

309401 535 7.4 24 

1039676 246 2.5 8 

Hand-held Applicator, AD-31, 120V, DuraBraid Cover (2) 

1039677 373 3.6 12 

5/16 in. Dia. 

1039678 500 5.0 16 

(1) 

Semi-rigid molded cover provides additional abrasion protection. 

(2) 

DuraBraid covering for better wear resistance. Use only with 

corrugated-style hand-held applicators. 

(3) 

AD-31 RTD-style hand-held applicators use a pivot sleeve shell 

that locks to the hose corrugated cover. This is designed for use 

with braided cover hoses and is not compatible with corrugated 

cover hoses. Conversion kits to permit use of corrugated cover 

hoses with thermostat hand-held applicators are available. Consult 

a Nordson representative for conversion kits. 

(4) 

For multiple hose systems. 




Hoses | 12-9 


AD-31 (LBS, B, C, K) Hand-Held Applicator Hoses 5/16, 5/8, 3/4, 1-1/8 in. 

Diameter, RTD Control: BM 20/BM 200 Drum Melters 


Length 

M FT 

276950 282.39 3.0 10 

Hand-held Applicator, 240V 

276951 456.17 5.0 16 

5/16 in. Dia. 

276952 687.87 7.4 24 

276953 697.50 9.1 30 

276938 348.73 3.0 10 

Hand-held Applicator, 230V 

276939 594.51 5.0 16 

5/8 in. Dia. 

276940 858.1 7.4 24 

276941 972.87 9.1 30 

Hand-held Applicator, 230V, Corrugated Cover (1) 

120958 259 3.0 10 

5/16 in. Dia. 

120959 419 5.0 16 

346048 361 3.0 10 

Hand-held Applicator, 230V, High Pressure (2)(3) 

346049 583 5.0 16 

3/4 in. Dia. 

346050 879 7.4 24 

(1) 

Semi-rigid molded cover provides additional abrasion protection. 

(2) 

Round, MS connector (8 pin) on applicator end. 

AD-41 (LBS, B, C, K) Hand-Held Applicator Hoses 5/16, 5/8, 3/4, 1-1/8 in. 

Diameter, RTD Control: BM 20/BM 200 Drum Melters 


Length 

M FT 

325763 224 2.4 8 

325764 340 3.6 12 

Hand-held Applicator, AD-41, 240V, DuraBraid (1) 

325765 456 5.0 16 

5/16 in. Dia. 

325766 572 6.0 20 

325767 688 7.4 24 

1031728 206 2.5 8 

Hand-held Applicator, AD-41, 200V, DuraBraid (1) 

1031729 313 3.6 12 

5/16 in. Dia. 

1031740 419 5.0 16 

307001 246 2.4 8 

307002 373 3.6 12 

Hand-held Applicator, AD-41, 120V, DuraBraid (1)(2) 

307003 500 5.0 16 

5/16 in. Dia. 

307004 572 6.0 20 

307005 754 7.4 24 

325779 174 2.5 8 

Hand-held Applicator, AD-41, 120V, DuraBraid (1)(2) 

325780 264 3.6 12 

5/16 in. Dia. 

325781 355 5.0 16 

Low Watt Design, 190 °C (375 °F) Maximum 

325782 445 6.0 20 

325783 535 7.4 24 

(1) 

DuraBraid covering for better wear resistance. Use only with corrugated-style hand-held applicator. 

(2) 

For multiple hose systems. 

(3) 

BM units with 42:1 pumps must use high pressure hoses only. 



12-10 | Hoses 


Transfer Hoses 5/16, 5/8, 1-1/8 in. Diameter RTD Control: BM 20/BM 200 Drum 

Melters 

Transfer, BM, RTD, 230V 

5/16 in. Dia. 


5/8 in. Dia. 


11/8 in. Dia. 


Length 

M FT 

160263 365 5.0 16 

160264 551 7.4 24 

160265 690 9.1 30 

276942 348.73 3.5 10 

276943 594.51 5.0 16 

276944 858.1 7.4 24 

276945 972.87 9.1 30 

100704 460.64 3.0 10 

100705 699 5.0 16 

304559 1080 7.4 24 

Automatic Applicator Hoses 5/8 in. Diameter Thermistor Control: 150 Series 

FoamMelt Processors 


5/8 in. Dia. 


Length 

M FT 

719033 214.3 1.8 6 

719022 348.6 3.0 10 

719030 526.4 5.0 16 

Automatic Applicator Hoses 5/8 in. Diameter RTD Control: 190 Series FoamMelt 

Processors 


5/8 in. Dia. 


Length 

M FT 

111094 189.8 1.8 6 

111095 312.8 3.0 10 

111096 519.8 5.0 16 




Hoses | 12-11 


VersaBlue Series High Temperature Hoses, Pt100 Control 

Unit End 

Applicator End 

Unit Cuff Applicator Cuff End Cuff 

A B C 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

3 

2 

1 

7 

4 

5 

6 

Applicator Plug End 

Unit Plug End 

Automatic, 240 V, Pt100, HT, High Pressure 

5/16 in. (8 mm) Dia.. 

Automatic, 240 V, Pt100, HT, High Pressure 

5/8 in. Dia.. 


M 

Length 

1040712 123 1.2 4 

1040713 186 1.8 6 

1040714 250 2.4 8 

1040715 313 3.0 10 

1040716 411 4.0 13 

1040717 516 5.0 16 

1040718 621 6.0 20 

1040719 827 8.0 26 

1040720 238 1.8 6 

1040721 319 2.4 8 

1040722 400 3.0 10 

1040723 525 4.0 13 

1040724 659 5.0 16 

1040725 793 6.0 20 

FT 



12-12 | Hoses 


TC-8 Series Automatic Applicator Hoses Thermocouple Control: MX Series 

Melters 


Length 

M FT 

Automatic, 230 V, Thermocouple, 8 mm (0.312 in.) ID 

TC-12-8 Thermocouple 222771 117 1.2 4 















TC-8 Series Automatic Applicator Hose Pt100 Control: MX Series Melters 


Length 

M FT 

Automatic, 230 V, Pt100, 8 mm (0.312 in.) ID 

TC-12-8 Pt100 222797 117 1.2 4 

TC-18-8 Pt100 222813 179 1.8 6 

TC-24-8 Pt100 222777 240 2.4 8 

TC-30-8 Pt100 222778 304 3.0 10 

TC-40-8 Pt100 222779 408 4.0 13 

TC-50-8 Pt100 222780 513 5.0 16 

TC-60-8 Pt100 222781 616 6.0 20 

TC-70-8 Pt100 222782 720 7.0 23 

TC-74-8 Pt100 222783 762 7.4 24 

TC-80-8 Pt100 222784 824 8.0 26 

TC-90-8 Pt100 222799 928 9.0 29 

TC-100-8 Pt100 222800 1032 10.0 33 

TC-110-8 Pt100 222823 1137 11.0 36 

TC-120-8 Pt100 222824 1240 12.0 39 

TC-130-8 Pt100 222825 1344 13.0 43 




Hoses | 12-13 


TC-13 Series Automatic Hoses Thermocouple Control: MX Series Melters 


Length 

M FT 

Automatic, 230 V, Thermocouple, 13 mm (0.500 in.) ID 
















TC-13 Series Automatic Hoses, Pt100 Control: MX Series Melters 


Length 

M FT 

Automatic, 230 V, Pt100, 13 mm (0.500 in.) ID 

TC-12-13 Pt100 222785 117 1.2 4 

TC-18-13 Pt100 222786 179 1.8 6 

TC-24-13 Pt100 222787 240 2.4 8 

TC-30-13 Pt100 222788 304 3.0 10 

TC-40-13 Pt100 222789 408 4.0 13 

TC-50-13 Pt100 222790 513 5.0 16 

TC-60-13 Pt100 222791 616 6.0 20 

TC-70-13 Pt100 222792 720 7.0 23 

TC-74-13 Pt100 222793 762 7.4 24 

TC-80-13 Pt100 222794 824 8.0 26 

TC-90-13 Pt100 222795 928 9.0 29 

TC-100-13 Pt100 222796 1032 10.0 33 

TC-110-13 Pt100 222817 1137 11.0 36 

TC-120-13 Pt100 222818 1240 12.0 39 

TC-130-13 Pt100 222819 1343 13.0 43 



12-14 | Hoses 


Select Series Hoses 

The Select Series Hoses provide Nordson quality hoses to fit melters from ITW/DynatecM, Hot Melt 

Technologies (HMT®) or Robatech. These hoses are equipped with the proper electrical/hydraulic connectors for 

easy installation on other manufacturers’ melters. 

ITW - 5/16 in. Automatic Hose for Dynapro and Dynaplus 

Part Number Voltage Watts Description 

297901 240 109 Hose, 4 ft, DYP 

297900 240 167 Hose, 6 ft, DYP 

297899 240 224 Hose, 8 ft, DYP 

297898 240 282 Hose, 10 ft, DYP 

ITW - 5/16 in. Automatic Hose for Dynamelt and Dynamini with Dynacontrol 


297881 240 109 Hose, 4 ft, DYC 

297882 240 167 Hose, 6 ft, DYC 

297883 240 224 Hose, 8 ft, DYC 

297884 240 282 Hose, 10 ft, DYC 

1073291 240 456 Hose, 16 ft, DYC 

1074081 240 688 Hose, 24 ft, DYC 

Robatech - 5/16 in. Automatic Hose for Robatech Concept 4 


297904 240 99.75 Hose, 4 ft, RB 

297905 240 152.95 Hose, 6 ft, RB 

297906 240 206.15 Hose, 8 ft, RB 

297907 240 259.35 Hose, 10 ft, RB 

1021829 240 312.55 Hose, 12 ft, RB 

1022010 240 418.95 Hose, 16 ft, RB 

1087514 240 525.35 Hose, 20 ft, RB 

HMT - Hand-held Applicator Hoses for HMT ProFlex 


1001369 115 300 Hose, AD-31, HMT, 12 ft 

330980 115 200 Hose, AD-41, HMT, 8 ft 

725816 115 300 Hose, AD-41, HMT, 12 ft 

330982 115 393 Hose, AD-41, HMT, 16 ft 

1013992 115 494 Hose, AD-41, HMT, 20 ft 




Hoses | 12-15 


Accessories 

Hose Mounting and Installation Accessories 

The use of proper support brackets and correct installation techniques can significantly extend the life of Nordson 

hot melt hoses. Accessories are for 5/16 in. advanced technology hoses unless otherwise noted. 

Accessories Part Number Description Comments 

111940 Service kit 

Molded corrugated tube and clips used to route 

and fasten hoses. 

271486 Spiral wire support, 5/16 in. hoses 

274174 Spiral wire support, 5/8 in. and 1 1/8 in. hoses 

Use to properly suspend hoses. 

273314 Hose protector 

Spiral-wrap chafe guard prevents point contact 

wear. 

1034380 Leaf spring support (all widths) 

Mounting 1034369 Hose hanger kit Suitable for 5/16 in. and 5/8 in. hoses. 

accessories 

Maintains distance between two hoses for 

1047408 Hose separator kit 

maximum heat transfer efficiency. 

142512 

Hose straps (hangers), 51 mm x 356 mm 

(2 in. x 18 in.) 

142513 

Hose straps (hangers), 51 mm x 457 mm 

(2 in. x 14 in.) 

1124221 Kit, frame mount, Rediflex II System, 2 pc. For use with Blue Series hoses with factory 

1124712 Kit, frame mount, Rediflex II System, 50 pc. installed RediFlex II Hangers (round style) 

Insulating cuffs 

Extension 

Cords 

Other 

273634 Insulated cuff, 64 mm (2.5 in.) long 

273635 Insulated cuff, 51 mm (2 in.) long 

Use to insulate joint connections between hose 

and melter. 

274429 Insulated cuff, 44 mm (1.75 in.) long 

307000 Insulator fitting Use with AD41 hand-held applicators. 

1024083 Insulated cuff, 90° fitting Use to insulate joint connections between hose 

1024084 Insulated cuff, 45° fitting 

and applicator. 

115576 Cord, hose, 0.6 m (2 ft), 6000, FM, 130/170 

115581 Cord, hose, 9.1 m (30 ft), 6000, FM, 130/170 

Hose extension cordsets compatible with TC200. 

328967 Cable assembly, Vista, shield, 7.3 m (24 ft). 

Hose extension cordset compatible with 3000V 

melters. 

902514 Heat protective gloves 

132998 Service kit, corrugated hose cover 5.2 m (17 ft) 

Service Kit 

(part 111940) 

Spiral Wire Support 

(part 271486) 

Hose Protector 

(part 273314) 

RediFlex II 

Frame Mout 

Includes corrugated 

tube and clips used 

to route and fasten 

hoses. 

Use to properly 

suspend hoses. For 

5/8 in. and 1- 1/8 in. 

hoses, use part 

274174. 

Spiral- wrap chafe 

guard prevents point 

contact wear. 

Use with Blue Series 

hoses with factory 

installed RediFlex II 

Hangers (round style) 



12-16 | Hoses 


Hose Fittings 

Pipe Thread Fitting 

Part Number 

O-Ring Fitting 

Description 

Comments 

972051 

972628 

972657 

Straight 

Applicator to automatic hose; melter to 

automatic or hand applicator hose 

Compact hose-to-applicator fitting to 

minimize cold joint at applicator 

973411 973574 Pipe Plug Extra ports on applicator or melter 

972200 

274180 

972646 

90° Elbow 

Applicator to automatic hose 

Melter to automatic or hand 

applicator hose 

972618 

274179 

972647 

— 310281 

45° Elbow 

Applicator to automatic hose 

Melter to automatic or hand 

applicator hose 

FM 150 to hose 

— 719023 Straight 

FM 150 to 5/8 in. hose 

— 719024 Applicator to 5/8 in. hose 

— 719047 

Applicator to 5/8 in. hose 

— 816162 

45° Elbow 

5/8 hose to manifold with 

7/8-14 threaded port 

— 945025 O-ring For 7/8-14 threaded port 




Hoses | 12-17 


Hand-Held Applicator Bracket Kits 

2300 

3000 

Bracket Kit for 2300 Melters 

P/N 276318 

Bracket Kit for 3000 Melters 

P/N 133644 

Part Number Description Comments 

133644 Bracket Kit, Hand-Held Applicator Series 3000, tank end 

276318 Bracket Kit, Hand-Held Applicator Series 2300, tank end 

Melter-End Hose Fittings 

For more information on fittings, see Section 13. 


Pipe-Thread Fitting (NPT) 

Straight 90 45 Straight 90 45 

972628 972646 972647 972051 972200 972618 

KB and LS Melter Hose Fittings 

Part Number 

Description 

973137 LS 10/20 and KB 10/20 from Flow Control Valve to Hose, KB 30/50/100 Hose Manifold to Hose 

1029243 LS 10/20 With Filter Block To Hose, KB 10/20 With Filter Block or v3 or v4 With T block 

1032999 From #6 Hose to Automatic Applicator 90° Elbow 

1028578 From #6 Hose to Automatic Applicator 45° Elbow 



12-18 | Hoses 


Applicator-End Hose Fitting 

For more information on fittings, see Section 15. 


Pipe-Thread Fitting (NPT) 

Straight 90 45 Straight 90 45 

972657 274180 274179 972051 972200 972618 

NOTE: Hose applicator fittings vary in dimensions and thread specifications. Consult Nordson for compatible TC Series fittings and 

connectors. 

Non-Heated Inline Filters 

For more information on inline filters, see Section 15. 

Mesh Size Straight 90 45 

50 mesh 271658 273415 804123 

100 mesh 271659 273414 274988 

200 mesh 271595 273413 804125 

Multi-Plane Swivels 

Contact PPA Application Engineering for robotic installation assistance. 

Part Number 

Description 

139091 Swivel, Applicator, SP, SAE-6, Elbow 

139093 Swivel, Hose, SP, SAE-6/JIC-6, 5/16 in., Straight 

139096 Swivel, Hose, SP, SAE-6/JIC-12, 5/8 in., Straight. 



Controls 


Web Content 

Controls | 13-1 


Description 

The innovative Spectra 30 control system 

reduces system complexity and downtime 

while improving production efficiency 

and product quality. Available as either 

a time- or a distance-based controller, 

Spectra 30 systems use Nordson’s Optix 

graphical touchscreen interface to reduce 

the need for operator training. 

A unique slide-on bracket with a flexible 

VESA standard mounting interface 

makes installation quick and easy, while a 

setup wizard guides technicians step-bystep 

through the setup process. 

On-screen visual pattern programming 

allows operators to “see” the adhesive 

pattern prior to application, while 

complete system status is displayed in 

real-time right on the home screen. Your 

Spectra control system will display only 

the components installed on your line to 

minimize potential operator confusion. 

Minimize product changeover by taking 

advantage of the 50-recipe memory 

storage capacity. Pattern flexibility 

supports a wide variety of applications, 

with up to four (4) trigger inputs, four 

(4) pattern channel outputs, twentyfour 

(24) beads per channel, and an 

array of pattern types including: dotted, 

EcoBead (stitch), random length, and 

mirrored. 

The built-in USB port provides a 

convenient method of backing up system 

settings for safe storage. Also use a flash 

drive to quickly and easily upgrade 

the software with new features as new 

releases become available. 

Your Spectra 30 system has the ability to expand as your needs 

expand. Convert a time-based system to a distance-based system 

when variable line speeds become a requirement. Add other features 

like pressure run-up and remote recipe recall whenever they are 

needed without any hardware changes. 

Features 

Spectra 30 Pattern Control 

Watch Video 

• Simple, visual Optix pattern programming interface minimizes operator 

training. 

• Detailed diagnostics, advanced circuit protection, built-in self-test, and onscreen 

troubleshooting tips help keep your line up and running. 

• Fast and flexible installation and an automatic setup wizard get your system 

up and running quickly. 

• System security is provided by password protection and system backups 

through the front-mounted USB port. 



13-2 | Controls 



Parameter 

Standard System Configurations 

Independent Pattern Channels 

Independent Trigger Inputs 

Maximum Line Speed 

Pattern Resolution/Accuracy 

Pattern Types 

Encoders 

Pressure Run-up Outputs 

Digital Input/Outputs 

Specification 

Time Mode, Standard (no license required) 

Distance Mode (encoder license included) 

Distance Mode with Two Pressure Run-up Outputs & Remote 

Recipe Recall (Run-up & Remote Recall (license included) 

Remote Display with Pressure Run-up and Recipe Recall 

4 channels, 24 beads per channel 

4 independently assignable (NPN, PNP, or line driver) 

300 m/min (985 ft/min) 

1 mm (0.2 in.) 

Standard: Normal, dotted, EcoBead stitch, random length, mirror 

Optional: Continuous, random dot, auto dot 

1 (quadrature or pulse, 24 VDC, 250 mA max.) 

2 (4–20 mA and 0–10 VDC) 

Ready & Alert Outputs (24 VDC), Fault/Machine Stop Output (SPDT), Enable Input (24 VDC) 

Recipe Memory 

Up to 50 recipes 

Input Voltage 

100–240 VAC 1 Phase 50/60 Hz, 1.6 Amp Maximum 

Ambient Temperature Range (1) 0 to 40 °C (0 to 104 °F) 

Enclosure Rating IP44 (2) 

(1) 

0–50 °C (0–122 °F) with optional fan kit 

(2) 

IP54 with optional sealing kit 

Dimensions 

148 

5.82 

248 

9.76 

245 

9.64 







Spectra Control System 

Description Details Part Number 

Spectra 30 Time Only 

Spectra 30, Time-based operation only 

1123742 

(replaces EPC-15 P/N 342315) 

Spectra 30 Time Plus Remove Recipe Spectra 30, Time-based operation plus license 

1125169 


Spectra 30 Distance 

Spectra 30, Distance-based operation with encoder license 

1123743 


Spectra 30 Distance, I/O and 2 Run-up Spectra 30, Distance-based operation with encoder license plus 2 1124670 

pressure run-up outputs and remote recipe recall 


Spectra 30 Remote Display, Distance , I/O 

and 2 Run-up 

Spectra 30, Remote display, with distance, run-up, and remote 

recipe recall (replaces EPC-30 P/Ns 772000, 772001, 772002) 

1124676 

Cut and Stack Cabinets 


Control Cabinet, 1 Spectra 30, 2 ProBlue Cabinet designed for cut and stack labeling applications; doormounted 

735705 

melters 

Spectra 30 remote display plus 2 run-up 

transducers 

Control Cabinet, 1 Spectra 30, 1 ProBlue 

melter 

Cabinet designed for cut and stack labeling applications; doormounted 

Spectra 30 remote display plus 1 run-up transducer 

735706 





Customer Documentation Language Packs 

Note: The English language printed documentation pack and a product manual CD (with all languages) are included with each controller. 

Order additional language pack(s) as required. 


Spectra 30 Documentation Pack, Chinese Quick Reference Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Section 1124767 

Spectra 30 Documentation Pack, Dutch Quick Reference Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Section 1124769 

Spectra 30 Documentation Pack, English Quick Reference Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Section 1124770 

Spectra 30 Documentation Pack, French Quick Reference Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Section 1124768 

Spectra 30 Documentation Pack, German Quick Reference Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Section 1124771 

Spectra 30 Documentation Pack, Italian Quick Reference Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Section 1124772 

Spectra 30 Documentation Pack, Japanese Quick Reference Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Section 1124773 

Spectra 30 Documentation Pack, Portuguese Quick Reference Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Section 1124775 

Spectra 30 Documentation Pack, Spanish Quick Reference Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Section 1124776 

Spectra 30 Documentation Pack, Polish Quick Reference Guide, Installation Guide and Safety Section 1124774 

Quick Reference Guide, English Quick Reference Guide, English 1124633 

Quick Reference Guide, Chinese Quick Reference Guide, Chinese 1124727 

Quick Reference Guide, Dutch Quick Reference Guide, Dutch 1124728 

Quick Reference Guide, French Quick Reference Guide, French 1124729 

Quick Reference Guide, German Quick Reference Guide, German 1124730 

Quick Reference Guide, Italian Quick Reference Guide, Italian 1124731 

Quick Reference Guide, Japanese Quick Reference Guide, Japanese 1124732 

Quick Reference Guide, Portuguese Quick Reference Guide, Portuguese 1124733 

Quick Reference Guide, Spanish Quick Reference Guide, Spanish 1124734 

Quick Reference Guide, Polish Quick Reference Guide, Polish 7560257 

Spectra 30 Product Manual CD Contains all currently available language translations 1124632 

Spectra 30 English Manual Printed & Bound, Full Color, English Version 1124631 

Instruction Sheet, Spectra 30, Remote Mount Addendum to manual for remote display version 1124935 

Software License Keys (Aftermarket) 


Encoder License Key (distance operation) Add encoder function to a time-based system 1123914 

Pressure Run-up License Key Add pressure run-up function (requires encoder license) 1123915 

Remote Recipe Recall License Key 

Add remote recipe recall function to any system (for PLC recipe 

selection) 

1123916 

Extra Feature Bundle License Key Add pattern types, other advanced features 1124590 






Encoders/Cables 


Encoder, metric, 500 ppr 

Encoder, 500 pulses/revolution, metric flange, M3 screw holes, and 772050 

10 mm shaft 

Encoder, English 500 ppr 

Encoder, 500 pulses/revolution, US standard flange, 0.220 in. screw 772051 

taps, and 3/8 in. shaft 

Encoder, metric, 1000 ppr Encoder, 1000 pulses/revolution, metric flange, 10 mm shaft 772055 

Encoder, English, 1000 ppr Encoder, 1000 pulses/revolution, US standard flange, 3/8 in. shaft 772056 

Encoder, metric, 2500 ppr Encoder, 2500 pulses/revolution, metric flange, 10 mm shaft 1022679 

Encoder, English, 2500 ppr Encoder, 2500 pulses/revolution, US standard flange, 3/8 in. shaft 1022678 

Encoder Cable, standard 

Encoder Cable, water tight cable assembly with MS type connector, 772052 

30 ft 

Encoder Cable, water-wash 

Encoder Cable, water tight cable assembly with MS type connector 772053 

with water-wash seals, 30 ft 

Encoder Wheel, 10 mm shaft x 250 mm 

circ 

Friction Wheel, 250 mm circumference, 10 mm diameter center hole 

with rubber coated OD (Bracket: Use P/N 313370) 

7302371 


circ 


circ 

Encoder Wheel, 3/8 in. shaft x 500 mm 

circ 

Friction Wheel, 500 mm circumference, 10 mm diameter center hole 311453 

with rubber OD (Bracket: Use P/N 313370) 

Friction Wheel, 500 mm circumference, 10 mm diameter center hole 311454 

with metal OD (Bracket: Use P/N 313370) 

Friction Wheel, 500 mm circumference, 3/8 in. diameter center hole 296144 

Encoder Splitter Cable, 30 ft Can be used with encoders 772050 or 772051 1032422 

Encoder Bracket, Simple, Slotted Can be used with encoders 772050 or 772051 1086111 





Trigger Sensors 


Diffuse reflective photosensor 

Retro-reflective photosensor 

Polarized retro-reflective photosensor 

Bifurcated fiber optic cable, 

3 foot length, 1/8 inch diameter bundle, 

stainless steel fittings 

Sensor for proximity detection with LED modulated beam. Needs 

reflective substrate for detection. Comes with mounting brace. 

Sensor for retro-reflective detection with LED modulated beam. 

Includes reflector and mounting brace. 

Sensor for polarized retro-reflective detection where shiny surfaces 

must be detected. Includes reflector and mounting brace. 

Fiber optic conversion converts P/N 131476 to fiber optic operation. 

Requires P/N 145279 also. 

131476 

131474 

131475 

145278 

Fiber Optic Cable, single, 3 ft 3 ft Fiber Optic cable for P/N 131476 - requires 2 cables plus 145279 1020483 

Fiber Optic Cable, single, 6 ft 6 ft Fiber Optic cable for P/N 131476 - requires 2 cables plus 145279 1020484 

Replacement cover for Nordson sensor Required for fiber optic conversion. 145279 

P/N 131 476 

Lens Kit 

Provides retroreflective capability for fiber optic conversion of 

145974 

P/N 131476 

Complete Fiber Optic Sensor Kit, Kit, Photosensor, 3 ft Fiber Optic, 6 ft cable 1020500 

3 ft fiber, 6 ft cable 













Complete Fiber Optic Sensor Kit, 


Kit, Photosensor, 6 ft Fiber Optic, 25 ft cable 1020507 






Run-Up 


Pressure Run-up Assembly (4–20 mA) Pressure transducer, 4–20 mA, regulator, filter assembly, 10 m 

1123923 

cable 

Pressure Run-up Assembly (0–10V) Pressure transducer, 0–10V, regulator, filter assembly, 10 m cable 1123960 

Pressure Run-up Tubing and Fittings Kit Contains all the fitting and tubing commonly needed for run-up 

1124026 

installation 

Replacement Filter/Regulator Filter/Regulator, 3/8 G Port, Auto Drain (spare part) 1124258 

Replacement Transducer, 4–20 mA Regulator, Electro-pneumatic, 4–20 mA (spare Part) 1124259 

Replacement Transducer, 0–10V Regulator, Electro-pneumatic, 0–10V (spare Part) 1124260 

Run-up Cable Hard-Wired, 2 m Cable, Run-up, Hard-Wired, 2 m 377385 

Run-up Cable Hard-Wired, 10 m Cable, Run-up, EPC-30/Hard-Wired, 10 m 7300642 

Run-up Extension Cable, 5 m Cable, External, Repeat, Encoder, Straight, 5 m 377228 

Run-up I/P Transducer (IP66 WW) Water-wash I/P transducer for regulating air pressure in piston 

pumps, 4–20 mA. Comes with DIN rail mounting brackets, fittings, 

and 30 ft leads. 

154890 

Other System Accessories 


Bracket, VESA Mount, Basic Tilt Tilt-only VESA bracket 1124687 

Bracket, VESA Mount, Basic Tilt Basic tilt/swivel VESA bracket 1124688 

Bracket, VESA Mount, Extension Arm, 

Tilt, Swivel 

VESA bracket on an extendable arm (4–16 in. or 100–400 mm 

extension range) 

1124689 

Bracket, VESA Mount, Pole Adapter, 

42–50 mm 

Bracket, VESA Mount, Pole Stand, 

750 mm 

Stylus, Resistive Screen, Tethered, 

3 pack 

Kit, External Power, Enclosed, 

Spectra 30 

Pole-mount VESA bracket for poles ranging from 42–50 mm in 

1124691 

diameter 

VESA bracket mounted on 750 mm long pole stand with flange mount 1124690 

Tethered stylus for Spectra 30 screen (3 pack) 1124379 

IP67 power supply, 240 W, 24 VDC with 300 mm leads each end 1124320 

Kit, External Power, Open, Spectra 30 Open-frame power supply, 200 W, 24 VDC 1124321 

Line Simulator for Spectra 30 1 Encoder, 2 Trigger, 4 Applicators 1124020 





Service Kits 


Fan Kit Kit to increase operating temperature range to 50 °C 1123815 

IP54 Sealing Kit Kit to increase dust protection from IP44 to IP54 1124814 

Power Supply Service Kit Replacement 24 VDC power supply 1123816 

Touchscreen Service Kit Replacement touchscreen with software loaded 1123817 

Touchscreen for Remote Touchscreen Replacement touchscreen with software loaded but without LED 

1124679 

overlay 

Controller Board Service Kit Comes with all license keys enabled 1124812 




Web Content 



Description 

The Concert Series flow and temperature 

controllers were developed to provide 

economical, updated controllers to meet 

the needs of diverse markets. 

Concert series controllers feature 

expanded functionality and capabilities. 

This includes an advanced, yet intuitive, 

color touch screen LCD control, the 

Nordson Optix user interface, which 

enables features such as graphing, data 

logging, and local language support. 

Both Concert flow and temperature 

controllers offer vast improvements in 

ease-of-use and performance. These 

controllers can be part of an initial 

adhesive system investment or added as a 

retrofit solution for customers looking to 

expand or improve process capabilities. 

The Concert flow controller enables flow 

monitoring and closed-loop functionality 

when used with the new TruFlow 

meter. It can also be used with other 

members of the TruFlow portfolio: 

TruFlow dividers and applicators. The 

Concert temperature controller expands 

the number of heating zones for a 

single melter, increasing the equipment 

utilization of existing melters. 

Concert Series controllers offer a 

basic temperature controller with sixtemperature-zone 

capability and a 

basic flow controller with two-flow 

monitoring/control-circuit capability. 

Each is available with a nickel RTD 

or platinum RTD sensor, standard for 

compatibility with the vast majority of 

current and legacy equipment. 

Features 

Flow Control 

• Intuitive, color touch screen controls (Optix user interface) 

• Availability of temperature control channels in the flow controller to support 

heating of TruFlow devices and additional hoses 

• On-screen graphing and data logging 

• User settable limits (upper and lower) for warnings and faults (pressure, 

temperature and flow) 

• Local language support 

Benefits 

Watch Video 

Temperature Control 

• Installs quickly with simple, no-hassle set-up. 

• Displays system status at-a-glance with graphical control panel that simplifies 

set-up and operation. 





Specifications — Basic Flow Controller 

Parameter 

Number of flow channels Supports up to 2 

Control modes 

Pressure transducer inputs Supports up to 2 

Pressure transducer options 

Line speed reference inputs 1 

Line speed reference outputs 


Ambiet temperature range 


Temperature control sensor options 

Maximum heating capacity 

Channel 1,2 (each) 

Channel 3 




Ingress protection 

Specification 

Manual, Pressure, Gear to Line, Flow w/Pressure Build 

0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 

0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 

40 to 204 ºC (100 to 400 ºF) 

0 to 50 ºC (32 to 122 ºF) 

±1 ºC (2 ºF) 

Nickel 120 Ohm RTD, Platinum 100 Ohm RTD 

1,200 watts per channel/1,000 watts per zone 

2,800 watts per channel/1,800 or 1,000 watts per zone 

200/240 VAC 50/60 Hz, single-phase 

240 VAC 50/60 Hz, 3-phase 

4 inputs/3 outputs 

30 lb 

IP33 

Specifications — Basic Temperature Controller 

Parameter 

Specification 

Number of channels 3 


40 to 204 ºC (100 to 400 ºF) 

Ambiet temperature range 

0 to 50 ºC (32 to 122 ºF) 


±1 ºC (2 ºF) 

Temperature control sensor options Nickel 120 Ohm RTD, Platinum 100 Ohm RTD 

Maximum heating capacity 

Channel 1,2 (each) 

Channel 3 


Input/Output 


Ingress protection 

1,200 watts per channel/1,000 watts per zone 

2,800 watts per channel/1,800 or 1,000 watts per zone 

200/240 VAC 50/60 Hz, single-phase 

240 VAC 50/60 Hz, 3-phase 

4 inputs/3 outputs 

30 lb 

IP33 






Controllers 

Part Number 

1121832 Concert Temp/Flow Ctrl, Pt100 Basic 

1121833 Concert Temp Ctrl, Pt100 Basic 

1121834 Concert Temp/Flow Ctrl, N120 Basic 

1121835 Concert Temp Ctrl, N120 Basic 

Description 

Optional Boards 

Part Number 

1053300 Kit, Circuit Board, PROFIBUS Card 

1053288 Kit, Circuit Board, DeviceNet Card 

1053289 Kit, Circuit Board, Ethernet Card 

Description 



Service Kits 

Part Number 

Description 

1121882 Service Kit, Board, Main W/Ht Sink Assy, Concert 

1121883 Service Kit, PCA, Expansion, Concert 

1121884 Service kit, lcd w/frame, assembly, Concert 

1121885 Service Kit, Motor Control, Concert 

1121886 Service Kit, PCA, Press/Flow Cntrl, Concert 

1121887 Service Kit, PCA Power Supply, 24VDC 

1121888 Service Kit, PCA Board, 10V, Motor Supply 

Sales Collateral 

Part Number 

Description 

NWL-13-5817 Concert Series Flow Controller Data Sheet 

NWL-13-5816 Concert Series Temperature Controller Data Sheet 

1121717 Concert Series Flow Controller Technical Manual 

1121734 Concert Series Temperature Controller Technical Manual 









Web Content 



Description 

Nordson’s integrated LogiComm control system 

offers a comprehensive, easily-installed adhesive 

pattern control and verification system. Multiple, 

remote touch-screens can be positioned virtually 

anywhere on the parent machine for easy 

operation. This modular system offers a building 

block approach, allowing installation of either 

pattern control or verification initially, with the 

capability to easily integrate the other function as 

needed. 

The programmable pattern control provides 

quick pattern development and changeovers 

to accommodate even short runs on complex 

applications. Pattern control features include: 

• Multiple applicator control and trigger inputs 

• Selection of bead choices 

• Pressure control across full machine speed range 

• Multiple program memory 

• Integral applicator drivers 

LogiComm Screen and Module 

Verification capabilities enhance on-line quality assurance by 

monitoring adhesive pattern and placement accuracy without 

the need for adhesive additives. Additionally, the LogiComm 

system inspects product features for presence and integrity. 

The easy-to-program system can simultaneously detect and 

verify numerous parameters, including: 

• Accuracy of hot melt and liquid adhesive deposition 

• Overlapped and skewed substrates 

• Bar codes, recognized in diverse formats and codes 

• Security tags 

• Faulty folds, flaps and inserts 

• Cellophane windows 

• Liquid adhesive volume sensing on side seam applications 

• Tracking and ejection of defects 






Parameter 

Specification 

Maximum line speed m/min (ft/min) 1200 (3937) 

Pattern accuracy mm (in.) ± 0.25 (0.01) 

Display type 

Encoder resolution 

Encoder frequency 


Program memories 

Encoders 

Pattern channels 

Applicator outputs 

Applicator drivers 

Universal applicator driver low voltage 

Driver 

Verification channels 

15 in. XGA touch-screen 

up to 30 pulses/min 

100 KHz maximum 

Universal 80-256 VAC, 1∅ 

Virtually unlimited (via Flash Memory Card) 

1 or 2 per system 

4 or 8 per control module (up to 32/standard system) 

4 or 8 per connectors per module 

(one applicator connector per pattern channel) 

80 W maximum per applicator driver (4 applicators) (160 W per module) 

80 W per module 

6 or 12 per control module 

(up to 48 sensors per standard system) 

Pressure outputs 

Independent triggers 

Parent machine I/O 

Machine control outputs 

2 or 4 per control module (up to 16 run-up channels) 

4 or 8 per control module (up to 32 per standard system) 

Adaptable to PNP or NPN type 

4 in, 4 out programmable 

Ejector 

Batch kicker 

Delivery table 


A minimal LogiComm system includes one master and one XGA touch screen. Maximum system capacity 

includes one master control module, three expansion modules, three XGA touch screens and one ethernet hub. 






Master Modules 

Part Number 

Description 

1053710 4 Channel Pattern Master, UGD 

1067345 4 Channel Pattern Master, LVD 

1053711 8 Channel Pattern Master, UGD / UGD 

1067346 8 Channel Pattern Master, UGD / LVD 

1067347 8 Channel Pattern Master, LVD / LVD 

1053712 6 Channel Verification Master 

1067361 6 Channel Verification Logic Master 

1053713 12 Channel Verification Master 

1067362 12 Channel Verification Logic Master 

1053715 4 Channel Pattern and 6 Ch Verification Combination Master, UGD 

1067360 4 Channel Pattern and 6 Ch Verification Combination Logic Master, UGD 

1067348 4 Channel Pattern and 6 Ch Verification Combination Logic Master, LVD 

1067349 4 Channel Pattern and 6 Ch Verification Combination Master, LVD 

Expansion Modules 

Part Number 

Description 

1053716 4 Channel Pattern Expansion, UGD 

1067363 4 Channel Pattern Expansion, LVD 

1053718 8 Channel Pattern Expansion, UGD 

1067364 8 Channel Pattern Expansion, UGD / LVD 

1067365 8 Channel Pattern Expansion, LVD / LVD 

1053719 6 Channel Verification Expansion 

1053720 12 Channel Verification Expansion 

1053721 4 Channel Pattern and 6 Channel Verification Combination Expansion, UGD 

1067366 4 Channel Pattern and 6 Channel Verification Combination Expansion, LVD 

Data Communication Cables and Accessories 

Part Number 

Description 

1066052 Cable, Ethernet, 2m 





1091421 Control Module System Link Connection or Ext, 1.5 m, Multi-module Systems Only 

1034149 Control Module System Link Connection or Ext, 4.4 m, Multi-module Systems Only 

1078614 Control Module System Link Connection or Ext, 15 m, Multi-module Systems Only 

1078615 Control Module System Link Connection or ext, 50 ft, Multi-module Systems Only 





Touch Screen Display 

Part Number 

Description 

1082706 XGA Touch-Screen Module W/ 5 m Power Cable 

1060755 Cable, 24V ext., 5 m (16.4 ft), for Touch Screen 

1057332 Kit, Panel Pivot Wall Mount 

7302679 Holder for Touch Screen, VESA Mount 

Accessories 

Part Number 

Description 

1068176 Connector Kit 

1059609 Remote Purge Box (2 pattern banks) 8 Channel 

1098889 Wireless Remote Purge Kit, 8 Channel 

1061035 Cable. Remote Purge, 5 m Extension 

1092078 Cable, Remote Purge, 1.5 m Extension 

1060380 Light Tower W/Siren and 5 ft. Cable 

1059621 Light Tower Extension Cable, 5 m 

1062957 Siren With 25 ft. Cable (1063802 Required) 

1063802 Siren Box Splitter Cable 

1059607 Cable, Remote I/O, Pigtails, 5 m 

1034147 Cable, Remote I/O, 4.4 m Extension 

1063801 Machine Stop Relay Adapter With 4.4 m Cable 

377227 Encoder Repeater Splitter Cable (4 pin to 2 x 12 pin) 

377228 Encoder Repeater Extension 

1067730 External Panel Power Supply, 24V 






Applicator Cables - Electric Applicators 

Part Number 

7302530 Cable, LA825/LA820, 2.5 m (new conn on 820) 

7302531 Cable, LA825/LA820, 5 m (new conn on 820) 

7302330 Cable, LA825/LA820, 7.5 m (new conn on 820) 

7302532 Cable, LA825/LA820, 10 m (new conn on 820) 

7302533 Cable, WM801, 2.5 m 

7302534 Cable, WM801, 5 m 

7302535 Cable, WM801, 10 m 

1060587 Cable, LA822, 2.5 m 

1059608 Cable, LA822, 5 m 

1060588 Cable, LA822, 10 m 

1063858 Cable, E400, 5 m 

1100667 Cable, E400, 12 m 

1041835 Cable, e.dot (LogiComm to e.dot hose), 10 m 

1074921 Cable, EM 100/900, 240V, 5 m 

1076423 Cable, EM 100/900, 120V, 5 m 

1074922 Cable, E701, 5 m 

1074923 Cable, M70x/E35x-1 coil/Sure Seal, 5 m 

1075924 Splitter Cable, M70x/E35x-1 Coil/Sure Seal 

Description 

Applicator Cables - Pneumatic Applicators* 

Part Number 

7302536 ClassicBlue/SolidBlue/SureBead, 2.5 m 

7302537 ClassicBlue/SolidBlue/SureBead, 5 m 

7302538 ClassicBlue/SolidBlue/SureBead, 10 m 

Description 

1055875 

MiniBlue I and II, Standard With SD or SP Solenoid (LogiCom applicator connector only,cable 

included with applicator) 

7133035 MiniBlue With SG Solenoid, 2 m 

7165491 MiniBlue With SD or SP Solenoid, 2 m 





7302536 Other Pneumatic 20 x 27 mm Housing Solenoid, 2.5 m 

7302537 Other Pneumatic 20 x 27 mm Housing Solenoid, 5 m 


7302539 Other Pneumatic 16 x 16 mm Housing Solenoid, 2.5 m 



*Solenoids with built in Boost must use the Low Voltage DC Driver 

*Solenoids with MOV caps should be replaced by: 20 x 27 mm Solenoid Cap with LED, Part 1058523 

16 x 16 mm Solenoid Cap with LED, Part 7131860 





Applicator Cables - Miscellaneous 

Part Number 

7302542 Discrete Wire, Any Applicator, 10 m 

1059606 Cable, Applicator, Ext, 5 m 

375353 Applicator Connector, Male, 3-Pole+PE Screw 

7301617 Adapter, 2 Applicator Splitter, Series, 0.2 m 

7320545 Adapter, 2 Applicator LVD, Parallel, 0.1 m 

377239 LA825 to LA 404, LVD, 0.15 m 

Description 

Encoders 

Part Number 

Description 

7302430 Quadrature Pkg w/ 10 m Cable, Bracket and Small Wheel (2 ppmm), Metric Shaft Encoder 

1064710 Quadrature Pkg w/ 10 m cable, Bracket and Wheel (1.5 ppm), English Shaft Encoder 

7302447 Hi Res Quadrature Pkg w/ 5 m cable, Bracket and Wheel (10 ppmm) 

1085052 Quadrature Encoder, 5 m Cable, Wheel and Small Body (1 ppmm) 

727240 Mounting Arm For Small Body Encoder 

372759 Cable, Ext, Encoder, 5 m 

772050 Quadrature Encoder, 10 mm Shaft, 500 Pulse (EPC 30-metric) 

7302121 Quadrature Encoder, Hi Res, 10 mm 

7302113 Cable, Quadrature Encoder, 5 m 



7302371 Friction Wheel, 10mm Diameter x 250 mm Circumference, Rubber OD 

311453 Friction Wheel, 10 mm Diameter x 500 mm Circumference, Rubber OD 

311454 Friction wheel, 10 mm Diameter x 500 mm Circumference, Metal 

7301037 Quadrature Encoder, 2000 Pulse 



772051 Quadrature Encoder, 3/8 inch, 500 Pulse (EPC 30-English) 

296144 Friction Wheel, 3/8 inch Diameter x 500 mm Circumference, Rubber OD 

1064634 Encoder Wheel, 3/8 inch Shafe (requires 727879) 

727876 Rubber O-Ring for 1064634 (1.5 ppmm) 

727133 Single Phase Encoder With Bracket, 1 ppmm 

377222 Cable, Single Phase Encoder, 5 m 

727940 Cable, Single Phase Encoder, 20 feet 

727941 Cable, Single Phase Encoder, 30 feet 

377228 Cable, Encoder Repeater, 5 m Extension 

277227 Cable, Splitter, Encoder, Repeat, Str, (4 pin to 2 x 12 pin ), 5 m 







Photocell 

Part Number 

7302981 La650 Photocell, Laser 

7303071 Bracket, LA650, Vertical Drop Bar 

7303072 Bracket, LA650, Horizontal Drop Bar 

7301645 Basic Drop Bar With Photo Eye Bracket 

738443 Photocell, PZ With 0.3 m Pigtail 

377269 Photocell kit, fiber optic, 2 m cable 

313376 Bracket, Fiber Optic Photocell 

738463 Cabel, Ext, Photocell, 3 m 

377219 Cable, Ext, Photocell, 5 m 






738351 Trigger Combination Box (2 in 1 out) 

1502499 Ace-cable, Splitter, Sensor, Trigger, LogiComm 

7301974 Cable, Adapter, Photocell to HHS Timer 

7302375 Adapter, Photocell to Sensor Input 

Description 

I/P Transducer 

Part Number 

Description 

377188 1 in 1 out (with 2 m cable), Transducer Assembly 

7303400 1 in 1 out to flow (with 3 m cable), Transducer Assembly 

377189 1 in 2 out (W/ 2 m cable), Transducer Assembly 

377641 Cable, Run-up Output, 5 m 

377642 Cable, Run-up Output, 10 m 

377228 Cable, Extension, 5m 

377733 Kit, Installation, Run-up, 1 in 1 out 

377734 Kit, Installation, Run-up, 1 in 20 out 

772033 Transducer, Run-up, Piston Pump, DIN Mount, with 30 ft. cable 

154890 Transducer, Run-up, Piston Pump, DIN Mount, IP66 

1025168 LogiComm Run-up Connector, Solder Type 

7170916 Cable, Key-to-Line, LogiComm, VersaBlue, 2 m 



7173642 Cable, Key-to-Line, LogiComm, PURBlue 4, 2 m 







GD200 Verification Sensor for Liquid Adhesive 

Part Number 

Description 

1094546 GD200-S LA Sensor, Integrated 

1097296 Cable, GD200-S, 2.5 m 

1094547 Cable, GD200-S, 5.0 m 

1097297 Cable, GD200-S, 7.5 m 

1094548 Cable, GD200-S, 10 m 

7303071 Bracket Assembly for LA 650, Vertical Drop Bar 

7303072 Bracket for LA650, Plus Horiz. Bar 

7302890 Drop Bar Adapter for GD200S 

1084633 GD200-F18 LA Sensor, Fiber 18” 

1084634 GD200-F32 LA Sensor, Fiber 32” 

1106454 GD200-F32 LA Sensor, Fiber 32”, 3.6 mm Spot 

727142 Cable, GD200-F, 3.0 m 

1067046 Cable, GD200-F, 7.6 m 

7301636 Drop Bar Adapter for GD200F/GD100 

1084029 GD200F-18 Sensor Only (spare part) 

1084090 GD200F-32 Sensor Only (spare part) 

1106607 GD200F-32 3.6 mm Spot Sensort Only (apare part) 

1094867 Adaptor GD200S DIN to GD200F/GD100 9 Pin 

HD-100 Hot Melt Verification Sensor (High Speed) 

Part Number 

Description 

1067705 HD-100 Package (Universal Bracket, cable and sensor) 

377499 Sensor, HD-100, Hot Melt 

377498 Sensor, HD-100 and 10 m Cable 

377500 Cable, HD-100, 10 m 

7303737 Cable, HD-100, 30 m 

1074713 Waveguide, HD100 

7303071 Bracket Assembly for LA 650, Vertical Drop Bar 

7303072 Bracket for LA650, Plus Horiz. Bar 

7302000 Drop Bar Adapter for HD100 






HD-80 Hot Melt Verification Sensor (Low Speed) 

Part Number 

Description 

1120178 HD-80 Ext. Reach HM and Drop Bar Assembly 

727142 Cable, for HD-80, 3.0 m 

1067046 Cable for HD-80, 7.6 m 

1101509 Amplifier with Connector, 2 m 

1120177 Sensor Head, HD-80 

HD-70 Hot Melt Verification Sensor (Medium Speed) 

Part Number 

Description 

1091351 HD-70 Sensor Package (includes sensor, bracket, 10 m cable) 

1090391 HD-70 Sensor 

1078804 Cable for HD-70, 5 m 

1078807 Cable for HD-70, 10 m 

1087199 Cable for HD-70, 10 m Right Angle 

1095399 Parabolic Mirror 

UV Sensors 

Part Number 

Description 

1054179 GD 400, UV Luminance Sensor Package (includes cable and drop bar assembly) 

1103846 GD 400, UV Luminance Sensor Only 

1069171 Cable for GD 400, 5 m 

Barcode Sensors 

Part Number 

Description 

1073415 BC5100 Smart Sensor Barcode Scanner 

1091891 BC5100 Smart Sensor Barcode Scanner, Raster 

1059564 Cable for BC5100 Barcode Scanner, 15 ft 

1072674 Cable for BC5100 Barcode Scanner, 25 ft 

727267 Basic Drop Bar Mounting Assembly 

727268 Top Mount Bracket Assembly 

7303367 CBC5100 Color Barcode System (includes sensor, controller, encoder pkg and cables) 





GD500 Sensors 

Part Number 

Description 

7303180 GD500 Smart Sensor 

7302954 Cable for GD500, 7 m 

7303034 Bracket For Wheels, Straight, GD500 

7303036 Rectangular Bracket 

7303223 Straight-line Bracket Assembly 

- *GD500 Corrugated System with Control Box (includes sensor, controller, and cables) 

7303714 Cable, for GD500 Corrugated System, 10 m 

*This product is configurable. Please contact your Nordson representative for the correct part number. 

Other Sensors 

Part Number 

Description 

1067729 Cello Position Sensor, 18 in DB Package (includes 2 m cable and drop bar assembly) 

1025941 Cello position Sensor Without Drop Bar 

1067931 Cello Position Sensor, 23 in DB Package (includes 2 m cable and drop bar assembly) 

738253 Cello Position Sensor Head (spare Part) 

1067709 Cello Presence Sensor, 18 in DB Package (includes 2 m cable and drop bar assembly) 

1067708 Cello Presence Sensor, 23 in DB Package (includes 2 m cable and drop bar assembly) 

727120 Cello Presence Sensor Only (without Drop Bar) 

1055183 RGB Fiber Optic Sensor, 18 in. Drop Bar Package (includes 2 m cable and drop bar assembly) 

1057311 RGB Trigger Amplifier with Sensor Connector 

727949 RGB Sensor, Fiber Optic (spare part) 

1096080 Insert Edge Detection Sensor, Optical 

1067704 Security Tag Sensor, 18 in DB Package (includes 2 m cable and drop bar assembly) 

738605 Security Tag Sensor Only 

1067707 Security Tag Sensor, 24 in DB Package (includes 2 m cable and drop bar assembly) 

1103811 Double Sheet Detector With Mounting Bracket 

1104335 Double Sheet Detector Without Mounting Bracket 

1104336 Bracket for Double Sheet Detector 

727142 Cable, Sensor, Extension, 10 ft. 

1067046 Cable, Sensor, Extension, 25 ft. 






Reject, Marking, and Batch Control Equipment 

Part Number 

Description 

377491 Ejector, Rotary, 230VAC, CE 

377490 Ejector, Rotary, 400-460VAC, CE 

738562 Ejector, Rotary, 115VAC, CW ROT, W/MC Control 

727664 System, Ink Marking, ENVL, W/20 ft Cable (US) 

727119 Pusher, Pneumatic (w/regulator and hose) 

7302542 Cable, Solenoid, 10 m 

727183 Ejection, Mounting Bracket, Bobst 

727185 Ejection, Mounting Bracket, Jagenbert F.G. 

7302114 Cable, Cube Interface, 10 m 

7302372 Cable, Cube Panel to Encoder Input, 1 m 

727188 Batch Control, Mounting Bracket, Bobst-Media D&A 









Web Content 



Description 

The distance-based LA 404-2 pattern control offers 

application flexibility and easy operation. With up to 

four channel capability and a choice of several different 

bead types, the control fits a broad range of high-end 

packaging or folding carton, envelope, and bag and sack 

manufacturing requirements. 

In addition to quick connection cabling, the integrated 

applicator driver board and tip sealing activators 

simplify installation. The multi-language, menu-driven 

operator interface with scrollable LCD display simplifies 

programming. A 100-program memory delivers quick, 

easy changeovers. 

Four independent triggers allow broad pattern 

flexibility. An integrated driver controls up to eight 

liquid adhesive electric applicators (two per channel via 

splitter cable) or up to 24 pneumatic applicators (six 

5.8-watt solenoids per channel via splitter cable). 

The LA 404-2 control provides a number of bead 

choices including dot, autospot, or continuous patterns. 

With four bead events per channel, the system delivers 

the flexibility to achieve a wide variety of gluing 

patterns. 

Features 

LA 404-2 Pattern Controller 

• Highly accurate applicator control on four independent 

channels. 

• Selection of bead choices meets a broad range of application 

requirements. Choices include: normal, continuous, random 

length, random dot, dot, and autospot. 

• Quick-connect cables deliver rapid, easy installation. 

• One hundred-program memory allows rapid pattern 

changeover. 

• Four trigger inputs provide application flexibility. 

• Programmable applicator driver board settings accommodate 

a wide range of compatible applicators. 

• Run-up control minimizes adhesive waste during start-up or 

shutdown. 

• Integrated tip seal system helps prevent nozzle from drying 

out. 






Parameter 

Specification 

Maximum line speed m/min (ft/min) 600 (1969) 

Pattern accuracy (@ max. line speed) mm (in.) ±1 (0.04) (1) 

Program memory Up to 100 

Independent channels 4 

Applicator load Liquid adhesive electric 

Pneumatic (2) 

8 (2 per channel via splitter cable) 

24 (6 per channel via splitter cable) 

Independent trigger inputs 4 

Input voltage requirement 

85-265 VAC; 47-63 Hz 

Encoders 1 

Encoder resolution 0.1-20 pulses/mm (3) 

Pressure curves 

2 (2 point linear) 

Maximum beads per channel 4 

(1) 

1 pulse/mm quadrature encoder, < ±2 m/sec 2 acceleration; 2 ms applicators. 

(2) 

24V, 5.8 watt solenoid 

(3) 

1-10 pulses/mm recommended for most applications. 

Dimensions 

Dimension 

mm (in.) 

Height 

205 (8.07) including feet 

Width 310 (12.20) 

Depth 270 (10.63) 







Controller 

Part Number 

7301861 LA 404-2 

Description 

Photocell 

Part Number 

Description 

7301990 LA650 Photocell, NPN/PNP 

7301645 Bracket, LA650 

377219 Cable, Ext, Photocell, LCOMM/LA404-2, 5m 

7301988 Cable, Ext, Photocell, LCOMM/LA404-2, 7m 

Encoder 

Part Number 

Description 

7302112 Kit, Quadrature Encoder W/ 5m Cable, Bracket & Wheel (metric) 

772050 Encoder, Quadrature (EPC 30-metric) 

772051 Encoder, Quadrature (EPC 30-english) 


372759 Cable, Ext, Encoder, 5 m 

311454 Wheel, Friction, Encoder, 10 mm Diameter 

296144 Wheel, Friction, Encoder, 3/8 in Diameter 

313370 Bracket, Quadrature Encoder (metric) 

I/P Transducer 

Part Number 

377188 Transducer, I/P, 1 in 1 out (w/ 2 m cable) 

377189 Transducer, I/P, 1 in 2 out (w/ 2 m cable) 

377641 Cable, Runup Output, 5 m 

377642 Cable, Runup Output, 10 m 

377228 Cable, Ext, Runup, 5 m 

377733 Kit, Installation, Runup, 1 in 1 out 

377734 Kit, Installation, Runup, 1 in 2 out 

Description 





Applicator Cables - Electric Applicators 

Part Number 

1059608 Cable, LA822, 5 m 

1060587 Cable, LA822, 2.5 m 

1060588 Cable, LA822, 10 m 

377377 Cable, LA820 to LA404-2/WM408, 5 m 

377380 Cable, LA820 to LA404-2/WM408, 10 m 

Description 

Applicator Cables - Pneumatic Applicators 

Part Number 

Description 

7302542 Cable, Applicator, Discrete Wire Termination, 10 m 

Applicator Cables - Miscellaneous 

Part Number 

Description 

7302543 Cable, Adapter, Applicator, LA 404-2 to LA 404 

7302544 Cable, Splitter, Applicator, LA 404-2 to LA 404 

7302545 Cable, Splitter, Applicator, LA 404-2 to LA 404-2, 4-pin parallel 


375353 Connector, Applicator 

Accessories 

Part Number 

Description 

1059609 Assy, Box, Remote Purge, LCOMM/LA404-2 

377230 Cable, Remote Outputs, 10 m 

1042100 Cable, Remote Inputs, 10 m 

738011 Kit, Solenoid, Tip Seal 

738208 Cable, Tip Seal Output, 6m (20 ft ) 

738334 Cable, Extension, Tip Seal Output, 2 m (7 ft) 

738335 Cable, Extension, Tip Seal Output, 7 m (24 ft) 

375256 Cable, Tip Seal Output, Pigtail, 20 m 

1023676 Cable, Power, IEC, 120V US, 9.8 ft 

371943 Cable, Power, IEC, 240V EU, 3 m 

727142 Cable, Ext, 9 pin D-Sub, 3 m (10 ft) 

1034146 Cable, Ext, 9 pin D-Sub, 4.5 m (15 ft) 

1067046 Cable, Ext, 9 pin D-Sub, 7.6 m (25 ft) 

377225 Cable, Adapter, Encoder, LA404 to WM408 

374871 Cable, Adapter, Photocell, LA404 to WM408 




Web Content 


Seal Sentry ® Series 10 Bead 

Detection System 

Description 

The new Seal Sentry Series 10 bead detection system 

delivers basic hot melt adhesive bead detection 

for packaging, converting and product assembly 

applications. This innovative system confirms 

the presence of hot melt adhesive beads prior to 

compression on constant speed and limited speed 

change packaging machines. Adhesive bead verification 

improves productivity and quality by detecting 

substandard product immediately. 

The Seal Sentry Series 10 system utilizes quick 

disconnect cables and an internal power supply to 

simplify installation. The infrared hot melt bead sensors 

feature a sealed housing with a fixed field of view. The 

sensors’ attached mounting hardware eliminates the 

need for separate brackets. The Seal Sentry Series 10 

system does not use encoders or resolvers so installation 

is fast and easy. 

The Seal Sentry Series 10 system can be programmed 

quickly and easily. The bead detection system uses 

only two buttons for set-up and programming. LED 

indicators clearly indicate the setting for each bead 

sensor and the desired sensitivity level. 

• Dynamic calibration automatically establishes hot melt 

adhesive bead reference levels. 

• Two-button operator interface simplifies set-up and operation. 

• Infrared bead sensors simplify installation with integral 

mounting and fixed field of view. 

• Dual photo-trigger inputs provide two-station bead 

monitoring. 

• Stand-alone, fully integrated system has an internal power 

supply and is compatible with most packaging machines. 

• Fault output is configurable for normally open or normally 

closed operation. 

• Infrared sensors eliminate the need for adhesive additives or 

UV light. 


Input 

Parameter 

Maximum output 

Minimum bead size* 

Maximum line speed* 

Bead sensors 

Fault output 

Seal Sentry 10 

85-260 VAC 

4 A, 230 VAC 

Specification 

1.5 mm @ 20 m/min 

300 m/min with a 60 mm bead 

Infrared with 12-18 mm field 

of view 

Single NPN or PNP 

*Based on bead size of 3 mm @ 175 °C application temperature 

(0.125 in. @ 350 °F) 




Seal Sentry ® Series 10 Bead Detection System 


Console 

Part Number 

377051 SS10 Controller 

Description 

Photocell 

Part Number 

7301990 LA650 Photocell, Laser 


7302023 Cable, Adapter, LA650, 0.1 m 

Description 

Photocell Bracket 

Part Number 

7301645 Bracket, LA650 

Description 

Verification Sensor 

Part Number 

377052 Sensor, Bead Detect 

377067 Cable, Bead Sensor 1.5 m, Straight 

377068 Cable, Bead Sensor, 3 m, Straight 

313783 Cable, Ext, Bead Sensor, 5 m, Straight 

Description 




Web Content 



Description 

Nordson’s Accubar barcode verifier monitors and 

validates symbol accuracy in high-speed packaging and 

converting operations. Unacceptable codes can trigger 

an alarm, machine stop, ejector or marker. Product 

quality is protected against faulty codes and mixed lots 

that can increase operating costs. 

The microprocessor-based control provides efficient 

scanning using advanced laser technology. Capable of 

operating at line speeds over 400 meters per minute 

(1400 ft/min), the Accubar verifier accommodates highoutput 

production of folding carton manufacturing, 

case sealing, and container filling. 

Further efficiency is provided with pre-programmed 

barcode formats, adding product changeover flexibility 

without complicated format programming. The 

control’s comprehensive decoding feature recognizes 

diverse formats. These include black, colored and fine 

code lines; truncated codes; and ladder or picket-fence 

scanning. 

• Programming a specific code to memory is easy. Operators 

simply align the bar-coded product to the photocell, focus 

the laser on the barcode and press the memory button. The 

symbol in memory becomes the decode default that the 

scanner verifies. 

• When combined with the G-NET Verification System, 

you can increase productivity through automatic tracking 

and ejection. The G-NET system also accepts additional 

glue detectors, cellophane detectors and other end-product 

inspection sensors. 

• Efficient scanning technology enhances on-line quality 

management. 

• Microprocessor-based control accurately scans and verifies 

barcodes at line speeds up to 425 meters per minute (1400 ft/ 

min). 


• Diverse format decoding accepts black, colored, and fine 

code lines; truncated codes; and ladder or picket-fence 

scanning. 

• Comprehensive barcode formats are pre-programmed for 

quick setup and line start. 

• Instantaneous faulty code detection triggers an alarm, 

machine stop, ejector or marker for immediate notification, 

removal or identification. 

• Compact console and scanner install easily on parent 

machines in tight mounting spaces. 

• Convenient RS232 computer interface allows configuration 

and monitoring from a remote location. 

• Tracking and ejection capability consolidates reject removal 

or marking 






Parameter 

Scanning parameters 

Decoding capabilities 

Light source 

Photocell 

Relay contacts 

External link output 


Temperature rating 

Safety class 

Specification 

Rotating polygon uni-directional 1400 sweeps/second, picket-fence or ladder operation 

Codebar, code 3 of 9, interleaved 2 of 5, code 93, code 128, UPC/EAN, pharmacode 

Laser diode 

12 VDC @ 250 mA, open collector input 5-pin 180° IDIN connector 

220 VAC @ 10A form C 

Open drain 500 mA sink, 50 VDC maximum 

24 VDC or 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2 A 

0-60 °C (32-140 °F) 

Class II 


Part Number 

Description 

738180 LA 5100 Scanning Head/USA Codes 

727646 Accubar Console 

727648 LA 5100 Connection Cable, 3.66 m (12 ft) 

727658 LA 5100 Connection Cable, 7.32 m (24 ft) 

727173 Mounting Bracket, Clamp And Pole 

727174 Mounting Bracket, 30 mm (1.18 in.) Bracket And Pole 

727129 Fault Cable, 9.14 m (30 ft) 

727657 Fault Cable, 15.24 m (50 ft) 

727109 Machine Stop Cable, G. SITE 

727647 Machine Stop Cable, Standalone 

727268 Mounting Assembly, Top Mount 

727161 Mounting Brackets, 3/4 in. Bar 

727163 Mounting Brackets, 30 mm Bar 

727267 Barcode Upgrade Kit (1) 

(1) 

Contact Nordson Engineering for details. 






Dimensions 

Accubar 

235 mm 

(9 25 in ) 

190 mm 

(7 5 in ) 

125 mm 

(4 9 in ) 

LA-5100 

57 79 mm 

(2 28 in ) 

76 20 mm 

(3 0 in ) 

41 30 mm 

(1 63 in ) 











Mounting 

Configuration 

e.dot+, e.dot 

All Other Applicators 

Single Channel 2–4 Channels Single Channel 1–4 Channels 5–8 Channels 

DIN Rail — OEM 

Cabinet Mounting e driver* 1043759 

Stand Alone — 

Connectors 

Stand Alone — 

Terminal Blocks 

(IP54) 

LogiComm Driver 4 

CH Conn 

1074653 


CH TB 

1074651 

LogiComm OEM 

Driver** 1079694 e driver* 1043759 


CH Conn 

1074653 


CH TB 

1074651 


CH Conn 

1074653 


CH TB 

1074651 

*e driver is pre-programmed for the e.dot applicator. Order programming kit for other applicators. 

LogiComm OEM 

Driver** 1079694 


CH Conn 

1074653 


CH TB 

1074651 

LogiComm OEM 

Driver** 1079694 


CH Conn 

1074654 


CH TB 

1074652 

**LogiComm OEM Driver is pre-programmed for e.dot+ applicator. Use included programming kit to change for other applicators. 

Applicator Driver Comparison Chart 

LogiComm OEM 


LogiComm 

Applicator Driver 

e driver 

Electrical: 

Input Voltage 

Supply #1: 110–240 V VAC 

Supply #2: 20–28 VDC 

100–240V, 48–62 Hz 

200–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Input Current 3A 3A 3A 

Input Trigger 

18–30 VDC, PNP 

Opto-Isolated (NPN or PNP, 

source or sink) 10–30 VDC 

Opto-solated, 5 VDC logic, 

10–30 VDC 

Spike Duration 0.6–2.0 ms 0.1–12.7 ms 1.35 ms 

Hold Current 0.0–1.5 A 0–1.0 A 0.75 A 

Pull-in Current 0.0–3.0 A 0.1–3.1 A 2.85 A 

Fault Output Contact 

Potential-free contact rated 

at 0.25 A @ 24 VDC. Opens 

on output fault (open circuit, 

short circuit, terminal) 

1 form C potential-free contact, fail 

safe design. 

Contact rating 0.5 A @ 250 VAC 

Normally open-potential-free contact, 

closes on output 

fault 

Enclosure: 

Enclosure Rating 

IP20 

IPX4: Terminal Block Version 

IP 20 

IP30: Connector Version 

Dimensions (WxHxD) 78 mm x 105 mm x 73 mm 327 mm x 311 mm x 163 mm 63.5 mm x 203 mm x 147 mm 

Mounting DIN Wall DIN 

Operating Temperature 0–50 °C 0–50 °C 0–50 °C 

Continued... 





LogiComm OEM 


LogiComm 

Applicator Driver 

e driver 

Features: 

Applicators 

e.dot+, e.dot, E-400, All hot melt and liquid e.dot 

LA 820, WM 801 adhesive electric applicators 

Outputs 4 4 or 8 1 

Coils Per Channel 1–2 in series Varies per applicator 1–3 in series 

Input Triggers 4 4 1 

Normal Mode Yes Yes Yes 

Dot Mode Yes Yes Yes 

Dot Time 0.05–4.95 ms 0.05–12.70 ms 0.05–4.95 ms 

Purge Yes Yes Yes 

Flush Yes Yes Yes 

Hammering Yes Yes Yes 

Programming: 

Spike Amplitude 

Software LCD / Keypad Software 

Spike Duration Software LCD / Keypad Software 

Hold Duration Software LCD / Keypad Software 

# Coils Wire in series LCD / Keypad Wire in series 

User Interface: 

Interface 

Diagonistic LEDs — power Backlit LCD graphic with LEDs: power, trigger, output, 3 

(230V and 24V), enable, fault keypad and on/off switch. 4 thermal LEDs (fault warning or 

(short/open circuit) LEDs for triggers, 4 to 8 LEDs OK), open, short, dot, for each 

Diagnostic LEDs per channel— for outputs, LED for power, LED channel; purge button (press in); 

trigger, output, fault, dot mode/ for fault, and LED for alarm. two knobs for adjusting dot time. 

purge 

Purge button and buttons to 

scroll through LCD 

Connections Terminal Block Terminal block or Connector Terminal Block 

Other: 

Special Features 

Modbus TCP communication 

Ready output — potential free 

contact rated at 0.25 A @ 

24 VDC, closes on unit ready 

Presets for all legacy 

applicators, current mode and 

HD mode 

Port for software to set applicator 

settings 

Software Upgrades Software utility USB 2.0 and 1.1 via NCM None 

Major Replacement 

Parts 

Full set of service kits Full set of service kits None 




Web Content 



Description 

The LogiComm Applicator Driver is a high 

performance electric applicator driver for either hot 

melt or liquid adhesive applications that supports all 

Nordson Adhesives electric applicators, eliminating the 

need for different drivers for different applicators. It 

has four trigger inputs to interface to a pattern control, 

PLC or other device. The driver is available in four 

or eight channel models, each with either convenient 

external quick disconnect connectors or with traditional 

terminal blocks where IPX4 water protection is needed. 

Each output is independently programmable to respond 

to any trigger input and can control a different type of 

applicator on each channel. The LogiComm applicator 

driver makes set-up a snap. The user only needs to 

select the applicator type from menu and the correct 

pre-defined settings for that applicator are loaded 

automatically. The flexible design also allows the driver 

to be programmed with customized applicator output 

settings. 

LogiComm Applicator Driver 

Set-up and troubleshooting are aided by LED indicators 

as well as sophisticated diagnostics. In addition an alarm 

signal can be sent to a remote device such as a PLC. 

Future driver firmware upgrades are performed via the 

internal USB port. 

Features 

• Four- and eight-channel models available 

• Two I/O connection styles: 

–– 

quick-disconnect electrical connectors speed installation 

and maintenance 

–– 

internal two–piece terminal blocks provide water protection 

and preserve wiring labor in the event of a unit change 

• Each output can: 

–– 

select which trigger input to respond to 

–– 

be enabled or disabled for product changes 

–– 

drive a different type of applicator 

–– 

be activated using the purge button for testing, purging or 

flushing 

• Fully programmable to support future Nordson applicators and 

competitive applicators 

• Two trigger modes: normal/bead and dot (fixed time duration) 

• Operator panel displays status as well as simplifying installation 

and setup 

• Self-diagnostics coupled with the display and indicators 

simplify troubleshooting 

• Status indicators: eight outputs, four triggers, power, alarm and 

fault 

• USB connection for firmware upgrades and to save/restore 

settings (electrically isolated from internal power circuitry) 

• Internal 24 VDC power supply eliminates the need for a 

separate power supply for EPC pattern controller 

• Input line filter helps withstand high levels of noise, permitting 

reliable operation in industrial and factory environments 

• Hinged enclosure simplifies internal access when required 

• AC power switch for convenience 






Parameter 

Applicator outputs 

Applicator series supported 

Applicator drivers 

Independent triggers 

Trigger levels 

Dot mode time range 

Manual purge/test 

Alarm output contact 

Display type 

4 or 8 channel 

Specification 

All Nordson electric applicators including: E3xx, E400, E700, EM100, EM900, e.dot, LA82x, LA9xx 

and WM8xx 

80 W maximum per 4 channel driver (160 W total) 

4 opto-isolated (NPN or PNP; source or sink) 

10–30 VDC 

0.05–12.75 mSec 

Purge or flush; either mode available with “hammering” 

1 form C potential-free contact 

“Failsafe” design; Active when OK; Inactive when fault, power off or disconnected; contact rating: 0.5 

A at 250 VAC 

Backlit LCD graphic 

Maximum power requirement 200 W (2 A) 



170–264 VAC typical; 50/60 Hz; 1 phase 

90–132 VAC and 170–200 VAC at reduced applicator performance 

0–50 °C (32–122 °F) 


Environmental 

Mounting 

Dimensions (approx) 

UL and CE 

IP X4: Terminal Block version; IP 30: Connector version 

Cast mounting feet with 2 holes (top) and 2 slots (bottom) 

330 mm (width) x 305 mm (height) x 178 mm (depth) 

12 in. (width) x 12 in. (height) x 7 in. (depth) 







Applicator Driver with Connectors 

Part Number 

Description 

1074653 LogiComm Applicator Driver, 4 Channel, Connector 

1074654 LogiComm Applicator Driver, 8 Channel, Connector 

Applicator Cables for Connector Version 

Part Number 

Description 

7302530 Cable, LA820, 2.5 m (new conn on 820) 

7302531 Cable, LA820, 5 m (new conn on 820) 

7302532 Cable, LA820, 10 m (new conn on 820) 

1059608 Cable, LA822, 5 m 

1060587 Cable, LA822, 2.5 m 

1060588 Cable, LA822, 10 m 

7302533 Cable, WM801, 2.5 m 

7302534 Cable, WM801, 5 m 

7302535 Cable, WM801, 10 m 

1063858 Cable, E400, 20 ft 

1041835 Cable, e.dot (LogiComm to e.dot hose), 10 m 


1074921 Cable, EM100/EM900, 5 m 

1074922 Cable, E701, 5 m 

1074923 Cable, M70X & E35X, 5 m 

1074924 Cable, M70X & E35X, 2 coil, 5 m 

Other Cables for Connector Version 

Part Number 

Description 

1089003 Cable, Trigger, 20 m, LGD 

1074925 Cable, Alarm to Pigtail, 10 m, LGD 

1044019 Cable, EPC to LogiComm Driver (with 24 VDC power supply), 20 m 

1089004 Cable, LA404-2 to LogiComm Driver, 2 m 

1089061 Cable, Trigger Extension, 5 m 





Applicator Driver with Terminal Block 

Part Number 

Description 

1074651 LogiComm Applicator Driver, 4 Channel, Terminal Block 

1074652 LogiComm Applicator Driver, 8 Channel, Terminal Block 

Applicator Cables for Terminal Block Version 

Part Number 

Description 

1041830 e.dot, 15m 

1015173 E400, 20ft 

1039761 E400, 12 m 

1037535 E400, 25 m 

1032902 EM100/EM900, 4.6 m, 240V 

1046343 EM100/EM900, 4.6 m, 120V 

1032904 EM100/EM900, 9.1 m, 240V 

1046344 EM100/EM900, 9.1 m, 120V 

1032447 EM100/EM900, 4.6 m, Water-wash, 240V 

1032448 EM100/EM900, 9.1 m, Water-wash, 240V 

183542 M70X & E35X, 18ft (included w/ applicator) 

220764 M70X & E35X, Water-wash, 20ft (included w/ applicator) 

111934 E701, 10 ft (included w/ applicator) 

371189 WM801, 5 m 

377379 LA820, 5 m 

931158 Cable, 3 Conductor, 50 ft (trigger) 





Web Content 


Description 

The LogiComm OEM applicator driver board is a highperformance, 

four-trigger, four-output channel electric 

applicator driver that easily installs in an OEM control 

cabinet to interface with a PLC. The driver comes 

programmed with settings for the e.dot® series electric 

applicator but can be reprogrammed via a computer to 

drive many other hot melt or liquid adhesive electric 

applicators. 

LogiComm OEM applicator drivers support 

communication to the PLC via the digital I/O. The 

customer can reset the driver to a fault condition or 

enable the driver. Additionally, a driver contact is 

opened upon a fault such as an open or short coil or a 

thermal fault. 

LogiComm OEM Applicator Driver Board 

Features 

• Program driver settings via computer 

• Four trigger inputs and four output channels 

• Small driver size, DIN rail mounting and two-piece plug type 

connectors facilitate installation in an OEM control cabinet 

• Each output can be: 

–– 

programmed to drive different applicator types 

–– 

tested independently via a purge button or a signal from a PLC 

• Two trigger modes are available: normal/bead and dot 

• Four status LEDs for trigger, output, dot mode and fault 

(short and open coil detection) 

• Fully programmable to support current and future Nordson 

applicators 

• Fully serviceable 

• USB connection: 

–– 

allows field software upgrades 

–– 

allows uploading of new settings through software 

–– 

allows ability to back up settings 

• Digital I/O: 

–– 

enable/disable driver or reset the driver from a fault condition 

–– 

fault contact opened if an open/short coil is detected or a thermal 

fault 

• Modbus TCP communications 






Parameter 


Power supply high voltage 

Power supply low voltage 


Driver electrical output capacity (currentcontrolling 

peak followed by a reduced 

holding level) 

Driver operational modes 

Specification 

0–50 °C (32–122 °F) 

110–240 VAC (fuse-protected) max. 450 W depending on the load 

20–28 VDC, 5 W 

IP20 

Each Output 

1 electrical applicator at full performance 

2 electrical applicators in series at reduced performance 

Bead: the driver electrical output corresponds to the input trigger signal 

Dot: the input trigger signal activates the driver electrical output for a programmable, fixed 

time (0.05–4.95 ms) 

Trigger input 

Trigger level 

Opto-isolated by driver, PNP 

18–30 VDC 


Diagnostic LEDs 

Diagnostic LEDs per channel 

Fault output 

Ready output 

POWER 230 VAC 

POWER 24 VDC 

ENABLE 

FAULT (short circuit/open circuit) 

TRIGGER 

OUTPUT 

FAULT (short circuit/open circuit) 

DOT MODE/PURGE 

Potential-free contact rated at 0.25 A @ 24 VDC, opens on output fault (open circuit, short 

circuit, or thermal) 

Potential-free contact rated at 0.25 A @ 24 VDC, closes on unit ready 

Programming 

Terminal block connections 

Mounting 

Dimensions 

Programming of the driver is accomplished by connecting a USB Type-B PC interface cable 

to a port on the driver and using the shipped with service software. (CD) 

Quick-disconnect 

DIN rail, 35 mm 

178 mm x 105 mm x 73 mm 

7.01 in. x 4.13 in. x 2.87 in. 

Driver Software Parameter Ranges 

Parameter Description Range 

Peak Current Target Current Level For Initial Peak 0.0–3.0 A 

Hold Current Target Current Level For Hold 0.0–1.5 A 

Time Time for initial Peak 0.6–2.0 ms 







Applicator Driver with Connectors 

Part Number 

Description 

1079694 LogiComm OEM Applicator Driver Board, 4 Channel, Terminal Block 

Applicator Cables for Terminal Block Version 

Part Number 

Description 

1041830 e.dot, 15 m 

1015173 E400, 20 ft 

1039761 E400, 12 m 

1037535 E400, 25 m 

1032902 EM100/EM900, 4.6 m, 240 V 

1032904 EM100/EM900, 9.1 m, 240 V 

1032447 EM100/EM900, 4.6 m, Water-wash, 240 V 

1032448 EM100/EM900, 4.6 m, Water-wash, 240 V 

1046343 EM100/EM900, 4.6 m,120 V 

1046344 EM100/EM900, 9.1 m, 120 V 

183542 M70X & E35X, 18ft (included w/ applicator) 

220764 M70X & E35X, Water-wash, 20ft (included w/ applicator) 

111934 E701, 10ft (included w/ applicator) 

371189 Cable, WM 801, 5 m 

377379 Cable, LA 820 LogiComm, 5 m 

Other Cables for Terminal Block Version 

Part Number 

931158 Cable, Signal, 3-Conductor, 50 ft. 

Description 

Service Kits (Terminal Block) 

Part Number 

1079695 PCA, Main, LGD, OEM 

1079696 PCA, Amplifier, LGD, OEM 

Description 

Spare Parts (Terminal Block) 

Part Number 

939955 Fuse, 2 A, Time Lag, 5 x 20 

Description 










e driver 

Description 

The e driver is a high-performance, current-controlling, 

single-channel electric applicator driver designed for use 

with an e.dot electric applicator. The e driver controls 

coil current, which is the driving force behind the 

actuation of the dispensing module on the applicator. 

The driver’s electrical output is a spiked waveform 

that applies a high-peak current to actuate the module 

rapidly, followed by a lower holding current to reduce 

power dissipation. 

• Fully programmable: spike and hold current, spike time 

• Two operating modes: normal and dot 

• Troubleshooting indicators: power, trigger, output and thermal 

fault LEDs 

e driver 


Part Number 

Description 

1043759 e driver, Single Box 

1041830 Cable, 15 m (49.2 ft), e.dot+ Hose to e driver 

1041835 Cable, 10 m (32.8 ft), e.dot+ Hose to LogiComm/e driver 

1041831 Cable Extension, e.dot+ Hose to P/N 1041830 or P/N 1041835, 10 m (33 ft) 

1018155 Kit, Driver Programming 




e driver 


Parameter 


Voltage 


Driver electrical output capacity (current-controlling 

peak followed by a reduced holding 

level) 

Driver operational modes 

Specification 

0–50 °C (32–122 °F) 

200–240 VAC (+10%–15%), 3 A, 50/60 Hz (fuse- and transientprotected) 

IP20 

1 e.dot applicator at full performance 

2 or 3 e.dot applicators in series at reduced performance 

Standard (spray, bead, strand): the driver electrical output corresponds to the 

input trigger signal 

Dot: the input trigger signal activates the driver electrical output for a short 

programmable time (0.1–9.9 ms) 

Trigger input 

Opto-isolated by driver 


Trigger levels 

Diagnostic LEDs 

Alarm output 

Terminal block connections 

Mounting 

Dimensions 

5 VDC logic 

10–30 VDC 

POWER 

TRIGGER 

OUTPUT 

Thermal (OK, WARNING, FAULT) 

OPEN (open circuit) 

SHORT (short circuit) 

DOT MODE 

Potential-free contact rated at 0.25 A @ 24 VDC, closes on output fault (open 

circuit, short circuit, or thermal) 

Two-piece, quick-disconnect 

DIN rail 

64 mm (width) x 216 mm (height) x 147 mm (depth) 

2.50 in. (width) x 8.50 in. (height) x 5.78 in. (depth) 



Auxiliary Equipment 

Adhesive & Sealants Equipment Guide Auxiliary Equipment | 14-1 

Web Content 


Description 

The Nordson nitrogen generation system and nitrogen 

booster pump were developed to help customers achieve a 

simple, cost-effective nitrogen supply to: 

• produce a closed cell foam when using Nordson foaming 

technology; 

• create a nitrogen blanket when using Nordson tank melters or 

extruders with reactive hot melt materials or materials prone to 

char. 

The Nordson booster pump is necessary to boost the 

nitrogen gas pressure when high-pressure gas is required, as 

when used in conjunction with a SureFoam system. 

Foaming Applications 

While plant air, or a variety of inert gases, can be used 

with Nordson foaming systems to create the closed cell 

foam, nitrogen gas is considered best. Nitrogen gas supply 

is clean; relatively inexpensive; truly inert (non reactive 

with adhesives or sealants being formed); and creates small, 

consistent bubbles. 

Tank Blanketing 

Inert gas protects adhesives/materials in a holding or 

processing tank from exposure to oxygen and/or air (and 

most specifically in the case of reactive polyurethane 

adhesives, the mosture in air). Referred to as a “nitrogen 

blanket,” a constant supply of gas serves to fill up any 

“empty” space in a tank, thereby displacing oxygen/air. The 

blanket helps maintain the adhesive’s bonding integrity, 

prevents char development and in the case of moisturecure 

adhesives, prevents premature curing. Vitually any of 

Nordson’s tank melters can be fitted with a tank blanketing 

system if desired/needed. 

Nitrogen Gas Generation Process 

While nitrogen gas is often supplied in cylinders, they are 

cumbersome and require special handling/storage; require 

frequent change-out on the production line; and must be 

refilled/replenished regularly. 

Nitrogen Generation System & Booster 

On-site production of nitrogen gas can be 

instituted relatively inexpensively and easily with 

the Nordson nitrogen generation system. 

Plant air is the raw material that feeds the nitrogen 

generation process. A two-stage filtration process 

removes contaminants and moisture. The dry, 

purified air then passes into the membrane 

separation section of the nitrogen generator. 

The membrane construction allows the nitrogen 

molecules to proceed through to the end of 

the bundle of hollow tubes while the other 

air components, including oxygen and argon, 

pass through the tube membrane and vent to 

the outside atmosphere. The end result is an 

uninterrupted supply of nitrogen gas that is 95- 

99.5% pure. 



14-2 | Auxiliary Equipment 


Features 

Nitrogen Generation System 

• Ability to produce and have available nitrogen gas as needed for production 

• Continuous, in-line process so no need to shutdown production to replace cylinders 

• Easy-to-use, including immediate start-up and shutdown 

• Compact system allows placement as close to the application point as desired 

• Easy installation with no electric requirement 

• Very little maintenance required with no moving parts and filter replacement only every 4-6 months 

• 80-90% lower cost than nitrogen gas provided in pressurized cylinders 

• Eliminates the need for special storage/handling and appropriate training required to handle pressurized cylinders 

• Produces 95-99.5% pure nitrogen 

Nitrogen Booster Pump 

• Ability to produce and have available nitrogen gas as needed for production 

• Continuous, in-line process so no need to shutdown production to replace cylinders 

• Easy-to-use, including immediate start-up and shutdown 

• Compact system allows placement as close to the application point as desired 

• Easy installation with no electric requirement 

• Very little maintenance required with no moving parts and filter replacement only every 4-6 months 

• 80-90% lower cost than nitrogen gas provided in pressurized cylinders 

• Eliminates the need for special storage/handling and appropriate training required to handle pressurized cylinders 

• Produces 95-99.5% pure nitrogen 

Objectives 

• Provide customers with a relatively safe, easy source of nitrogen gas to simplify use of Nordson foam technology and tank melters for 

reactive adhesives/materials. 

• Foster the use of nitrogen gas rather than other inert gases for foaming adhesives as nitrogen gas creates the “best foam.” Nitrogen 

gas is truly inert/non-reactive with adhesives/materials; has no oxygen component that can cause char; and produces a small and 

consistent bubble. 

• Replace cumbersome, expensive nitrogen gas cylinders that some customers do not want to deal with. Cylinders require special 

storage and handling; must be replenished; and are often too bulky to be placed near the point of application. 




Auxiliary Equipment | 14-3 



Generator Specifications 

Perameter 

Specification 

Nitrogen purity 95.0-99.5% 

Maximum pressure 

7 bar (100 psi) 

Maximum flow rate (per hour) 

137 liters 

Atmospheric dewpoint 

-50 °C (-58 °F) 

Recommended ambient temperature 

200 °C (68 °F) 

Maximum pressure drop (@99%N2 purity, 125 psig) 

10 psig 

Maximum inlet air temperature 

43 °C (110 °F) 

Dimensions (L x H x D) 

473 x 361.5 x 150 mm (18.62 x 14.23 x 5.91 in.) 

Weight (approx) 

9.5 kg (21 lb) 

Booster Specifications 

Maximum pressure 

Dimensions (L x H x D) 

Weight (approx) 

Designation 

Perameter 

Specification 

138 bar (2000 psi) 

307 x 274 x 174 mm (12.1 x 9.4 x 6.8 in.) 

110 kg (24 lb) 

CE 

Part Numbers 

Part Number 

Description 

1106554 Nitrogen Generator 

1105945 Amplifier, Booster, Air/Nitrogen 

1108292 Kit, regulator, Nitrogen Blanket, 10 psi, W/Timer 

1108290 Kit, Regulator, Low Pressure 3000-10-0 psi, W/Timer (used with 3000 psi bottle) 

1108291 Kit, Regulator, High Pressure 6000-10-0 psi, W/Timer (used with 6000 psi bottle) 









Web Content 



Description 

Compact ProMeter VDK dispense heads provide gear 

metering technology to deliver precision and control 

for form-in-place gasketing, bonding and sealing 

operations. It is ideal for high-viscosity silicones, butyls, 

epoxies, and hot melt materials. 

Features 

• Metering technology delivers precise bead profiles, shot 

weights, and gasket sizes, resulting in material savings and 

dispense-control accuracy to within ±1 percent. 

• Material metering close to the application point minimizes the 

effects of pressure variations, material viscosity changes, and 

pressure drops due to material output. 

• Design provides faster response time than pressure-fed systems 

when changing flow rates and output. 

• Positive-displacement spur gear pumps link to an encoderfeedback 

servo drive within the head, providing precise 

volumetric output. 

• Spur gear design eliminates side loads that can lead to 

premature wear. 

ProMeter VDK Dispensing Module 

• External-speed input reference signals synchronize with 

automation speed when mounted on a robot or used in 

a stationary position, resulting in deposition uniformity 

regardless of robot or line-speed changes. 

• Module retrofits to Nordson and non-Nordson supply and 

processing units to improve output control. 

• Choice of ambient, temperature-conditioned, and heated 

configurations provides application versatility. 

• Output range of 15 to 600 cc/min meets diverse production 

requirements. 

• Mounting configurations include direct Blue Series, AutoFlo, 

or AG900+S applicator module attachment, or remote-mount 

with separate dispense head. 

• Standard control provides full functionality, including 

digital readouts for volumetric-output and system-pressure 

monitoring and separate alarm signals if pressure, flow rate, or 

output volume exceeds preset limits. 







Cold 

Heated 

Parameter 

Specification 

Ambient 

38–218 °C (100–425 °F) 

Maximum input pressure MPa (psi) 13.79 (2,000) 

Maximum pressure difference (outle-inlet) MPa (psi) 2 (300) 

Material output range cc/min 15–600 

Dispense control accuracy ±1% 

Viscosity range centipoise 1,000–1,000,000 

Voltage 

240 VAC, 380 VAC 

Weight kg (lb) 8.4 (18.5) 

Approvals 

CE 

Dimensions 

Dimensions mm (in.) Module Basic Controller 

Height 525 (21.0) 760 (30) 

Width 84 (3.3) 610 (24) 

Depth 79 (3.1) 250 (10) 







ProMeter VDK Dispense Applicator Matrix 

Pump Size 

0.15 

cc/rev 

0.3 

cc/rev 

0.6 

cc/rev 

1.2 

cc/rev 

2.4 

cc/rev 

4.5 

cc/rev 

6 

cc/rev 

Module Type 

Applicator Part Number 

Non-heated 

Heated 

Remote 1078943 1078947 

SolidBlue 1078944 1078948 

Auto FLow 1078945 1078949 

AG-900+S 1078946 1078950 

Remote 1079081 1079085 

SolidBlue 1079082 1079086 

Auto FLow 1079083 1079087 

AG-900+S 1079084 1079088 

Remote 1079089 1079093 

SolidBlue 1079090 1079094 

Auto FLow 1079091 1079095 

AG-900+S 1079092 1079096 

Remote 1079103 1079108 

SolidBlue 1079102 1079107 

Auto FLow 1079101 1079125 

AG-900+S 1079106 1079117 

Remote 1079119 1079111 

SolidBlue 1079118 1079110 

Auto FLow 1079128 1079124 

AG-900+S 1079131 1079132 

Remote 1079105 1079116 

SolidBlue 1079129 1079115 

Auto FLow 1079126 1079122 

AG-900+S 1079112 1079109 

Remote 1079130 1079114 

SolidBlue 1079120 1079113 

Auto FLow 1079127 1079123 

AG-900+S 1079104 1079121 





ProMeter VDK Controllers 

Part Number 

1123694 Controller, ProMeter VDK, 240V 

1123461 Controller, ProMeter VDK, 380V 

Description 

ProMeter VDK Cables 

Cable Type 

Length m (ft) 

3 (9.8) 6 (19.7) 9 (29.5) 15 (49.2) 

Encoder 1503566 1503567 1503568 1503569 

Motor Power 1503562 1503563 1503564 1503565 

Applicator Solenoid 1009269 1009360 1009361 1044857 

Transducer 1009362 1009363 1009364 1044856 

Digital/Analog N/A N/A 1013449 1044859 

Trigger/Volume N/A N/A 1013660 1044848 




Web Content 



Description 

Nordson VDK metering applicators provide precision 

and control for dynamic robot applications such as 

foam-in-place gasketing, bonding, and sealing. These 

applicators are ideal for high-viscosity silicones, butyls, 

epoxies, and hot melt materials. 

• Metering technology close to the application point delivers 

precise dispense accuracy within ±1 percent. 

• High dynamic servo drives provides fast response and 

volumetric precision. 

• PLC control with intuitive touch-screen interface 

• PROFIBUS interface for integrated system control 

• Freely programmable pressure snuffback to eliminate 

overpressure and hammerheads 

• External-speed input reference signals synchronize with 

automation speed when mounted on a robot or used in 

a stationary position, resulting in deposition uniformity 

regardless of robot or line-speed changes, including 

programmable output fine adjust factor 

• Choice of ambient, temperature-conditioned, and heated 

configurations provides application versatility. 

• Configurations with various Nordson applicator modules 

possible 

• Inlet and outlet pressure control - pressure-controlled material 

supply possible 

• 24V heater on extended nozzle 

VDK Metering Applicator 





Features 

• Available with precision gear pumps in selectable capacities 

• High dynamic Servo drives 

• Available as stand-alone version with separate Siemens® S7 

PLC 

• Easy integration to existing lines as system retrofit through 

interfaces to parent machine 

• Key-to-line communication with parent machine 

• Different temperature sensor choices (Ni-120, PT100) 

• Recirculation ports selectable (when in operation with 

recirculating system) 

• Quick installation 

• Service-friendly design - easy accessible service parts like 

pumps and couplings 

• Easy to operate with intuitive graphical touch panel user 

interface 

• Configurable product meets specific application needs 

• Rigid low vibration design 

• Special requirements can be offered as an engineered system 

on request 

Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG. 


Parameter 


VDK midi 

Max. output L/hr (1) 33 

Approx. weight kg (lb) 

(incl. Swivel, robot flange) 

15 (33) 

Temperature °C (°F) 

Heated cold 

40–250 (76–478) ambient 


230 VAC +PE 

Max. adhesive pressure bar (psi) 100 (1,450) 


Pressure control 

Hose connections/swivel 

Re-circulation port 

Applicator modules 

PT100 / Ni-120 

Inlet and outlet 

8,13,16, 20, 32 mm 

Optional 

AG900+/AN25 SUN/H20 + others on request 


(1) 

Maximum output rate depends on material, foam rate, and selected pump size. 

(2) 








Type 


A B C 

Capacity 

(cc.rev) 

Output 

@70rpm (L/hr) 

Type 1.2 34.0 70 66 1.2 5.04 

VDK midi 

Type 1.75 40.5 70 66 1.75 7.35 

Type 3.0 44.5 70 66 3.0 12.6 

Type 6.0 63.0 70 66 6.0 25.2 

Dimensions 









Web Content 



Description 

Nordson PS Metering Stations maintain consistent 

application pressure and improve adhesive metering 

precision. The systems 

• act as a booster pump to compensate high pressure/volume 

losses and maintain system pressure, e.g. with high viscous 

materials like butyls 

• provide multiple adhesive streams to add application points 

• move the volumetric adhesive supply unit as close as possible 

to the point of application to provide consistent and precise 

adhesive flow 

The Nordson PS Metering Station enhances adhesive 

output streams or improve process efficiency. 

The PS Metering Station normally is an integral component 

of an engineered system but can also be provided as a 

retrofit solution. The retrofit version has a separate control 

cabinet with PLC and intuitive touch panel interface 

for easy integration into existing installations, including 

key-to-line functionality to be controlled by the parent 

machine. 


Adding a PS Metering Station can be an economical way 

to extend the adhesive streams rather than investing in a 

complete new melter. 

The compact layout allows metering precision as close to 

the point of application as possible. 

The PS Metering Station optionally features a circulation 

port, which builds a highly dynamic application system 

with re-circulating applicators for accurate intermittent 

applications. 

Unwanted hammerheads and inconsistent beads are 

eliminated. 

As a booster pump it will help to maintain a consistent 

pressure by compensating pressure losses in the system, 

a problem which is often caused when applying higher 

viscous materials. 

The PS Metering Station is available in two layout versions 

with 1 to 4 pumps depending on the output capacity. The 

pumps feature 1 or 2 outputs and high dynamic servo 

drives. 

PS Metering Station Control Cabinet 





Features 

• Precision gear pumps in selectable sizes from 0.2 cc/min -n to 

50 cc/min -n 

• High temperature applications < 250 °C 

• High pressure applications





PS midi 

Part Number 

Type 


A B C 

Capacity 

(cc.rev) 

Output 

@100 rpm 

(L/hr) 

7521694 GP 03 M0.5 3 76 76 0.2 1.2 

7521751 GP 03 M1 3 76 76 0.4 2.4 

7521755 GP 03 M2 3 76 76 0.8 4.8 

7521703 GP 06 M2 6 76 76 1.7 10.2 

7528130 GP 12 M2 12 76 76 3.5 21 

7521668 GP 25 M2 25 76 76 7 42 

7055336 GP 30 M2 30 76 76 8.4 50.4 

7523855 GP 50 M2 50 76 76 13.3 80 

7053428 GP 100 M1 

15 195 120 16.7 100 

PS maxi 

7525111* GP 160 M2 

7522285* GP 220 M2 

25 195 120 27 162 

35 195 120 37 222 

*Additional heating cartridges needed 

7500209* GP 300 M2 

50 195 120 50 300 

Dimensions 

PS midi 

PS midi 2x2 

PS midi 4x2 





Dimensions (contd) 

PS maxi 

Metering Station Width X 

PS maxi 1x ~405 






Liquid Adhesive Equipment 


Web Content 

Liquid Adhesive Equipment | 15-1 


Description 

Nordson LA 300 dual-acting piston pumps offer 

flexibility and consistent high-flow rates of liquid 

adhesives in paper converting industries such as folding 

carton, envelope or bag & sack manufacturing. 

The filter housing can be rotated around the air motor 

body, which allows flexible mounting. Further, the filter 

housing can be moved close to the applicator area by 

means of an extra wide high pressure hose. Additionally, 

the LA38x pressure regulators do not need a drain pipe. 

This allows you to move the regulator and the filter 

housing close to the applicator area to prevent pressure 

drops. 

Wall-mount, lid-mount and system-trolley 

configurations are available to meet specific installation 

requirements. 

A 7:1 air-to-fluid ratio delivers precise application when 

paired with LA 38X pressure regulators. High flow rates 

allow use of lower pressure, reducing risk of adhesive 

shearing. Higher flow capability also reduces the need to 

use multiple pumps in high flow applications. 

LA 300 pumps accommodate 20, 30 and 200 liter (5 or 

55 gallon) containers. The versatile systems offer both 

standard and wear-resistant rods to handle a wide range 

of adhesive and production needs. The pump seals and 

lubricating oil are US FDA approved, making them 

acceptable for use in food and tobacco industries. 

LA 300 Piston Pump 



15-2 | Liquid Adhesive Equipment 



Parameter 

Specification 

Maximum pump rate/hr l (gal) 120 (31.7) 

Maximum hydraulic pressure bar (psi) 42 (600) 

Ambient temperature °C (°F) 1-50 (33-122) 

Suction lift (wet) @ 3000 mPas m (ft) 4 (13) 

Air-to-fluid ratio 7:1 

Maximum air consumption Ni/s (scfm) 1.8* (3.8) 

Minimum air line ID mm (in.) 8 (5/16) 

Sound intensity 




Cart Systems and Level Control 

Part Number 

Description 

K850002 Configurable Cart System - Adhesive System Console (ASC) 

7300113 Flush/Return Hose 

7302303 Manifold, 1 in 4 out, With Nipples 


7302304 Manifold, 1 in 4 out + Nipples And Shutoff Gauge 

7302299 Manifold, 1 in 8 out + Nipples And Shutoff Gauge 

1054761 Dip Tube Kit for 55 gallon Drums 

7301107 Dip Tube Kit for 1000 l Container 

377188 Run-up I/P 1 in 1 out, LogiComm, LA Timers 

377189 Run-up I/P 1 in 2 out, LogiComm, LA Timers 

377733 Mounting Kit for 377188 


7304186 Kit, LA100C Level Detection, LA3XX, Wall Mount 

7304308 Kit, LA100C Level Detection, LA3XX, Lid Mount 

Remote Filter Mounting 

Part Number 

7300409 Bracket for remote Filter 

7300410 Nipple, m 16 x 5 

7300411 Hose, 1.5 m (4.9 ft) 

7300412 Hose, 3.0 m (9.8 ft) 

7300413 Hose, 6.0 m (19.7 ft) 

7300414 Hose, 9.0 m (29.5 ft) 

Description 





Dimensions 




Web Content 



Description 

Nordson LA 310 dual-acting piston pumps offer 

flexibility and consistent flow rates of liquid adhesives 

in folding carton, envelope, and bag and sack 

manufacturing. Whether lid-mount or wall-mount 

versions, or on Nordson’s adhesive system console, 

the system offers flexibility for installations in OEM 

machines or to retrofit existing production lines. 

A 5:1 air-to-fluid ratio delivers precise application when 

paired with LA 380 pressure regulators. High flow rates 

allow use of lower pressure, reducing risk of adhesive 

shearing. 

LA 380 regulators do not need drain pipes, hoses or 

glue chambers to relieve glue pressure making it possible 

to place regulators close to the applicators. 

LA 310 pumps and LA 380 pressure regulators use non 

PTFE seals or parts and the lubricating oil is US FDA 

approved, making the pumps acceptable for use in food 

and tobaco industries. 

LA 310 Pump Lid Mount on bucket 


Parameter 

Specification 

Maximum pump rate/hr l (gal) 48 (12.6) 


Ambient temperature °C (°F) 1-50 (33-122) 

Suction lift (wet) @ 3000 mPas m (ft) 2 (7.5) 

Air-to-fluid ratio 5:1 

Maximum air consumption NL/s 0.53* (1.1) 

Sound intensity 



Dimensions 

Wall-Mounted 






Lid-Mounted 






Pumps 


7303405 Pump, Piston, LA310 LA310 Piston Pump 

7303410 Pump, Piston, LA310, Wall LA310 Piston Pump, Wall mount 

7303420 Pump, Piston, LA310, Lid LA310 Piston Pump, Lid mount 

Cart Systems and Level Control 

Part Number 

Description 

K850002 Configurable Cart System - Adhesives System Console (ASC) 

7302303 Manifold, 1 in, 4 out With Nipples 

7302298 Manifold, 1 in, 8 out, With Nipples 

7302304 Manifold, 1 in, 4 out, With Nipples And Shutoff Gauge 

7302299 Manifold, 1 in, 8 out, With Nipples And Shutoff Gauge 

1054761 Dip Tube Kit for 55 gallon Drums 

7301107 Dip Tube Kit for 1000 liter Container 

377188 Run-up I/P 1 in, 1 out, LogiComm, LA Timers 

377189 Run-up I/P, 1 in, 2 out, LogiComm, LA Timers 



7304186 Kit, LA100C Level Detection, LA3XX, Wall Mount 

7304308 Kit, LA100C Level Detection, LA3XX, Lid Mount 

Pressure Gauge Kits 


377985 0-6 bar (0-90 psi) Kits include gauge, tee and fittings 

377986 0-25 bar (0-350 psi) 

377987 0-60 bar (0-900 psi) 

Mounting Kits 


7303408 Kit, Lid-mount, LA 310 Stainless steel pump lid 400 mm with handles; LA310 

7303409 Kit, Wall-mount, LA310 Wall-mount bracket, LA310 




Web Content 



Description 

Diaphragm pumps maximize delivery of cold liquid 

adhesives, including PVA, solvent-based, starch and 

dextrine adhesives. 

• Engineered polyamide-based plastics (PTFE) yield high 

material strength and corrosion resistance. 

• Use for low-pressure, constant adhesive delivery of up to 50 

liters per minute (13.3 gal/min) with the LA 320. 

• Air-to-fluid pressure ratio of 1:1 produces reliable output at 

low pressures. 

• Changeover mechanism reduces pump wink for constant 

adhesive delivery over a wide viscosity range. 

• Metal-free outer casing protects against aggressive, corrosive 

environments. 

• Compact design installs easily on parent machines or lidmount 

systems, and interchangeable suction and output 

connections speed setup. 

LA 320 Diaphragm Pump 

• PTFE bonded diaphragms, with integrated metal cores, 

maximize corrosion resistance and delivery response. 


Parameter 

Specification 

Pump type 

Diaphragm 

Air-to-fluid pressure ratio 1:1 

Pumping rate, maximum L/min (gal/min) 50 (13.3) 

Maximum operating pressure MPa (psi) 0.7 (103) 

Air inlet connection R 1/4 

Output threading 

1/2 in. NPT(F) 

Solid kernel size, maximum mm (in.) 4 (0.16) 

Suction lift, meters: 

Dry 

Wet 

1.5 

9.5 

Operating temperature: 

Maximum 

Ambient 

120°C (248°F) 

1 to 50°C (33 to 120°F) 

Weight kg (lb) 7 (15.4) 


CE 





LA 320 Diaphragm Part Numbers 


727312 Pump, Diaphragm 1/2 in. Pump only, no filter, no regulator 

373224 LA320 Pump, Diaphragm, No Mounting Unmounted, with filter 

370883 LA320-A1FNN Pump (20L) Lid mounted (D=314 mm), with filter, no regulator 

370871 LA320-B1FNN Pump (30L) Lid mounted (D=400 mm), with filter, no regulator 

373223 LA320-M Pump With Filter Corrugated versions, unmounted 

374425 LA320M-A1FNN Corrugated versions, lid mounted (D=314 mm) 

374300 LA320M-B1FNN Corrugated versions, lid mounted (D=400 mm 

374426 LA320M-D1FNN Corrugated versions, lid mounted (D=600 mm) 

7302582 LA320-B1FSN, Diaphragm Pump (S=LA381) Lid mounted (D=400 mm), with filter, LA 381 regulator 

1069177 Pump Assembly, Dip Tube, One Zone, L.P. LA320 pump + accessories 

1069178 Pump Assembly, Dip Tube, Two Zone, L.P. LA320 pump + accessories 

Service Parts 


373403 Kit, Air Valve, LA320 Pump For air motor 

373402 Kit, Hydraulic, LA320 Pump O-Rings, Balls, Diaphragm 

312500 Gauge, Pressure, 0-6 bar, G 1/4 Air Pressure Gauge 0-6 bar, G1/4 

Auxiliary Components 


7300421 Level Detection Kit, Double Probe For pump lid 

7300379 Level Controller, Double Probe Spare part, Double probe 

7300388 Cable, Spiral, Probe to Control Box Connection cable for probe 

1070511 Hose, Assembly,1 m, 1/2-20 Female, 3/8 ID T Hose assembly 

Dimensions 

C 

E 

D 

B 

A 

H 

I 

F 

J 

K 

L 

G 

DISCHARGE 

COMPRESSED 

AIR 

SUCTION 


A 140 (5.1) 

B 124 (4.88) 

C 286 (11.25) 

D 152 (6) 

E 164 (6.46) 

F 132 (5.2) 

G 191 (7.5) 

H 256 (10.08) 

I 51 (2) 

J 8 (0.31) 

K 156 (6.14) 

L 213 (8.39) 





Web Content 


Description 

Pressurized adhesive containers feature safety brackets, 

filter inserts, safety cam locks and mounting screws. 

Tanks are available in three capacities to meet specific 

volume demands. Containers provide 3.8, 19 or 38-liter 

(1, 5, 10 gal) capacities. 

Features 

• Wetted fittings and tank casing are made of stainless steel to 

resist corrosion. 

• Safety valve releases overpressure tank buildup. 

• Wide openings facilitate filling and cleaning. 

• Straight-wall design speeds cleaning. 

• Standard adhesive pre-filter helps ensure clean adhesive 

delivery. 

• Safety cam locks and quick-release mounting handles provide 


LA 105, LA 120, & LA 140 Pressure Containers 

• Safety-tesed units include safety certificate. 

LA 105 Container 

Provides 3.8 liter (1 gal) filling capacity for use with 

high-cost adhesives and lab testing. 

LB 120 Container 

Provides 15-liter filling capacity for standard adhesive 

delivery requirements; Non PTFE® 


Provides 19-liter (5 gal) filling capacity for standard 

adhesive delivery requirements. 

LB 140 Container 

Provides 30-liter filling capacity for high-volume 

operations, Non PTFE 

NOTE: Optional level control is available for all units. 


Provides 38-liter (10 gal) filling capacity for highvolume 

operations. 

NOTE: Not saleable in Europe. 






Parameter LA 105 LA 120 LA 140 LB 120 LB 140 

Operating pressure range mPa (psi) 0.05 to 0.38 (7.5 to 56) 

Operating pressure, maximum mPa (psi) 0.38 (56) 

Filling capacity L (gal) 3.785 (1) 18.972 (5) 37.85 (10) 15 (3.962) 30 (7.925) 



377260 Pressurized Adhesive Container, LA 105, 3.8 L (1 gal) no level control 

377261 Pressurized Adhesive Container, LA 120, 18.97 L (5 gal) no level control 

377264 Pressurized Adhesive Container, LA 120, 18.97 L (5 gal) Includes level control 

377262 (1) Pressurized Adhesive Container, LA 140, 37.85 L (10 gal) no level control 

377265 (1) Pressurized Adhesive Container, LA 140, 37.85 L (10 gal) Includes level control 

313388 Pressurized Adhesive Container LB120 15L non PTFE no level control 

313389 Pressurized Adhesive Container LB140 30L non PTFE no level control 

313390 Pressurized Adhesive Container, LB140, 30L, LB140 includes level control 

(1) 

LA140 Not Saleable in Europe 

Dimensions 

Dimensions mm (in.) LA 105 LA 120 LA 140 

Diameter 228.6 (9) 304.8 (12) 

Width (overall) 342.9 (13.5) 

Width (base) 245 (9.6) 321 (12.6) 

Height 280 (11.6) 636.5 (25.1) 708.2 (27.9) 




Web Content 



Description 

The LA 380 Series pressure regulators meet the need 

of fast pressure adjustment in cold glue application at 

variable speed. Accurate regulation of pressure during 

acceleration or deceleration means products receive the 

right amount of glue more consistently, which helps to 

eliminate product waste. Because the LA 380 has only 

one inlet and one outlet, it does not require any dump 

valve or drain pipe, providing cleaner operation and 

ease of mounting that lets you locate the regulator close 

to the source of your needs, which will reduce pressure 

drop and increase regulation accuracy. 

• Regulator controls, corrects and helps provide accurate 

adhesive flow. 

• Metal parts are made of stainless steel, providing long service 

life even with aggressive glues. 

• All seals and lubricants have been approved for use by the 

tobacco industries and by the US FDA. 

• The base plate is compatible with the WM 370 and WM 350 

type regulators. 

• Regulators can be used with both low and high pressure 

pumps, or can be connected to a central pumping system to 

regulate adhesive pressure delivered to each specific machine. 

LA 380 Pressure Regulator 


Parameter LA 381 LA 382 LA 383 

Hydraulic pressure range bar (psi) 0–7 (0–100) 0–18 (0–250) 0–48 (0–700) 

Control air pressure range bar (psi) 0–6 (0–85) 

Adhesive line connections 

1/2-20 UNF 

Compressed air connection 

G 1/4 in. 


1–50 °C ( 33–122 °F) 

Maximum relative humidity 95% 

Noise emission 

< 70 dB (A) 

Weight kg (lb) 4.5 (10) 5 (11) 






Part Number 

377912 LA 381 Pressure Regulator, 0–7 bar/100 psi 



Description 

Accessories 

Pressure Gauge 

Manifold with Ball Valves 

Component P/N Description 

Pressure 

Gauge 

Manifold 

377985 Kit, Pressure Gauge, 0–6 bar (90 psi), Liquid Filled, Stainless Steel With Tee Connection and Fittings 




7302299 Manifold, 1 in 8 out + Nipples, Shutoff, Gauge 


7302304 Manifold, 1 in 4 out + Nipples, Shutoff, Gauge 

7302328 Kit, Pressure Gauge, for Manifold 

Lubricant 377933 Oil, FDA Approved, 10 ml With Syringe 






Dimensions 

LA381 

128 mm 

(5,04 in.) 

288 mm 

(11.34 in.) 

114 mm 

(4.49 in.) 

15 mm 

(0.59 in.) 

30 mm 

(1.18 in.) 

Ø 6,5 mm 

(0.26 in.) 

103 mm 

(4.05 in.) 

LA 382/383 

145 mm 

(5,71 in.) 

304 mm 

(11.97 in.) 

114 mm 

(4.49 in.) 

15 mm 

(0.59 in.) 

30 mm 

(1.18 in.) 

Ø 6,5 mm 

(0.26 in.) 

117 mm 

(4.60 in.) 









Web Content 



Description 

High-cycling WM 801 Electric Applicators maximize 

flexibility and performance in high-speed, intermittent 

cold adhesive applications. A choice of applicator styles 

provides pattern flexibility in contact or production 

environments with frequent product changeovers. 

• Compact applicators deliver high-performance in contact or 

non-contact operation with a cycle time of 3.0 milliseconds 

and a minimum service life of 500 million cycles. 

• The WM 801-S is a “quick slide plate” applicator. It provides 

fastest possible pattern plate exchange during production. An 

additional slide plate allows preparation of one while another 

is in production, for an instant changeover. 

• The WM 801-Q design allows quick-change versatility for 

contact nozzles or pattern plates. Interchangeable nozzles and 

pattern plates make changeovers quick and easy. 

• Single-piece armature assembly and an efficient coil design 

permit fast, repeatable adhesive deposition with clean, accurate 

cut-off. 

• Lightweight applicator-mount bracket simplifies installation 

and a vertical micro-adjust control facilitates critical applicator 

positioning. Bracket swings up and out to access applicator for 

cleaning or removal. 

LA 801 Applicator with Attached Pattern Plate 

• Configurable pattern plates use flow dynamics to provide 

sharp cut-off, even at changing line speeds, while allowing the 

flexibility to meet specific deposition needs. 

• Corrosion-resistant and stainless steel parts provide durability 

and help prolong applicator life. 

NOTE: The WM801 Series applicators can be driven by various 

devices. Refer to the Applicator Driver Selection Chart and 

the Applicator Driver Comparison Chart in the Controls 

section for more information. 






Parameter 


Hydraulic hose connection 

Specification 

4.8 (700) maximum 

1/2-20 UNF 

Minimum cycle time (1) ms 3.0 

Nozzle diameter range (2) : 

Contact mm (in.) 

0.3–1.0 (0.012–0.039) 

Non-contact mm (in.) 0.3–0.7 (0.012–0.028) 

45 x 34 (1.77 x 1.34) 

Pattern plate sizes (2)(3) mm (in.) 

45 x 45 (1.77 x 1.77) 

45 x 60 (1.77 x 2.36) 

0.5 (0.020) 

Pattern plate hole diameters mm (in.) 

0.7 (0.028) 

1.0 (0.039) 


Weight kg (lb) 

Peak current 1.8 A, holding current 0.4 A 

(1) 

Cycle time based on an adhesive viscosity of 800 cps. Actual cycle time will vary depending on adhesive viscosity and characteristics. 

(2) 

Specify and purchase nozzles and pattern plates separately. 

(3) 

Pattern plates are a configurable product. Widths shown represent standard sizes only; custom sizes are available to meet specific 

application parameters. 

(4) 

Use with Nordson applicator driver products. 



7301316 Applicator, WM801-Q without nozzle 

7301317 Applicator, WM801-S, + Slide Plate 34 mm with slide plate (no pattern plate included) 

7302932 Applicator, WM801-S, + Slide Plate 45 mm with slide plate (no pattern plate included) 

7300104 WM801-S, Upgrade Kit (retrofit) Upgrade WM801-Q or WM801-P to WM801-S 






Accessories 

WM 801 Electric Applicator Nozzles 


373076 Bead Nozzle, SE, 0.30 mm (0.012 in.) Dia short-engagement, non-contact 

373083 Bead Nozzle, SE, 0.35 mm (0.014 in.) Dia 





374760 Long Engagement Nozzle, SE, 0.30 mm (0.012 in.) Dia long-engagement, non-contact 

374762 Long Engagement Nozzle, SE, 0.35 mm (0.014 in.) Dia 







374741 Contact Nozzle, 0.30 mm (0.012 in.) Dia, Depth 0.2 mm diameters as noted depth 0.2 mm 

7301651 Contact Nozzle, 0.35 mm (0.014 in.) Dia, Depth 0.2 mm, Envelope 

374743 Contact Nozzle, 0.40 mm (0.016 in.) Dia, Depth 0.2 mm 





313353 Kit, Quick Change Plate, 34 x 45 mm includes guides, screws, washers 

313354 Kit, Quick Change Plate, 45 x 45 mm 

313355 Kit, Quick Change Plate, 60 x 45 mm 

312528 Quick Change Plate, 34 x 45 mm plate only 

312530 Quick Change Plate, 45 x 45 mm 

312533 Quick Change Plate, 60 x 45 mm 

371319 Quick Change Plate, 34 x 45 mm, High Flow 

371709 Quick Change Plate, 45 x 45 mm, High Flow 

371049 Slot Nozzle, 34 mm QCP Needs part 313353 



379960 Shim, Set Blind 4 x 0.2, 4 x 0.3, 4 x 0.4, QCPSN34 







WM 801 Electric Applicator Brackets 

Part Number 

372829 Vertical Micro Applicator Mounting 

373220 Vertical Macro Applicator Mounting 

7301069 Bracket, Straight Line 

7301613 Straight Line Bracket, Drive Side 

371454 Adapter Block, 801, Straight Line 

371365 Kit, Bracket, Bridge, Build Your Own 

Description 

WM 801 Electric Applicator Cables 


372442 Cable, WM408 to e-applicator Cable, lockable WM 801 - WM 408 & H. board - 5 m 

7302533 Cable, LogiComm to WM801, 2.5 m 

7302534 Cable, LogiComm to WM801, 5 m 

7302535 Cable, LogiComm to WM801, 10 m 

7302037 Cable, WM801 Hard-wired, 18M hard wiring (EPC30) 






Dimensions 

30x30 

25x25 

WM-801-S Electric Applicator with Bracket 

M6(2x) 









Web Content 



Description 

High-speedcycling LA 825 series enhance efficiency and 

productivity of production process by maintaining an 

overall high and even bonding quality. 

Features 

• 250Hz continuous cycle rate 

• Sharp cut-off in high frequent dotting mode and clean 

operation due to new ceramic nozzle insert 

• Highly accurate and consistent flow control due to improved 

stroke adjustment 

The LA 825RC with improved RC nozzle geometry 

offers sharp and cleaner cut-off helping improve product 

quality and reduce rejects. The elongated nozzle allows 

positioning closer to carriers, increasing production 

flexibility. 

Independent stroke adjustment for each applicator 

further increases flexibility particularly when using 

multiple applicator configurations. 

LA 825RC Applicator 

The LA 825 applicator’s new design with a single piece 

stainless steel housing and superior engineered armature 

increases durability and helps to prolong service life and 

production uptime. 

LA 825 series accommodate a wide range of adhesives 

and a choice of nozzle sizes is available to meet specific 

application requirements. 

The applicators are also available with an LED for 

improved actuation visibility. 






Specifications apply to LA 825 and LA 825RC liquid adhesive applicators. 

Parameter 

Peak Voltage Duration 

LogiComm (Universal Applicator Driver) 

LA 4XX/LA 404-2 

WM 408 driver board 

Holding voltage (VDC)/ Holding current (A): 


LA 4XX/LA 404-2 

Wm 408 driver board 

Adhesive Connection 

LA 825 

LA 825RC 

Viscosity range (1) 

Minimal uptime (2) 


LA 4XX/LA 404-2 

Wm 408 driver board 

Minimal downtime (2) 


LA 4XX/LA 404-2 , WM 408 driver board 

Adhesive Pressure Maximum LA 825 (LA 825 RC) 


LA 4XX/LA 404-2 


Maximum Continuous Cycle Rate 


LA 4xxx/LA 404-2 


Safety rating 

Specification 

Duration 0.8 ms @ 1.8 A 

Duration 1.8 ms 

Duration 1.6 ms 

0.6 A 

5.0 VDC 

0.6 A 

1 / 2 -20 UNF 

1 / 2 -20 UNF 

0–1500 mPas (Linear to 1200 MPas) 

0.8 ms 

1 ms 

1 ms 

1 ms 

1 ms 

18 bar/261 psi (23 bar/363 psi) 

20 bar/290 psi (23 bar/363 psi) 

18 bar/261 psi (23 bar/363 psi) 

250 Hz 

250Hz 

IP65 

(1) 

Linearity is dependent upon the rheology of the adhesive. The viscosity is measured according to the Brookfield method. 

(2) 

Time is dependent upon the adhesive. Minimum uptime is related to bead length. Minimum downtime is related to the distance 

between two beads (the stitch). 






Parts and Accessories - LA 825 Applicator 

Applicator for Use with All Controllers 

Part Number 

7303130 Applicator, LA 825 - 1/2-20 UNF 

7303140 Applicator, LA 825 LED - 1/2-20 UNF 

Description 

Nozzles - Non-Contact, Short Engagement 

Part Number 







Description 

Nozzles - Non-Contact, Long Engagement 

Part Number 

374760 0.3 mm, Long Engagement 







Description 





Parts and Accessories - LA 825 Applicator (contd) 

Options (Filter Valve) 

Part Number 

Description 

7300530 Filter Assembly ,75 Mesh, 1/8 BSP-1/2-20 UNF 

738203 Valve, Swivel Assembly, 1/2-20 X 1/2-20 

Cables for LogiComm Applicators 


7302530 Cable, LogiComm to LA 825-Cordset, 2.5 m "LA820 LogiComm" and LA 825 to Logi- 

7302531 Cable, LogiComm to LA 825-Cordset, 5 m 

Comm (lengths as noted) 



7301617 Cable, Splitter, Applicator, 7-Pin Serial 

To drive two applicators LA820 LogiComm 

or LA 825 at one channel 

7302978 Harness, 2 m, HP, Remote Conn. Box & LA-404-2 Wire harness, use in combination with ASC 

7302979 Harness, 3 m, HP, Remote Conn. Box & LA-404-2 

7302980 Harness, 4.5 m, HP, Remote Conn. Box & LA-404-2 

7303190 Harness, 2 m, HP, LogiComm, GD200S 


7303192 Harness, 4.5 m, HP, LogiComm, GD200S 






Parts and Accessories - LA 825RC Applicator 

Applicators for Use with All Controllers 

Part Number 

Description 

7303153 Applicator, LA 825RC, With Nozzle , 0.30 mm 



7303163 Applicator, LA 825RC LED, With Nozzle , 0.30 mm 



LA 825RC - Common Service Parts 

Part Number 

Description 

7302883 Nozzle, Steel, LA 825RC, 0.30 mm 



7304129 Needle and Nozzle Kit, Steel, LA 825RC, 0.30 mm 



Options (Filter Valve) 

Part Number 

Description 

7300530 Filter Assembly, 75 Mesh, 1/8 BSP-1/2-20 UNF 

738203 Valve, Swivel Assembly, 1/2-20 X 1/2-20 

Brackets for installations in Folder Gluers 

Part Number 

Description 

7303070 Bracket, Folding Carton, With Horizontal Bar, LA82x, LA650 

7303069 Bracket, Folding Carton, LA82x, LA650 





Cables for LogiComm Applicators 

Part 

Number 

Description 

7302530 Cable, LogiComm to LA 825-Cordset, 2.5 m 



Comments 

"LA 825 LogiComm" and LA 825 to LogiComm/LA404-2 

(lengths as noted) 


7301617 Cable, Splitter, Applicator, 7-pin Serial to drive two applicators LA 825 LogiComm or LA 825 at one 

channel 

7302978 Harness, 2 m, HP, Remote Conn. Box & LA-404-2 Wire harness, use in combination with ASC 

7302979 Harness, 3 m, HP, Remote Conn. Box & LA-404-2 

7302980 Harness, 4.5 m, HP, Remote Conn. Box & LA-404-2 



7303192 Harness, 4.5 m, HP, LogiComm, GD200S 






Dimensions 

LA825 









Web Content 



LV 227 Pneumatic Bead Applicator 

Description 

• Air-open, air-close actuation resists adhesive build-up. 

• Use for non-contact applications. 

• Zero-cavity needle design provides precise cut-off and helps 

prevent adhesive curing on the nozzle. 

• Integrated needle-stroke adjustment allows accurate adhesive 

volume control. 

• Quick-disconnect air fitting speeds installation. 

• Narrow body profile installs easily on most parent machinery. 

• Stainless-steel needle resists corrosion from aggressive liquid 

adhesives. 

• Includes mounted 24 VDC or 110 VAC solenoid. 

LV227 Pneumatic Bead Applicator 


Parameter LV 227 


Operating air pressure bar (psi) 4 to 6 (47-87) 

Cycle time, minimum 

13.5 ms 

Nozzle diameter range 

0.3-1.5 mm (0.012-0.059 in.) 

Pattern coating width mm (in.) 

n/a 

Viscosity range maximum (cps) 3,500 


230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC or 

110 VAC solenoid 

Weight kg (lb) 0.4 (0.88) 







LV 227 Applicators 

Part Number 

230 VAC 110 VAC 24 VDC 

24 VDC 

chemical 

resistant 

Description 

Comment 

373381 372849 372843 377805 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) Dia Nozzle New design, air-open/air-closed 

373382 372850 372844 377806 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) Dia Nozzle 





LV 227 Service Parts 


372855 Kit, Needle Plus Nozzle And Seals, 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) Dia Stainless steel, includes needle, nozzles 

372856 Kit, Needle Plus Nozzle And Seals, 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) Dia 

and O-ring. 





372873 Seal Kit 

372874 Seal Kit, Chemical Resistant 

771138 Solenoid Valve 45A-L00-DDFJ-1KD, E302 

Solenoid LV227/WM710, 24 VDC, 

12.7W 

771139 Solenoid Valve 45A-L00-DAAJ-1KD, E302 Solenoid LV227/WM710, 115 VAC 

771142 Solenoid Valve 45A-L00-DABJ-1KD, E302 Solenoid LV227/WM710, 230 VAC 

771307 Solenoid Valve 45A-L00-DDAJ-1KE, E302, 5.4W Solenoid LV227/WM710, 24 VDC, 5.4W 

7302226 Needle Assembly, LV227, 0.4 mm, Corrosion Resistant 

LV 227 Nozzle Covering 

Part Number 

373568 Nozzle Cover With Solenoid 

374026 Nozzle Cover Without Solenoid 

374027 Solenoid, 24 VDC 

374113 Air Manifold For Nozzle Cover 

7302596 Kit, Nozzle Cover, Silicone, RC, 15 Pieces 

Description 







LV 227 Cables 


7302542 Cable, Pneumatic Applicator to LogiComm, Hard-wired, 10 m 

7302539 Cable, LogiComm to Solenoid (16/16) Pneumatic Applicator, 24 VDC, 2.5 m 

7302540 Cable, LogiComm to Solenoid (16/16) Pneumatic Applicator, 24 VDC, 5 m 

7302541 Cable, LogiComm to Solenoid (16/16) Pneumatic Applicator, 24 VDC, 10 m 

also suitable for LA404-2, LA302 

and WM408 

Dimensions 

M5 











Web Content 


LA725 Pneumatic Liquid Adhesive Applicator 

Description 

LA 725 applicators are new, state-of-the-art pneumatic liquid 

adhesive applicators for use as non-contact and contact bead 

applicators as well as control valves in liquid adhesive slot 

applicators. 

LA 725 and LA 725-S applicators feature superior module life 

and increased high-speed capability. Customers benefit from 

greater productivity, less maintenance and reduced downtime. 

• Module – Longer Life – Snuff-back - Better Adhesive Cutoff 

New, patented hydraulic seal technology (used in MiniBlue® II 

applicators) delivers operating life more than 2-3 times that of the 

previous WM 710 or any other competitive offering. The seal features 

silicone material which makes it resistant to most chemicals used in 

water-based adhesives. And, the snuff-back technology provides a 

superior cutoff performance. 

• Solenoid – Improved Speed – Consistency – Operating Life 

New high-speed solenoid technology improves speed, reduces cycle 

times and delivers longer life with consistent operation over the life of 

the valve. 

• Advanced Module + Innovative Solenoid = Superior Performance 

Combining the new module and solenoid technology produces: 

-- 

High-speed cycle times of approximately 7.6ms (adhesive dependent) 

-- 

Unmatched operational life since sealing technology is frictionless 

-- 

Superior consistency and performance 

LA 725 applicators dispense a standard range of water-based 

adhesives with viscosities up to 20,000 cps. 

LA 725 Pneumatic Liquid 

Adhesive Applicator 

The new LA 725 applicator was developed to replace the WM 

710 applicator to overcome the known limitations in some 

target markets regarding lifetime and wear out. Similar to the 

WM 710, the new applicator has a plunger resulting in a snuffback 

effect, which is especially beneficial when used on slot 

nozzle applications. 

Features 

• Improved lifetime (2-3x longer) due to use of the new patented seal 

concept within the modular-designed cartridge. 

• Fast cycle times (4.8 ms on/2.8 ms off) provide the opportunity for 

stitching and dotting application with a pneumatic valve. 

• Quick exchange of application module, solenoid with housing or 

cartridge. 

• Mechanically 100% backwards compatible with WM 710-Q & WM 

710-S applicators. 

LA 725-S Pneumatic Liquid 

Adhesive Applicator 





LA 275 Pneumatic Liquid Adhesive Applicators 


Parameter LA 725 

Operating Air Pressure 

5 - 6 bar (75 - 87 psi) 

Oiling of Compressed Air 

not needed 

Ambient Temperature Range 10 to 50° C (50 to 122° F) 

Filtering of Compressed Air 

particle filtering with 5µm or better 

Minimum Glue Pressure 1 bar (14.5 psi) 

Maximum Glue Pressure 

42 bar (610 psi) 

Minimum Glue Viscosity 

>500 cps 

Maximum Glue Viscosity 

20,000 cps 

Recommended PH Value 1 PH 4 to 7 

Solenoid Connector 


M8 screwed 

24 VDC +/-10 % / 4 Watt 

NO SPIKED SIGNALS ALLOWED 

Ingress Protection Class IP 64 

Air Pressure Connection 

Hose Connection Fitting 

3 - 5 mm (0.118 - 0.196 in.) 

½ 20 UNF 

Minimum On Time 2 4.8 ms 

Minimum Off Time 2 

* Actual specification values will vary depending on adhesive type and application parameters. 

2.8 ms 

1 

PH values outside the recommended range may result in corrosion or damage of seals, either of which will reduce the life and 

performance of the applicator. In case of unexpected corrosion due to adhesive used, the glue supplier needs to be contacted to identify 

an inhibitor that can be used as an additive to the glue to minimize corrosive effects. 

2 

Actual cycle time will vary depending on adhesive viscosity and characteristic. The minimum “on time” is defined by the bead length, the 

minimum “off time” is defined by the gap between two beads. 

Note: Adhesive used needs to be solvent-free 

Note: 1 bar = 14.5 psi = 105Pa 

Note: 0.4536 kg = 1 lb Note: 9 x °C/5 +32 = °F Note: 25.4 mm = 1 in. 

Note: 1 cps = 1 cP = 1 mPa s = 1 mNs/m2 








LA 725 and LA 725-S Applicators 

Part Number 

Description 

7304677 Applicator, LA 725 

7304700 Applicator, LA 725-S, with plate 34 mm 

LA 725 and LA 725-S Modules 

Part Number 

Description 

7304298 Module, complete, LA 725, d/a 

7304301 Housing LA 725, d/a, w.valve 

7304286 Cartridge, LA 725 

7304747 Kit, O-ring, cartridge LA 725 

LA 725 and LA 725-S Kits 

Part Number 

Description 

7300105 Kit, slide plate, 34mm 



7304810 Kit, quick change plate, 34 x 45 mm 



LA 725 and LA 725-S Nozzles 

Part Number 

Description 

313043 Bead nozzle, standard, 0.25 mm 









313092 Contact nozzle 0.3 mm, 0.2 groove 




313098 contact nozzle 0.7 mm, 0.2 groove 


Connection Cables for Hardwiring 

Part Number 

Description 

1100687 Cable assy, sol, m8, 3wire, 5 meters 

1100958 Cable assy, sol, m8, 3wire, 10 meters 

7304843 Cable assy, m8, 3wire with led, 10 m 

Connection Cables for Use with 

LogiComm 

Part Number 

7304844 

7304845 

Description 

Cable assy, m8, LogiComm to gun, 

5 m with connectors 

Cable assy, m8, LogiComm to gun, 


Connection Cables for Use with 

LA 404-2 

Part Number 

7304846 

7304847 

Description 

Cable assy, m8, LA 404-2 to gun, 


Cable assy, m8, LA 404-2 to gun, 







Dimensions 





Web Content 


Description 

Coating of liquid adhesives whether in paper 

converting or product assembly applications 

always ask for unique coating patterns and 

precise application depending on the substrate 

and adhesive used. 

Nordson offers a range of Liquid Adhesive 

Coating Applicators featuring customized 

pattern die sets or coating slot nozzles. 

Depending on the specific process parameters 

like application speed, adhesive viscosity and 

application patterns, Nordson provide the 

right Liquid Adhesive Coating Applicator 

which serves with evenness and high precision, 

whether it is an intermittent or continuous 

application. 

VarioCoat 

Nordson offers standard slot nozzles, that quickly 

mount to a standard LA applicator via a Quick Change 

Plate (QCP) or the patented Slide Plate, as well as 

customized multi-module coating applicators which are 

offered as an engineered system. 

Features 

• Standard or customized applicators to meet specific needs 

• Pneumatic or electric applicator modules available depending 

on process parameters (LA725 and WM801) 

• Compact & Service friendly design 

• Common or individual module control 

• Optimized adhesive channel geometries provide even glue 

distribution for fast and precise application 

WM 801 with attached pattern plate 

• Choice of machined pattern sets or shims for higher flexibility 






Parameter 


Applicator modules WM 801 LA725 

Actuation Electric Pneumatic 

Min. cycle time /application speed 1 3 ms 7.6 ms 

Operating adhesive pressure 48 bar 25 bar 

Adhesive viscosity < 4500 cps < 6000 cps 

Application width 

(1) 

Maximum cycles rate depends on applicator module, hydraulic and control air pressure, as well as adhesive viscosities. 

(2) 

Wider slot nozzles are available upon request. 

NOTE: Liquid Adhesive Multi-Module Slot Applicators are configurable and quoted per RFQ. 


Configurable pattern plates provide complex pattern flexibility specific to individual deposition requirements. 

Please contact your Nordson representative for more information regarding pattern plates. 






Standard Slot Nozzles (w/o Applicator) for Use with LA725 and WM 801 

Applicators 


371049 Slot Nozzle, 34 mm QCP Shims not included 



379960 Shim Set, Blind, 4X0.2, 4X0.3, 4X0.4,QCPSN34 



313353 Kit, Quick Change Plate, 34X45 mm 



312528 Quick Change Plate, 34X45 mm 



371319 Quick Change Plate, 34X45 mm, high flow 

371709 Quick Change Plate, 45X45 mm, high flow 

WM 801 with 34 mm 

Slide plate and 60 mm 

slot nozzle 

Special Slot Nozzles (w/o Applicator) for Use with QPC and Slide Plates 


7301441 Slot Nozzle, 90 mm QCP60 blind shim 

7302171 Slot Nozzle, 95 mm QCP60 90 mm coat; Wear resistant 

7302185 Slot Nozzle, 70 mm QCP34 60 mm coat 

7302414 Slot Nozzle, 34 mm, Ceramic 10 mm coat, Ceramic mouthpiece 

7303356 Slot Nozzle, 135 mm (AB=130 mm) for QCP60 130 mm coat; Wear resistant 

NOTE: Other customized Slot nozzles are available upon request 










Web Content 


VarioCoat TM Liquid Adhesive Dispensing Applicator 

Description 

VarioCoat applicators are new state-of-the-art 

pneumatic liquid adhesive applicators for contact 

slot applications using medium to high viscosity 

adhesives. VarioCoat applicators can be used for 

continuous or intermittent operation for a range of 

patterns from simple to comple 

VarioCoat applicators use patented LA 725 modules 

for reliability and superior performance. LA 725 

modules have advanced hydraulic seal technology 

and frictionless operation to extend service life 

thereby reducing maintenance. Fast cycle times and 

snuffback technology improve productivity and 

uniformity of pattern appearance. 

VarioCoat-M Applicator 

There are two variants of VarioCoat applicators. The 

VarioCoat-S is a single module applicator with either a slide 

plate or a quick-exchange plate for a maximum application 

width of 80 mm. The VarioCoat-M is a multi-module 

applicator, up to 22 modules, for application widths up to 

600 mm. 

VarioCoat applicators are fully configurable to meet specific 

customer requirements in a timely fashion. 

Features 

• Longer lifetime reduces downtime 

• Quick-exchange modules and pattern plates increase productivity 

and decrease downtime 

• Snuffback technology provides clean cutoff and pattern consistency 

• Reliable adhesive delivery optimizes adhesive use and reduces waste 

VarioCoat-S Applicator 





VarioCoat TM Liquid Adhesive Dispensing Applicators 

Dimensions 






Description 

Configurable pattern plates provide complex pattern flexibility specific to individual deposition requirements. We 

only recommend this for very complex patterns. 

Various Pattern Plate options are available through your Nordson Representative. Please contact them for 

assistance. 

Sample Pattern Plate: 

Bottom surface 

of plate 

Left side 

of plate 

Right side 

of plate 

C=3 

A=23 

11 5 

11 5 

3 

8 

23 

34 

WP-830XQR03 0CA023 0A034 

RIGHT HAND PLATE 

Quick Change Kits 


313353 34 x 45 mm 

Includes guide. 

313354 45 x 45 mm 

313355 60 x 45 mm 










Web Content 


Description 

The pneumatic spray applicator features an innovative nozzle design that delivers controlled spray patterns. 

Individual adjustment screws allow control of air pressure and adhesive volume. 

• Dual air-spray capabilities provide wider spray patterns, even 

with higher viscosity adhesives. 

• Needle design permits use of a wide viscosity range. 

• Integrated needle-stroke adjustment allows accurate adhesive 

volume control. 

• Quick-disconnect air fitting speeds installation. 

• Narrow body profile installs easily on most parent machinery. 

• Use of nicke-plated steel resists corrosion from aggressive 

liquid adhesives. 

• Includes mounted solenoid. 

• Includes 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) round mounting clamp for easy 

installation. 


Parameter 


Max. adhesive operating pressure 

Cycle time, minimum 


Control voltage / power 

Air connection 

Adhesive connection 

Minimum up-time (1) 

Minimum down-time (1) 

Weight 

Dimensions 

Width 

Height 

Depth 

(1) 

Times measured using: 


Control air pressure 

Solenoid valve 

Specification 

4–6 bar (57–87 psi) 

48 bar (57–87 psi) 

6.5 ms 

24 VDC, - 8.5 W 

110 VAC 

220 VAC 

8 mm (0.314 in.) 

1/8 BSP-1/2-20 UNF SS 

6.5 ms 

9 ms 

1.1 kg (2.42 lbs) 

85 mm (3.346 in.) 

190 mm (7.400 in.) 

120 mm (4.724 in.) 

700 mPa s 

5 bar 

24Vdc/ 8.5 W 

(1) 

Maximum achievable pattern width depends on adhesive characteristics. 






LS 373 Applicators 

24 VDV 

24 VDC 

Corrosion 

Reisitant 

Part Number 

220 VAC 110 VAC 

Description 





LA 373 Needle and Nozzle Kits 

Part Number Orifice Size Comment 

264481 Nozzle Set, 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) Diameter Kit, needle & nozzle, LS 373 

(sizes as stated) 

257499 Nozzle Set, 0.6 mm (0.024 in.) Diameter 



7302833 Kit, Nozzle, 0.3 mm (0.012 in.) Diameter, Corrosion Resistant 




Needle and nozzle kit, wear 

resistant needle 

Air Spray Caps 

Part Number 

Description 

254354 0.3–0.6 mm (0.012/0.024 in.) Dia, Standard (cw) 

254656 1.2–2.0 mm (0.047/0.079 in.) Dia, Standard (cw) 

315698 0.3–0.6 mm (0.012/0.024 in.) Dia, Special (ccw) 

315699 1.2–2.0 mm (0.047/0.079 in.) Dia, Special (ccw) 

Seal Kits 

Part Number 

257209 Seal Kit 

257501 PTFE Seal Kit 

Description 






Dimensions 











Nordson liquid adhesive high pressure hoses use corrosion-resistant stainless steel fittings and a specially 

engineered plastic tubing that does not allow air to reach the adhesive material, which minimizes changes to the 

adhesive that could adversely affect system performance. All liquid adhesive high pressure hoses are fitted with 

1/2-20 UNF fittings. 

Part Number 

Length m (ft.) 

312255 0.15 (0.5) 

312256 0.25 (0.8) 

312257 0.5 (1.6) 

312258 0.75 (2.5) 

312259 1.0 (3.3) 

312264 1.25 (4.1) 

312265 1.5 (4.9) 

312266 2.0 (6.6) 

312267 2.5 (8.2) 

312268 3.0 (9.8) 

312270 4.0 (13.1) 

312271 5.0 (16.4) 

312272 5.5 (18.0) 

312273 6.0 (19.7) 

312274 7.0 (23.0) 

312275 8.0 (26.3) 

373066 10.0 (32.8) 

312263 12.0 (39.4) 

373960 18.0 (59.0) 

NOTE: Other sizes are available on request. 

PTFE Metal Braided Hoses 

Part Number 

Description 

842072 Hose, PTFE, 0.25 ID, 1.83 m (6 ft. ) 












Accessories 

Adhesive & Sealants Equipment Guide Accessories | 16-1 

Web Content 


Saturn In-Line Filters 

The Saturn in-line filter assembly delivers easy access 

and simplifies filter maintenance. Used to reduce nozzle 

clogging and subsequent downtime, Saturn in-line 

filters can be easily and efficiently replaced as part of 

routine, scheduled maintenance. 

The in-line filter assembly can be installed in straight, 

45 and 90 degree configurations to permit filter 

accessibility. The inside-out disposable filter is replaced 

without having to disconnect the hose from the 

applicator. The disposable filter is a threaded element 

that simply screws in or out for easy removal or 

installation on a pressure-purged hotmelt adhesive 

system. Use of color-coded rings allows you to select the 

correct replacement filter every time. 

• Filter replacement without disconnecting the hose and 

applicator. 

• Filter can be positioned for easy accessibility. 

• Disposable filter element. 

• Inside-out flow traps contaminants for discard with the 

disposable filter cartridge. 

• Color-coded Saturn identification rings for accurate filter 

replacement. 


Parameter 

Maximum working pressure 

Maximum recommended 

adhesive viscosity 

Saturn Filter Elements 

Specification 

103.4 bar (1500 psi) 

10,000 cps 

Saturn Integrated Applicator 

Filters 

The Saturn integrated applicator filter is inserted 

into a specially-ported applicator manifold to ensure 

uninterrupted adhesive flow by trapping particles that 

may cause nozzle clogging. It is designed for use with 

low viscosity (under 10,000 centipoise) adhesive. 



16-2 | Accessories 


Part Numbers 

If the Nozzle Orifice Diameter is... 

...use a filter with a... 

50 Mesh 

(.30 mm) 

Screen (Red ring) 

100 Mesh 

(.15 mm) 

Screen (Gold ring) 

200 Mesh 

(.07 mm) 

Screen (Purple ring) 

Saturn In-Line Filters 

Component Part Number Description 

1007033 0.30 mm (0.0117 in.), 50 Mesh 

1007034 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.), 100 Mesh 

Straight 

1007035 0.07 mm (0.0029 in.), 200 Mesh 

1007230 0.30 mm (0.0117 in.), 50 Mesh 

1007231 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.), 100 Mesh 

90 degree 

1007232 0.07 mm (0.0029 in.), 200 Mesh 

1007233 0.30 mm (0.0117 in.), 50 Mesh 

1007234 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.), 100 Mesh 

45 degree 

1007235 0.07 mm (0.0029 in.), 200 Mesh 

1120049 0.30 mm (0.0117 in.), 50 Mesh 

No Filter Inlet Fitting 

1120050 0.15 mm (0.0059 in.), 100 Mesh 

1120051 0.07 mm (0.0029 in.), 200 Mesh 




Accessories | 16-3 


Replacement In-Line Filters 

Part Number 

Description 

1007372 Filter Element, 0.30 mm (0.0117 in.), 50 Mesh, 5 Pack 



In-Line Filter Accessories 


1056296 Saturn In-line Filter Insulator Kit 

Saturn Integrated Applicator Filter 


1123661 Kit, Filter, 50 Mesh, Saturn, 5 pack 







Heated In-line Filters 

Inserted between the hose and applicator, the heated in-line filter provides final adhesive filtering immediately 

before applicator deposition. It helps balance temperature swings in extreme environments and removes char 

or contaminants that can cause nozzle clogging. The filter consists of a large surface-area filter screen assembly 

contained in a heated aluminum body. 

• Use with high-viscosity hot melts over 10,000 centipoise. 

• Cartridge heater and button thermostat provide independent 

heat and temperature control. Nordson does not recommend 

combining the thermostatically-controlled filter with RTDstyle 

hoses and applicators. 

• Choice of thermostat settings ranges from 50° to 230° 

• °C (120 to 450 °F) to maintain operating temperature 

consistency throughout the system. Specify required 

thermostat when ordering; otherwise, a 175 °C (350 °F) 

thermostat is standard. 

• Selection of filter screen mesh sizes matches application 

requirements to maximize filtration. Each filter includes 

a 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) screen. Order different mesh sizes 

separately. 

• Filter screen is readily accessible for removal and cleaning. 

Drain valve flushes loose contamination out of the body 

during filter-screen removal. 

• Filter is wired in parallel with the applicator and includes two 

armored cordsets; one attaches the filter to the hose, while the 

other replaces the standard applicator cordset and attaches the 

applicator to the filter. 

• When used with H-200 applicators and Series 2000 

applicators, discard the upper filter cordset (P/N 242077) 

and replace with the applicator cordset to connect the filter 

to the hose. The lower filter cordset connects the filter to the 

applicator. 



Parameter 

Specification 

240 VAC 50/60 Hz 

120 VAC, 50/60 Hz (includes 145 W heater) 



309100 Filter, 240 VAC 

803124 Filter, 120 VAC Includes heater, 145 W, 120 VAC, P/N 803123. 

803231 Filter, Drum Melters, 240 VAC 

Attaches to 5/16 in. hose fitting at manifold and uses 5/8 

in. hose fitting on the output side. 

249954 Filter Screen, 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) 


161130 Filter Screen, 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) Shipped with filter. 


Dimensions 

Dimension 

mm (in.) 

Height 141 (5.6) 

Depth 64 (2.5) 

Width 51 (2.0) 






Non-Heated In-Line Filters 

Description 

Fitting Type 

In-line Filter Assemblies O-Ring 1/4 NPT 

Straight Filter, 0.28 mm (0.011 in.), 50 Mesh 274290 271658 



45° Filter, 0.28 mm (0.011 in.), 50 Mesh 274989 804123 






In-line Replacement Filters 

Filter Element, 0.28 mm (0.011 in.), 50 Mesh — 271598 











Web Content 



Saturn Solenoid Valves 

Saturn ® Platinum Solenoid 

for Single or Independent Air 

Actuated Applicators 

New high-speed Saturn Platinum (SP) solenoid 

technology improves speed, reduces cycle times and 

delivers longer life with consistent operation over the 

life of the valve. 

Saturn Platinum solenoid reduces the performance gap 

between pneumatic and electric applicators. 

Maximum speed and response is achieved when one 

solenoid operates one module. Single or Independent 

Actuated module applicators will benefit the most using 

the Saturn Platinum Solenoid. 

NOTE: Spiked voltage of any type will destroy the solenoid 

electronics. Only a constant 24 VDC should be use 

Saturn Platinum Solenoids 






Saturn Platinum Solenoids 

Application 

MiniBlue II, AO/AC, 

Single Module 

MiniBlue II, AO/AC, 

Multi Module 

BestChoice, AO/SC, 

Single Module 

BestChoice, AO/AC, 

Single Module 

BestChoice, AO/AC or 

AO/SC, Multi Module 

Valve Type 

4 way, 5 port, 

Reverse Function 


Reverse Function 


Standard Function 





Inner 

Ring 

Yellow 

Yellow 

Outer 

Ring 

White 

Purple 

Applicator 

Connection Ports 

2 ports, M5, 

10mm ctrs 

2 ports, 1/8 NPT, 

15mm ctrs 

Kit PN 

PN on 

Solenoid 

(for reference 

only) 

1095800 1095809 

1120826 1120824 

Yellow White 1 port, 1/8 NPT 1095801 1095810 

Yellow 

Yellow 

White 

Purple 


15mm ctrs 


15mm ctrs 

1095802 1095811 

1120875 1120878 

Yellow = 24VDC 

White = Single Module 

Purple = Multi Module 

Spare Parts 

Solenoid Cabling 

Part 

Number 

Description 

Notes 

1100687 Cable Assy, Solenoid, M8, 3-wire, 5 m 

1100688 Cable Assy, Solenoid, 90 deg, M8, 3-wire, 5 m 

1100958 Cable Assy, Solenoid, M8, 3-wire, 10 m 

1100959 Cable Assy, Solenoid, 90 deg, M8, 3-wire, 10 m 

1121990 Kit, Cable, Splitter Connects one extension cable to 2 solenoids 

Solenoid Accessories and Spare Parts 

Part 

Number 

Description 

Kit Contents 

734262 Muffler, M5 

1100452 Muffler, 1/8 in. NPT, Plastic, Compact 

1058058 Muffler, 1/8 in. NPT, Polyethylene 

1106321 Muffler Restrictor Service Kit Used when ashesvie viscosity is below 700 cps 

1082500 Muffler, R1/8 Used when reduced noise is required (





Standard Saturn Solenoid Valves 

for Multi-Module Common Air 

Applicators 

Saturn solenoids are designed specifically for Nordson 

pneumatic hot melt adhesive dispensing applicators. 

These balanced, 3- and 4-way piloted valves deliver 

maximum shifting force in both directions by 

alternately supplying air to each end of the spool. Equal 

shifting forces at energization and de-energization result 

in resistance-free shifting, increased reliability and faster, 

more consistent response times. 

Color-coded rings allow you to select the correct 

replacement solenoid every time. Rings are a trademark 

of Nordson Corporation and are your assurance of 

genuine Nordson quality. 

Saturn solenoids are compatible with all Nordson 

pneumatic air-open/air-close (AO/AC) and air-open/ 

spring-close (AO/SC) applicators. 

• Meets Nordson requirements for hot melt adhesive 

application, providing peak dispensing applicator performance. 

• Improved valve life and reduced maintenance. 

• High-temperature seals and components withstand 

temperatures of 93 °C (200 °F). 

• Eliminates guesswork and minimizes risk. Saturn solenoids are 

designed specifically for use with Nordson pneumatic hot melt 

dispensing applicators. 

• Color coded rings identify voltage and air flow. 

• Durable, high-temperature seals deliver excellent performance 

in demanding applications. 

• Air flow supports single and multi-module applicator 

applications. 






Saturn Ring Identification 

First Ring Color 

Voltage 

Yellow 

24 VDC 

Green 

12 VDC 

Blue 

24 VAC 

Brown 

48 VAC 

Red 

100 VAC 

Beige 

120 VAC 

Gold 

200 VAC 

Grey 

240 VAC 

Second Ring Color 

Air Flow (Cv) 

Blue 1.0 

Green 1.5 

White 0.18 

Platform Comparisons 

Description 

Large Cv Saturn 

Solenoid 

Small Cv Saturn 

Solenoid 


Solenoid 

Cycle Life 40 million cycles 40 million cycles 100 million cycles 

Minimum On/Off Time 15 ms 15 ms 3 ms 

Pattern Variation Over Life of Valve 2.5 ms 2.5 ms 1 ms 

Cv Value 1.0 to 1.5 .18 .25 

Amps/Solenoid .25 .25 .25 

Multi-Module Use √ √ No 

Large Cv Saturn Solenoid Part Numbers 

Part Number 

Description 

1053894 4-way, AO/AC, 24VDC, Q.D. Plug With LED Light (yellow, blue) Not Mounted to Applicator 1 

1055480 4-way, AO/AC, 24VDC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (yellow, blue) Not Mounted to Applicator 1 

1055483 4-way, AO/AC, 24VDC, MOV, Q.D. Plug With LED Light (yellow, blue) 

1069020 4 way, AO/AC, 24VDC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light, reverse function (yellow, green) 

1074634 4 way, AO/AC, 240VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (grey, green) 

1056119 3-way, AO/SC, 24VDC, Q.D. Plug With LED Light (yellow, green) Not Mounted to Applicator 1 

1055481 3-way, AO/SC, 24VDC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (yellow, green) Not Mounted to Applicator 1 

1056273 3-way, AO/SC, 100VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (red, green) 

1056120 3-way, AO/SC, 120VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (beige, green) 

1056274 3-way, AO/SC, 200VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (gold, green) 

1056121 3-way, AO/SC, 240VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (grey, green) 

1062017 3-way, AO/SC, 24VDC, MOV, Q.D. Plug With LED Light (yellow, green) 

(1) 

Requires ¼ NPT fitting, not included. 







Small Cv Saturn Solenoid Part Numbers 

Part Number 

Description 

1069250 4-way, AO/AC, 24VDC, Q.D. Plug With LED Light (yellow, white) Not Mounted to Applicator 1 

1069209 4-way, AO/AC, 24VDC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (yellow, white) Not Mounted to Applicator 1 

1069257 4-way, AO/AC, 120VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (beige, white) 

1069258 4-way, AO/AC, 240VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (grey, white) 

1069208 3-way, AO/SC, 24VDC, Q.D. Plug With LED Light (yellow, white) Not Mounted to Applicator 1 

1069207 3-way, AO/SC, 24VDC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (yellow, white) Not Mounted to Applicator 1 

1069206 3-way, AO/SC, 12VDC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (green, white) 

1069251 3-way, AO/SC, 24VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (blue, white) 

1069252 3-way, AO/SC, 48VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (brown, white) 

1069253 3-way, AO/SC, 100VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (red, white) 

1069254 3-way, AO/SC, 120VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (beige, white) 

1069255 3-way, AO/SC, 200VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (gold, white) 

1069256 3-way, AO/SC, 240VAC, Q.D. Plug Without LED Light (grey, white) 

(1) 

Requires 1/8 NPT fitting, not included. 

Standard Saturn Solenoid Spare Components Part Numbers 

Part Number 

1123073 Kit, Repl Elec Connector, SP, 10pc 

1058522 Standard Black No LED 

1058523 Clear With LED 

1058524 Clear LED 120 VAC 

1058525 Clear With LED MOV 

1058058 Muffler 1/8 in. NPT 

1058059 Muffler 1/4 in. NPT 

Connectors 

Mufflers 

Description 

NOTES: 3-way solenoids are used for air-open/spring-closed (AO/SC) applicators such as Best Choice, SolidBlue S & SureBead S. 

All Saturn solenoid valves can be used in water wash applications. 

Large CV Saturn solenoid valves contain 1/8 x 1/4 in. pipe bushings, mufflers, and universal inlet fitting. 

Small CV Saturn solenoid valves contain mufflers, and universal inlet fitting. 











Description 

Nordson adhesive and sealant equipment serves an 

international customer base. To facilitate equipment 

installation, Nordson offers a variety of pneumatic and 

hydraulic connectors, and miscellaneous plugs and 

adapters. 

• Equipment built prior to 1983 has pipe-thread fittings. 

• Outside North America, ISO threads are the standard for 

connecting equipment to input air sources. 

• Listings represent common fittings only. 

Contact a Nordson representative for additional 

recommendations pertaining to use and application. 

• Most newer hydraulic applications use SAE standard fittings. 

Fitting Usage and Comparison 

Fitting 

Where Used 

Pipe Thread Fitting 

P/N 

O-ring Fitting 

P/N 

Applicator to automatic hose; melter to automatic or 

hand-held applicator hose 

972051 972628 (972657) (1) 

Straight Connector FM 150 to hose - 310281 

FM 150 to 5/8 in. hose - 719023 

Applicator to 5/8 in. hose - 719024 

Pipe Plug Extra ports on applicator or melter 973411 973574 

90° Elbow 

Applicator to automatic hose 972200 274180 

Melter to automatic or hand-held applicator hose 972200 972646 

Applicator to automatic hose 972618 274179 

45° Elbow 

Melter to automatic or hand-held applicator hose 972618 972647 

Applicator to 5/8 in. hose - 719047 

(1) 

Compact hose-to-applicator fitting minimizes cold joint at the applicator. 





Fitting Part Numbers 

Pneumatic Connectors 

Pipe Nipples 

Length 

Pipe Nipple Port/Thread Length Drop 

P/N A B mm in. mm in. 

Comments 

973000 

19.1 0.75 

A 

973002 38.1 1.50 

1/8-NPT 

973001 N/A 63.5 2.50 

973032 1/4-NPT 63.5 2.50 

N/A 

N/A 

Galvanized Steel, 

Straight Pipe 

973004 1/8-NPT 76.2 3.00 

Pipe Elbows, 90° 

Length 

B 

Pipe Elbow, 

90° 

Port/Thread Length Drop 


Comments 

Drop 

973152 

1/4-NPT 20.3 0.80 20.3 0.80 

1/4-NPT 

973158 1/8-NPT 19.1 0.75 19.1 0.75 

Galvanized Steel 

A 

973179 3/8-NPT 3/8-NPT 26.0 1.02 26.0 1.02 Zinc-plated Steel 

SAE 90° Elbow 

Length 

SAE 90° 

Street 



Comments 

Drop 

B 

973151 

1/4-NPT 1/4-NPT 22.4 0.88 27.7 1.09 

Zinc-plated steel 

A 

973154 Stainless Steel 






90° Male Elbow Barged Coupling 

Length 

90° Male 

Elbow 

Barbed 

Coupling 


Comments 

Drop 

A 

B 


972623 

0.25 

tubing 

1/8-NPT 17.5 0.69 16.0 0.63 Brass 

Straight Barbed Coupling 

Straight 

Barbed 

Coupling 


Comments 


A 

B 

972584 

0.25 

1/8-NPT 

972586 tubing 1/4-NPT 

N/A N/A N/A N/A Brass 

SAE 45° Street 

B 

Drop 

SAE 45° 

Street 



Comments 

Length 

A 

973129 1/4-NPT 1/4-NPT 19.1 0.75 19.1 0.75 Galvanized Steel 

SAE Adapter, Straight 

Length 

SAE 

Adapter, 

Straight 


Comments 

A 

B 


973953 1/4-NPT 1/8-NPTF 27.0 1.06 N/A N/A Brass 





SAE Adapter, Tee, 3 Ports 

Length 

SAE 

Adapter, Tee, 

3 Ports 


Comments 

A 

Drop 


973250 1/8-NPTF 

16.8 0.66 16.8 0.66 

N/A 

973260 1/4-NPTF 22.4 0.88 22.4 0.88 

Zinc-plated Steel 

Hydraulic Connectors 

SAE 37° Straight Connector 

Length 

SAE 37° 

Straight 

Connector 


Comments 


972628 9/16-18 9/16-18 44.5 1.75 

B 

A 

310281 9/16-18 7/8-14 38.1 1.50 

719024 1 9 43.7 1.72 

719023 11/16-12 7/8-14 45.7 1.80 

N/A 

N/A 

Brass, O-ring 

972505 11/16-12 11/16-12 54.9 2.16 Zinc-plated Steel 

SAE Hydraulic Flareless Female Tube Connector 

A 

B 

SAE 

Hydraulic 

Flareless 

Female Tube 

Connector 



971164 7/16-20 

971157 9/16-18 

Comments 

1/4-NPTF N/A N/A N/A N/A Zinc-plated Steel 






SAE 90°, 37° Flare Male Elbow 

Length 

SAE 90°, 

37° Flare 

Male Elbow 

Port/Thread Length Drop Comments 


Drop 

A 

B 

972176 1/2-20 1/4-NPTF 24.1 0.95 27.7 1.09 Zinc-plated Steel 

972200 9/16-18 27.0 1.06 

SAE 90°, 37° Flare Swivel 

Length 

SAE 90°, 37° 


Flare Swivel 


B 

Drop 

972400 9/16-18 9/16-18 31.75 1.25 27.0 1.06 


A 

271449 1/4-NPT 9/16-18 N/A N/A N/A N/A 

SAE 90°, 37° Male Connector 

Length 

SAE 90°, 

37° Male 

Connector 


Comments 


A 

B 

Drop 

274180 

38.1 1.50 

9/16-18 9/16-18 

972646 45.7 1.80 

816163 7/8-14 11/16-12 46.2 1.82 42.2 1.66 

27.0 1.06 Brass, O-ring 

SAE 45° Male Tube Elbow 

Drop 

45° Male 

Tube Elbow 


Comments 

Length 

A 


972618 9/16-18 1/4-NPTF 21.1 0.83 21.8 0.86 Brass 





SAE 45°, 37° Connector Elbow 

Length 

SAE 45°, 

37° Connector 

Elbow 



972647 

9/16-18 43.2 1.70 14.5 0.57 

A 

B 

Drop 

719047 11/16-12 45.7 1.80 15.2 0.60 

9/16-18 

274179 9/16-18 29.0 1.14 14.4 0.57 

719046 9/16-18 43.2 1.70 21.1 0.83 

Brass, O-ring 

816162 7/8-14 11/16-12 39.9 1.57 32.5 1.28 

Miscellaneous Plugs, Adapters, and Parts 

Pipe Plug, SAE Square Head 

Length 

Pipe Plug, SAE 

Square Head 

Port/Thread Length Comments 

P/N A B mm in. 

A 

973400 1/8-NPTF 

15.2 0.60 Steel 

N/A 

973414 1/4-NPTF 20.8 0.82 Zinc-plated Steel 

Pipe Plug, Socket Head 

Length 

Pipe Plug, 

Socket Head 


A 


B 

973410 0.25 socket 1/4-NPTF 11.2 0.44 

973402 0.19 socket 1/8-NPTF 6.4 0.25 







O-Ring Pipe Plug 

Length 

O-ring 

Pipe Plug 



973574 9/16-18 N/A 12.2 0.48 Zinc-plated Steel 

A 

SAE 37° Flare Tube Cap 

Length 

SAE 37° Flare 

Tube Cap 


A 

B 


972359 0.30 OD 1/2-20 15.5 0.61 Zinc-plated Steel 

Pipe Bushing 

Length Pipe Bushing Port/Thread Length Comments 


B 

A 

973372 1/4-NPT 1/8-NPT 

973562 3/8-NPT 1/4-NPT 

21.6 0.85 


Pipe Coupling 

Length 

Pipe Coupling Port/Thread Length Comments 

A 

B 


973500 1/4-NPTF 1/4-NPTF 28.7 1.13 Zinc-plated Steel 





Hydraulic Hose Adapter 

Length 

Hydraulic Hose 

Adapter 



972352 1/2-20 NF-2 1/4-NPS 22.4 0.88 Ledloy 

B 

A 

972650 1/4 NPTF 

9/16-18 

male 

30.9 1.22 O-ring 

Pneumatic Adapter 

Pneumatic 

Adapter 

Port/Thread 

Length 

Length 


972662 

1/8-NPT 

female 

1/8-BSP 

male 

27.7 1.09 

A 

B 

972663 

972664 

1/4-NPT 

female 

1/8-ISO 

female 

1/4-BSP 

male 

1/8-NPT 

male 

36.1 1.42 

27.7 1.09 

972665 

1/4-ISO 

female 

1/4-NPT 

male 

36.1 1.42 

O-Ring Replacement 

O-Ring 

Replacement 

Port/Thread 

Length 

Comments 


945032 9 

/ 16 

-18 N/A N/A N/A Viton 






A selection of hydraulic system components is available to tailor system operation to the 

application. 

Flow Control Valve 

Use alone or in combination to balance adhesive flow from multiple applicators or from multiple hoses supplied 

from the same melter. 

Part Number 

Description 

276060 Valve, Use On Applicator Models With O-Ring Fittings 

901134 Valve, Use On Applicator Models With NPT Fittings 

Hydaulic System Pressure Gauge Kit 

Use with any hot melt system. Install in series with hose to monitor system pressure. 


274428 In-line Pressure Gauge Kit Includes gauge and hardware. 

274425 Gauge and Protector Included in above kit. 

816084 Dead-end Pressure Gauge Kit Fit to unused hose port on manifold. 

O-Rings 

Use Kalrez® O-rings in applications where rapid O-ring failure occurs as a result of incompatibility between the 

adhesive and standard Viton® O-rings. Use Viton O-rings in applications with operating temperatures up to 

230°C (450°F). 

Kalrez P/N Viton P/N O-ring Size 

709773 940101 0.250 ID X 0.375 OD 

710742 940111 0.312 ID X 0.437 OD 

709774 940121 0.375 ID X 0.500 OD 

709775 940133 0.437 ID X 0.562 OD 

711012 940112 0.437 ID X 0.625 OD 

710021 N/A 0.500 ID X 0.688 OD 

709776 940161 0.625 ID X 0.750 OD 

709777 940181 0.750 ID X 0.875 OD 

Kalrez and Viton are registered trademarks of E.I. DuPont de Nemours & Company 





Best Choice Extension Cords (Ni-120 Receptacles) 

Part Number 

Description 

135972 6 pin, T-style Low Power Applicator, 7.3 m (24 ft) 

108946 6 pin, T-style Low Power Applicator, 4.9 m (16 ft) 

115576 12 pin, T-style Low Power Hose/Applicator, 0.6 m (2 ft) 






Extension Cables 

Extension cables are used when a applicator has two cordsets and only one hose will be used. 

Part Number 

Description 

108946 Cable, Extension, Applicator to melter, 4.9 m (16 ft) 

728023 Cable, Extension, Water Wash Applicator to Melter, 5.5 m (18 ft) 

728093 Cable, Extension, Water Wash Applicator to AquaGuard Melter, 6.1 m (20 ft) 

124992 Cable, Extension, Applicator to Bulk Melter, 4.3 m (14 ft) 

Best Choice Splitter Cables (Ni-120 only) 

Part Number 

Description 

113543 Two 108946 or 135972 Extension Cords, Splitter at Unit 

116998 Two 6-pin Low Wattage Applicators, Splitter at Applicators 

Equipment Accessories 

Part Number 

902514 Heat Protective Gloves 

1054187 Melter Flush Kit 

270755 Type R Fluid, 1 gallon 

1054215 Safety Glasses With Shields 

132426 Hose/Applicator Diagnostic Device 

Description 






The multi-service device is used for Blue Series modules. Use the multi-service device for air cap adjustment, 

module removal, nozzle removal and applicator filter removal. 








Technical Data 


Technical Data | 17-1 


Maximum Required Delivery Rate (MRDR) 

NOTE: 16 kg/hr x 2.2 = 36.30 lb/hr 

(2.2 kg/hr = 1 lb./hr) 



17-2 | Technical Data 


Bead Cross Sectional Area (BCA) Calculations 

Bead Diameter 

mm (in.) 

Round Bead 

Circular Sector 

BCA= 

D 2 

4 

( 3) 

BCA 

mm 2 (in 2 ) 

Width mm (in.) 

Web Usage 

BCA = Slot Thickness x Slot Width 

Thickness mm (in.) 

BCA 

mm 2 (in 2 ) 

1.59 (1/16) 0.594 (0.00092) 25.4 (1) 0.051 (0.002) 0.051 (0.002) 

1.98 (5/64) 0.929 (0.00144) 25.4 (1) 0.102 (0.004) 0.102 (0.004) 

2.38 (3/32) 1.335 (0.00207) 25.4 (1) 0.152 (0.006) 0.152 (0.006) 

2.78 (7/64) 1.819 (0.00282) 25.4 (1) 0.203 (0.008) 0.203 (0.008) 

3.18 (1/8) 2.374 (0.00368) 25.4 (1) 0.254 (0.010) 0.254 (0.010) 

4.76 (3/16) 5.342 (0.00828) 25.4 (1) 0.305 (0.012) 0.305 (0.012) 

6.35 (1/4) 9.503 (0.01473) 25.4 (1) 0.406 (0.016) 0.406 (0.016) 

7.94 (5/16) 14.845 (0.02301) 25.4 (1) 0.508 (0.020) 0.508 (0.020) 

9.53 (3/8) 21.374 (0.03313) 25.4 (1) 0.635 (0.025) 0.635 (0.025) 

11.11 (7/16) 29.097 (0.04510) 

12.70 (1/2) 38.000 (0.05890) 

25.4 (1) 0.762 (0.030) 0.762 (0.030) 

Required Melt Rate (MR) 

where: 

BCA = 

BL = 

S [BCA X BL] = 

p = 

Bead Cross Sectional Area 

Bead Length on the product 

Total volume of adhesive on product 

Adhesive density 










Electrical 

Pull-In (Applicator Open) and Drop-Out (Applicator Close) Time 

Pull In 

Drop Out 

H-20 H-200 E-700 

17 ms 

14 ms 

12 ms 

14 ms 

18 ms 

18 ms 






Adhesive Mileage 

Extend adhesive mileage by using only enough material at the appropriate bead size for consistent, repeatable 

results. 

Bead Size Mileage (1) 

1.59 mm (1/16 in.) diameter = 2,004 m/kg (2,982 ft/lb), or 200 cm/g (35,783 in/lb) 

1.98 mm (5/64 in.) diameter = 1,282 m/kg (1,908 ft/lb), or 128 cm/g (22,896 in/lb) 

2.38 mm (3/32 in.) diameter = 891 m/kg (1,325 ft/lb), or 89 cm/g (15,900 in/lb) 

2.78 mm (7/64 in.) diameter = 654 m/kg (974 ft/lb), or 65 cm/g (11,688 in/lb) 





Other Equations 

4.2445 (g/cc) (dia 2 ) = cm/g 

980.4754 [ (lb/gal) (dia 2 ) ] = in/lb 

(1) 

Calculations are based on standard packaging-grade adhesive density of 0.84 g/cc at 177C (7.01 lb/gal at 350F), 

using compensated-geometry bead of 0.60 of a half round circle. 





Coating Data Sheet 

Calculations are based on standard packaging-grade adhesive density of 0.84 g/cc at 177C (7.01 lb/gal at 350F), 

using compensated-geometry bead of 0.60 of a half-round circle. 

Coating Weights* 

mils tm g/8 in 2 g/24 in 2 oz/yd 2 g/m 2 lb/ream** 

lb/1000 

ft 2 g/100 in 2 gr/24 in 2 

0.3 7.62 0.037 0.110 0.22 7.12 4.4 1.5 4.6 1.7 

0.5 12.70 0.061 0.184 0.35 11.86 7.3 2.4 7.7 2.8 

0.6 15.24 0.073 0.220 0.42 14.20 8.8 2.9 9.2 3.4 

0.7 17.78 0.086 0.257 0.49 15.62 10.2 3.4 10.7 4.0 

0.8 20.32 0.098 0.294 0.56 19.00 11.7 3.9 12.3 4.5 

0.9 22.86 0.110 0.330 0.63 21.36 13.1 4.4 13.8 5.1 

1.0 25.40 0.123 0.368 0.70 23.74 14.6 4.9 15.3 5.7 

1.1 27.94 0.135 0.404 0.77 26.11 16.1 5.3 16.8 6.3 

1.2 30.48 0.147 0.441 0.84 28.49 17.5 5.8 18.6 6.8 

1.3 33.02 0.159 0.478 0.91 30.86 19.0 6.3 19.9 7.4 

1.4 35.56 0.176 0.515 0.98 33.24 20.4 6.8 21.6 8.0 

1.5 38.10 0.184 0.551 1.05 35.61 21.9 7.3 23.0 8.5 

1.6 40.64 0.196 0.588 1.12 37.98 23.4 7.8 24.5 9.1 

1.7 43.18 0.208 0.625 1.19 40.36 24.8 8.3 26.0 9.7 

1.8 45.72 0.221 0.662 1.26 42.73 26.3 8.7 27.5 10.3 

1.9 48.26 0.233 0.698 1.33 45.11 27.7 9.2 29.1 10.8 

2.0 50.60 0.245 0.732 1.40 47.29 29.2 9.7 30.7 11.4 

3.0 76.20 0.368 1.103 2.10 71.22 43.8 14.6 46.0 17.0 

4.0 101.60 0.490 1.470 2.80 94.96 53.3 19.6 61.3 22.7 

5.0 127.00 0.613 1.838 3.50 118.70 72.9 24.3 76.6 28.5 

6.0 152.40 0.736 2.206 4.20 142.44 87.5 29.2 92.0 34.2 

* Figures based on 7.8 lb/gal material density. 

** 3000 ft2/ream 






Speed Conversion Table 

Use the following table to convert from meters per minute (mpm) to meters per second (m/s) to seconds per meter 

(s/m); or feet per minute (fpm) to inches per minute (in/min) to inches per second (in/s) to seconds per inch (s/ 

in). 

mpm m/s s/m fpm in/min in/s s/in 

0.15 0.0025 393.70 0.5 6.0 0.1 10.00 

0.30 0.005 196.85 1.0 12.0 0.2 5.00 

0.61 0.010 98.43 2.0 24.0 0.4 2.500 

0.91 0.015 65.62 3.0 36.0 0.6 1.666 

1.22 0.020 49.21 4.0 48.0 0.8 1.250 

1.52 0.025 39.37 5.0 60.0 1.0 1.000 

1.83 0.030 32.81 6.0 72.0 1.2 0.8333 

2.13 0.035 28.12 7.0 84.0 1.4 0.714 

2.44 0.040 24.61 8.0 96.0 1.6 0.625 

2.74 0.045 21.87 9.0 108.0 1.8 0.555 

3.05 0.050 19.69 10.0 120.0 2.0 0.500 

3.35 0.056 17.90 11.0 132.0 2.2 0.435 

3.66 0.061 16.40 12.0 144.0 2.4 0.417 

3.96 0.066 15.14 13.0 156.0 2.6 0.385 

4.27 0.071 14.06 14.0 168.0 2.8 0.357 

4.57 0.076 13.12 15.0 180.0 3.0 0.333 

4.88 0.081 12.30 16.0 192.0 3.2 0.313 

5.18 0.086 11.58 17.0 204.0 3.4 0.294 

5.49 0.092 10.94 18.0 216.0 3.6 0.278 

5.79 0.097 10.36 19.0 228.0 3.8 0.263 

6.10 0.102 9.84 20.0 240.0 4.0 0.250 

6.40 0.107 9.37 21.0 252.0 4.2 0.238 

6.71 0.112 8.95 22.0 264.0 4.4 0.227 

7.01 0.117 8.56 23.0 276.0 4.6 0.217 

7.32 0.122 8.20 24.0 288.0 4.8 0.208 

7.62 0.127 7.87 25.0 300.0 5.0 0.200 

9.14 0.152 6.56 30.0 360.0 6.0 0.167 





Speed Conversion Table (contd.) 

mpm m/s s/m fpm in/min in/s s/in 

12.19 0.203 4.92 40.0 480.0 8.0 0.125 

15.24 0.254 3.94 50.0 600.0 10.0 0.100 

18.29 0.305 3.28 60.0 720.0 12.0 0.083 

21.34 0.356 2.81 70.0 840.0 14.0 0.071 

24.38 0.406 2.46 80.0 960.0 16.0 0.063 

27.43 0.457 2.19 90.0 1080.0 18.0 0.056 

30.48 0.508 1.97 100.0 1200.0 20.0 0.050 

38.10 0.635 1.57 125.0 1500.0 25.0 0.040 

45.72 0.762 1.31 150.0 1800.0 30.0 0.033 

53.34 0.889 1.12 175.0 2100.0 35.0 0.029 

60.96 1.016 0.98 200.0 2400.0 40.0 0.025 

68.58 1.143 0.87 225.0 2700.0 45.0 0.022 

76.20 1.270 0.79 250.0 3000.0 50.0 0.020 

83.82 1.397 0.72 275.0 3300.0 55.0 0.018 

91.44 1.524 0.66 300.0 3600.0 60.0 0.016 

99.06 1.651 0.61 325.0 3900.0 65.0 0.015 

106.68 1.778 0.56 350.0 4200.0 70.0 0.014 

114.30 1.905 0.52 375.0 4500.0 75.0 0.013 

121.92 2.032 0.49 400.0 4800.0 80.0 0.012 

137.16 2.286 0.44 450.0 5400.0 90.0 0.011 

152.40 2.540 0.39 500.0 6000.0 100.0 0.010 

182.88 3.048 0.33 600.0 7200.0 120.0 0.008 

213.36 3.556 0.28 700.0 8400.0 140.0 0.007 

243.84 4.064 0.25 800.0 9600.0 160.0 0.006 

274.32 4.572 0.22 900.0 10800.0 180.0 0.0055 

304.80 5.080 0.20 1000.0 12000.0 200.0 0.0050 






Temperature Conversion Table 

Celsius 

°C 

Farenheit 

°F 

Celsius 

°C 

Fahrenheit 

°F 

60 140 185 365 

65 149 190 374 

70 158 195 383 

75 167 200 392 

80 176 205 401 

85 185 210 410 

90 194 215 418 

95 203 220 428 

100 212 225 435 

105 221 230 446 

110 230 235 455 

115 239 240 464 

120 247 245 473 

125 257 250 482 

130 266 255 491 

135 275 260 500 

140 284 265 509 

145 293 270 518 

150 302 275 527 

155 311 280 536 

160 320 285 545 

165 329 290 554 

170 338 295 563 

175 347 300 572 

180 356 

F = (C x 1.8) + 32 

C = (F - 32) x 0.5556 





Weights and Measures Conversions 

Multiply By To Obtain 

Length 

mils 

inches (in.) 

centimeters (cm) 

inches (in.) 

millimeters (mm) 

feet (ft) 

meters (m) 

mils 


0.001 

2.54 

0.3937 

25.4 

0.0394 

0.3048 

3.2808 

0.0254 

39.3701 

inches (in.) 

centimeters (cm) 

inches (in.) 


inches (in.) 

meters (m) 

feet (ft) 


mils 

Weight 

ounces (oz) 

grams (g) 

grams (g) 

pounds (lb) 

kilograms (kg) 

28.3495 

0.0353 

15.43 

0.4536 

2.2046 

grams (g) 

ounces (oz) 

grains (gr) 

kilograms (kg) 

pounds (lb) 

Velocity 

feet per minute (fpm) 

meters per second (m/s) 

0.0051 

196.86 

meters per second (m/s) 

feet per minute (fpm) 

Temperature 

degrees Fahrenheit 

degrees Celsius 

(°F - 32) x 0.5556 

(°C x 1.8) + 32 

degrees Celsius 

degrees Fahrenheit 

Volume 

gallons (gal) 

cubic feet (ft3) 

gallons (gal) 

cubic inches (in3) 

231 

1728 

3.7853 

16.3871 



liters (L) 

cubic centimeters (cc) 

Density (1) 

pounds per gallon (lb/gal) 

grams per cubic centimeter (g/cc) 


kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3) 

pounds per gallon (lb/gal) 

pounds per cubic inch (lb/in3) 

7.4805 

1 

1000 

0.001 

0.1198 

27.6799 

pounds per cubic foot (lb/ft3) 

kilograms per liter (kg/L) 

kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3) 


kilograms per liter (kg/L) 


Adhesive 

Mileage (2) 

inches per pound (in/lb) 

centimeters per gram (cm/g) 

0.0833 

10 

feet per pound (ft/lb) 

meters per kilogram (m/kg) 

1. The density of water = 8.337 lb/gal; 0.0361 lb/in3, 1 g/cc. 

2. Standard packaging-grade adhesive density = 0.84 g/cc at 177°C or 7.01 lb/gal at 350°F using a compensated-geometry bead 

of 0.60 of a half round circle.

2018 Adhesives and Sealants Equipment Guide

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?